Sharp MX-4100N MX-5000N MX-4101N MX-5001N SM PG

1 : Oct.
24 2008
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX5001/S1E 1
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-4100N/5000N 1
MODEL MX-4101N/5001N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERNAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [D] RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[E] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[F] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .F-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND
[H] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . i-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . J-1
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[K] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . .K-1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 10-1
[L] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[11] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[M] FUSER SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[N] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . R-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERNAL VIEW
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[B] OPERATION PANEL
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . B-1
1. Article constitution (Main unit and option) . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
2. Mainfunction of the main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
[C] DSPF SECTION
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . C-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 [D] RSPF SECTION
2. Recommended color paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . D-1
3. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
4. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
5. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
[E] SCANNER SECTION
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . E-1
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . .4-1 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
[5] ADJUSTMENTS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 [F] PAPER FEED SECTION
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . F-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
[6] SIMULATION 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 [G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . G-1
3. Details of simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
1. Self diag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 [H] LSU SECTION
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . H-1
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
[8] MAINTENANCE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
1. Maintenance list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 [i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
2. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . . i-1
3. Maintenance and disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-4
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-5
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 [J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . J-1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 [K] DEVELOPING SECTION
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-41 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . K-1
[11] OTHERS 2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
1. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 [L] TRANSFER SECTION
3. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow). . . . 11-7 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . L-1
2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4
[M] FUSER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[N] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . N-1
2. Operational descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-4
[O] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
[Q] FAN SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
NOTE
MX-5001N
FOR SERVICING 5) Do not damage, break, or excessively twist the power cord.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
1. Precautions for servicing
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, 6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
7) Do not put any type of container with liquids or metal pieces
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
inside the machine.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
8) Do not touch the power plug, insert the phone jack, operate the
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
machine, or perform servicing with wet or oily hands.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
3. Note for installing site
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing an operational machine, keep hands away Do not install the machine at the following sites.
from a moving chain, belt, gear, or any other moving part or 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
drive mechanism. ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. perature and humidity.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to access the Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the
interior of the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
or an injury. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink described later.
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
Alternatively, follow all instructions in the MSDS guide.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may explode and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use the speci- 2) Place of high vibrations
fied battery only. It may cause a breakdown.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be incom-
patible, causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
Otherwise. it may cause a breakdown or malfunction.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to only connect the power cord to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock. 3) Poorly ventilated place
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal An electro-static type copier will produce ozone.
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
A low level of ozone is produced so as not to affect the human
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. body. However, continuous use of such a machine may pro-
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage duce an odor of ozone. Install the machine in a well ventilated
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may place, and ventilate occasionally.
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
MX-5001N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or dirty copy.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirty copy.
6) Place of excessive dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machines require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
quality or a breakdown may be result.
30cm
30cm 45cm
8) Unstable or slanted surface

If the machine drops or tips over, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
It is recommended to use an optional paper desk as outlined in
the specifications.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-5001N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

1 : Oct. 24 2008
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

1. Article constitution (Main unit and option)
Paper exit system Document feeder system
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
10 MX-SCX1 REVERSING DUPLEX
EXIT TRAY UNIT SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS FEEDER
4 MX-TRX2 For MX-4100N/5000N For MX-4101N/5001N
DIGITAL FULL COLOR
FINISHER
5 MX-FNX9 MX-4100N/5000N Paper feed system
PUNCH MODULE
8 MX-PNX1 MX-4101N/5001N
A/B/C/D
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
10 MX-SCX1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
3 MX-LCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
11 AR-SC3 (For saddle)
PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER
7 MX-FN10
PUNCH MODULE
9 MX-PNX5 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
A/B/C/D PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
1 MX-DEX8 2 MX-DEX9
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
14 AR-SC2 PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE
12 MX-FN11 13 MX-PNX6
A/B/C/D
Printer expansion Image send expansion
PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT

15 MX-PKX1 17 AR-PF1 FACSIMILE INTERNET FAX APPLICATION
EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT EXPANSION KIT INTEGRATION MODULE
XPS EXPANSION KIT

18 MX-FXX2 19 AR-SU1 21 MX-FWX1 23 MX-AMX1
16 MX-PUX1 ENHANCED
STAMP CARTRIDGE COMPRESSION KIT
20 AR-SV1 22 MX-EBX3
Authentication/Security Application/Solution
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT 1 LICENSE KIT 50 LICENSE KIT COMMUNICATION MODULE KEYBOARD
24 MX-FR11U 25 MX-FR11 26 MX-USX1 29 MX-US50 31 MX-AMX2 33 MX-KBX2
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK EXTERNAL
5 LICENSE KIT
Memory 27 MX-USX5
100 LICENSE KIT
30 MX-USA0
ACCOUNT MODULE
32 MX-AMX3
EXPANSION
SHARPDESK
MEMORY BOARD
10 LICENSE KIT
34 MX-SMX3 28 MX-US10
MX-5001N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

1 : Oct. 24 2008
2. Mainfunction of the main unit
1 MX-4100N/5000N MX-4101N/5001N
Copier STD
PCL printer STD
PS printer OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5"
FAX OPT
Scanner STD
Filing STD
HDD STD
RSPF/DSPF RSPF DSPF
Automatic duplex STD
Security OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

OPT*1: Product key target.
3. Combination of options
MX-4100N/4101N Product
Section Name Model name Remarks
MX-5000N/5001N key target
Paper feed 1 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX8 {
system 2 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX9 {
3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1 { A4
Paper exit system 4 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX2 {
5 FINISHER MX-FNX9 { Inner finisher
6 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3 {
7 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10 {
8 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1 { For inner finisher
A/B/C/D
9 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5 { For saddle stitch finisher
A/B/C/D
10 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1 { For finisher
11 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3 { For saddle
12 FINISHER MX-FN11 {
13 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6 { For finisher (MX-FN11)
A/B/C/D
14 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC2 { For finisher (MX-FN11)
Printer expansion 15 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1 { {
16 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 {*3 {
17 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1 {
Image send 18 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 {*1
expansion 19 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1 {
20 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1 {
21 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1 { {
22 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EBX3 {
23 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1 { {
Authentication/ 24 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR11U { { Commercial version
Security 25 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR11 { { Authentication version
Application/ 26 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1 {
Solution 27 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5 {
28 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10 {
29 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50 {
30 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0 {
31 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE MX-AMX2 { {
32 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3 { {
33 KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/{*2
Memory 34 EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3 { 1GB
STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected.

* 1: No support for some destinations.
* 2: Standard for North America and Sweden (DSPF/RSPF model). Standard for U.K., Germany and France (DSPF model only).
* 3: Memory expansion are required.
MX-5001N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

1 : Oct. 24 2008
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-5001N (6) Engine resolution
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

Writing resolution Copy: 600 x 600dpi

1. Basic specifications Print: 1200 x 1200dpi
Smoothing No
A. Base engine Gradation Copy: 600 x 600dpi
(Monochrome/Color) Print : 600 x 600 (1bit)
(1) Type / 600 x 600 (4bit)
/ 1200 x 1200 (1bit)
Type Desktop
(7) Printable area

(2) Engine composition
Max. print size 299 x 450 mm
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: I30mm)
Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Black x 1, Color x 3
Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush 8mm or less
development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method Full A3 / 11 X 17 dimension (299 x 450 mm) can be printed with
Transfer system Intermediate transfer belt PCL / PS driver.
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Heat roller
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner (8) Engine speed (ppm)
bottle system a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
Monochrome Color
(3) Dimensions / Weight Paper type Paper size
MX- MX- MX- MX-
4100N/ 5000N/ 4100N/ 5000N/
Outer dimensions MX-4100N/5000N (RSPF model): 4101N 5001N 4101N 5001N
1
(W x D x H) 25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 37-25/64 inch 1 Standard A3 19 22 19 22
645 x 695 x 950 mm paper B4 22 25 22 25
MX-4101N/5001N (DSPF model): A4
25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 37-25/32 inch 41 50 41 50
B5
645 x 695 x 960 mm A4R
Dimensions occupied by 39-11/64 x 27-23/64 inch 26 30 26 30
B5R
Machine (W x D) 995 x 695 mm
A5R 29 32 29 32
(State of the manual paper
Extra 18 21 18 21
feed tray is expansion.)
11 x 17 19 22 19 22
1 Weight MX-4100N/5000N (RSPF model):
(Including OPC drum/ Approx. 253 lbs (115 kg) 8.5 x 14
excluding consumble parts) MX-4101N/5001N (DSPF model): 8.5 x 13
22 25 22 25
Approx. 273 lbs (124 kg) 8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11 41 50 41 50
(4) Warmup 8.5 x 11R
26 30 26 30
7.25 x 10.5R
Warm-up time MX-4100N/4101N: 120 seconds or less 5.5 x 8.5R 29 32 29 32
MX-5000N/5001N: 140 seconds or less Heavy paper A4
(The value may be increased by operating B5
condition) A5R 17 17 17 17
Pre-heat Yes 8.5 x 11
Recovery time from jam * 30 sec. or less 8.5 x 5.5R
A4R
* Condition: After the door has been opened for 60 seconds and
B5R
the polygon motor has stopped. 13 13 13 13
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
(5) First copy time In the other sizes 10 10 10 10
Platen/ MX-4100N/4101N MX-5000N/5001N * LCC - Supported paper types and weights: 8.5 x 11, A4, B5:
RSPF Monochrome Color Monochrome Color 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 LB.)
1 Platen 4.7 sec. 6.7 sec. 4.1 sec. 5.9 sec.

or less or less or less or less
RSPF 10.1 sec. 13.5 sec. 9.3 sec. 13.5 sec.
DSPF 9.5 sec. 15.2 sec. 8.8 sec. 15.2 sec.
* Measurement conditions: When paper of A4/8.5 x 11 is fed to

narrow side direction from the main unit tray 1, and the polygon
motor is rotating.
Color auto judgment/magical view OFF.
The first output immediately after turning ON the power is
excluded.
MX-5001N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
1 : Oct. 24 2008
b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding B. Controller board

Monochrome Color (1) Controller board
Paper MX- MX- MX- MX-
Paper size CPU Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (1GHz)
type 4100N/ 5000N/ 4100N/ 5000N/
4101N 5001N 4101N 5001N Interface
Standard A3W *1 17 20 16 20 IEEE 1284 Parallel No
1
paper A3 18 21 17 21 Ethernet 1 port
B4 21 24 19 23 Interface 10Base-T , 100Base-TX,
A4 31 39 1000Base-T
41 50 Support TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/
B5 34 42
Protocol SPX , NetBEUI , EtherTalk
A4R 21 27
24 29 USB 2.0 Host 1 port
B5R 23 29
USB authentication No
A5R 29 32 29 32
acquisition
Extra
17 20 16 20 ACRE expansion I/F Yes
12 x 18 *1
Serial I/F 1 port
11 x 17 18 21 17 21
Memory expansion slot 1 slot
8.5 x 14
USB 2.0 Device 1 port
8.5 x 13
21 24 19 23
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11 41 50 31 39
(2) Memory, hard disk
8.5 x 11R 22 28 Memory capacity, HDD capacity
24 29
7.25 x 10.5R 21 27
5.5 x 8.5R 29 32 29 32 Local Memory (Copy) Standard 512MB
Memory
OHP A4, 8.5 x 11 16 16 15 15
Local Memory (Print) Standard 512MB
A4R, 8.5 x 11R 12 12 11 11
Memory
Envelope Monarch,
11 11 10 10 System Memory (Print) Standard 1GB
Com-10, DL, C5
Memory
Heavy A4
Expansion 1GB
paper B5
Memory
A5R 16 16 15 15
Max. 2GB
8.5 x 11
HDD 80GB *
8.5 x 5.5R
A4R * Capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
B5R
12 12 11 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R C. Operation panel
In the other sizes 9 9 8 8
(1) Display device
*1: Engine speed in finisher output a. Color LCD
Type Dot matrix TFT LCD, touch panel

(9) Power source Size 8.5 inch
Display dot number 800 x 480 (W-VGA)
100V series 200V series
LCD drive display area 184.8 x 110.88mm
1 Voltage / Current MX-4100N/4101N: 220 - 240V 8A
LCD backlight Fluorescent lamp backlight system
110 - 127V 12A
MX-5000N/5001N: LCD contrast adjustment Yes
110 - 127V 16A
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power source code Fixed type Inlet
(Direct connection)
Power switch 2 switches
(Primary switch: in the front cover;
Secondary switch: the operation panel)
(10) Power consumption
100V series 200V series

1 Max. Rated Power MX-4100N/4101N: 1.84Kw
Consumption *1 1.44Kw
MX-5000N/5001N:
1.92Kw
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification
heater is OFF.
D. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation
Scanning copy mode

Resolution (dpi) Platen Monochrome 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
600 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Color 600 x 600dpi
RSPF Monochrome 600 x 400 dpi (Default)
600 x 600 dpi
Color 600 x 600dpi
DSPF Monochrome 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
600 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Color 600 x 600dpi
In sending Scanner Internet Fax / Direct SMTP Fax
Resolution (dpi) 200dpi x 100dpi Standard
100dpi x 100dpi (middle tone not allowed) (203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
(middle tone not allowed)
Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
Super Fine
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
Ultra Fine
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Exposure lamp Xenon
Reading gradation 10bits
Output gradation B/W: 1bit
Gray scale: 8bit
Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each
(2) Document table
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Original standard position Left bottom reference
Detection Yes
detection size Automatic detection
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Platen
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, B4, A4, A4R, A5
AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.4
AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.5
Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
(Scanner section) DKIT-0373FCZZ
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

Scan speed
Monochrome (A4 / 8.5 x 11) Color (A4 / 8.5 x 11)
Copy Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit) Single: 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
Duplex: 16-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit)
FAX / Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/RSPF) Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
RSPF
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 11
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position
Document size Standard size (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet FAX 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed
(The following two kinds of sizes can be combined; A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11" and 8.5". AMS is available.)
* In random paper feeding, scanning with duplex is not available.
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 100 sheet (21 lbs Bond, 80g/m2) or 13 mm (height limitation)
documents
Transport disable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
document document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Finish stamp Option
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

Scan speed
Monochrome (A4 / 8.5 x 11) Color (A4 / 8.5 x 11)
Copy Single: 70-sheet/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 1bit) Single: 41-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 41-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
41-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 50-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
41-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit)
FAX / Internet FAX Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Scanner Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/DSPF) Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
DSPF
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 11
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position
Document size Standard size (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet FAX 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed
(The following two kinds of sizes can be combined; A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11" and 8.5". AMS is available.)
* In random paper feeding, scanning with duplex is not available.
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 150 sheet (21 lbs Bond, 80g/m2) or 19.5 mm (height limitation)
documents
Transport disable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
document document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Finish stamp Option
E. Paper feed section (5) Tray 5 (LCC)
(1) Type Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
Type Standard:
Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
feed tray Paper size setting Simulation setup
Full option: Paper size setting when A4
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper shipping
feed + LCC Paper type setting Yes
Paper type setting Yes Allowable paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit) and weight for paper letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper:
feed 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
(2) Tray 1, 2 (Main unit) Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m 2)
Effective height: 385 mm
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, detection
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, Off-center adjustment r 3mm
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, (Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
heavy paper Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) (without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W
Heavy paper: 28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209g/m2) Power source 5Vr5% and 24Vr5% are supplied from main
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3 unit
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5 x 11, Tray 2: 11 x 17 External dimensions 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 x 20-15/32 inch,
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) (W x D x H) 370 x 550 x 520 mm
detection Dimensions occupied by 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 inch, 370 x 550 (mm)
Machine * Clearance with main unit: 235 mm
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) (W x D)
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs, 30 kg
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Thermal heater Standard equipment: AC power is supplied
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, OFF operation.
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 , 8.5 x 13.5, Optional detection Auto detection system
8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, envelope F. Paper exit section
Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, (1) Center tray of main unit
heavy paper, thin paper, envelope, OHP,
label sheet, tab paper, glossy paper Paper exit section Center section of the main unit
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper: Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system
13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) Paper exit capacity 500 sheets (When A4, 8.5 x 11)
Plain paper: (recommended paper for color)
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper:
Heavy paper: weight 13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2), Plain paper:
110 lb index - 140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2) 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
(4) Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray) 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2),
110 lb index -140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2)
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 Shifter function Yes
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, Paper exit full detection Yes
8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11 R, 7.25 x 10.5R * A3W/12x8 paper exiting is not allowed.
Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, (2) Shifter
heavy paper
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: Paper weight 16 lb bond - 140 lb index (55 - 256g/m2 )
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Paper size/type Offset mode Size:
Heavy paper: Envelope, custom size, A3W
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) and 12 x 18 are not acceptable
Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width Type:
shipping Envelope, OHP, label paper and
tab paper are not acceptable
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
detection Offset width 30 mm
Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit) Integrity Non-offset Getting out:
* In using the It doesn't fall down from tray
Dimensions with 28-22/64 x 11-15/16 inch,
recommended paper, Offset mode Getting out: within 50 mm
(W x D x H) adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm
A4/8.5 x 11 FR shift: within r10 mm
without 24-13/64 x 26-3/8 x 11-15/16 inch,
JOB distance: 10 mm or more
adjuster 615 x 670 x 303 mm
(3) Paper exit tray (5) Copy functions
Type Exit tray unit Function

Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the Automatic paper selection Job reservation (99 items)
system main unit/Paper exits in face-down Automatic magnification ratio Tray installation priority
Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (When A4/8.5 x 11) selection Program call/register (48 items)
(recommended paper for color) Paper type selection Document paper size input
Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except Auto tray switching Indefinite paper size input
type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper. Rotation copy Duplex copy direction switching
Shifter function No Electronic sort Preview function
Paper exit paper full Yes Special functions
detection
Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) (Multi shot) (Centering provided,
Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/ page printing based on number
G. Copy functions side erase) of original pages is provided)
(1) Copy magnification ratio 2 in 1
Center binding (Centering provided) Book copy
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio1 :1 r0.8% Large volume document mode Tab copy
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, Tandem copy Card shot
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, Cover paper insertion Automatic temporary save
200%, 400% Only insertion of tab paper. Filing
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, Combination with tab copy is not Trial copy
121%, 129%, 200%, 400% allowed. Document count
Zoom 25-400% (RSPF/DSPF: 25-200%)
Mixed document feeder
Preset magnification 4
OHP insert paper Thin paper scanning
ratio
Document control (When the data security kit is installed)
(2) Density/copy image quality process Print menu Color adjustment
Date print Stamp RGB Color balance
Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Character print Page print Sharpness Brightness
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph, adjustment
Map, light document Water mark Background Vividness
Number of manual steps 9 steps removal adjustment
Toner save mode Yes Modifying image Auto color calibration
* Off on printed photo, photograph or light Photo repeat A3 wide copy (Setting with system)
document Enlargement Centering Registration
continuous copy (Setting with system)
(3) Color copy mode Mirror image Black-white
reversion
Auto color selection Copy mode automatically discerning color/ (Excluding
monochrome. the U.K.)
Full color Full color copy
Two color Red/Black mode (Change red point in H. Printer function
document into other color)
Copies with one color (R/G/B/C/M/Y) that is (1) Platform
replaced from red color area in document,
and black color. IBM PC/AT
Single color Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y Macintosh
(4) Duplex (2) Support OS
System Non stack system Custom Custom Custom

OS PPD
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, PCL6 PCL5c PS
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, Windows 98 / Me
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Yes
Type and weight of Plain paper: 2000
paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) XP
passed Heavy paper: XP x 64 No
28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209 g/m2) Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, Server 2003 x 64 No
letter head, re-printed paper, pre-punched Server 2008 Yes
paper, heavy paper
Server 2008 x 64 No
Vista Yes
Vista x 64 No
Mac 9.2.2
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9 No No No Yes
10.4.11
X 10.5-10.5.1
(3) PDL emulation
PCL5c compatibility, PCL6 compatibility Standard

PostScript 3 compatibility Option
(4) Font (3) Support image
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax
PCL5c Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code File format Monochrome: TIFF-FX
copatibility, Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts TIFF, PDF, Encrypted (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
PCL6 PDF, XPS
compatibility Color/
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts Gray scale:
compatibility = 136 fonts Color TIFF, JPEG, ---
PDF, Encrypted PDF,
(5) Print channel XPS,
High compression
Support print PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment PDF (When MX-EBX3
channel LPR is installed)
IPP Compression Monochrome: Non-compression,
PAP:EtherTalk system Non-compression MH, MMR
FTP G3 = MH
NetBEUI G4 = MMR
Raw Port (Port 9100) Color / Gray scale:
---
USB 1.1 (Windows98/Me/2000/Server2003/XP/Vista) JPEG
USB 2.0 (For Windows2000/XP/Vista only) (High compression/
HTTP (Web Submit Print) Middle
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) compression/
Low compression)
(6) Environment setting Conversion for
each page to a
Setting item General file (Available Yes ---
Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number to quantity
of copies and the print direction specification)
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS (4) Item Number of registration items
error, setting of binary data outputting
Item No. of registration items
I. Image send function One-touch/Group 999 items
Max. number of registration items for one
(1) Mode group (500 items)
Program 48 items
Scanner Scan to e-mail Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter /
Scan to Desktop relay and broadcast: 100 items
Scan to FTP
Sender registration FAX, Internet FAX: 1 item
Scan to Folder (SMB)
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000 items
Scan to USB memory
Scan to e-mail with Meta Transfer table list 50 items
Scan to Desktop with Meta Sender number 18 items
Scan to FTP with Meta Item name 30 items
Scan to SMB with Meta File name 30 items
Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB Fixed phrase 30 items
(Document Admin) Meta data set list 10 items
Fax Fax to Fax (Manual) Allow/Reject Number Setting Fax: 50 items
Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer) (Allow/Reject In total 50 items)
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing) Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Internet FAX: 50 items
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin) Name Setting (Allow/Reject In total 50 items)
Internet Fax Internet Fax to Internet FAX (Manual) Polling allow number FAX: 10 items
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Inbound routing)
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
(2) Support system
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax

Corresponding SMTP POP server
server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server ---
SMB ESMTP server
J. PC-Fax, PC internet Fax functions K. Document filing function
(1) Working environment (1) Basic function
OS Windows 98 Number of files 38GB

Windows Me that can be saved Monochrome (Text): 5,500 pages or 3,000 files (*1)
Windows NT4.0 Workstation in the standard Full color data (Text and Photo): 2,500 pages (*2)
(Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more) folder/user folder
Windows 2000 Number of files 12GB
Windows XP that can be saved Monochrome (Text): 1,700 pages or 1,000 files (*1)
Windows XP x 64 in temporary file Full color data (Text and Photo): 800 pages (*2)
Windows Server 2003 folders.
Windows Server 2003 x 64 Number of folders Max. 1,000 folders
Windows Server 2008 that can be made
Windows Server 2008 x 64 as user folders.
Windows Vista Number of users Same as that of account users of the main unit
Windows Vista x 64 which can be
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine registered
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
Monitor Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above (*1): When the standard document (A4 monochrome: test sheet C)
Number of colors: 256 colors or above is used.
Memory 64 MB or more (*2): When the color document (A4, greg fruit) is used.
HDD Empty capacity of 50MB or above
Interface USB 2.0 Original (Text, A4): Test Sheet C Original (Color, A4): Greg fruit
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Communication protocol LPR / lp
Port9100 (RAW)
IPP
USB2.0
(2) Functions
PC-FAX send Yes

(When FAX is installed)
FAX number max. 64 digits
PC-Internet FAX send Yes (Internet FAX expansion kit is required)
Internet FAX address: max. 64 digits
Resolution 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi*
* Internet-Fax only
Send document size A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11 x 17 / 8.5 x 14 / (2) Data operation by each function
8.5 x 11 / 5.5 x 8.5 / 8.5 x 13
Compression system MH / MMR / JBIG Each folder in the
Broadcast send Yes (Max. 500 items) standard folder Temporary folder
F-code send Yes Sub address Yes /user folder
Job
(Max. 20 digits) Confi- Confi-
Sharing Sharing
Pass code Yes dential dential
storage storage
(Max. 20 digits) storage storage
Telephone book Yes Copy
Yes Yes
registration, Send function Printer
Covering letter Yes Direct print (FTP pull)
attachment function Direct print (FTP push) No
Covering letter making Yes Direct print (USB pull)
function Direct print (e-mail push) Yes No
Sender print Prints always Direct print (Web push)
No Yes No
Preview Yes Direct print (SMB pull)
Delivery confirmation Yes Scan to e-mail/FTP
(Notification to PC by Scan to SMB
NJR)
FAX send No
Document filing function Filing Yes
Internet FAX send
Automatic temporary save
PC FAX / PC Internet
PC- FAX send log Yes FAX send Yes
User authentication Yes Scan to HDD No
(3) Data operation contents L. Ambient conditions
Operation content Operation panel WEB (1) Working environment
Reprint
Resend (Humidity)
Delete
85%
Shift
Attribute change (Common/
Yes 60%
Confidential/Protection)
Confidential file setting
Confidental folder setting
File name change
Creation of a folder
20%
File transfer to Local PC No
Machine HDD occupying rate Yes
Yes 10 30 35
display
(Temperature)
Confirmation of save data Yes
image (Preview) (The print data displays only
the first page.) Standard environmental Temperature 20 25 C
Retrieval conditions Humidity 65 r 5 %RH
Collective print Usage environmental Temperature 10 35 C
(When the user name and the conditions Humidity 20 85 %RH
Yes
password of target files in the Atmospheric 590 1013 hPa
folder are the same) pressure (height: 0 2000m)
Delete with the time specified Quality Guarantee Period Toner and Developer: 24 months from the
Multi file selection (print only) No production month (unopened)
Drum: 36 months from the production month
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is
disabled.
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
Reprint Resend
Job Data
Mode Mono- Mono-
kind save Color Color
chrome chrome
Copy Copy Color Yes Yes
Mono- Yes Yes
No
chrome
Printer Printer Color Yes No No
Mono- No
No
chrome
Image Scan Color Yes Yes
send send Mono-
chrome
FAX Mono-
send chrome No Yes No Yes
Internet Mono-
FAX chrome
send
Document Scan Color Yes Yes
filing save Mono-
No No
chrome
* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-50NTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-31NVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 100K MX-31NVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set))
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-31NRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 150K (Black) MX-31NUSA
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 100K (Color)
Charger cleaner rubber x1
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-50GTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-31GVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 100K MX-31GVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-31GRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 150K (Black) MX-31GUSA
C. Asia/Hong Kong
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-50ATBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-31AVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 100K MX-31AVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-31ARSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 150K (Black) MX-31AUSA
MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-50FTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-31FVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 100K MX-31FVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-31FRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 150K (Black) MX-31FUSA
E. Brazil
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-50BTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-31NVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 100K MX-31NVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX31NRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 150K (Black) MX-31NUSA
2. Recommended color paper

The following color print paper is recommended. Use this recom-
mended color paper for the color balance adjustment. If another
kind of paper is used for the color balance adjustment, proper
image qualities (color balance, density, color reproduction) may not
be produced.
Kind Model Supplier Specification

Recommend Hammermill Hammermill [11" x 8.5", 90g/m2]
paper LASER PRINT [11" x 17", 90g/m2]
Mondi Mondi [A4, 90g/m2]
Color Copy [A3, 90g/m2]
(90g/m2)

1 : Oct. 24 2008
3. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller unit x1 200K MX-410UH
2-1 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-410HK 41-sheet machine for 120V
Separation pawl lower x4
Upper separation pawl spring x4
Lower separation pawl spring x4
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
Upper thermistor PA (Non-contact thermistor P) x1
Lower heat roller unit x1
External heating belt unit x1
1 2-2 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-500HK 50-sheet machine for 120V
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
3 Web cleaning kit Web unit x1 150K MX-410WC
Lower CL roller CJ2 x1
Lower CL roller bearing x2
CL pressure SP CJ2 x2
4 Primary transfer kit PTC unit x1 300K MX-310Y1
Primary transfer belt x1
Transfer cleaning blade x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
5 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-410Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
Secondary transfer idle gear x1
6 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 150K MX-450FL
1
7 PS paper dust removing unit PS paper dust removing unit x1 150K MX-310PD
8 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 40K MX-310HB 5% coverage for each
color; 43% color ratio
9 DV seal kit DV blade N kit x1 Black: 150K, MX-310DS
DV side seal F x1 Color: 100K
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter unit x3
10 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 Black: 150K, MX-310MK
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 100K
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
11 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 For 4K finisher
(MX-FN11)
12 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 2000 times x 3 AR-SC3 For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
13 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
14 Stamp cartridge Stamp cartridge x2 AR-SV1
15 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) x1 MX-410U1
16 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) x1 MX-410U2
17-1 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-410FU1 41-sheet machine for 120V
1 17-2 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-500FU1 50-sheet machine for 120V

1 : Oct. 24 2008
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
2 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-410HK
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
4 Primary transfer belt kit Primary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310B1
PTC unit x1
5 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x4 300K MX-310X1
Belt drive gear x1
6 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310B2
7 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x1 300K MX-410X2
9 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 150K MX-450FLN
1
DV side seal R x1
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN11)
(MX-FN10)
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
19 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-410FU
C. Hong Kong
2 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-410HK
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
4 Primary transfer kit Primary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310Y1
PTC unit x1
Belt drive gear x1

1 : Oct. 24 2008

1
DV side seal R x1
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN11)
(MX-FN10)
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
17 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-410FU
D. Asia/Middle East/Agency
2-1 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-410HK 41-sheet machine for 120V
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
1 2-2 Heat roller kit Separation pawl upper x4 300K MX-500HK 50-sheet machine
Separation pawl lower x4 for 120V series
Upper separation pawl spring x4 41/50-sheet machine
Lower separation pawl spring x4 for 230V series
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
4 Primary transfer kit Primary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310Y1
PTC unit x1
Belt drive gear x1
1
DV side seal R x1

1 : Oct. 24 2008

Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN11)
(MX-FN10)
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
17-1 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-410FU1
1 17-2 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-500FU1
17-3 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-410FU
4. Definition the developer/drum life end 1

B. 50-sheet machine
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
Black developer/drum Color developer/drum
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level. Single multi 64,000 50,000
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged 2 sheets multi 100,000 73,000
as life end. 3 sheets multi 120,000 87,000
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output 4 sheets multi 138,000 94,000
may differ greatly. 5 sheets multi 150,000 100,000
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are out-
put, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode
in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color 160,000
selection). Black developer/drum 150,000
140,000 Color developer/drum

In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as 138,000
well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.

120,000 120,000
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be deter-
mined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm
100,000 100,000 100,000
reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end.
Printable counter
94,000
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13. 87,000
80,000
(840K rotations = 7,916,813cm) 73,000
64,000
60,000
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm
50,000
B/W Full color B/W Full color
40,000
Developer/ 150K 100K 840K 840K
drum rotations rotations
20,000
1 A. 41-sheet machine
0
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi 5 sheets multi
Black developer/drum Color developer/drum
Single multi 74,000 53,000
2 sheets multi 112,000 77,000
3 sheets multi 135,000 91,000
4 sheets multi 150,000 100,000
160,000
Black developer/drum 150,000
140,000 Color developer/drum
135,000
120,000
112,000
100,000 100,000
Printable counter
91,000
80,000 77,000
74,000
60,000
53,000
40,000
20,000
0
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

5. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
Part name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as

follows. Destination
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. Toner color Incompatibility
Production
1: Number place
For this model, this digit is 2.
Production
year/month/day
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. Version
3: Number
Serial No. in production day
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. Example: 1st of production onJune 1, 2008
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
(1)
(8) (2) (3) (4) (9)(5) (6)
1 When using the When a finisher / saddle

MX-4101N/5001N. stitch finisher is not installed.
(10)
(7)
When a keyboard
is installed.
When a Saddle stitch finisher When a finisher is installed.
is installed.
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a
toner cartridge.
3 Paper pass unit* This transfers output to the finisher (large capacity) or the saddle stitch finisher.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Right tray* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
7 Finisher* This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to
punch holes in output.
8 Punch module This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large capacity).
9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as
USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
10 Keyboard* This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can
be stored under the operation panel.
11 Saddle stitch finisher* This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and
stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
12 Finisher (large capacity)* This can be used to staple output.
13 Tray 1 This holds paper.
14 Tray 2 This holds paper.
15 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
16 Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer is installed)*
17 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is This holds paper.
installed)*
*: Peripheral device.
MX-5001N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 1

1 : Oct. 24 2008
B. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (9)
(2) (3) (4) (5)
(8)
1 When using the

MX-4101N/5001N.
No. Name function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Reversing tray During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is temporarily output to this tray in order to be turned over for
scanning of the reverse side.
9 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

C. Internal operation parts
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of the photoconductive
drums are combined together on the transfer belt. During black and white printing, only the black toner
image is transferred onto the transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
6 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
9 Waste toner box release button Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to replace the waste toner box or
clean the laser unit.
10 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
11 Right cover of stand/ Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer right cover of stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/1 x
500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)
12 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2.
13 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.

D. DSPF
(1) Internal structure
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No. Name Function/ Operation
1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 No. 1 resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 No. 1 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to paper.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
8 No. 2 resist roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
9 No. 2 resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to paper.
10 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
11 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to paper.
12 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
13 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to paper.
14 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.
15 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
(2) Sensors, switches

SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SPPD2 SPRDMD STUD
SPLS2
SPLS1
STLD
SPWS
SPOD
SPPD3 SPED2
SOCD SPPD5
SLCOV
SPPD4
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

SPPD2 DSPF paper pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the paper. Transmission type
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door. Transmission type
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the paper size in random paper feed. Transmission type
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray. Transmission type
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document. Transmission type
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the paper feed tray upper. Volume resistor
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Transmission type
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. Transmission type
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the lower door. Micro switch
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Detects paper exit of the document. Transmission type
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the paper feed tray. Transmission type
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the paper feed tray. Transmission type

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB and lamps
SPFFAN
SPFM
STRC
SPFC SPUM
STRRC SPOM
SRRC SLUM
4 2
1
3
DSPF COPY LAMP
LUMP
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the paper feed
section.
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor PM step motor Drives the paper exit roller.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the paper feed tray.
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the paper feed section.
STRRC DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
SRRC DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the motors and the clutches.
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document
images.

1 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
2 DSPF flash PWB Program ROM PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.
5 DSPF CL inverter PWB Drives the copy lamp.

E. RSPF
(1) Internal structure
4 2 1 14 16
3
5
6
8
7
12 11 9 10 17 13 15
NO. Name Function/Operation

1 Pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
4 U-turn roller Guide roller to transport paper.
5 PS follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the PS roller to give the transport power of the PS roller to the
paper.
6 PS roller Synchronizes the document lead edge and the scan start position.
7 Transport follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport
roller to the paper.
8 Scan front roller Transports paper from the PS roller to the scan rear roller.
9 Scan rear roller Transports paper from the scan front roller to the SWB roller or paper exit roller.
11 Transport roller in SWB pass section Transports paper from the SWB roller to the PS rear roller.
13 Paper exit roller Discharges paper.
14 Paper exit follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper
exit roller to the paper.
15 SWB roller The transport direction is switched back to reverse paper.
17 Reverse gate Selects between discharging a document to the paper exit section and transporting a
document to the reverse tray.
(2) Sensor, switch
SPLS2
SPPD1 SPLS1
SPED
SPED
SCOV
SPWS
SPPD2 SPPD5
SPPD3 SOCD
SPPD4
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

SCOV RSPF cover switch Detects the paper feed cover open/close. Micro switch
SPED RSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF tray. Transmission type
SPLS1 RSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPLS2 RSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPPD1 RSPF paper entry detection 1 sensor Detects paper entry and detects paper size in random paper feeding. Transmission type
(Also used for random detection)
SPPD2 RSPF paper entry detection 2 sensor (PS front) Detects the paper in front of the PS roller. Transmission type
SPPD3 RSPF scan front sensor Detects the paper in front of scan point. Transmission type
SPPD4 RSPF reverse gate front sensor Detects the paper in front of reverse gate. Transmission type
SPPD5 RSPF reverse rear sensor Detects reversed paper. Transmission type
SPWS RSPF document width sensor Detects width of document on the tray. Volume resistor
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF. Transmission type

(3) Motor, clutches, solenoids and PWB
SPFM
SPFC
SRRC
SPRM
1
SGS
STMPS
SPFC

SGS SPF document exit gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Reverses the paper exit guard by ON operation.
SPFC SPF paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller.
SPFM SPF transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller and the PS roller.
SPRM SPF paper feed reverse motor Stepping motor Drives the roller for paper feeding and drives the SWB transport roller.
SRRC SPF resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the PS roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid - Drives the finish stamp.
NO Name Function/Operation
1 RSPF drive PWB Drives the RSPF.

F. Connectors
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

1 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket.
2 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.
3 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. This connector
is not initially available for use. If you wish to use the connector, contact your service technician.
4 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
5 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the USB
cable, use a shielded cable.
6 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
7 Power plug
G. Operation panel
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) (10) (17)
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides
confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators
x READY indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
x DATA indicator This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators
x LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
x DATA indicator This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This
lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
10 [COLOR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in color. This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
11 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
12 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
13 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
14 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
16 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( )
blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
17 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
18 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
H. Status display
Ready to scan for copy.
0 Job Status (1) Job Status
MFP Status MFP Status

Color Mode Special Modes
020/015 Maintenance
Full Color
2-Sided Copy Information
Copying
Plain DC DC DC
8x11
Output 005/000 DC DC DC
Exposure 1. 8x11
2. 8x11R Waiting DC DC DC
Auto 3. 8x14 File
4. 11x17
010/000
Quick File
Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
100% Auto Auto

8x11
010/000
8x11 Plain Waiting
(2) (3)

1 Display selection key The status display can be switched between Job Status and MFP Status.
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display automatically changes to "MFP Status".
2 Job Status display This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of
job, the set number of copies, the number of copies completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only be manipulated in the job status screen.
3 MFP Status display This shows machine system information.
Maintenance Information:
This shows machine maintenance information by means of codes.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
I. Sensor
OCSW
MHPS
TFD3
TFD2
HPOS
POD3
POD2
APPD1
POD1
HLPCD
DSW_ADU
1TUD_CL
1TUD_BK
DHPD_CL REGS_F
DHPD_Y DHPD_M DHPD_C DHPD_K REGS_R
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPED
PPD2
MTOP1 MPLD
MPWD
PPD1 MPFD MTOP2
TH_M/HUD_M
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1
CSS11 DSW_C
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CSS2 CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE

1TUD_BK Transfer belt separation BK detection Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper Transmission type
pass.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass. Reflection type
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass. Reflection type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting Duct switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 either of tray 1 rear edge detection 1 4. Duct switch
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Duct switch
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting Duct switch
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 either of tray 2 rear edge detection 1 4. Duct switch
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Duct switch
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase. 41-sheet machine
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase. 50-sheet machine
1
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase. 50-sheet machine
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase. 50-sheet machine

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover
open/close.
HLPCD Fusing pressure release sensor Detects pressure release of the fusing roller. Transmission type
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Manual paper
length. feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Transmission type Manual paper
pull-out position (storing position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Transmission type Manual paper
pull-out position (pull-out position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
REGS_F Pro-reg sensor F Detects the registration shift of the machine Reflection type
front (F) side and detects color toner patch.
REGS_R Pro-reg sensor R Detects the registration shift of the machine Reflection type
rear (R) side and detects black toner patch.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). Magnetic sensor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). Magnetic sensor
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_LM_IN Lower main thermister Detects the temperature.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.

J. Switch
PWRSW
DSW-R
DSW-F
MSW
1TNFD

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Mechanical switch Detects the waste toner full.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the
fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the
fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

K. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
MPUC
PCSS
MPFS
MPGS
LSUSS_B
1TURC_R
1TURC
CPUC1
CPLC1
CPFC
CPUC2
CPLC2

1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
1TURC_R Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray
section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid 1 Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
(Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration
sensor.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
L. Drive motor
1
PRM
OSM
POM ADUM_H
PGM FUM
WEBM
WTNM
MIM
TNM_Y
PFM TNM_M
HPFM TNM_C
TNM_K
CLUM1 DM_Y
DVM_K
DVM_CL
ADUM_L CPFM DM_C DM_M
CLUM2 DM_K
BTM RRM
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NOTE

ADUM_H ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
BTM Transfer belt motor Stepping motor Drives the transfer belt.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_K BK drum motor Stepping motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M CL drum motor Stepping motor Drives the CL drum. 41-sheet machine
M drum motor Drives the M drum. 50-sheet machine
1
DM_C C drum motor Stepping motor Drives the C drum. 50-sheet machine
DM_Y Y drum motor Stepping motor Drives the Y drum. 50-sheet machine
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section/transfer section (K).
FUM Fusing drive motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing unit.
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Stepping motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor
drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor
drive system.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the resist roller and the right door
section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Stepping motor Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_C Toner motor C Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Synchronous motor Stirs waste toner.
M. Lamps, gates and heaters
CLI
CCFT
2 1
HL_EX2
HL_EX1
HL_EX1
HL_U
HL_LM
DL_Y DL_M DL_C DL_K

CCFT LCD backlight Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Backlight for LCD
CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_EX1 Heater lamp external 1 Heats the upper heat roller. (External)
HL_EX2 Heater lamp external 2 Heats the upper heat roller. (External)

1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to
discharge paper to the right tray.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is transported to
the duplex (ADU) section.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
N. Fans and filters
3
POFM_R
POFM_F
PCSFM1
PCSFM2
(50-sheet machine) RCFM
PCSFM2
PCSFM1
(41-sheet machine) FUFM CAFM
FUFM
PCSFM1
2
CCFM
MFPFM
PSFM2
PSFM
LSUFM
MFPFM OZFM
Signal name Name Function/Operation

CAFM Cartridge cooling fan motor Cools the toner cartridge.
CCFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
FUFM Fusing fan motor Cools the fusing unit and peripheral area.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU section.
MFPFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
PCSFM1 Toner cooling fan motor 1 Cools the toner bottle.
PCSFM2 Toner cooling fan motor 2 Cools the toner bottle.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor2 Cools the power unit.
RCFM Rear cooling fan motor Cools rear (R) part of the machine.
NO Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
3 Left cabinet filter Removes foreign materials from sucked air.
1 4 TN suction filter Removes foreign materials from sucked air. 50-sheet machine

O. PWB
14
15
16
10
13
31 12
9
11
26
2
25
24
23 21
27 22
30
8
17
19
33 28
29 20
18
5
7
32
1 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
2 Tray installation detection PWB Detects the tray.
3 DC power PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
4 Driver main PWB Drives the transport motor and related sections.
5 MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
6 Primary transfer PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
7 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power source.
8 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
9 CCD PWB Scans document images.
10 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.

11 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
12 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for document size detection.
13 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
14 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
15 MFP OPE-P PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
16 Power SW PWB Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
17 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
18 Secondary transfer PWB Generates the secondary transfer voltage, the transfer belt cleaning voltage and the pre-transfer voltage.
19 MFP cnt PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.
20 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFP cnt PWB and other PWB.
21 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
22 PCU Flash ROM PWB The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB.
23 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
24 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
25 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
26 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
27 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
28 PROG1 ROM PWB Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
29 PROG2 ROM PWB Stores the program.
30 SCN Flash ROM PWB Stores the scanner control program.
31 USB connector PWB For connecting the USB
32 TM drive PWB Control the toner motor.
33 Driver sub PWB Drives the process motor and related sections.
P. Fuses/Thermostats
14
TS EX2
TS EX1
TS SUB
TS MAIN
10
13
11
12
8 6
7
1 9
2
3
4
5

Signal name Name Specifications Section
TS MAIN Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS SUB Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS EX1 Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS EX2 Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
NO Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 F401 Fuse T6.3AH 250V (100V/200V 41-sheet machine) DC power PWB
F101 Fuse T6.3AH 250V (100V/200V 50-sheet machine) DC power PWB
6 F1 Fuse 15A 250V (100V 41-sheet machine) / AC power PWB
T10AH 250V (200V 41-sheet machine, 200V 50-sheet machine) /
20A 250V (100V 50-sheet machine)
7 F2 Fuse T10AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB
10 F001 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T8AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
11 F101 Fuse T5AH 250V (100V 41-sheet machine) / T2.5AH 250V (200V 41-sheet machine) / DC power PWB
T6.3AH 250V (100V/200V 50-sheet machine)
F003 Fuse T8A 500V (100V 50-sheet machine) / T5A 500V (200V 50-sheet machine) DC power PWB
12 F201 Fuse T8AH 250V (100V 41-sheet machine) / T4AH 250V (200V 41-sheet machine) DC power PWB
13 F002 Fuse T2AH 250V (100V 41/50-sheet machine, 200V 41-sheet machine) / DC power PWB
T8AH 250V (200V 50-sheet machine)
14 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB
Q. Roller
35 34 32 33
36
37
25
24
26
27
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
21
23 31
30
5 19
17
4 18
6
15
16
8 14
40
7 41
12
13
9

NO. Name Function/Operation
1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
8 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to
the paper.
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
the paper.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport
roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
the paper.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
the paper.
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
the paper.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
the paper.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
the paper.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
the paper.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
the paper.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the
manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section. /
Transports paper to the paper exit roller 2.
the paper.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
39 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
40 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
the paper.

[5] ADJUSTMENTS
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor gap
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller main pole
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values 4A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
4B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
4C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image registration 5A Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration 44-13
sensor) adjustment 5B Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black image 44-2
density sensor (image registration sensor R) adjustment
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 61-4
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment 7A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
7B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) 44-31
ADJ 8 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment (Print engine 10A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning 50-22
section) direction) (Auto adjustment)
10B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual 50-20
adjustment)
10C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual 50-21
adjustment)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion adjustment 11A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
11B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit 12A Document table mode image focus adjustment
position adjustment) 12B DSPF mode image focus adjustment
ADJ 13 RSPF/DSPF parallelism adjustment 13A RSPF height adjustment
13B RSPF diagonal adjustment
13C DSPF levelness adjustment
13D DSPF skew adjustment
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 48-1
(Document table mode) (Document table mode)
14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(Document table mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 15A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 48-1
(RSPF/DSPF mode) (RSPF mode)
15B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(RSPF mode)
15C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
15D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment 16A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
16B Scan image off-center adjustment (RSPF mode) 50-12
16C Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-12
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment 18A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1 (50-2)
18B Document scan position adjustment (RSPF mode) 53-8
18C Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode) 53-8
18D Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) 50-6 (50-7)
18E Copy image position, image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6 (50-7)
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
MX-5001N ADJUSTMENTS 5 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy 63-3 (63-5)
(1) mode)
20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3 (63-5)
(2)
20A Shading adjustment (DSPF mode)
(3)
20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24
20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment) 46-1
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20E Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole 46-2
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density 46-10
level in each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
20G Monochrome copy density/gamma adjustment (Each monochrome copy 46-16
mode) (Normally not required)
20H Condition setting of document density reading operation (exposure) in the 46-19
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally not required)
20I Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the 46-32
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20J Copy density adjustment for low density section (Each copy mode) 46-63
20K Color copy text, line image edge gamma, density adjustment/TextMap 46-27
mode gamma, density adjustment
20L Color document reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome copy mode 46-37
20M Black ingredient amount adjustment in color copy mode (Normally 46-38
unnecessary to adjust)
20N Sharpness adjustment in the color auto copy mode (Normally 46-60
20O Copy high density part density correction setting (Prevents against tone 46-23
gap) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20P Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode) (Normally not 46-25
required)
20Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode (Normally unnecessary to 46-9
adjust)
20R DSPF mode copy density adjustment (Normally not necessary to adjust)
20S Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto 26-53
adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
20T Copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) 46-54
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density adjustment 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24
21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
21C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) (Normally 67-36
21D Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density part tone 67-34
gap countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
21E Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto 26-54
adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
21F Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic 46-74
adjustment)
21G Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) 67-54
ADJ 22 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 23 Document size sensor adjustment 23A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-2
23B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 25 RSPF/DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor 25A RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
adjustment 25B DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, 27A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic 50-28
image magnification ratio auto adjustment adjustment
with SIM50-28 27B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
27C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, 50-28
sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
27D RSPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
27E DSPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio auto adjustment
3. Details of adjustment 4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor
gap
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.60 r 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
70mm 40mm
40mm
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
Note for use of a thickness gauge

Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
The gauge must pass freely.
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
* Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
A
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.60mm in between 40mm - 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
70mm 40mm
40mm
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
main pole
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference
* When the print image density is low. value setting
* When there is a blur on the print image. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. * When developer is replaced.
* The toner is excessively dispersed. NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop- replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
ing unit on a flat surface.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing 6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
provide a correct position.) $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the $7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9($'-B/B<
$7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9(92B0B<
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller $7'(9($'-B0B.
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) $7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
23mm $7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi- $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 r $7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
0.5mm. $7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- $7'(9(92B/B.
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. $7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
Abnormal end Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
A $7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm $7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing

screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust. $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
. & 0 < (;(&87(
2) Close the front cabinet.

3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole

position comes to the specified range.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values
density, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver- 4-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. * U2 trouble has occurred.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
completed or not. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed 1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.

NOTE: 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
result is not reflected. $ % 0,''/(63(('*%B&
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera- & 0,''/(63(('*%B0
' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not,
Control voltage: 8.0V or above.
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not, 10-key EXECUTE
Control voltage: 2.0V or below.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 2.5V r 0.2V EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
6,08/$7,2112
NOTE: 7(67
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
&/26(
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors $

$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
% 0,''/(63(('*%B&

of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. & 0,''/(63(('*%B0
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.

2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure
to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
may not be performed correctly.
3) When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2. 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and

the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage

Adjustment PWB)
Item Mode Actual voltage
range Monitor voltage Check
(Specified value) pin
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 18.5 r 1.1V GB-K -650V
(Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-C
(Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-M
(Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-Y
(Middle speed mode)
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 17.7 r 1.1V GB-K -620V
(Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-C
(Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-M
(Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 150 - 850 GB-Y
(Low speed mode)
Remark: 6) Attach a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
putted. adjusted mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer- The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
tain relationship. If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
mode, and then adjust the other mode. procedure as short as possible.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the If possible, use a old developer unit and OPC drum for this
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are adjustment.
automatically changed. Use care for that. 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt- If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
age, there is no need to check the output value. shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
procedures below. may be defective.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine. MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Development unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2
2) Open the PWB holder.

3) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV
high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.
4-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. '96(77,1*$1'287387

$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.
* U2 trouble has occurred. $ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. & 0,''/(63((''9%B0

' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
after 30 sec.
or

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.
$ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
& 0,''/(63((''9%B0

' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high

Adjustment voltage PWB) Actual
Item Mode
range Monitor voltage Check voltage
(Specified value) pin
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-K -450V
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-C -450V
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-M -450V
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-Y -450V
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-K -450V
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-C -450V
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-M -450V
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 r 1.2V BS-Y -450V
Remark: 5) Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
putted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed 6) Connect the digital multi-meter leads at the check pin and
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto- GND on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer- particular adjustment mode.
tain relationship. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
automatically changed. Follow procedure as outlined above.
adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt- though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
age, there is no need to check the output value. may be defective.
If a voltage check or adjustment must be made, follow the proce- MC/DV high voltage PWB
dures below.
PCU PWB
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
Development unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2) Open the PWB frame.

the scroll key.
1 : Oct. 24 2008

4-C Transfer voltage adjustment
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced. $ 7&/2:63(('&/.
$
* U2 trouble has occurred. % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&

* The PCU PWB has been replaced. ' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. ( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.
$ % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&

' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is out-
putted.
Default value Default

value of
Setting Actual output
Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet actual
range setting range
machine machine output
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transport Color K In low speed 51 - 255 95 2PA - 30PA 8PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference In middle 146 182 15PA
1
value speed
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C In low speed 95 8PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C In middle 146 15PA
speed
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M In low speed 95 8PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M In middle 146 15PA
speed
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y In low speed 95 8PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y In middle 146 15PA
speed
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/ K In low speed 95 8PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K White In middle 146 182 15PA
1
speed
1 : Oct. 24 2008

value of
range setting range
value
1 K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 130 151 2PA - 100PA 40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX transport bias paper Back surface 120 35PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX reference value Black/ Front surface 109 130 30PA
1 White
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 99 109 25PA
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 88 20PA
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 78 15PA
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/ Front surface 78 15PA
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX White Back surface 68 10PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 88 20PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
U TC2 GLOSSY CL Color Gloss paper 88 20PA
V TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
W TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 72 88 12PA
1
X TC2 OHP BW Black/ 72 78 12PA
White
Y TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 78 15PA
Z TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 63 8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transport In middle speed print 0 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning bias Cleaning 85 500V
reference value
AE VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 0 - 255 100 0 - (1.94) - 4.01KV 2.47KV
AF VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 100 2.47KV
AG VPTC LOW SPEED BK (AC constant Black/ Low speed 100 2.47KV
AH VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting) White Middle speed 100 2.47KV
AI FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 1 - 255 192 0.5KHz - 1.5KHz 0.5KHz
AJ FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 192 0.5KHz
AK FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency Black/ Low speed 192 0.5KHz
AL FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) White Middle speed 136 0.7KHz
AM DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 0 - 255 93 0 - (0.68) - 2.14KV 1.0KV
AN DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 149 1.4KV
AO DCPTC LOW SPEED BK (DC constant Black/ Low speed 149 1.4KV
AP DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting White Middle speed 149 1.4KV
value)
AQ PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 1 Always ON
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment (TC environment table 6 steps)
setting
AR HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 0% - 100% 50%
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater (10 steps)
constant
operation (Duty
ratio setting)
* Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) cali-

ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image bration SIM44-2
registration sensor) adjustment NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density
and image registration on front frame side, the black image
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor sec- density sensor detects black image density and image reg-
tion. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each istration on rear frame side. Therefore, two functions are
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed. assigned to each sensor array
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the fol-
* When the image density sensor (image registration sensor) is lowing items.
replaced. * Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
* U2 trouble has occurred. istration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. registration sensor R) are clean.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor is clean.
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor * Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
(image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment scratches.
methods.
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibra-
tion SIM44-13
6) Install the color image density sensor (image registration sen-
5-A Color image density sensor (image sor F) calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing
registration sensor F) calibration section.
1) Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste Engage the pawls (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide
toner box. it to the rear frame side.
2) Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the PTC terminal.
A
A
3) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
UNLOCK
CAUTION: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer (;(&87(
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after
completion of the work. This procedure initializes the
EXECUTE
transfer roller to return it to the home position.
4) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5) Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer

6,08/$7,2112
belt unit. 7(67
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
&/26(
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
(;(&87(
8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).

9) Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.
11) Press [EXECUTE] key. De-
Mode Display/Item Content Range
Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is fault
automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the Adjustment E PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to value for GRND level when
the normal display. process completion of Item B
control adjustment
Adjustment operation F PCS_K Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
Display/Item Content Default mode BELT belt base detection
value range
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 108 MAX level
CARB OUT LED current adjustment G PCS_K Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
target value BELT MIN belt base detection
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 21 level
LED ADJ LED current adjustment H PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
target value (PCS CL CARB BELT DIF level difference
OUT) registered LED current (Item E - Item F)
level Adjustment I REG_F Image registration 1 - 255 56
value for LED ADJ sensor light emitting
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. image quantity adjustment
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any registration value F
operation J REG_R Image registration 1 - 255 56
abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again.
mode LED ADJ sensor light emitting
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised. quantity adjustment
Color image density sensor value R
PCU PWB K REG_F Image registration 0 - 255 0
DARK sensor dark voltage
Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
F
scratch, discoloration)
L REG_R Image registration 0 - 255 0
Image density sensor calibration plate DARK sensor dark voltage
R
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
M REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
ture, low humidity and dark place.
GRND level when
completion of Item I
5-B Color image density sensor (image adjustment
registration sensor F), black image density N REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 256 0
GRND level when
sensor (image registration sensor R)
completion of Item J
adjustment adjustment
NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of O REG_F Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
BELT belt base detection
registration adjustment operation and process control oper-
MAX level (F side)
ation as well as SIM44-2.
P REG_F Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
1) Enter SIM44-2 mode. BELT belt base detection
MIN level (F side)

Q REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
BELT level difference
3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B)*51' DIF (Item O - Item P)
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51' R REG_R Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B)%(/70$;
BELT belt base detection
3&6B.'$5. 5(*B)%(/70,1
MAX level (R side)
3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70$; S REG_R Minimum value of 0 - 255 0

3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/70,1 BELT belt base detection
3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/7',) MIN level (R side)
5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+.
T REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
5(*B5/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+&
BELT level difference
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+0
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+<

DIF (Item R - Item S)
(;(&87( U REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (K)
(K)
V REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), PATCH F for check (C)
the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) (C)
are automatically adjusted. W REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is PATCH F for check (M)
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. (M)
X REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
De- PATCH F for check (Y)
Mode Display/Item Content Range
fault (Y)
Adjustment A PCS_CL Color image sensor 1 - 255 21 Y REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 55 0
value for LED ADJ light emitting quantity PATCH R for check (K)
process adjustment value (K)
control B PCS_K Black image sensor 1 - 255 21 Z REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
operation LED ADJ light emitting quantity PATCH R for check (C)
mode adjustment value (C)
C PCS_CL Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0 AA REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
DARK PATCH R for check (M)
D PCS_K Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0 (M)
DARK
De- * When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
Mode Display/Item Content Range adjustment.
fault
Adjustment AB REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 * When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
value for PATCH R for check (Y)
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
image (Y)
registration NOTE: This adjustment can be executed efficiently by executing
operation the following procedures in advance.
mode
The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis- adjusted for that.
played. 1) Press [REGIST] button in SIM50-22 mode to execute the auto-
matic image registration adjustment.
Mode Error display Error content
2) The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display
Adjustment BK_SEN_ADJ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error
menu.
value for _ERR density (The target value is not
process sensor obtained after retried 3) Put down the displayed skew level value.
control adjustment three times.) (Meaning of the skew level value)
operation abnormality
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
mode CL_SEN_ADJ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ
skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the
_ERR sensor error (The target value
value.
adjustment is not obtained after
abnormality retried three times.) * When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number
_ERR surface (The surface detection of the value.
reading level is maximum or At that time, the fractional part after the decimal point is rounded.
abnormality the minimum value
difference is outside a NOTE: The K (black) image skew level cannot be checked with
reference range. ) this adjustment.
Adjustment REG_SEN_F Registration REG_F LED ADJ error To check and adjust the K (black) image skew, follow the
value for _ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not procedures below and execute the adjustment.
image adjustment obtained after retried
registration abnormality three times.) 1) Enter SIM61-4 mode.
operation REG_SEN_R Registration REG_R LED ADJ error
mode

_ADJ_ERR sensor R (The target value is not 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment obtained after retried /68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
abnormality three times.) $ % 3$3(5&6
REG_BELT_F F side REG_F GRND error
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
surface level is maximum or
reading the minimum value
abnormality difference is outside a
reference range. )
REG_BELT_R R side REG_R GRND error
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
surface level is maximum or (;(&87( 2.
reading the minimum value
abnormality difference is outside a key
EXECUTE
reference range. )
EXECUTE
or end of print
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any

abnormality. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) /68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17

$ 08/7,&2817
Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) $ % 3$3(5&6

PCU PWB
Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
Transfer belt cleaner
Color image sensor calibration plate
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by

ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment changing the value of set item B.
(LSU unit) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed out.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
* When the color shift occurs.
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
printed in black.
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
* When a color image registration mistake occurs. for any skew (right angle).
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. Method 1:
(Required depending on the cases.) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth). for judgment of good or no good
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Method 2: 5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the (For U.S.A. 50-sheet machine only)
rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x Remove the power switch cover.
1
8.5 paper for judgment of good or no good.
(NOTE) In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be
used may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of
paper to be used in advance.
(Method 1) 1
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
4
2
Diagonal line D
For U.S.A. 50-sheet machine only
Diagonal line C
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C

and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in 3 3
the following range. C D = r0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust. 6) Loosen the LSU unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift the skew
(Method 2) adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the LSU (writ-
ing) unit skew.
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern. (When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
Comparison line When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
A3 or 11 x 17 paper
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
0.5mm or less 4 When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
Direction A
Direction B
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)

If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
Y X
(
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper

and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8) Execute procedures 3) - 4).
(Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw. ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust- * When the photoconductor drum is replaced.
ment. * When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
4
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
*B
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) is
replaced.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
*A * When the color image sensor (image registration sensor R) is
replaced.
Direction A Direction B
7-A OPC drum phase adjustment
*B (Auto adjustment)
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.

( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
*A: Rough adjustment print pattern 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*

*B: Fine adjustment print pattern 0/1*
</1*
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front

frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within r1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare EXECUTE
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not met, do the following: 6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
adjust.
Y M C
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 - 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
(;(&87(
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is

skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller number) from 2) Press [ALL] key.
the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclock- (The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
wise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B (to image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
the larger number), turn the adjustment screw clockwise. both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
12) Print the check pattern. The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
13) Check the color image skew pattern. adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registra-
tion adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
Repeat procedures 11) - 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained. adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing adjustment simultaneously.
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment are executed automatically.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and 2) Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjust- press [OK] key.
ment result is displayed. 3) Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11" x 17") in it with
PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key.
MAIN, SUB Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0 : 105.0 (+2) The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.
PHASE OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.

Example: This time 90q, previous time 45q : 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
7-B OPC drum phase adjustment

(Manual adjustment)
NOTE: The OPC drum phase adjustment by manual is not recom-
mended. Cause judgement of adjustment pattern differ in
individuals. Auto adjustment mode with SIM50-22 is rec-
ommended.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % 3+$6(&
& 3+$6(0

' 3+$6(<
Each identification number ("1" - "8") is printed on each printed
( 3$3(5&6
page of 8 adjustment patterns.
5) Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print
pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for
each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number
(;(&87( 2. as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
key.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % 3+$6(&
& 3+$6(0
' 3+$6(<

( 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
When the deflection exceeds the range

between 2 lines in the printed result. 94mm 94mm 94mm 94mm
10-key
OK
NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle
6,08/$7,2112
(94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(GHJ
$ % 3+$6(& OPC drum drive section
& 3+$6(0
' 3+$6(< Transfer belt drive section

( 3$3(5&6
Paper feed drive section

Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
(;(&87( 2.
ADJ 8 Print engine image
EXECUTE EXECUTE magnification ratio adjustment
or end of print
(BK) (Main scanning direction)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26( (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(GHJ
$ % 3+$6(&
& 3+$6(0

' 3+$6(< This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
( 3$3(5&6
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (Print engine section)
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$
$ %.0$* This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.

' 0$,1&6 * When a paper tray is replaced.
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* 0$,1/&&
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
scanning direction) is performed.
- 68%&6 * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
(;(&87( 2. * When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
EXECUTE * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
EXECUTE * When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
End of print
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
(Note)

& 0$,1&6
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
item.
) 0$,1&6 * Check that the print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
* 0$,1/&&
(BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly adjusted.
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7 1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.
- 68%&6
. 68%&6

/ 68%/&& 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87( 2. 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. & 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
( 0$,1&6
key. ) 0$,1&6
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. * 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
The check pattern is printed out. , 68%0)7
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240 - 68%&6
. 68%&6
r0.5mm. / 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
240 0.5mm
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. / 68%/&&
6) Change the set value of set item A. (;(&87( 2.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed

by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre- 3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted. cedure 2).
Setting De-
Display/Item Content The adjustment pattern is printed.
range fault
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
magnification ratio BK rect position.
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
value (Manual paper feed) rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 all the following conditions are satisfied.
value
(Tray 1) RV
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 2.0mm 2.0mm
value
(Tray 2)
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 3)
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 4)
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(LCC)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (ADU)
NOTE: Before execution of
this adjustment,
check to insure that
the adjustment
items A - G have FV
been properly 2.0mm 2.0mm
adjusted. If not, this
RV: REAR VOID AREA
adjustment cannot
be made properly. FV: FRONT VOID AREA
I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50 RV + FV d 4.0mm
motor ON paper feed RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
J SUB-CS12 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50 FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
adjustment tray If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B - H) to be
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
adjusted with the scroll key.
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 7) Change the adjustment value.
O PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1-6 1 2 Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
selection feed (CS1) [EXECUTE] key.
CS1 Tray 1 2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
CS2 Tray 2 3 printed.
CS3 Tray 3 4
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
CS4 Tray 4 5
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
LCC LCC 6
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
P DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1
print (NO) When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
NO No 1
selection changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, 10-A Image registration adjustment (Main
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc- scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4). (Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
cuted simultaneously and automatically.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*

0/1*
</1*
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
E X ECUTE Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment

(Print engine section)
(;(&87(
* When the color shift occurs. Abnormal end
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.

* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
direction occurs. 35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning (55257211(5(037<
direction occurs
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt,
etc.)
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
(;(&87(
2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust-
ment auto adjustment mode.
Note before adjustment
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
must have been completed.)
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust-
* [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scan- ment result is displayed.
ning direction) (print engine section) It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
Display/ Dis- De-
Content NOTE registration adjustment mode below.
Item play fault
MAIN C Registration 1.0 - 100 * Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
F adjustment value 199.0 adjustment) (SIM50-20)
(Main scanning * Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
direction) (Position adjustment) (SIM50-21)
of writing by cyan
laser is F side)
M Registration 1.0 - 100
10-B Image registration adjustment (Main
adjustment value 199.0 scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
(Main scanning
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
direction) (Position
of writing by control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
magenta laser is F executed automatically and updates the result in each
side) case.
Y Registration 1.0 - 100 In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must be set to
adjustment value 199.0 item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits).
(Main scanning
of writing by yellow
laser is F side)
MAIN C Registration 1.0 - 100 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
R adjustment value 199.0 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21

$ &<$1)5217
(Main scanning $ % &<$15($5
direction) (Position & 0$*(17$)5217
of writing by cyan ' 0$*(17$5($5
laser is R side) ( <(//2:)5217

) <(//2:5($5
M Registration 1.0 - 100
* 08/7,&2817
adjustment value 199.0
+ 3$3(5&6
(Main scanning , '83/(;12
of writing by
magenta laser is R
side) (;(&87( 2.
Y Registration 1.0 - 100

adjustment value 199.0 EXECUTE
10-key
(Main scanning
EXECUTE End of print
of writing by yellow
laser is R side)
SUB C Registration 1.0 - 100

adjustment value 199.0 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(Sub scanning 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
direction) (Cyan $ &<$1)5217

$ % &<$15($5
drum to black drum)
& 0$*(17$)5217
M Registration 1.0 - 100 ' 0$*(17$5($5
adjustment value 199.0 ( <(//2:)5217
(Sub scanning ) <(//2:5($5
direction) (Magenta * 08/7,&2817
drum to cyan drum) + 3$3(5&6
, '83/(;12
Y Registration 1.0 - 100
adjustment value 199.0
(Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow (;(&87( 2.
drum to magenta
drum) 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by
SKEW C Calculated result of -99.9 - If the value is plus, changing the value of set item H.
print skew amount 99.9 - R is displayed to 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Cyan) left side of The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
M Calculated result of -99.9 - numerical value. If
ning direction is printed.
print skew amount 99.9 - the value is minus,
(magenta) L is displayed to left
Y Calculated result of -99.9 - side of numerical
print skew amount 99.9 value. When the
(yellow) value is in the -4 to
+4 range, "OK" is
displayed to right
-
side of numerical
value. If not, "NG"
is displayed to right
side of numerical
value.
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.

( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
A A A
C C C
C C C
A A A
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 r1)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Adjustment
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Display/Item Content Default
value range
frame sides. C MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, (FRONT) adjustment value
and measure the shift amount. (Main scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
D MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
adjusted independently. (REAR) adjustment value
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front (Main scanning direction)
frame side and the rear frame side individually. (Magenta) (R side)
E YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
Rough adjustment print Check that the rough adjustment print pattern (FRONT) adjustment value
pattern check is at the center for the rough adjustment (Main scanning direction)
reference pattern. (Yellow) (F side)
Fine adjustment print Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is F YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
pattern check at the center for the fine adjustment reference (REAR) adjustment value
pattern. (Main scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
r1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ment is not required.) For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode adjustment value, refer to the following.
adjustment item A - F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust. (Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of
the adjustment value)
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default a) Measurement of the shift amount
value range
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100 * Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
(FRONT) adjustment value Use the visually highest color density section as the
(Main scanning direction) center, and measure the shift amount.
(Cyan) (F side)
(Example)
B CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(REAR) adjustment value The measurement value of the figure is "14.
(Main scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from -18 22
that.
-16 24
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as -14 26
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks -40 -12 28
corresponds to 40.
(Example) -10 30
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus -8 32
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-6 34
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment -4 36
shift amount. -2 38
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
0 0
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount.
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the -38 2
minus polarity. -36 4
(Example)
-34 6
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 54.
Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14) -32 8
120 -120 -30 10
-28 12
-18 22
-26 14
-16 24
-24 16
-14 26
40 -12
-22 18
28
-10 30 The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
-8 32 is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
- F.
-6 34
b) Adjustment value calculation
-4 36 Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
-2 38 from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
0 0
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
-38 2 Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
-36 4 amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
-34 6
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
-32 8 amount (correction value)
120 -120 -30 10
-28 12
-26 14
-24 16
-22 18
Yellow -18 22 -18 22
E -16 24 F -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
Magenta -18 22 -18 22
C -16 24 D -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
Cyan -18 22 -18 22
A -16 24 B -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
(Example) 1) Enter SIM50-21 mode.
Previous value before

New adjustment value
adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
A: 100 A: 86 (=100-14) $ &<$1
B: 112 B: 88 (=112-24) $ % 0$*(17$
C: 95 C: 97 (=95+2) & <(//2:

' 08/7,&2817
D: 98 D: 120 (=98+22)
( 3$3(5&6
E: 102 E: 116 (=102+14) ) '83/(;12
F: 96 F: 140 (=96+44)
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the

other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
(;(&87( 2.
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 10-key EXECUTE
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process EXECUTE or end of print
control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhib- 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21

$ &<$1
its) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1. $ % 0$*(17$
& <(//2:

' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17")
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.
C B
A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)
tern positions of each color.
A
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount. -40 -120
Rough adjustment print pattern Check that the rough adjustment
check print pattern is at the center for the
rough adjustment reference
B
120
pattern.
Fine adjustment print pattern check Check that the fine adjustment -18 22
print pattern is at the center for the
fine adjustment reference pattern. -16 24
-14 26
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
r1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- -12 28
ment is not required.)
-10 30
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
-8 32
adjustment item A - C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust. -6 34
-4 36
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default
value range -2 38
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
adjustment value C 0 0
(Sub scanning direction) -38 2
(Cyan)
B MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100 -36 4
adjustment value -34 6
(Sub scanning direction)
(Magenta) -32 8
C YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100 -30 10
adjustment value
(Sub scanning direction) -28 12
(Yellow)
-26 14
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained. -24 16
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
-22 18
adjustment value, refer to the following.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)
the adjustment value)
A
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern 40
-120
Use the visually highest color density section as the
center, and measure the shift amount.
(Example)
B
120
The measurement value of the figure is "14.
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern -18 22
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc- -16 24
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
-14 26
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark -12 28
as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as -10 30
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
-8 32
corresponds to 40.
(Example) -6 34
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus -4 36
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-2 38
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern C 0 0
C: Adjustment range -38 2
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref- -36 4
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
-34 6
- C.
-32 8
-30 10
-28 12
-26 14
-24 16
-22 18
b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
amount (correction value)
A B C
-120 -120 -120
120 120 120

-18 22 -18 22 -18 22
-16 24 -16 24 -16 24
-14 26 -14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 3 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8 -32 8
-30 10 -30 10 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18 -22 18
Previous value before

New adjustment value
adjustment
A: 100 A: 46 (=100-54)
B: 112 B: 126 (=112+14)
C: 95 C: 125 (=95+30)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion

adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to [C]-3.)
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
distortion adjustment
is not in contact. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear L
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L L
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference 11-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
position as shown below.) With the document cover open, distortion adjustment
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction. 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
If La = Lb, there is no distortion. ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
La Lb If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles,
there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are
needed.
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left
Lc Ld Lc Ld
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner (The distortions are balanced.)
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw. If not, perform the following procedures.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side. ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)
12-A Document table mode image focus
adjustment
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the

right and the left heights of the scanner rail. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the $ &&'0$,1
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. $ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front ' 63)68%
frame side, change the overall height. ( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%

7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range. 2.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted

with the above procedures, perform ADJ 11D Scan image dis- 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit). Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole 3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
image distortion adjustment.

Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
A A A
A
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 * Never loosen the screws marked with X.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
1.0mm
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
Copy image direction) to change the installing position.
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110 When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
shorter than CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
the original) than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
following procedures.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
7) Remove the document table glass.
in procedure 9).
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
B
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced. NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
12-B DSPF mode image focus adjustment direction) to change the installing position.
This adjustment is required in the following cases: When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted. At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
in procedure 4).
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 4) 6) until the condition is satisfied.
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below. NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with .

Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.
13-A RSPF height adjustment
ADJ 13 RSPF/DSPF parallelism 1) Make an RSPF height adjustment sheet
adjustment Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart> <Work procedure>

a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass
holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
A
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much. a
Yes
b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and

adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit.
Adjust hinge D
until there is a If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D
resistance in counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF
section A.
(Counter-
unit.
clockwise)
Turn the hinge

D to lift the
RSPF so that
there is a
resistance in D
the section A.
(Clockwise)
c) Adjust the section F.
Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.3mm - 5.0mm.
If not, turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the
section F so that
the clearance is edge (a) of the right lower cover of the base.
4.3mm - 5.0mm.
No
4.3 - 5.0mm
Is there a
resistance in the
section B?
Yes F
Increase the a
clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in 20mm
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.0mm.
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the RSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the RSPF unit.
d) Check section B.
Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section B.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is
in contact, it is O.K.)
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height
adjustment sheet.
Is b
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
f) Check section C.
Adjust hinge
E until the
separation in
section C is
Check section C. deleted.
(Counter-
clockwise)
* The bosses in section A

Is there No and B are excessively b
a separating pressed. (The right
section. C
side is separating.)
Yes
End of the
adjustment
C
b
5) Close the RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the RSPF
13-B RSPF diagonal adjustment diagonal adjustment screw section.
1) Set a test chart (A3) on the RSPF document tray, and make a Turn the hex wrench of the RSPF skew adjustment screw to
copy. adjust the skew.
2) Measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. If (a) - (b) =
r1mm or more, perform the diagonal adjustment.
a 1
TEST CHART 2
A3 size
* In the case of (A), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw

b counterclockwise.
In the case of (B), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw
clockwise.
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw section.
A B
4) Raise the RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the
hinge.
6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
2
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a)-
(b)=r1mm or less) is satisfied.
2
1 7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
13-C DSPF levelness adjustment tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: the main unit.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
13-D DSPF skew adjustment

(Front surface mode)
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
1mm back sides of the paper.
A
A Paper pass direction
0mm
B
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3.
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
L adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
R
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise. C D
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
c d
Repeat steps 2 to 3 until an acceptable result is obtained.
[Check Method 2] [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction left]
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
1.0mm. adjusting screw.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
0 - 1.0mm If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
(Skew adjustment (back surface mode))
A This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
back sides of the paper.
of "3. Skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
A Paper pass direction
1
B
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw. Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
side of the DSPF rear frame.
C D
c d
[Check Method 2] [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction left]
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
1.0mm. counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
0 - 1.0mm If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn-
A ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
NOTE: Since turning the adjustment screw too much may cause
the optical axis trouble, turn in less than one turn clockwise
or counterclockwise.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the

front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "2. Skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the adjustment (Document table
procedures of step 3) or later. mode)
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to

adjust.
A B
* When the adjustment screw is turned 180 degrees, a change

of about 0.5mm is made.
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1 Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
$ % &&'68% cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%

(Example 1)
Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
2.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification (Example 2)
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
procedure.
the original)
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi- range (100 r 1.0%).
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
is within the specified range (100 r1.0%). ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
mode)
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
below.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100 r1.0%).
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (RSPF/DSPF mode)
15-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
15-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (DSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
* When the RSPF/DSPF is disassembled.
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
(DSPF)
a. Adjustment procedures
Setting Default
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- Item Display Content
range value
ment tray of the RSPF/DSPF.
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and adjustment (CCD)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Paper pass direction C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
A4 size surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
(Both the front surface E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
and the back surface) surface magnification ratio
10mm 10mm adjustment (Main scan)
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. (RSPF)

3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original Setting Default
Item Display Content
images. range value
magnification ratio
original B CCD (SUB)
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
copy C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front
1 - 99 50
10 50 100 150 200 250

D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10 50 100 150 200 250 E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
formula: surface magnification ratio
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%) * Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range * Items B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the
(100 r 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro- * It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
cedures. 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
5) Enter the SIM48-1 mode. the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (Front surface)
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
$ % &&'68% (Back surface)
& 63)0$,1
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1 When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
fication ratio is changed by 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
2.
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this

state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
5) Enter the SIM48-1 or 50-6 mode.
15-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode) (SIM48-1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
15-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17

$ &&'0$,1
(Sub scanning direction) (DSPF mode) $

% &&'68%
& 63)0$,1
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
* When the RSPF/DSPF is disassembled. 2.
a. Adjustment procedures (SIM50-6)

1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
ment tray of the RSPF/DSPF. /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$ 6,'(
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. $
% 6,'(

Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. ( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
10mm + 75$,/B('*(6,'(
, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63)
Paper pass direction . 6&$1B63(('B63)
A4 size 2.
SIM48-1
(DSPF)
Setting Default
range value
10mm magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original magnification ratio
images. adjustment (CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10
D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50

50

E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
100
10

original
150
50
(RSPF)
200
100
Setting Default
range value
copy
150

magnification ratio
200
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following magnification ratio
formula: adjustment (CCD)
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
(%) surface magnification ratio
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range surface magnification ratio
(100 r 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. adjustment (Sub scan)
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro- E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
cedures. surface magnification ratio
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the

magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
SIM50-6 Setting Default
(DSPF) Item Display Content
range value
Setting Default F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0 - 99 20
Item Display Content loss (SIDE2) lead edge image
range value
amount loss amount
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
setting setting
document scan
G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20
position
adjustment (SIDE2) side image loss
(CCD) amount setting
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 0 - 99 30
document scan (SIDE2) rear edge image
position loss amount
adjustment setting
(CCD) I OFSET_SPF1 RSPF front 1 - 99 50
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20 surface
loss (SIDE1) lead edge image document off-
amount loss amount center
setting setting adjustment
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20 J OFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
(SIDE1) side image loss surface
amount setting document off-
center
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 30
adjustment
(SIDE1) rear edge image
loss amount K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
setting front surface
magnification
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0 - 99 30
ratio adjustment
loss (SIDE2) lead edge image
(Sub scan)
amount loss amount
setting setting L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
SIDE2 back surface
G FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20
magnification
(SIDE2) side image loss
ratio adjustment
amount setting
(Sub scan)
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) rear edge image * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
loss amount timing is delayed.
setting
* * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
surface image loss is increased.
document off- * * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
center * The SPF rear edge image loss is provided for countermea-
adjustment
sures against shades.
J OFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface 6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
document off- (SIM48-1)
center
adjustment SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DRSPF 1 - 99 50 surface)
document front SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back
surface surface)
magnification (SIM50-6)
ratio adjustment
(Sub scan) SCAN SPEED SPF1 Sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio (Front surface)
(RSPF) SCAN SPEED SPF2 Sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio (Back surface)
Setting Default
range value 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 key, and press [OK] key.
document scan When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
position
tion ratio is increased.
adjustment
(CCD) When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 fication ratio is changed by 0.01%.
document scan Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
position obtained.
adjustment
(CCD) NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20 machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
loss (SIDE1) lead edge image state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
amount loss amount system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
setting setting tion mode.
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
amount setting
loss amount
setting
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center

7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: $ 2&
$ % 63)6,'(
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. & 63)6,'(
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the RSPF unit is installed.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. 2.
16-A Scan image off-center adjustment 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
(Document table mode) 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the The entered value is set.
adjustment mode (document table or RSPF). When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is
A satisfied.
16-B Scan image off-center adjustment

(RSPF mode)
A=B
16-C Scan image off-center adjustment
(DSPF mode)
B This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
2) Check the copy image center position.
If A' - B' = r1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
* When the PF section is disassembled.
* When the RSPF/DSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the document
table mode off-center adjustment (ADJ 16A) must have
A' been properly adjusted.
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
A' - B' = 1.0mm Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
(100%) direction.
Paper transport direction

B'
Front surface Back surface
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
Draw a line at the center of the

front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF/DSPF. SIM50-6
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the (DSPF)
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the Setting Default
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. Item Display Content
range value
document scan
original copy position
adjustment
a (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment
b (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20
amount loss amount
setting setting
If the difference is within the range of 0 r 2.7mmm there is no D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
need to perform the adjustment. (SIDE1) side image loss
amount setting
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
4) Enter the SIM50-12 and 50-6 mode. (SIDE1) rear edge image
loss amount
(SIM50-12) setting

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
$ 2& amount loss amount
$ % 63)6,'( setting setting
& 63)6,'( G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20
amount setting
loss amount
setting
I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
2.
surface
document off-
center
(SIM50-6) adjustment
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( surface
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
document off-
$ 6,'(
$ center
% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
adjustment
' )5217B5($56,'( K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
( 75$,/B('*(6,'( front surface
) /($'B('*(6,'( magnification
* )5217B5($56,'(
ratio adjustment
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
(Sub scan)
, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63) (RSPF)
Setting Default
2. Item Display Content
range value
SIM50-12 document scan
Setting Default position
Item Display Content adjustment
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 (CCD)
center adjustment B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 document scan
center adjustment position
adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
(CCD)
center adjustment
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss (SIDE1) lead edge image
position is shifted to the rear frame side. amount loss amount
setting setting
1step = 0.1mm D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
amount setting
loss amount
setting
Setting Default
range value ADJ 17 Print area (Void area)
F Image
loss
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Back surface
lead edge image
0 - 99 20
adjustment (Print engine
amount loss amount section)
setting setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
(SIDE2) side image loss * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
amount setting * When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
loss amount * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
setting * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
I OFSET_SPF1 RSPF front 1 - 99 50
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
surface
document off- * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
center * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
adjustment
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
J OFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
document off- * U2 trouble has occurred.
center * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8
magnification Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
ratio adjustment scanning direction) (Print engine section) in advance.
(Sub scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
back surface
magnification
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
ratio adjustment 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
(Sub scan) $
$ %.0$*
% 0$,10)7
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
timing is delayed.
( 0$,1&6
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the ) 0$,1&6
image loss is increased. * 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change , 68%0)7
* The SPF rear edge image loss is provided for countermea- - 68%&6
. 68%&6
sures against shades. / 68%/&&
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. (;(&87( 2.
(SIM50-12)
EXECUTE
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode EXECUTE
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode End of print
(SIM50-6)

OFSET SPF1 Front surface mode 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
OFSET SPF2 Back surface mode 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. % 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
' 0$,1&6
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is ( 0$,1&6
shifted to the rear.) ) 0$,1&6

* 0$,1/&&
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is + 0$,1$'8
obtained. , 68%0)7

- 68%&6
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the . 68%&6
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this / 68%/&&
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the (;(&87( 2.

tion mode. 2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
Setting De-
are in the range of the standard values. Display/Item Content
range fault
Content Standard adjustment value A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
edge reference position
X Lead edge void area 3.0 r 1.0mm
adjust- (OC)
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 r 2.0mm value motor ON Tray
C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 - 99 50
Z1 D RRCB-LCC adjust- LCC 1 - 99 50
2.0 2.0mm E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 - 99 50
paper
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
X value adjustment
3.0 1.0mm Y I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
2.0 - 5.0mm adjust- adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjus- center adjustment
tment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Z2 cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
2.0 2.0mm ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. scanning correction value
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
5) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1. correction
P DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value

Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
value
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$ R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
$ % 55&%&6 value
& 55&%&6
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
) 55&%$'8
* /($' When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
+ 6,'( increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
, '(1$
area is decreased.
- '(1%
. )52175($5 When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
2.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
10-key
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
OK
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item

N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$ of all paper feed tray.
$ % 55&%&6
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
( 55&%0)7 each paper tray.
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
+ 6,'( that the void area is within the specified range.
, '(1$
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
- '(1%
. )52175($5
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
2.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
ADJ 18 Copy image position,
Setting De-
image loss adjustment Display/Item Content
range fault
A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
18-A Copy image position, image loss edge reference position
adjust- (OC)
adjustment (Document table mode) B ment RRCB-CS12 Standard 1 - 99 50
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: value Tray
Resist
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. C RRCB-CS34 Desk 1 - 99 50
motor ON
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. timing
RRCB-MFT Manual 1 - 99 50
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. adjust-
E paper
ment
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. feed
* U2 trouble has occurred. F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. value adjustment
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjust- adjustment
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine adjustment
section) has been completed normally. K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure REAR area adjustment
below. L Off-center OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99
adjust- center adjustment 50
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
ment
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
M Magnifica SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
plate.
tion ratio SPEED_OC magnification ratio
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead correction adjustment (CCD)
edge can be seen. Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
N
scanning correction value
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 50
O print area 1 - 99
value
correction
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 50

P value 1 - 99
value
DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 50
Q 1 - 99
value
Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 50
R 1 - 99
scanning value
S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
print area DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
T correction
value
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.

2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1. Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%

mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
$ 55&$
$ % 55&%&6
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
& 55&%&6 copy scale.
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7 If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.

) 55&%$'8
* /($' (Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
+ 6,'(
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
, '(1$
- '(1% Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
. )52175($5
obtained.
2.
Scale image 3.0mm position

Paper lead
edge
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$
100%
$ % 55&%&6
5mm 10mm
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
+ 6,'(
200%
, '(1$ 5mm 10mm
- '(1%
. )52175($5
2.
5) Image loss adjustment a. Adjustment procedures
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the 1) Make a copy in the RSPF/DSPF (front surface) mode, and
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in check for any shade on the lead edge section of the copy
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, image.
change these adjustment items.
Paper lead edge
Papar lead edge

Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400% Image area
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm
Shadow image of RSPF
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
Adjust De- Standard If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
Display section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
Content ment fault adjustment
/Item
range value 2) Enter the SIM53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0
adjustment image loss r 1.0mm
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0 $872 0$18$/
loss adjustment r 1.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
18-B Document scan position adjustment

(RSPF mode)
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

18-C Document scan position adjustment
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
(DSPF mode) position to the RSPF/DSPF scanning position is increased.
Document scan start position adjustment When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is
(Scanner reading position adjustment when scanning the front sur- changed by 0.1mm.
face in the RSPF/DSPF mode) (RSPF/DSPF mode) Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: obtained.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. ADJ18D Copy image position and image loss adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. (DSPF mode) and ADJ18E Copy image position and
image loss adjustment (DSPF mode).
18-D Copy image position, image loss
* When the RSPF/DSPF section is disassembled.
adjustment (RSPF mode)
This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when
18-E Copy image position, image loss
scanning the front surface in the RSPF/DSPF mode.
adjustment (DSPF mode)
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
shifted to the specified position and a shade of the document table This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
RSPF/DSPF (front surface) mode. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the RSPF/DSPF section is disassembled.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the following items must have SIM50-6
been properly adjusted. (DSPF)
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment Setting Default

(RSPF/DSPF mode) range value
ADJ 16B RSPF mode off-center adjustment A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
ADJ 16C DSPF mode off-center adjustment document scan
position
ADJ 15A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(CCD)
ADJ 15C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (DSPF mode)
document scan
ADJ 15B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
position
(Sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
adjustment
ADJ 15D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
(Sub scanning direction) (DSPF mode)
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment loss (SIDE1) lead edge
(Print engine section) amount image loss
ADJ 18B Document scan position adjustment (RSPF mode) setting amount setting
ADJ 18C Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode) D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
b. Adjustment procedures (SIDE1) side image loss
amount setting
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 30
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- (SIDE1) rear edge
dures. image loss
amount setting
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
loss (SIDE2) lead edge
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, amount image loss
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification setting amount setting
marks of the front surface and the back surface. G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20
R Front surface amount setting
FACE
(SIDE2) rear edge
image loss
L T
amount setting
surface
document off-
Put the position center
marks. adjustment
F
surface
document off-
Draw arrows.
center
adjustment
R Back surface K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF 1 - 99 50
BACK
document front
surface
magnification
L T
ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
(RSPF)
Put the position
marks. Setting Default
range value
F A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
Draw arrows. position
adjustment
(CCD)
2) Enter the SIM50-6 mode.
document scan

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( position
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63) adjustment
$
$ 6,'(
(CCD)
% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'( amount image loss
) /($'B('*(6,'( setting amount setting
* )5217B5($56,'(
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63)
amount setting
. 6&$1B63(('B63) E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) rear edge
2. image loss
amount setting
Setting Default
Item Display Content Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
range value
the image lead edge.
amount image loss
setting amount setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 - 99 20
amount setting
(SIDE2) rear edge
image loss Copy image
amount setting
surface
document off-
center
adjustment Image loss
3.0 1.0mm
surface
document off- If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
center procedure.
adjustment 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF 1 - 99 50 press [OK] key.
document front
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
surface
magnification
sumed image lead edge.
ratio (Sub scan) SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF 1 - 99 50 SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
document back
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
surface
magnification
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
ratio (Sub scan) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
obtained.
timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
image loss is increased. 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF/DSPF mode. Check
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
* The SPF rear edge image loss is provided for countermea- front surface and the back surface.
sures against shades.
Paper rear edge
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
tion mode.
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values. Copy image
(Standard set value)
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1):
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2):
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
increased.)
procedure.
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF/DSPF mode. Check with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0r1.0mm
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment
on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
value (Front surface)
edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): Rear edge image loss adjustment
value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)

1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
rear frame side are 2.0r2.0mm on the front surface and the $
$ '(1&
% '(1%
back surface. & )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
Paper F Image loss ( '(1%&6
side edge 2.0 2.0mm ) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
Copy image
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following $ % '(1%
procedure. & )52175($5
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1)/ ' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key. ) '(1%&6
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) Front/Rear image loss adjustment * '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
value (Front surface) , '(1%/&&
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2) Front/Rear image loss adjustment - '(1%$'8
value (Back surface) . 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image (;(&87( 2.
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step) 2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
obtained. in it.
Setting
range
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position A DEN-C Printer lead edge 1 - 99 30
adjustment (Printer mode) image position
adjustment
(Print engine section) B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
* When the regist roller section is disassembled. area adjustment
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50
* U2 trouble has occurred. void area adjustment
correction value
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. area adjustment
correction value
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
area adjustment
(3mm) in the printer mode. correction value
1) Enter the simulation 50-5 mode. G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Setting (The following items affect the copy color balance/density
Display/Item Content Default adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu-
range
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) tion of the image quality adjustments.)
selection paper feed 1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3 Job Simulation
Adjustment Item List
CS3 Tray 3 4 No
CS4 Tray 4 5 ADJ Image density ADJColor image sensor 44-13
LCC LCC 6 5 sensor, image 5A calibration
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO) registration sensor ADJColor image density 44-2
print adjustment 5B sensor, black image
NO No 1
selection density sensor, image
registration sensor
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 64-1/61-4
6
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
ADJ OPC drum phase ADJ OPC drum phase 50-22
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
7 adjustment 7A adjustment
in the standard adjustment value range. (Auto adjustment)
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r2.0mm ADJ OPC drum phase 44-31
7B adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ Image registration ADJ Image registration 50-22
10 adjustment (Print 10A adjustment
engine section) (Main scanning
direction, sub
scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
ADJ Image registration 50-20
3.0 2.0mm
10B adjustment
(Main scanning
direction)
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ Image registration 50-21
10C adjustment
(Sub scanning
direction)
(Manual adjustment)
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key. 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
6) Change the adjustment value. Job
Adjustment item list Simulation
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the No
[EXECUTE] key. ADJ Adjust the developing doctor gap
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is 1
printed. ADJ Adjust the developing roller main pole position
2
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
ADJ Adjusting high ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When 4 voltage values 4A grid voltage
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed 4B bias voltage
by about 0.1mm. ADJ Transfer voltage 8-6
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied. 4C adjustment
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment
12 (CCD unit position adjustment)
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density ADJ

20A
CCD gamma adjustment
(CCD calibration)
63-3
adjustment (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density color balance/density adjustment)
adjustment Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/ balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
density adjustment must be executed. servicing conditions.
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/ Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
density adjustment procedures depending on the actual conditions.
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment, There are following four, major cases.
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color 1) When installing
balance/density adjustment have been completed. 2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
The importance levels of them are shown below. 3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
(2) Copy color balance and density check [Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
(Note) UKOG-0317FC11)]
Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
execute the following jobs. check to insure the following conditions.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) (Color copy)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
(Method)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11), and check that they are proper.
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11). Set the copy density

level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a
copy.
20-A (1)
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ment mode must be set to the default (center).
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
(Normal document copy mode)
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). * When the CCD unit is replaced.
Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo * When a U2 trouble is occurred.
mode (Manual). * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust- * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
ment mode must be set to the default (center). (1) Note before adjustment
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)] 1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure surface are free from dirt and dust.
the following conditions. (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to check. the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
(Color copy)
If they are dirty, clean them.
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied. If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W (2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
Patch 2 is copied.
the left side.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. (2) Adjustment procedures
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray.
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17
2&

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
% * 5 (;(&87(
2&
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC

Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
and low humidity. method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
20-A (2) 2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode.
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(DSPF mode)
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
* When the CCD unit is replaced. 2&

* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. &&&555
(1) Note before adjustment 000***
<<<%%%
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the SPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of % * 5 '63) 2&
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
3) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
If they are dirty, clean them. selected color is displayed.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one. * When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
NOTE: the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by of the selected color is displayed.
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera- * Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
place of low temperature and low humidity. * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
% * 5 '63) 2&
4) When [DSPF] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color * When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed. played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color

auto adjustment is executed.
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
20-A (3)

Shading adjustment (DSPF mode)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
1) Open the lower door, and insert the white reference sheet
DSPF (PSHEP5668FCZZ). Close the lower door.
(;(&87(
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed

in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis-
played.
When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the
sub number entry screen.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&/26(
* When inserting the white reference sheet DSPF, insert it
6&$11(502725,61275($'< straight along the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of
the white reference sheet DSPF comes at the root of the
actuator as shown in the mark {.
(;(&87(
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error

patch numbers are displayed.
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
tial screen. (The previous value is displayed)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6$035,1*'$7$81),7

3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
20-B Copy color balance adjustment
3) Select, [DSPF SHADING].
(Auto adjustment)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21 * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
6(/(&72&6+$',1*'63)6+$',1*$1'35(66(;(&87( replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading
is started. The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
* When the operation is executed, the document is trans-
24 or the user program automatically.
ported by about 25mm, and shading data are obtained dur-
ing transport. (When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted. There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis- 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
played. is used.)
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
screen. The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
<Descriptions of keys>
If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
Display Content use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode) work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
<Result display> lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
Display Content service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
COMPLETE Normal completion To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
ERROR Abnormal completion understood.
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ20B Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic density).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11 x 17) paper.

(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory
target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automati-
cally performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is automatically performed. Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the factory color balance and

density target which is available in 3
kinds. (SIM63-11)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the factory
ance and density. color balance and
density target (available
in 3 kinds) is changed,
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the satisfactory color balance
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- and density are not obtain-
ed (SIM63-11), or the
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) service target is
selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ20C (Manual copy color balance

YES and density adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21).
(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the service
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. target, select the service target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with ADJ20C (Manual copy
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) color balance and density adjustment)
(SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) any problems.
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check *3:
the color balance and density. If the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
NO Are the color balance and den- for any problems.
sity at the satisfactory level? *4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
YES for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the
color balance auto adjustment menu.)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
[FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of
)257+,6$'-8670(17 the above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
(;(&87(
target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
selected.) can be registered with SIM 63-7.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
procedure 2) on the document table. half tone image correction is performed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed

6,08/$7,2112
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
[EXECUTE] key.
MODE" is displayed.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
balance, select the service target. &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed

to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
6) Check the color balance and density. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
There are following three methods in the color balance and mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
density check. adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
(Method 1) pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
rection table in an actual copy mode.
image is within the following specifications.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
(Method 3)
Low density High density Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
Y 0317FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
M balance and density check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
C from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
Bk 63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
Q If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
(Max) dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P 20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, 20C).
and BK is very slightly copied.
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
and BK are not copied.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
x Patch B may not be copied.
x Patch A must not be copied.
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 (;(&87(
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance

with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
checked more precisely. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
Low density High density

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Y +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7
M &203/(7(
Bk
CMY
blend
Q
(Max) 5(68/7 (;(&87(
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C,
Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
6,08/$7,2112

&/26(
adjustment)
7(67
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is

replaced.
(;(&87( * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG- * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
0317FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color a. General
balance and density check.) The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per- adjust the copy density (15 point for each color) of CMYK. This is
form the following procedures. used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment
9) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. described above is not existing within the range of reference. When
(SIM 44-21) a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) for changing (customizing) the color balance.
(SIM44-26) In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG- not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
color balance and density check.) efficiency.
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
be another cause. 1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments, 2) The CCD gamma must have been properly adjusted.
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
3) Set the color patch image adjustment pattern on the document
beginning.
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 20C) (Manual
adjustment).
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-21)
Start
Execute ADJ21B (Copy color balance and density adjustment)

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A3 (11 " x 17 ") paper.
(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a

target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the patch color balance and density in the process

gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)
Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
Are the color balance NO

sfactory level?
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the half tone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Perform the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11)

to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density. *1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
NO Are the color balance *2:
and density at the sati- If the initial setting of the half tone image
sfactory level? correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
YES this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic copy color balance
adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End
1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.

When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
$ 32,17 color balance stated above.
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
' 32,17 mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
( 32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
) 32,17
* 32,17
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
+ 32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
, 32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
- 32,17
. 32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/ 32,17 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999).
10-key EXECUTE When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
EXECUTE End of print and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
( 32,17 and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
) 32,17
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
* 32,17
+ 32,17 Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
, 32,17 way of adjustment.
- 32,17
. 32,17 Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
/ 32,17 cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
selected.) 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
If not, execute the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Low density High density +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
$M
(;(&87(
CMY
Blend It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
3 pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 (Normal end (Auto transition))
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,

and BK is very slightly copied. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
3) Patch A of each of Y, M, C, 5(68/7

&203/(7(
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same 5(68/7 (;(&87(
level.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
(;(&87(
5(68/7 (;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
data as the reference data for the half tone correction. 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjusting to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce- check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
dure. copy color balance/density check.)
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed. specified level, there may be another cause.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
operation is started. ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. the color balance as the service target.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service

target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
made in the next color balance adjustment.
7(67
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar-
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust-
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service color bal-
ance target)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
(;(&87(
There are following three kinds of the target.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com- Factory color balance (gamma) target
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. Service color balance (gamma) target
(Normal end (Auto transition)) User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( This adjustment is required in the following cases.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 * When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
&203/(7(
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
5(68/7 (;(&87(
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
Type Descriptions
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target target is changed, this color balance target is also
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
changed accordingly.
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
target level. In advance, the user's unique color balance
must be registered as the service color balance
target. The above registration (setting) is made
by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the
color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of
the color balance is same as the factory color
balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default
DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color correction
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue
SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
ment (SIM 46-24). judges as follows.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. the service color balance target in SIM 46-24 is unsatisfactory or
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to abnormal.
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
SIM 63-11. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
changed accordingly. made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration) b. Setting procedure
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
customized with SIM 46-21. If the color balance is not customized, service color balance target)
this procedure is not required.
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7 (adjustment pattern).
to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with adjustment.
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
6,08/$7,2112
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it 7(67
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
&/26(
from discoloration and dirt. %&'()
*+,-.
The service color balance target data are basically registered 012
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
. & 0 < 6(783
3) Press [SETUP] key. * When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly be sure to execute this procedure.
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(adjustment pattern). 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.

If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with 3) Press [YES] key.
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe- The service color balance target and the color balance target for
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. ance as the factory color balance target.
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
&/26(
mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
(;(&87( * U2 trouble has occurred.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
$ $872
$ % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272

' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
+ /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
(;(&87( - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.

/2: +,*+ 2.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q

(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal. OK
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar- $

$ $872
% 7(;7
get. & 7(;735,17('3+272
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color ' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same ) 3+272*5$3+
color balance as the factory color balance target) * 0$3
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance + /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<

was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar- . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
get with SIM 63-7. / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2: +,*+ 2.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
Setting
Display/Item Content Default Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
range
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
HIGH 1 - 99 50 checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 obtained.
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 20-E Copy density adjustment (Each
HIGH 1 - 99 50 monochrome copy mode) (Whole
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
HIGH 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 adjust)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den-
HIGH 1 - 99 50 sity and high density part at each copy mode individually.
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
copy by each the copy mode individually.
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo (Copy * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) copy mode individually.
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 * U2 trouble has occurred.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 from the user, execute this adjustment.
(COLOR TONE (Color tone 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50

6,08/$7,2112
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 $ $872
(COLOR TONE (Color tone $

HIGH 1 - 99 50 % $872
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) & 7(;7

' 7(;735,17('3+272
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
( 7(;73+272
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 ) 35,17('3+272
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) * 3+272*5$3+
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 + 0$3
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 , 7(;7&23<72&23<

- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 / /,*+7
HIGH 1 - 99 50 /2: +,*+ 2.
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50

(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 OK
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50

(Copy document) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. $ $872
$ % $872
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
& 7(;7
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- ' 7(;735,17('3+272
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ( 7(;73+272
mode and change the adjustment value. ) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is + 0$3
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy , 7(;7&23<72&23<
density is decreased. - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ /,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
Setting
range

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
HIGH 1 - 99 50 7(;7 7(;73573+272 35,17('3+272 3+2727(;73+272
0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*

B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 (;(&87(
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50

G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
&/26(
HIGH 1 - 99 50 $ 32,17

$ % 32,17
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 & 32,17
HIGH 1 - 99 50 ' 32,17
( 32,17
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 ) 32,17
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50

* 32,17
+ 32,17
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 , 32,17

- 32,17
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 . 32,17
(COPY TO COPY) document) / 32,17
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50

. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) C

HIGH 1 - 99 50
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 10-key
HIGH 1 - 99 50 OK
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- $ % 32,17
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" & 32,17
' 32,17
mode and change the adjustment value. ( 32,17
) 32,17
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is * 32,17
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy + 32,17
, 32,17
density is decreased. - 32,17
. 32,17
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- / 32,17
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- [SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the or end of print
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and

checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
obtained. (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17
$
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To % 32,17
& 32,17
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. ' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color * 32,17
+ 32,17
balance adjustment at each density level in , 32,17

- 32,17
each color copy mode) . 32,17
/ 32,17
(Normally not required) . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma 3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
by each the copy mode individually. key.
* U2 trouble has occurred. 4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. key.
Density level Adjustment
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
color copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
Density level Adjustment 2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
Item/Display Default key.
(Point) value range
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
A POINT1 Point 1 373 - 627 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 373 - 627 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 373 - 627 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 373 - 627 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 373 - 627 500
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. F POINT6 Point 6 373 - 627 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is G POINT7 Point 7 373 - 627 500
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den- H POINT8 Point 8 373 - 627 500
sity is decreased. I POINT9 Point 9 373 - 627 500
J POINT10 Point 10 373 - 627 500
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
K POINT11 Point 11 373 - 627 500
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
L POINT12 Point 12 373 - 627 500
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
M POINT13 Point 13 373 - 627 500
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
N POINT14 Point 14 373 - 627 500
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is O POINT15 Point 15 373 - 627 500
printed out. P POINT16 Point 16 373 - 627 500
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density Q POINT17 Point 17 373 - 627 500
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
20-G Monochrome copy density/gamma increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode)
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
(Normally not required) adjusted.
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
* When there is necessity to change the gamma in monochrome to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
mode.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
* U2 trouble has occurred. printed out.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy practically to make a copy and check it.
mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This
adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. 20-H Condition setting of document density
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. reading operation (exposure) in the
monochrome auto copy mode

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(Normally not required)
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17 ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
& 32,17
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
' 32,17
( 32,17
ment, change the setting.
) 32,17 This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* 32,17
+ 32,17
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in monochrome
, 32,17 auto mode.
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(

$(B02'( 02'( 02'(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$(B6723B&23< 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$(B6723B)$; 2)) 21
$ 32,17
$(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$ % 32,17
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
& 32,17
$(B:,'7+ )8// 3$57
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17

. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Document table/DSPF mode
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases. 3 to 7mm
Display/Item Content Set value Default

AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE1
mode MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP Document table mode
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
3 to 7mm
NOTE: MODE1:
High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: 100mm
Normal gamma
STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of AE WIDTH = PART
document, decides the output image density according to
the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
stant at whole area.)
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
decides the output image density according to the density
of each part of the document. (The output image density
DSPF mode
may be not constant at whole area.)
PRESCAN:
The densities of the all surface of document are once 3 to 7mm
scanned, and the output image density is determined

according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width.
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width).
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light,
Document density detection area
output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
image density is decreased by control.
20-I Document background density 20-J Copy density adjustment for low density
reproducibility adjustment in the section (Each copy mode)
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) Use to adjust image density low density area in copy mode.
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background When there is a desire to no reproducing the document back-
density in monochrome auto copy mode. ground or reproducing the low density image, adjust this.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document. image of the document.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When there is request from the user. * When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode. 1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* %*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &23<2& $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272

$ $ % &2/25&23<7(;7
% &23<563)
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
& 6&$12&
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
' 6&$1563)
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
( )$;2&
) &2/25&23<0$3
) )$;563)
* &2/25&23</,*+7
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<

, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
2.
10-key
10-key OK
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $ % &2/25&23<7(;7
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
$ &23<2&
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
$ % &23<563)
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
& 6&$12&
) &2/25&23<0$3
' 6&$1563)
* &2/25&23</,*+7
( )$;2& + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
) )$;563) , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

2.
Set
2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: RSPF" with value
the scroll key. A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
background and the low density image is increased. When the PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
ground and the low density image is decreased. PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
Set TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
value F COLOR COPY : MAP map (color copy) 1-9 5
A COPY : FOC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 (color copy)
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) Text
(color copy)
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
Set 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
value
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 Adjust
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) Display/Item (Copy mode) Content ment Default
range
L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
M COLOR PUSH:PRINTED Printed photo 1-9 5
(SLOPE) gamma skew
PHOTO (color PUSH)
adjustment
N COLOR Photograph 1-9 5
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
PUSH:PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment
O COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text/Photograph 1-9 3
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (color PUSH)
(SLOPE) gamma skew
P COLOR PUSH:MAP map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
adjustment
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
background and the low density image is increased. When the
(SLOPE) gamma adjustment
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- (Text/Map mode)
ground and the low density image is decreased. F ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, adjust by ADJ20D and (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
ADJ20E. (Text/Map mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

20-K Color copy text, line image edge gamma,
When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
density adjustment / Text Map mode gamma at the line edge section is changed.
gamma, density adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
(Adjustment 1) character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the line edge is decreased.
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and increased, the image density at the line edge section is
lines can be varied. increased, and vice versa.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode 4) Press [OK] key.
(manual). 5) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 6) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be (manual), check the copy.
changed. When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
* U2 trouble has occurred. acter and line image.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. mode and change the adjustment value.
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
(Adjustment 2) If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in adjustment value.
the Text/Map copy mode. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy 20-L Color document reproducibility adjustment
mode images. in the monochrome copy mode
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. image in monochrome copy mode.
6,08/$7,2112
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
$
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
monochrome copy mode.
& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23( * When the MFP PWB is replaced.

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2. % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
$ % %*
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23( 10-key

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
DEFAULT
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
2.
$ % %*

Adjust
Display/Item (Copy mode) Content ment Default
range
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50 EXECUTE NO
C COLOR Color character edge 1 - 99 50
TEXT(SLOPE) gamma skew
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
adjustment $ 5*
$ % %*
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50

E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
gamma adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
(Text/Map mode) '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. YES
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is

changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

$ 5*
increased, and vice versa. $ % %*

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is

increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to cancel the simulation mode.
6) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
the output print. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
Adjust
Display/Item 3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
range
Display/Item (Copy Select Content Default
A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 0 - 99 21 mode) button
B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0 - 99 0 MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
(+) LUT1
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
(+) LUT2
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, (-) LUT1
copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment NOMAL
value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased. (+) LUT1
4) Press [OK] key. (+) LUT2
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed phto copy mode PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
(manual), check the copy. PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
(+) LUT1
mode and change the adjustment value.
(+) LUT2
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
obtained. (Manual)
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
20-M Black ingredient amount adjustment in (+) LUT1
color copy mode (+) LUT2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Photograph
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (Manual)
NOMAL
(except character and line image)
(+) LUT1
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part (+) LUT2
changes. MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1
This adjustment is required in the following cases. (-) LUT1
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required. NOMAL
* To make the black background and the dark area darker (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
* When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
* U2 trouble has occurred. TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. NOMAL Text printed
(Manual)
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. (+) LUT1
1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode. (+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text (Manual)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(+) LUT1
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/ (+) LUT2
/87 /87 COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
/87 /87
NOMAL Printed photo
35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87 (+) LUT1 (Manual)

3+272 /87 /87 120$/
(+) LUT2
/87 /87
7(;73+272
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1
/87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
0$3 /87 /87 120$/ NOMAL (Manual)
/87 /87
(+) LUT1
0$18$/ $872
(+) LUT2
(-)LUT2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
7(;73+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
0$3 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
0$18$/ $872
Display/Item (Copy Select Content Default
mode) button 20-N Sharpness adjustment in the color auto
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL copy mode (Normally unnecessary to
(-) LUT1 judgment 0
adjust)
NOMAL
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
(+) LUT1
auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
(-) LUT1 judgment 1 shade part.
NOMAL This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(+) LUT1 * When changing the sharpness of copy image in auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2 (obtain crispy image)(decreases moire)
AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
shade part (for decrease of asperity)
NOMAL
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL * U2 trouble has occurred.
(-) LUT1 judgment 3 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 4

6,08/$7,2112
NOMAL 7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
(+) LUT1 $ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$
(+) LUT2 % $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5 ( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
NOMAL ) &2/25&23<&0<21
(+) LUT1 * &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
(+) LUT2
, &2/25386+5*%21
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL - %:386+21
(-) LUT1 judgment 6

NOMAL
2.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
10-key
4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.
When reproduction as solid of black image is required: OK
Selects + button
When there is desire to darken copy of black image:

6,08/$7,2112
Selects + button 7(67
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black: $

$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
Selects - button & &2/25&23<&0<21
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. ' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode ) &2/25&23<&0<21
and change the adjustment value. * &2/25&23<.21
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. + %:&23<21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default NOTE
range
A SCREEN H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy mode only
FILTER LEVEL image in auto copy mode emphasis
L Soft 2
emphasis
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high density image
COPY:CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 except text and line image
D COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When setting ON, smoothness in the
COLOR:CMY ON in sigle color copy mode ON 1 image shade part improves by
F 2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) applying soft filter.
COPY:CMY ON in 2-color copy mode ON 1 (asperity decreases)
2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
G
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
H
ON copy mode ON 1
COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
I
PUSH:RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1(ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
J
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter a. Adjustment procedure

process mode). 1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode.
Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-

6,08/$7,2112
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness. 7(67
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
&/26(
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large $

$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
numeric value to decrease moire. & &<$10$;7$5*(7
Adjustment item B: ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
moire.
Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key. 2.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.

If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode 10-key
and change the adjustment value.
OK
20-O Copy high density part density correction 6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
setting (Prevents against tone gap) (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(

$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in color mode, or if there & &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
change the setting. ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are

case of following, change the setting.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of
high density. 2.

2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. a. Adjustment procedure
Setting
range

A CMY 0 CMY engine 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(0:ENABLE maximum density 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
1:DISABLE) correction mode $

$ 5('
% *5((1
Enable
0-1 0 & %/8(
1 CMY engine ' &<$1
maximum density ( 0$*(17$
correction mode ) <(//2:
Disable
B K 0 K engine maximum
(0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode Enable
0-1 1
1 K engine maximum
density correction & 0 < 2.
mode DIsable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 10-key
TARGET CYAN maximum density
OK
correction
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET MAGENTA maximum

density correction 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783

$ 5('
TARGET YELLOW maximum $ % *5((1
density correction & %/8(
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 ' &<$1
TARGET BLACK maximum density ( 0$*(17$

) <(//2:
correction
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B

The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 & 0 < 2.
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
these values are changed, density of the high density part 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal- Adjustment Default
Display/Item
range C M Y
ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
20-P Copy color balance adjustment (Single C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
color copy mode) (Normally not required) D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
the single color copy mode to the user's request. F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
5) Press [OK] key.
color.
6) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
is a request from the user. 7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
20-Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are
case of following, change the setting.
* When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedure
20-R DSPF mode copy density adjustment
(Normally not necessary to adjust)
It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment.
In the following cases, however, this adjustment must be per-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) formed.
$ &23</2:
$ * When the copy density differs in the DSPF mode and in the doc-
% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2: ument table mode.

D &23<+,*+
* When the copy density differs on the front surface and on the
( 6&$1+,*+
F )$;+,*+
back surface in the DSPF mode.
* When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
2.
10-key
(Front surface copy density adjustment)
OK 1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23<6,'($/2:
$ &23</2:
$ $ % 6&$16,'($/2:
% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2: & )$;6,'($/2:
D &23<+,*+ &23<6,'($+,*+

'
( 6&$1+,*+ ( 6&$16,'($+,*+

F )$;+,*+ ) )$;6,'($+,*+
2.
2& '63) 2.

When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY DSPF
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
10-key
(COPY HIGH)".
OK
Setting De-
Item/Display Content
range fault
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 48 (;32685($'-8670(1763)

$ &23<6,'(%/2:
adjustment (Low density side) $ % 6&$16,'(%/2:
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 & )$;6,'(%/2:
adjustment (Low density side) &23<6,'(%+,*+
'
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy copy mcde 1 - 99 53 ( 6&$16,'(%+,*+
exposure adjustment ) )$;6,'(%+,*+
(High density side)

E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment
(High density side) 2& '63) 2.

In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
(Back surface copy density adjustment)
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content 1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode.
range value
A OC COPY SIDEA: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
6,08/$7,2112
adjustment (Low 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
density side)
$ &23<6,'($/2:
B SCAN SIDEA: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47 $ % 6&$16,'($/2:
LOW mode exposure & )$;6,'($/2:
adjustment (Low &23<6,'($+,*+
'
density side) ( 6&$16,'($+,*+
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 ) )$;6,'($+,*+
LOW exposure
adjustment (Low
density side)
D COPY SIDEA: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure
adjustment (High 2& '63) 2.
density side)
E SCAN SIDEA: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
DSPF
HIGH mode exposre
adjustment (High
density side) 10-key
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
OK
HIGH exposure
adjustment (High
density side)
A DSPF COPY SIDEB: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
LOW exposure (;32685($'-8670(1763)
adjustment (Low $ &23<6,'(%/2:

$ % 6&$16,'(%/2:
density side)
& )$;6,'(%/2:
B SCAN SIDEB: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
&23<6,'(%+,*+
'
LOW mode exposure ( 6&$16,'(%+,*+
adjustment (Low ) )$;6,'(%+,*+
density side)
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
adjustment (Low
density side)
D COPY SIDEB: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
2& '63) 2.
HIGH exposure
adjustment (High
density side)
Setting Default
E SCAN SIDEB: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50 Item Button Display Content
range value
HIGH mode exposre
adjustment (High A OC COPY SIDEA: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 42
density side) LOW exposure
adjustment (Low
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
density side)
HIGH exposure
adjustment (High B SCAN SIDEA: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 42
density side) LOW mode exposure
adjustment (Low
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
density side)
SIDEB: R balance R
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 42
H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
LOW exposure
SIDEB: G balance G
adjustment (Low
I BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
density side)
SIDEB: B balance B
D COPY SIDEA: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 53
2) Press OC key to select the front surface copy density adjust- HIGH exposure
adjustment (High
ment mode.
density side)
3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. E SCAN SIDEA: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 53
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY HIGH mode exposre
SIDE A LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area, adjustment (High
select "COPY SIDE A HIGH." density side)
4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key.
HIGH exposure
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease adjustment (High
the density, enter a smaller number. density side)
5) Press [OK] key.
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.
7) Make a copy and check the copy density.
Setting Default b. Setting procedure
Item Button Display Content
range value 1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
A DSPF COPY SIDEB: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 45
LOW exposure

adjustment (Low 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
density side) $ <(612
B SCAN SIDEB: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 45 $
LOW mode exposure
adjustment (Low
density side)
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 45
LOW exposure
adjustment (Low
density side)
D COPY SIDEB: DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure 2.
adjustment (High
density side)
10-key
E SCAN SIDEB: DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
HIGH mode exposre
OK
adjustment (High
density side)

HIGH exposure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (High (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21

$ <(612
density side) $
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R balance R
SIDEB: G balance G
SIDEB: B balance B
2) Press DSPF key to select the back surface copy density

adjustment mode.
2.
3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY 2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
SIDE B LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area, When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
select "COPY SIDE B HIGH." (Yes).
4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key. 3) Press [OK] key.
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
the density, enter a smaller number. (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
5) Press [OK] key. played in the user program mode.
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode. (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
7) Make a copy, and check the copy density. Remark:
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
20-S Auto color balance adjustment by the user
1) Enter the system setting mode.
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
cedure 4) on the document table.
tion with SIM 26-53.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's side.
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
patch image (adjustment pattern).
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user. Thin line
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
20-T Copy color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
a. General
This adjustment is to adjust the color balance and the density in the
monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, the black text, the
color text edge, the line image edge, the text mode, and the map
mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
b. Adjustment procedures
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is
printed.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
patch image (adjustment pattern). the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density

adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density

adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- pleted properly.
mality. (This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
5) Press [OK] key. * Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed. ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color bal-
ance/density adjustment.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
Select item (2) Printer color balance/density check
Content
(Mode/Image)
(Note)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
*1 heavy paper mode Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of lines, execute the following procedures in advance.
text density, and thickness * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction of forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
lines, text density, and thickness
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode (Method 1)
Color Ed Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the text Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
mode and the map mode. Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,
load paper in the manual paper feed tray.
selected.)
In the monochrome mode, only the monochrome pattern is
printed.
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
Patch B may not be copied.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
DEF 1.)
21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level reduce the number of service calls.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
same level.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
(Method 2)
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and work effectively.
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
black patch to check the color balance.
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
Low density High density the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
; understood.
/
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
%
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and

BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and

BK are not copied.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

Start
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and density adjust-

ment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A3

(11" x 17" ) paper.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the factory target or the service target, and
press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is
scanned, and the adjustment is automatically per-
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
formed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the factory color balance and density
target which is available in 3 kinds.(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone

image correction is automatically performed.) Though the factory color
balance and density target
(available in 3 kinds) is cha-
Cancel SIM67-24. nged, satisfactory color bal-
ance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
service target is selected.
YES
Execute ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density

adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer
color balance and density adjustment. (*2) *1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the service target, select the service target.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print *2:
check pattern, and check the printer If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not
color balance and density. properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
Are the color balance and NO with ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density adjustment)
density at the satisfactory (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for
level? any problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the

color balance auto adjustment menu.)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&/26(
There are two kinds of the gamma targets for the color balance
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
[FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of
the above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-27.)
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable) When ship-
ping, the service target gamma data and the factory target
(;(&87(
gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
selected.) can be registered with SIM 67-28.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table.

Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
[EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color 3/($6(48,77+,602'(
balance, select the service target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
6) Check the color balance and density. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
There are two methods to check the color balance and density. mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
(Method 1)
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
image is within the following specifications.
(Method 3)
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density.
Low density High density Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
; The print test pattern is printed out.
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
/ balance and density. (Refer to the item of the printer color bal-
ance and density check.)
% When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
$M obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
3
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
/CZ cedures from 1).
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and 21C).
BK are not copied.
Cancel SIM 67-25.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter 21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
not be reversed.
level. * When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjust-
Patch B may not be copied.
ment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(Method 2)
a. General
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
adjust the printer density (17 pts for each color) of C, M, Y and K.
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
This is used at the following situation. When the result of auto
checked more precisely.
adjustment described above is not existing within the range of ref-
erence. When a fine adjustment is required. When there is request
from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance.
Low density High density In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
;
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
/
efficiency.
% b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
1) After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
$M 2) When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
CMY patch image adjustment pattern.
Blend
3 3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,

BK are not copied.
The max. density section is not blurred.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure

Start
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A3

(11 " x 17 ") paper. (Automatic selection.)

Check the printed adjustment check pattern,

and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
Select a target adjustment density level with the

scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.

Check the patch color balance and density in the

process gray of the color balance check pattern.
(If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta,
the color balance is properly adjusted.)
Are the color balance

NO
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer

color balance and density adjustment result. (*2)
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print

check pattern, and check the printer
color balance and density.
Are the color balance and NO

density at the satisfactory
level?
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
YES obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic *2:
printer color balance adjustment. If the initial setting of the half tone image correction
(SIM67-27) is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance
and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check
the print engine for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17 Low density High density

' 32,17
( 32,17
;
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17 /
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17 %
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

$M
10-key CMY
Blend
OK 3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and
$ 32,17 BK is very slightly copied.
$ % 32,17
& 32,17 Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and

' 32,17 BK are not copied.
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
+ 32,17 The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
, 32,17 The patch density is changed gradually.
- 32,17
. 32,17 The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
not be reversed.
EXECUTE EXECUTE level.
or end of print Patch B may not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17 color balance stated above.
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17 mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
( 32,17 adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
) 32,17
* 32,17
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
+ 32,17 the color balance target is DEF 1.)
, 32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
- 32,17
. 32,17
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
/ 32,17 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(;(&87( 2.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99).
. & 0 <
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
selected.) and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print (Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service
color balance and the density. color balance target)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. a. General
The print test pattern is printed. When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
8) If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
the color balance as the service target. There are following three kinds of the target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not Factory color balance (gamma) target
required.
Service color balance (gamma) target
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
User color balance (gamma) target
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
the next color balance adjustment.
to a desired level.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode This adjustment is required in the following cases.
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg- * When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
istered color balance. ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to regis- * U2 trouble has occurred.
ter the color balance as the service target. If the color bal- * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
ance is not customized, this procedure is not required. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service * When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be * When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
made in the next color balance adjustment. improper.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar- Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust-
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color Type Descriptions
balance as the registered color balance. A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance
balance targets, and each of them is specified according
(gamma) to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select
target one of them as the factory target. The default
setting (factory setting) is the color balance
(DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance customize the color balance to user's desired
(gamma) level. In advance, the user's unique color
target balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to
register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the
color balance is set to the factory color balance
target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting
(factory setting) of the color balance is same as
the factory color balance target. (Emphasized
on color reproduIf the user does not request for
customizing the color balance, be sure to use
SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory
color balance targetction (DEF1))
C User color Same color balance as the service color
balance balance (gamma) target When the service color
(gamma) balance target is changed, this color balance
target target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow

SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF1)
Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color balance
Hue adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1

operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
Direction actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
ment (SIM 67-28). purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. customized with SIM 67-25. If the color balance is not customized,
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set this procedure is not required.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
SIM 67-26. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment to register the service color balance target data by use of the
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in printed adjustment pattern.
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
changed accordingly. SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from
discoloration and dirt.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-

ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judged as follows.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting (;(&87(
the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
abnormal. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was %&'()
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with *+,-.
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. /012
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image . & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
(adjustment pattern).
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
adjustment. (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
*+,-. get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
/012
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 67-27.
. & 0 < 6(783 * When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
26, be sure to execute this procedure.
3) Press [SETUP] key.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
table. 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another

machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
a. Adjustment procedure
21-C Printer density adjustment (low density part
density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary
to adjust)

This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
&/26(
printer mode. $ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image. & &<$10$;7$5*(7
This adjustment is required in the following cases. ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7

( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
* When reproduction of low density image is required. ) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

* When there is request from the user.
2.
10-key
OK
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$ $3$7&+,1387

6,08/$7,2112
$ 7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2.
10-key
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
OK Setting
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine 0-1 0
(0: ENABLE maximum density
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 1:DISABLE) correction mode
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17 Enable
$ $3$7&+,1387
$ 1 CMY engine

maximum density
correction mode
Disable
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction
mode Disable
2.
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. correction
In case of increase of the image density on low density part, D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density TARGET MAGENTA maximum
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value. density correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum
21-D Printer high density part desnsity
density correction
correction setting (high density part tone F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
gap countermeasure) (Normally TARGET BLACK maximum density
unnecessary to the setting change) correction
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in * If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
printer mode. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following gap is better.
cases, a change of setting must be made. * In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. to item A and B.
* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of The tone gap may occur in high density part.
high density. (NOTE) If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed,
* The CCD unit has been replaced. density of the high density part is changed.
* U2 trouble has occurred. When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
21-E Auto color balance adjustment by the user
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
(Printer color balance auto adjustment ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above set-
ENABLE setting and adjustment) tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
a. General properly.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal- 1) Enter the system setting mode.
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). 2) Enter the printer setting mode.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
tion with SIM 26-54. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
CAUTION: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
user's understanding on the automatic adjustment of 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
the copy color balance and density and the user's oper- cedure 4) on the document table.
ational ability are judged enough to execute the adjust-
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
ment.
side.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
explained to the user.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. Thin line
b. Setting procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
$ the display returns to the original operation screen.

21-F Copy/Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
2. * When the CCD unit is replaced.
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
&/26(
$
$ <(612

a. General
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
2.
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. this mode.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1" This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
(Yes). matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
3) Press [OK] key. the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
displayed in the user program mode. ment individually.
b. Adjustment procedures
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ21F Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 17") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the factory color balance and density target
which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically
NO
performed.) (*3)
Cancel SIM46-74.
Though the factory color
balance and density target
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result.
(available in 3 kinds) is
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a copy in the Text changed, satisfactory color
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density. balance and density are
not obtained (SIM63-11),
or the service target is
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color selected.
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
YES
Are the color balance and density NO

at the specified level? Execute ADJ20C (Copy color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21)
YES (*3)
*1:
When the color balance and
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
density are customized and
performed. (*2) Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and registered as the service
density adjustment) target, select the service
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (*2)
(Automatic adjustment). (SIM67-24) target.
*2:
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) If the initial setting of the half
Automatic color balance target change
tone image correction is not
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a copy in properly adjusted, satisfactory
Change the factory color balance and density
the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density. color balance and density
(available in 3 kinds). (SIM67-26)
cannot be obtained. In this
NO case, check the print engine
for any problems.
NO Are the color balance and density
*3:
at the specified level?
If satisfactory color balance and
Though the factory color density are not obtained with
YES balance and density target ADJ20C (Copy color balance
(available in 3 kinds) is and density adjustment) (Manual
changed, satisfactory color
adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
balance and density are
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print not obtained (SIM67-26), check the print engine for any
check pattern. or the service target is problems.
selected.
*4:
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check If there is any streak or unclear
pattern, and check the printer color balance copy on the printed check
and density. pattern, check the print engine
YES
for any problems.
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance

Are the color balance NO and density adjustment)
and density at the (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)
specified level?
YES
End

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. and prints the color balance check patch image.
The high density process control is performed, and the copy If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A3 or tern, check the print engine for any problems.
11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Low density High density
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1*
;
$M
3
/CZ
(;(&87( # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

procedure 2) on the document table.
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the Remark:
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch (Descriptions on the factory service key button in the color bal-
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, ance automatic adjustment menu)
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image There are two kinds of the gamma targets for the color balance
(adjustment pattern). automatic adjustment: the factory target and the service target.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance
(The color balance can be selected from the three kinds of
fixed ones with SIM63-11.)
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping from the factory, the service target gamma data
and the factory target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping from
the factory. For the service target, a customized color balance
gamma can be registered with SIM63-7.
The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
out. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press

6,08/$7,2112
[EXECUTE] key. 7(67
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal- &21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, $1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service )257+,6$'-8670(17
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the

[SERVICE] target.
(;(&87(
6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is dis-
procedure 5) on the document table. played. Press [OK] key.
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The initial setting of the half tone image correction is per-
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch formed.
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
6,08/$7,2112
(adjustment pattern). 7(67
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$

PRINTER CALIBRATION
2.
9) When "COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the

adjustment operation is completed. Cancel SIM46-74.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
7) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press 3/($6(48,77+,602'(

[EXECUTE] key.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
12:5(*,67(5,1*7+(1(:7$5*(72)+$/)721(352&2167
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
celed, the adjustment result is invalid.
10) Check the copy color balance and density.
There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
2.
(Method 1)
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically 0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
performed and the color balance check patch image is printed the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
out. copy color balance and density check.)
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat- When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
tern, check the print engine for any problems. from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
Low density High density dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
; 20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
/ cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
%
20C).
(Method 2)
$M By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
3 and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
/CZ with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 checked more precisely.
Though the procedures 13) - 15) are performed, the copy color
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
Low density High density
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treat-
; ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
/ If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results
of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ
% 20C) (Manual adjustment).
16) Check the printer color balance and density.
$M There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
CMY
(Method 1)
Blend Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
3 color balance and the density.
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 Set each setting value to the default and press [EXECUTE]
key, and the print test pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
BK is very slightly copied. check.)
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and (Method 2)
BK are not copied. Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
1) The max. density section is not blurred. compare the black patch color balance of each process (CMY)
with the black patch. This procedure allows checking the color
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. balance adjustment result correctly.

mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the Low density High density
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is ;
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF /
1.)
11) Use SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction. %
(Compulsory execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. $M
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. CMY

Blend

3
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( /CZ
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57


BK are not copied.

(;(&87(

It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG- converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check in an actual printer mode. (When the color balance target is
the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the DEF 1.)
copy color balance and density check.) If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the den-
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per- sity is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the
form the following procedures. manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21) 21-G Printer color balance adjustment
14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) (Automatic adjustment for each dither)
(SIM44-26) a. General
15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG- This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check in the monochrome mode, the heave paper mode, 1200dpi, 600dpi,
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy and 1bit mode.
color balance/density check.) This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
b. Adjustment procedures 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode. The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically the color balance check patch image is printed out.
selected.) 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color press [EXECUTE] key.
patch image (adjustment pattern). After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
PRINTER CALIBRATION tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
values.
ADJ 22 Fusing paper guide position

adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
paper rear edge section.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Remove the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. position in the front/rear frame direction.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- 2) Insert the removed screws of the fusing paper guide into the
mality. screw hole in the paper guide long hole section.
5) Press [OK] key. Loosely tighten the screws so that the paper guide can be
moved in the directions of A and B.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
3) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the heavy
paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode (When 1200dpi mode is frequently used)
600dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 600dpi,
1bit mode. A
the monochrome mode B

selected.)
A
A
B B
A
PRINTER CALIBRATION
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.

Change the position according to the situation.
* When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
in the arrow direction B.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
arrow direction A.
Normally, the hole on the fusing paper guide standard fixing
position is used to fix the fusing paper guide.
ADJ 23 Document size sensor 23-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
adjustment 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.

* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred. =':'%76'?

* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
23-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3' #

=':'%76'?
3' 3' 3' 3'
Adjustment
failed
(;(&87(
Adjustment completed
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is

returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32 r0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.) (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783

2&
(;(&87(
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
32+
-0.5mm the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 40-2. 2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 display.
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1* The maximum width position detection level of the manual

paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
(;(&87(
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 display.
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&/26(
&203/(7( display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(;(&87(
8) Open the RSPF/DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width
ADJ 25 RSPF/DSPF tray paper size position.
(width) sensor adjustment
25-A RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor
adjustment
25-B DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor

adjustment
* The RSPF/DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem-
bled.
* The RSPF/DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. The minimum width detection level is recognized.
1) Enter the simulation 53-6 mode. * When each of the above operations has been completed,
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper-
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting
* The operation panel has been replaced.
(;(&87(
2) Open the RSPF/DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width

position.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
The maximum width detection level is recognized. pressed.
4) Open the RSPF/DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
A4R size. as a needle or a pin).
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the RSPF/DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A5R size.

NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image guide.
off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
Display/Item Content 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.

OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode) 12:(;(&87,1*
SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper

PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
27-A Print image main scanning direction image

magnification ratio automatic adjustment
5(35,17 (;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( * Print image main scanning direction image magnification
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
ratio
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'- 7) Press [OK] key.
5(68/7 '$7$
The adjustment result becomes valid.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<

2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
(;(&87(

5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)


2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.
27-C Copy lead edge image reference position
3) Select [ALL] with the key button.
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning

direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
$//

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment

* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment 2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
executed simultaneously. (Any paper size will do.)
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 0)7 &6 &6
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
(Any direction)
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion) NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.

The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7 6,'( 6,'(
$//
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17 (;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment. 3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image used to print SPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio sponding button:
automatic adjustment SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
7) Press [OK] key. SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
The adjustment result becomes valid. ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print SPF

adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 5) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7( of SPF adjustment patterns.
3/($6(386+&$.(<
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing SPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start SPF adjustments.
6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.

27-D RSPF mode image off-center, image lead

edge position, sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
SPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading
SPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
reading and calculating SPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).

The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading SPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).
<Adjustment Item List>
RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (front
side)

8) SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. 1) Enter the simulation mode 50-28 to select [SPF ADJ].

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select an adjustment item (front, back, both).
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the <List of adjustment items>
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print Menu display item Content
SPF adjustment patterns again. SIDE1 DSPF adjustment front surface
9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading SIDE2 DSPF adjustment back surface
SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). ALL DSPF adjustment front/back surface
reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side. 6,'( 6,'(
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment $//
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment Item List>
SPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
SPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the SPF
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for SPF adjustment printing.
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
SPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* To have the machine start re-reading the SPF adjustment $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button. 0)7 &6 &6
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-

ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
27-E DSPF mode image off-center, image lead (;(&87(
edge position, sub scanning direction

4) Self-print of the SPF adjustment pattern is performed.
image magnification ratio auto adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. 12:(;(&87,1*
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.

* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
* The PF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is used to adjust the DSPF (front/back) document
lead edge, off-center, sub operation magnification ratio.
(;(&87(

5) After completion of printing, the DSPF adjustment start screen 9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
is displayed. The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(63)
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7+(135(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
5(35,17 (;(&87(
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.

6) Load the SPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-print of the SPF
adjustment pattern (front, back) again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, the SPF adjustment
pattern (front, back) is scanned again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used in execution
of the adjustment are displayed.
10) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved in
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the end
screen.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7) Press [EXECUTE] key, and scanning of the SPF adjustment 6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
pattern selected in step 2) is started. 3/($6(386+&$.(<

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:(;8&87,1*

5(35,17 (;(&87(
8) When [ALL] is selected, load the SPF adjustment pattern on

the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back sur-
face in the similar procedures.

[6] SIMULATION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General (Including basic operations)

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON
o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-5001N SIMULATION 6 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF/DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the RSPF/DSPF
control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF/DSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Paper feed desk/
transport clutch (LTRC). Large capacity tray (LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Fusing
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each
color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF/DSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/U2/LCC/PF troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point
by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF/DSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the RSPF/DSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After
completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor .(Setting must be made according to the auditor use Auditor
conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding
mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode)
54 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode)
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Felica card. Data clear
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process
(registration sensor). (Photoconductor/Developing)
13 Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Developing system
21 Used to set the half tone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
61 Used to adjust the color image density sensor. (The adjustment is made according to the input of SIM44-
13 to set the target value of the color sensor gain adjustment.)
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46 41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
54 Used to perform the engine half tone automatic density adjustment (dither).
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/
Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to adjust the high compression PDF ASIC. (Do not change default value in the field)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM
50-1).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF/DSPF mode) RSPF/DSPF
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF/DSPF mode). RSPF/DSPF
(This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
21 Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction)
(Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF/DSPF
resist roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF/DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF/DSPF mode document scan position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM).
2 Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print).
(The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section Printer
tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP PWB
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1 Section Scanner (reading)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed).
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
scan resolution (operation speed). (346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Item/Display Operation mode Default value (259.5mm/s)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI 600DPI 600DPI
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) (173.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI 1200DPI 1200DPI
(259.5mm/s) (86.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI

6,08/$7,2112
(86.5mm/s) 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
(;(&87(
2
(;(&87(
1-2 2-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto
(reading) section and the related circuits. document feed unit and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading) Section RSPF/DSPF
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ation speed).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
6&$11(56(1625&+(&.
MHPS
[RSPF]
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)

(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
[DSPF] SPPD2 DSPF document pass detector 2
Item/Display Operation mode Default value (Resist roller front document transport detection)
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD3 DSPF document pass detector 3
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) (Document scanning front document transport detection)
400DPI 400DPI SPPD4 DSPF document pass detector 4
(259.5mm/s) (Reverse gate front document transport detection)
600DPI 600DPI SPPD5 DSPF document pass detector 5
(173.0 mm/s) (Document reverse rear document transport detection)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPOD DSPF paper exit detector
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) SPRDMD DSPF random feed paper size detection
400DPI 400DPI SPLS1 DSPF document length detector 1 (Short)
(259.5mm/s) SPLS2 DSPF document length detector (Long)
600DPI 600DPI STLD DSPF document tray lower limit detector
(173.0 mm/s) STUD DSPF document tray upper limit detector
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detector

NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)$*,1*
63)6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$'
66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
633' 633' 633' 633'
633' 63/6 63/6 67038
SINGLE '28%/( (;(&87(
2-2

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 2-3
sors and the detectors in the document Purpose Operation test/check
feed unit section and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
Section RSPF/DSPF in the auto document feed unit and the con-
Operation/Procedure trol circuit.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Section RSPF/DSPF
played.
Operation/Procedure
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
are highlighted.
key.
[RSPF] 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SSET RSPF installation detection The selected load performs the operation.
SOCD RSPF open/close detector When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
SPED RSPF document empty detector
[RSPF]
SPPD1 RSPF document pass detector 1 SPFM RSPF transport motor
(Paper enter detection) SPRM_F RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation)
SPPD2 RSPF document pass detector 2 SPRM_R RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation)
(Resist roller front document transport detection) SPFC RSPF paper feed clutch
SPPD3 RSPF document pass detector 3 (Document scanning front SRRC SPF resist roller clutch
document transport detection)
SGS RSPF document exit gate solenoid
SPPD4 RSPF document pass detector 4
STMPS Finish stamp solenoid
(Reverse gate front document transport detection)
SPPD5 RSPF document pass detector 5 [DSPF]
(Document reverse rear document transport detection)
SPLS1 RSPF document length detector 1 (Short) SPUM DSPF paper feed motor
SPLS2 RSPF document length detector 2 (Long) SPFM DSPF transport motor
STMPU SPF stamp unit installation detector SPOM DSPF paper exit motor
SWD_LEN RSPF guide plate position SLUM DSPF lift-up motor
SWD_AD RSPF document width sensor (volume) output level SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch
[DSPF] SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
SRRBC DSPF resist roller break clutch
SSET DSPF installation detection
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch
SOCD DSPF open/close detector
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller break clutch
SCOV DSPF cover open/close detector
STRC DSPF transport clutch
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detector
STMPS Stamp solenoid
SPED1 DSPF document empty detector 1
SPED2 DSPF document empty detector 2
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detection 1 (Paper enter detection)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
<Saddle stitch finisher>
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1

6,08/$7,2112

PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2
7(67 &/26(
63)287387&+(&. PDCS Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor
63)0 6350B)
FPPD1 Paper delivery detector 1
63 50B5 63)&
655& 6*6
FPAPHS_F Paper alignment plate home position sensor F
67036 FPAPHS_R Paper alignment plate home position sensor R
FATPD Paper alignment tray paper detector
FGHPS Gripper home position sensor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FPLD Paper surface detector
FPPD2 Paper transport detector 2
FSPHS Saddle plate home position sensor
(;(&87( FSTPD Saddle exit tray paper detector
FSMRS Saddle motor rotation sensor
FTULD Tray upper limit detector
FTLLD Tray lower limit detector
3 FTLMRS Tray lift motor rotation sensor
FSHS Staple home position sensor
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
3-2 FSED Staple empty detector
Purpose Operation test/check FSLS Staple lead edge sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- FTPS Tray position sensor
sors and the detectors in the finisher and FCD1 Cover detector 1
the control circuit. FCD2 Cover detector 2
FSSW1 Safety switch 1
Section Finisher FCD Finisher connection detector
Operation/Procedure FSSSW1 Staple safety switch
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FFL Fan lock signal
played. FDRHS Delivery roller home position sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FPPD3 Paper transport detector 3
are highlighted. FSATPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
FSSSW2 Stapler safety switch 2
<Inner finisher> FPHHD Paper hold home position sensor
FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1") FSAPHS Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
FBED Tray paper detection FSPGHS Saddle paper guide home position sensor
FULD Tray upper limit detection FSRHS Saddle roller home position sensor
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection FPDD Delivery detector
FLLD Tray lower limit detection FSSHS Saddle staple home position sensor
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1 FSSES Saddle staple sensor
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2 FSSCS Saddle staple cover sensor
FRLD Roller up/down detection FSSSHS Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor
FBRD Belt separation detection FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front FPD Punch unit detection (connector)
FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear FPCHPS Punch home position sensor
FJPD Alignment guide position detection FPDFS Punch dust sensor
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection FPTS Punch timing sensor
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FSD Staple empty detection FPES2 Punch paper edge sensor 2
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection FPES3 Punch paper edge sensor 3
FDSW Door open detection FPES4 Punch paper edge sensor 4
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection FPPS Punch paper position sensor
FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1")
FPUC Punch unit connection detection
<4K finisher>
FPHPD Punch HP detection
1
FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2 FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3 FED Entry port paper detection
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4 FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FPDD Punch dust detection FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2 FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FCCD Tray approach detection
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDD1 Discharged paper detection
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
1 : Oct. 24 2008
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor
1 FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection FFJM Alignment motor front
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection FRJM Alignment motor rear
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection FSM Staple shift motor
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection FFSM Staple motor
FSD Staple empty detection FTLM Tray lift motor
FSTD Needle lead edge position detection FFANM Fan motor
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection FPNM Punch motor
FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection FPSM Punch side resist motor
FSAD Staple safety SW
<Saddle stitch finisher>
FSHTD Shutter open detection
FCD Upper door open detection PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FFDD Front cover open detection PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
F24V 24V output interruption detection PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection FPTM1 Paper transport motor 1
FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection FDRLM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection FGM Gripper motor
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FPAM-F Paper alignment motor F
FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FPAM-R Paper alignment motor R
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FSSM Stapler shift motor
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FSM Staple motor
FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FPTM2 Paper transport motor 2
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FSDM Saddle motor
FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FSPTM Saddle paper transport motor
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FSPAM Saddle paper alignment motor
FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection FSPM Saddle positioning motor
FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FSDSM Saddle staple motor
FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FPHS1 Paper holding solenoid 1
FPE Punch motor lock detection FPHS2 Paper holding solenoid 2
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FTLM Tray lift motor
FPHPD Punch HP detection FPM Punch motor
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection FPSM Punch shift motor
FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPDD Punch dust detection
<4K finisher is installed>
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
1 FINRPS Interface paper gate solenoid
FJPM Interface transport motor

FJFM Interface transport fan motor
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),16(1625&+(&. FFM Entry port transport motor
3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33'
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
)3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36
)'73' )3/' )33' )63+6 FFJM Alignment motor front
)673' )6056 )78/' )7//' FRJM Alignment motor rear
)7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6('
)6/6 )736 )&' )&'
FSM Staple shift motor
)66: )&' )666: ))/ FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
)'5+6 )33' )6$73' )666:
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
)3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6
)3'' )66+6 )66(6 )66&6 FFSM Staple motor
)666+6 FSWM Oscillation motor
FASM Rear edge assist motor

FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
3-3 FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in FPNM Punch motor
the finisher and the control circuit. FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 7(67
),1/2$'&+(&.
&/26(
key. 3'3*6 3'370 3'&) )370
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. )'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05
The selected load performs the operation. )660 )60 )7/0 )370
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. )6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630
<Inner finisher> )6'60 )3+6 )3+6

FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid

FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
FPDS Paddle solenoid
FBRS Belt separation solenoid (;(&87(
FRM Registration motor

FSWM Oscillation motor
1 : Oct. 24 2008
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust-

3-10
ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi-
Purpose Adjustment tion adjustment"
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
Section Finisher folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set-
Operation/Procedure
ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
panel. to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) setting r5.0mm)
<Inner finisher> In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
Setting Default lation, the above trouble will not occur.
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 <4K finisher>
ADJUST adjustment (front)
1 Default
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10 Item Display Item Set range
adjustment (rear) value
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10
adjustment adjustment (front)
(one position at the rear) B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 adjustment (one
FRONT adjustment position at the rear)
(one position in front) C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 adjustment (one
adjustment (center position position in front)
of two positions binding) D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50
F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 CENTER adjustment
adjustment (staple pitch of E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
two positions binding) adjustment
G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50
CENTER sensor

H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(paper transport direction) ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$ 6$''/(326,7,21
$
<Saddle stitch finisher> % )2/',1*326,7,21
& )5217$'-867
Setting Default ' 5($5$'-867

range value ( 67$3/(5($5
) 67$3/(5($55
A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50 * 67$3/()5217
POSITION adjustment + 67$3/()52175
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 - 75 50 , 67$3/(%27+
POSITION adjustment - 67$3/(3,7&+
. 381&+&(17(5
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50
/ 381&++2/(
ADJUST adjustment (Front)
2.
D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50
adjustment (Rear)
E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
adjustment
(one position at the rear) 4
F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 - 75 50
R adjustment (one position at
the rear) 4-2
G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 75 50 Purpose Operation test/check
FRONT adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
(one position in front)
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 55 50
FRONT R adjustment (one position in
ity tray, and the control circuit of those.
front) Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 - 55 50 Operation/Procedure
adjustment (two positions
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
at the center)
J STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 35 - 62 50
played.
adjustment (two positions The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
in pitch) are highlighted.
K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 - 65 50
<Desk>
CENTER
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 - 60 50 DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection
adjustment DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection
M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50 DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection
ST_POS adjustment DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection
N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50 DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
adjustment DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2

DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection
'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
'3)0 '/80 '38& '/80
DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection
DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection '38& '75&
DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection

DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection
<A4 LCC> (;(&87(
LPFD LCC transport sensor

LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor 4-5
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
L24VM LCC24V power monitor and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
LLSW LCC upper limit SW Section Paper feed desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
Operation/Procedure
[Check the ON operation]

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
7(67
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
'&6, '3)' '/8' '3('
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
'&63' '&66 '&66 '&66 the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
'&66 '&6, '3)' '/8' highlighted.
'3(' '&63' '&66 '&66
'&66 '&66 '6:B'6. [Check the OFF operation]
Press the highlighted button which is ON.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.
'75& '75&2))
/75& /75&2))

4-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
the control circuit of those.
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
display is maintained.
touch panel key.
The selected load performs the operation.
5
<Desk> 5-1
DPFM Desk main motor Purpose Operation test/check
DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor
cuit.
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch
DTRC Desk transport clutch Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
<A4 LCC>
The LCD is changed as shown below.
LPFM LCC transport motor The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
LLM LCC lift motor MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
checked.
LTRC LCC transport clutch
5-3
NO.05-01
SIMULATION
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 &23</$03&+(&.
7(67
2&&23</$03 '63)&23</$03
(;(&87(
5-4
5-2 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater charge lamp and the control circuit.
lamp and the control circuit. Section Process
Section Fusing Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
DL_K Discharge lamp K
Heater lamp operation check method: DL_C Discharge lamp C
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater DL_M Discharge lamp M
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
the frames.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main (For warm-up)

HL_LM Heater lamp lower main 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
',6&+$5*(/$03&+(&.
HL_E Heater lamp external '/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80 +/B/0
+/B(
$// (;(&87(
(;(&87(
6-2
6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
6-1
motor and its control circuit.
Section Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Operation/Procedure
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
key.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Load operation check method: sound.
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation Item/Display Content
sound. POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
(POFM_U, POFM_F and POFM_R are simultaneously
Section Item/Display Content ON.)
Transport/ PFM Transport motor OZFM Ozone fan motor
process RRM Registration motor PSFM Power cooling fan motor
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation) LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation) CCFM Process cooling fan motor
FUM Fusing motor RCFM Rear cooling fan motor
CPFM Tray paper feed motor FUFM Fusing fan motor
OSM Shifter motor PCSFM Toner cooling fan motor
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch CAFM Cartridge fan motor
1TURC Primary transport separation clutch MFPFAN Controller fan motor
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
WTNM Waste toner drive motor

PTCHT PTC heater 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)$1/2$'6(783
HPFM Horizontal transport motor 32)0 2=)0
Paper feed CLUM1 Tray 1 lift-up motor 36)0 /68)0
CPUC1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch &&)0

)8)0
5&)0
3&6)0
CLUM2 Tray 2 lift-up motor &$)0 0)3)$1
CPUC2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch

MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid
$// (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6-3
)(('287387&+(&.
3)0 550 320) 3205 Purpose Operation test/check
)80 &3)0 260 &3)& Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary
785& 3&66 :710 37&+7 transport unit and the control circuit.
+3)0 &/80 &38& &/80 Section Process (Transport)
&38& 038& 03)6 03*6 Operation/Procedure
/6866 1) Press [TC1] or [TC1_R] key to highlight it.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the load operation set in the above
procedure 1) is started.
(;(&87( (Separation operation of BLACK o COLOR o FREE or
BLACK o FREE is repeated.)
[TC1]
BLACK Monochrome mode Monochrome mode position o Color
position mode position o Non-transport
COLOR Color mode position position o (Monochrome mode
FREE Non-transport position) The operation is repeated.
position
[TC1_R]
BLACK Monochrome mode Monochrome mode position o
position Non-transport position o
FREE Non-transport (Monochrome mode position) The
position operation is repeated.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
75$16)(5/2$'&+(&. $*,1*7(676(77,1*
326,7,21
$*,1* ,17(59$/
0,6)(('',6$%/( )86,1*',6$%/(
:$5083',6$%/( '9&+(&.',6$%/(
6+$',1*',6$%/( &&'*$,1)5((
7& 7&B5 (;(&87(

(;(&87(
6-6
7-6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
separation.
cycle.
Section Fusing
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
2) Press [EXCUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing key.
pressure release are repeated.
2) Press [OK] key.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
played.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying o Fusing The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
applying pressure release o (Fusing pressure after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
release
(6 2/ & 2 1 1 2 , 7 $ / 8 0 , 6
7 6
( 7
38 7( 6 (0 ,7 ( /& <& * 1, *$ / $9 5( 71 ,
& ( 6 ( 0 , 7 ( / & < & $

6,08/$7,2112 $
7(67 &/26(
)86(5/2$'&+(&.
326,7,21
.2
)86(5 (;(&87(
7-8
Purpose Operation display
7 Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.

Section
Operation/Procedure
7-1
Purpose Setting
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
warm-up is displayed
aging.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6(&21'6
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.

The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup (;(&87(
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup

SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment
7-9
8
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
8-1
(Used to check the copy operation and the
image quality for each color). Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
Operation/Procedure
and the control circuit.
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
(Two or more colors can be selected.) low speed are also adjusted simulta-
The key of the selected color is highlighted. neously.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Process (Developing)
Copying is performed with the selected color. Operation/Procedure
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
ation menu in the simulation mode. panel.
K Setup/cancel of black
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
C Setup/cancel of cyan 3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
M Setup/cancel of magenta label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
35,17,1*&2/256(/(&7&2/2502'(
output for 30 sec.
. & 0 <
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting
Key Item/Display Content
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias 0-600
DVB_K set value at middle
speed
B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias 0-600
DVB_C set value at middle
(;(&87(
speed

C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias 0-600
DVB_M set value at middle
speed
7-12 D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias 0-600
Purpose Operation test/check DVB_Y set value at middle
speed
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias 0-600
setting (for aging operation)
DVB_K set value at low
Section RSPF/DSPF speed
Operation/Procedure B LOW SPEED C developing bias 0-600
DVB_C set value at low
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
speed
(Setting range:0 - 255)
C LOW SPEED M developing bias 0-600
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. DVB_M set value at low
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- speed
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. D LOW SPEED Y developing bias 0-600
DVB_Y set value at low
speed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*

$ 25,*,1$/6 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$ '96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.
$ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
& 0,''/(63((''9%B0
' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
2.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
8-2 Adjustment
Key Item/Display Content
range
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of SPEED GB_K value at middle speed
the main charger grid voltage in each B MIDDLE C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
printer mode and the control circuit. SPEED GB_C value at middle speed
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the C MIDDLE M charging/grid bias 150 - 850
low speed are also adjusted simulta- SPEED GB_M set value at middle
neously. speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
Section Process (Charging)
SPEED GB_Y value at middle speed
Operation/Procedure LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch GB_K value at low speed
panel. B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] keys. GB_C value at low speed
C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias 150 - 850
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
GB_M set value at low speed
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each GB_Y value at low speed

The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
output for 30 sec. 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. $ % 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0
' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

value of
range setting range
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transport Color K In low speed 51 - 255 95 2PA - 30PA 8PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference In middle 146 182 15PA
1
value speed
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C In low speed 95 8PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C In middle 146 15PA
speed
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M In low speed 95 8PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M In middle 146 15PA
speed
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y In low speed 95 8PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y In middle 146 15PA
speed
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/ K In low speed 95 8PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K White In middle 146 182 15PA
1
speed
1 : Oct. 24 2008

value of
range setting range
value
1 K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 130 151 2PA - 100PA 40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX transport bias paper Back surface 120 35PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX reference value Black/ Front surface 109 130 30PA
1
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX White Back surface 99 109 25PA
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 88 20PA
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 78 15PA
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/ Front surface 78 15PA
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX White Back surface 68 10PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 88 20PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
U TC2 GLOSSY CL Color Gloss paper 88 20PA
V TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
W TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 72 88 12PA
1
X TC2 OHP BW Black/ 72 78 12PA
White
Y TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 78 15PA
Z TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/ 78 15PA
White
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 63 8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transport In middle speed print 0 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning bias Cleaning 85 500V
reference value
AE VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 0 - 255 100 0 - (1.94) - 4.01KV 2.47KV
AF VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 100 2.47KV
AG VPTC LOW SPEED BK (AC constant Black/ Low speed 100 2.47KV
AH VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting) White Middle speed 100 2.47KV
AI FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 1 - 255 192 0.5KHz - 1.5KHz 0.5KHz
AJ FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 192 0.5KHz
AK FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency Black/ Low speed 192 0.5KHz
AL FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) White Middle speed 136 0.7KHz
AM DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color Low speed 0 - 255 93 0 - (0.68) - 2.14KV 1.0KV
AN DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control Middle speed 149 1.4KV
AO DCPTC LOW SPEED BK (DC constant Black/ Low speed 149 1.4KV
AP DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting White Middle speed 149 1.4KV
value)
AQ PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 1 Always ON
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment (TC environment table 6 steps)
setting
AR HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 0% - 100% 50%
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater (10 steps)
constant
operation (Duty
ratio setting)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.
$ % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
9 10
9-2 10-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the paper reverse supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
section (duplex section) and its control cir- related circuit.
cuit. Section Process (Developing)
Section Duplex Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When [ALL ] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
are highlighted.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1 toner cartridges.
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2 If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&.
'6:B$'8 $33' $33' tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making
a few black background copy in the single color copy mode
of the target color.
TNM_K Toner motor K

TNM_C Toner motor C
TNM_M Toner motor M
TNM_Y Toner motor Y

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(502725$&7,9$7,21
710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<
9-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure

(;(&87(
key.
The selected load performs the operation. 13
13--
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
ADUM_U ADU motor upper
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section

Operation/Procedure
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'8/2$'&+(&. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
$'80B/ $'80B8 $'8*6
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
(;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
14 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
14--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
U2/LCC/PF troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
17
17--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

15 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
15--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large
capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Section LCC
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
21
21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
$5(<28685("
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
<(6 12 (;(&87(
clarify.
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
16 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
16--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 150K
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
Operation/Procedure (TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 100K
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. (COLOR) (Color) 999 : Free
OTHER (BW) Black and white other Self print quantity

6,08/$7,2112
counter
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783 OTHER (COL) Color other counter Self print quantity
$ 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5727$/
$
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
% 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&2/25
ALL (Total)

MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
COL (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transport unit print
counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transport unit
accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary
2.
transport unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transport unit
print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transport unit
22 accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary
22-1
transport unit (Day)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ FUSER UNIT (U) Fusing unit print counter
Check (Heat roller upper)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print counter
section and each operation mode. (L&E) (Heat roller lower and
external)
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
FUSER ACUM Use day of fusing unit
Section DAY (U) (Heat roller upper)
Operation/Procedure FUSER ACUM Use day of fusing unit
Change the display page with [n] [p] key on the touch panel. DAY (L&E) (Heat roller lower and
external)
TOTAL OUT (BW) Total output quantity of All prints including FUSER WEB Fusing web cleaning send
black and white jams SEND counter
TOTAL OUT (COL) Total output quantity of All prints including FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter
color jams FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fusing web unit
TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity of black Effective paper DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated number of
and white (including self print, drum rotations K (%)
excluding jams) DRUM LIFE (C) Accumulated number of
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity of full Effective paper drum rotations C (%)
color (including self print, DRUM LIFE (M) Accumulated number of
excluding jams) drum rotations M (%)
TOTAL (2COL) Total use quantity of 2-color Effective paper DRUM LIFE (Y) Accumulated number of
(including self print, drum rotations Y (%)
excluding jams) DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated number of
TOTAL (3COL) Total use quantity of 3-color Effective paper developer rotations K (%)
(including self print, DEVE LIFE (C) Accumulated number of
excluding jams) developer rotations C (%)
TOTAL Total use quantity of single Effective paper DEVE LIFE (M) Accumulated number of
(SGL_COL) color (including self print, developer rotations M (%)
excluding jams) DEVE LIFE (Y) Accumulated number of
COPY (BW) Black and white copy Billing target developer rotations Y (%)
counter (excluding self print) PTC PTC counter
COPY (COL) Full color copy counter Billing target
(excluding self print)

COPY (2COL) 2-color copy counter Billing target 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(excluding self print) &2817(5',63/$<
727$/287%: 35,17&2/
COPY (SGL_COL) Single color copy counter Billing target
727$/287&2/ 35,17&2/
(excluding self print) 727$/%: 35,176&/B&2/
PRINT (BW) Black and white print Billing target 727$/&2/ '2&),/%:
counter (excluding self print) 727$/&2/ '2&),/&2/
PRINT (COL) Full color print counter Billing target 727$/&2/ '2&),/&2/
727$/6*/B&2/ '2&),/6*/&2/
&23<%: 27+(5%:
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print counter Billing target &23<&2/ 27+(5&2/
(excluding self print) &23<&2/ 0$,17(1$1&($//
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print counter Billing target &23<6*/B&2/ 0$,17(1$1&(&2/
(excluding self print) 35,17%: 7&%(/7

35,17&2/ 7&%(/75$1*(
PRINT (SGL_COL) Single color print counter Billing target

DOC FIL (BW) Black and white document Billing target
filing print counter (excluding self print)
DOC FIL (COL) Color document filing print Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
DOC FIL (2COL) 2-color document filing Billing target
print counter (excluding self print)
DOC FIL Single color document filing Billing target
(SGL COL) print counter (excluding self print)
22-2

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
7(67
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed )/))
and troubles. (When the number of total )/))
jam is considerably great, it is judged as ))+(

8)/(
necessary for repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
0$&+,1(-$0
563)'63)-$0
7528%/( 22-5
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section).
Section Firmware
Operation/Procedure
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.

When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
22-3 S/N Serial No.

Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the LANGUAGE Language support data version
misfeed count of each position.
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
* Presumption of the faulty point by this IMG DATA ROM MFP ASIC Flash ROM data
data is possible. COLOR PROFILE Color profile
Section PCU PCU
Operation/Procedure SCU SCU
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one SPF SPF
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
FAX2 (MAIN) FAX 2-Line (Main section) (Japan only)
*For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
DESK Desk unit
OTHERS.
LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
PUNCH Punch unit
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< NIC NIC
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1
POWER-CON Power controller
/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&& E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6
ESCP ESCP font ROM
)'230)7
PDL PDL font ROM
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section)
ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section)
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
61
,&80$,1 ),1,6+(5
,&8%227 381&+
22-4 /$1*8$*( 1,&
*5$3+,& 32:(5&21
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check ,0*'$7$520 (0$18$/
&2/25352),/( :$7(50$5.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- 3&8 (6&3
tory. 6&8 3'/
63) $&5(0$,1

Section )$;0$,1121( $&5('$7$
Operation/Procedure )$;0$,1121(

'(6.121(
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. /&&
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in
tht "[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".
22-6
6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 7(67 &/26(
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
63)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data 6&$1
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the 67$3/(5
firmware version, and the counter list. 381&+(5
67$03
Section 6$''/(67$3/(5
Operation/Procedure 6$''/(9)2/'
&29(5
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print +3B21
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. 2&/$037,0(
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) '63)/$037,0(
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
22-9
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version,
counter data, etc. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
2 SIM50-24 data Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
3 Data related to the process control quantity) of each paper feed section.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
1) . Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
'$7$35,1702'(
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
$ '$7$3$77(51 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
$ TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter

MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
(Paper reverse section)
(;(&87( 2.

6,08/$7,2112
22-8 7(67
3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$<
&/26(
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 75$<

75$<
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations 75$<
(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, 75$<

0)7727$/
and the scan (reading) unit. 0)7+($9<
Section 0)72+3
0)7(19
Operation/Procedure /&&
$'8
The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.

SPF Document feed quantity
SCAN Number of times of scan
STAPLER Staple counter 22-10
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter (option, internal hardware).
COVER Cover open/close counter Section
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection Operation/Procedure
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
The system configuration is displayed.
(* hour * minutes)
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section (The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
(* hour * minutes) played.)
MACHINE MX-4100N Main unit

MX-5000N
MX-4101N
MX-5001N
SPF MX-RPX2 Automatic document
STANDARD feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DEX8 Desk unit
MX-DEX9
LCC MX-LCX1 Large capacity tray
(LCC)

6,08/$7,2112
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch unit 7(67 &/26(
)$;&2817(5',63/$<
MX-PNX5A )$;287387
MX-PNX6A )$;287387B/
)$;6(1'
MX-PNX6B )$;5(&(,9('
MX-PNX6C 6(1',0$*(6
MX-PNX6D 6(1',0$*(6B/
6(1'7,0(
FINISHER MX-FNX9 Finisher
5(&(,9('7,0(
MX-FN10 $&56(1'
MX-FN11
FAX MX-FXX2 FAX kit
NETWORK SCANNER MX-NSX1/ Network scanner

STANDARD expansion kit
PRINTER MX-PBX3/ Printer expansion kit
STANDARD
22-12
PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
SECURITY MX-FR11U Security kit (DSK) Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF/DSPF misfeed
commercial version positions and the number of misfeed at
MX-FR11 Security kit (DSK) each position. (When the number of mis-
authentication version feed is considerably great, it can be judged
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration as necessary for repair.)
module
Section RSPF/DSPF
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity Operation/Procedure
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 I-Fax expansion kit *For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
ACM MX-AMX2 Application OTHERS.
communication module
EAM MX-AMX3 External account
module

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
ACRE MX-EBX3 Enhanced compression 63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
kit (ACRE)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(

7(67
0$&+,1(6<67(0
0$&+,1(0;)1 6(&85,7<0;)58
63)67$1'$5' $,00;$0;
67$03$568 6'5$06<60%
'(6. 0;'(; 6'5$0,&80%
/&& 0;/&; +''0%
381&+(50;31;$ 1,&67$1'$5'
),1,6+(50;)1; %$5&2'($53)
)$;0;);; )217$53)
)$;0;)/; ,17(51(7)$;0;):;
)$;0(025<$500 $&0 0;$0;
+$1'6(70;+1; ($0 0;$0;

22-13
360;3.; 9(1'25&96+
;360;38; $&5(0;(%; Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
22-11 process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
Operation/Procedure
receive) of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed) The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
are displayed. DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX print quantity counter (for line 2) (K)
(Japan only) DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
FAX SEND FAX send counter (C)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) (M)
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
(Japan only) (Y)
SEND TIME FAX send time DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time DRUM TURN C Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (C)
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding DRUM TURN M Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (M)
communications DRUM TURN Y Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (Y)
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
DRUM DAY C Number of day that used drum (Day) C FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
DRUM DAY M Number of day that used drum (Day) M SMB SEND Number of SMB send
DRUM DAY Y Number of day that used drum (Day) Y USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C) SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M) SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y) SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color)
(cm) (K)
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance

(cm) (C) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance 1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$<

1(76&125*B%:
(cm) (M) 1(76&125*B&/
DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance 1(76&125*B&/
(cm) (Y) 1(76&125*B6*/
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) ,17(51(7)$;287387
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
DEVE TURN C Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (C) ,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
DEVE TURN M Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (M) ,17(51(7)$;6(1'
DEVE TURN Y Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (Y) 0$,/&2817(5

)73&2817(5
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K 60%6(1'
DEVE DAY C Number of day that used developer (Day) C 86%&17
DEVE DAY M Number of day that used developer (Day) M 75,$/02'(B% &
DEVE DAY Y Number of day that used developer (Day) Y

TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C) 22-90
TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K)
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (C) Section
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (M) Operation/Procedure
TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (Y) 1) Change the display with [n] [p] key.
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$<
'580&75*. '580'$<. All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
'580&75*& '580'$<&
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
'580&75*0 '580'$<0
'580&75*< '580'$<<
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
'5805$1*(. '(9(&75*. PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
'5805$1*(& '(9(&75*& PS FONT LIST
'5805$1*(0 '(9(&75*0
PS KANJI FONT LIST
'5805$1*(< '(9(&75*<
'5807851. '(9(5$1*(.
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
'5807851& '(9(5$1*(& NIC PAGE
'58078510 '(9(5$1*(0 Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
'5807851< '(9(5$1*(<
list (*) GROUP LIST

PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
22-19
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
related to the scan - image send. ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
5GEVKQP
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
Operation/Procedure ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
Change the display with [n] [p] key. Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
number table
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
counter (B/W scan job) allow address
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity domain table
counter (Color scan job) To Email INBOUND ROUTING LIST
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity Transfer table list
counter (2-Color scan job) To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity Transfer list
counter (Single-color scan job) Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
OUTPUT model, this setting is invalid.
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( operation or load operation name)
/,6735,17
$//&867206(77,1*/,67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67
STANDARD Reference value (ms)
3&/,17(51$/)217/,67 3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67 CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
36)217/,67 36.$1-,)217/,67 final paper
36(;7(1'(')217/,67 1,&3$*(
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job
,1',9,'8$//,67 *5283/,67
352*5$0/,67 0(025<%2;/,67
on the final paper
$//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67 MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
$'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
$//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67 $17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67
$17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67 has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
23
23-2
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is (;(&87(
required.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
24
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
24-1

Purpose Data clear
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'( Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
(;(&87(
MACHINE Machine JAM counter

SPF RSPF/DSPF JAM counter
23-80 TROUBLE Trouble counter

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- -$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
tion and the paper transport section. Used 0$&+,1( 63) 7528%/(
to output the list of the operation status of

the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport sec-
tion.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
24-2
6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Data clear 7(67
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num- 63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
ber of prints) of each paper feed section. 67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
Section +3B21 2&/$037,0( '63)/$037,0(
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter 24-4
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter Purpose Data clear
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
printer counters of the transport unit and
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
nance, clear the counters.)
ADU ADU paper feed counter Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
&/26(
75$< 75$< 75$< 75$< 3) Press [YES] key.
0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)7(19 The target counter is cleared.
/&& $'8
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)

MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transport unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transport unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transport unit (Day)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
TC2 BELT Secondary transport unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transport unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
24-3 TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary transport unit (Day)
FUSER UNIT (U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
Purpose Data clear
FUSER UNIT (L&E) Fusing unit print counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the (Heat roller lower and external)
scan (reading) unit counter. FUSER DAY (U) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
Section FUSER DAY (L&E) Fusing unit use day
(Heat roller lower and external)
Operation/Procedure
PTC PTC counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web send counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FUSER WEB Fusing web print counter
3) Press [YES] key. FUSER WEB DAY Fusing web unit use day

SPF RSPF/DSPF document feed counter 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
SCAN Scan counter 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5

0$,17(1$1&($// 0$,17(1$1&(&2/ 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*(
STAPLER Staple counter
7&%(/7'$< 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*( 7&%(/7'$<
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter )86(581,78 )86(581,7/ ( )86(5'$<8 )86(5'$</ (
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter 37& )86(5:(%6(1' )86(5:(% )86(5:(%'$<
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter

COVER Cover open/close counter
HP_ON HP detection count
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF LAMP TIME (*) DSPF section lamp total lighting time
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
* Displayed only when the DSPF is installed.
24-5

6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Data clear 7(67
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After &23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25
replacement of developer, clear the

counter.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared

automatically.
24-7
Developer cartridge print counter (K) Purpose Data clear
K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
replacement of the OPC drum, clear the
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
counter.)
C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C Section
Developer cartridge print counter (M) Operation/Procedure
M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
3) Press [YES] key.
Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y The target counter is cleared.
Drum cartridge print counter (K)

K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5 Number of day that used drum (Day) K
. & 0 < Drum cartridge print counter (C)
C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used drum (Day) C
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used drum (Day) M
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580&75*&2817(5&(/$5
24-6 . & 0 <
Purpose Data clear

Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)

24-9
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR)
SINGLE COLOR Single color Purpose Data clear
2COLOR 2-color Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) 24-15
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR) Purpose Data clear
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors)
scan mode and the image send.
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color)
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) Section
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR) Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5 3) Press [YES] key.
35,17%: 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/
35,176&/B&2/ 27+(5%: 27+(5&2/
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity

counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (single color scan job)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
24-10 SEND OUTPUT
Purpose Data clear INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
(Only when FAX is installed) SEND
Section MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
Operation/Procedure FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
3) Press [YES] key. SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
The target counter is cleared. SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1) SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color)
FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX Print quantity counter (for line 2)
(Japan only)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
6,08/$7,2112
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) 1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) 1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B6*/
(Japan only) ,17(51(7)$;287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387

,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9( ,17(51(7)$;6(1'
SEND TIME FAX send time 0$,/&2817(5 )73&2817(5
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 60%6(1' 86%&17
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding 75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B%:

6&$172+''B&/ 6&$172+''B&/
communications 6&$172+''B6*/

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;287387 )$;287387B/ )$;6(1' )$;5(&(,9('
6(1',0$*(6 6(1',0$*(6B/ 6(1'7,0( 5(&(,9('7,0(
$&56(1'
24-30
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word.
Section
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
(default).
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
simulation.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
&/26(
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
7&'B.
7&'B&
7&'B0
7&'B<
7&9B.
7&9B&
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
7&9B0
7&9B<
24-31
Purpose Data clear /2: 0,''/( (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-

word.
25-2
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
2) Press [YES] key.
matic adjustment)
The service mode password is initialized.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
set the password to "service" (default).
Operation/Procedure

1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
&/26(
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
erence toner density level is not set normally.
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup-
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may
occur, causing a trouble.
25
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
25-1
low speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
Purpose Operation test/check AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
oping section. adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
Section Process (Developing section)
mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
Operation/Procedure
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M
mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K
played. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C
the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M
TCD_K Toner density sensor K process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y
TCD_C Toner density sensor C
TCD_M Toner density sensor M
TCD_Y Toner density sensor Y
TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
TCV_C Toner density sensor control voltage level C
TCV_M Toner density sensor control voltage level M
TCV_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level Y

6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
6,=(6(783
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
/&& h $ %
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
*/%66(7 *5$0 /%6
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<

. & 0 < (;(&87(
26-3
26 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor
26-1 .(Setting must be made according to the
Purpose Setting auditor use conditions.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Section Paper exit
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Default
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) value
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1). BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
Item/Display Content EC1 EC1 mode operation
A 0 YES Paper exit tray : YES OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
1 NO Paper exit tray : NO AUDITOR vendor is used.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can
be controlled.)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( P VENDOR2 Vendor mode
5,*+775$<6(783 communicating with the
$ <(612
$ parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer)

(Japan only)
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
(*1)
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
P OTHER NOT USED
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print
2.
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
26-2 performed in the duplex
Purpose Setting print mode.
If the remaining money
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
expires during continuous
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size printing, the sheets in the
is changed, this simulation must be exe- machine are discharged
cuted to change the paper size in software.) without being printed on the
Section Paper feed back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
Operation/Procedure
performed in the duplex
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel. print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
LCC 0 8.5 x 11 printing every surface in all
1 A4 the printing process.)
2 B5 If the remaining money
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM expires during printing, the
1 LBS sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_ C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
sensor. E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
passes the paper exit $h&281783
sensor in the main unit, the $ 727$/%:
$
right tray, and the after % 727$/&2/
& 0$,17(%:

process unit.
' 0$,17(&2/
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC. ( '(9%:
) '(9&2/
(*2) Details of the vendor mode

Completion Insufficient money during Completion
of the copy job of the
specified specified
BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money 2.
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 26-6
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 Purpose Setting
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
Operation 1: magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, Section
which can be changed in the system setting. Operation/Procedure
Operation 2: 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3:
The selected set content is saved.
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
U.S.A. United States of America

6,08/$7,2112
CANADA Canada
7(67 &/26(
$8',7256(783 INCH Inch series, other destinations
%8,/7,1$8',725 3 (&
JAPAN Japan
2876,'($8',725 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
327+(5 9(1'25(;
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
9(1'25(;08/7,
6B9(1'25 EUROPE Europe
'2&$'- 21 2)) U.K. United Kingdom
3)$'- 21 2))

AUS. Australia
9(1'2502'( 02'( 02'( 02'(
&2817837,0,1* )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287 AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
CHINA China

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(67,1$7,216(783
86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
26-5 $%B% (8523( 8. $86
Purpose Setting $%B$ &+,1$
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total

counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
11x17 size)
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.

2) Enter the setting value with 10-key

1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
value
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color) (Japan)
2
(Except
Japan)
26-10 26-30
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
scanner. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
Section standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
0 Control allowed
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
( 0 : YES 1 : NO ) 1 Control inhibited
1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
to the power frequency, etc.
1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783
$ 75,$/02'(<(612
$
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2. &(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
$ <(612
$

26-18
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Section
Operation/Procedure 2.

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-35
3) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
Default trouble history when a same trouble
Item Display Content occurred repeatedly. There are two display
value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited. modes: display as one trouble and display
0 as several series of troubles.
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited. Section
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed. Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0 Only once display.
721(56$9(02'(6(783
$ &23<<(612 1 Any time display.
$ % 35,17(5<(612
2) Press [OK] key.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
$ 21&($1<
$

2.
2.
26-38 26-49
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
maintenance life is reached. mode.
Section Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
2) Press [OK] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23<63(('02'(6(783
Default 3267&$5' /2: +,*+
value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
1: STOP) (Print Continue)
1 Continue/Stop setting of print
when the fusing web is end
(Print Stop)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1* 26-50
$ 0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
$ % )86(5:(%(1'&217,18(6723 Purpose Setting

Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
2. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
26-41 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
Enable/Disable setting to *1/*2
in the center binding mode.
C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
Section FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
Operation/Procedure limited. to *3
1 Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
0 AMS Disable
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
1 AMS Enable
(PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1
2) Press [OK] key. 1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
<Default value of each destination> print counters are displayed.
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
COLOR ON during paper feed
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
1 Paper feed tray color display
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) OFF during paper feed
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) (*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Destination Item A Item B Item D

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
USA 1 0 2
7(67
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1* CANADA 1 0 2
$ <(612
$ INCH 1 0 2

JAPAN 1 7 2
AB_B 1 0 2
EUROPE 1 0 2
UK 0 0 2
AUS 1 0 2
AB_A 1 0 2
CHINA 1 0 2
2.
(*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
26-52
played)
Purpose Setting
Mode 2-Color/Single
Set value Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
Single 2-color Counter
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
0 OFF OFF OFF
or not.
1 OFF ON OFF
2 ON OFF OFF Section
3 ON ON OFF Operation/Procedure
4 OFF OFF ON 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON 0 Count up
7 ON ON ON 1 No count up
(*3) 2) Press [OK] key.

Target Target paper setting
paper 0 1 Destination Default
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped The operation U.S.A 0 (Counted)
saddle envelope when 30 sheets of a same is stopped CANADA 0 (Counted)
stitch kind are discharged when the paper INCH 0 (Counted)
finisher continuously. When, however, exit tray is full
JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
different kinds of sheets are or when 500
AB_B 0 (Counted)
mixed and discharged and sheets (94mm
less than 30 sheets of a kind thick) are EUROPE 0 (Counted)
are continuously discharged, discharged. U.K. 0 (Counted)
the operation is performed AUS. 1 (Not counted)
similarly to that of setting AB_A 0 (Counted)
value "1". CHINA 0 (Counted)
Label The operation is stopped
sheet, tab when 100 sheets of a same
sheet, OHP kind are discharged

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
continuously. When, however, $%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
different kinds of sheets are $ <(612
$
mixed and discharged and
less than 100 sheets of a kind
are continuously discharged,

the operation is performed
similarly to that of setting
value "1".
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped If it is set to "1,"
finisher envelope when 10 sheets of a same the operation is
kind are discharged stopped when
continuously. When, however, the paper exit 2.
different kinds of sheets are tray is full or
mixed and discharged and when 250
less than 10 sheets of a kind sheets
26-53
are continuously discharged, (35.5mm thick)
the operation is performed are discharged. Purpose Setting
similarly to that of setting Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
value "1".
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
Label The operation is stopped
(copy mode)
sheet, tab when 100 sheets of a same
sheet, OHP kind are discharged Section
continuously. When, however, Operation/Procedure
different kinds of sheets are
mixed and discharged and
less than 100 sheets of a kind
are continuously discharged, 0 Inhibit
the operation is performed 1 Allow (Default)
similarly to that of setting
value "1".
2) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
)81&7,216(77,1* (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$ %:5(9(56(<(6 $ <(612
$ % &2/2502'( $
& ),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
' &2/2502'(35,17(5
( )(('75$<&2/25<(6
2. 2.
26-54

Purpose Setting 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance /,0,76+((76
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting /,0,7&23,(6 21 2))

/,0,76+((76/
(printer mode) 6$''/(&23,(6 21 2))
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Inhibit
1 Allow (Default)

2) Press [OK] key.

26-69

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Setting
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
$ toner near end.

Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
2.
Setting Default
range value
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
26-65 PREPARATION message is
Purpose Setting (0 : YES 1 : NO) displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. 1 The toner preparation
message is not
Section displayed.
Operation/Procedure B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1
Use the touch key to set. END message is
(0 : YES 1 : NO) displayed.
Set Setting Default 1 The toner near end
Item Content message is not
value range value
displayed.
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of 30 or 50 50
SHEETS stapling: Max. 30 C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2
TONER END
50 Number of sheets of
stapling: Max. 50 2 Operation STOP in
TONER END
LIMIT ON Number of sets of stapling: ON or ON
COPIES Max. 50 sets OFF 3 Operation STOP in
TONER END
OFF Number of sets of stapling:
Not Limited D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 1
COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of 25 or 30 25
Enable after TONER
SHEETS(L) stapling: Max. 25
NEAR END.
30 Number of sheets of
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
stapling: Max. 30
ALART status send of E-mail
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in ON or ON
alert
COPIES the saddle staple: Limited OFF
When the toner
(*1)
preparation message
OFF Number of sets loaded in
is displayed (in near
the saddle staple: Not
near toner end)
Limited
1 Condition for Low
*1: 1-5 sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets)/ status send of E-mail
10-15 sheets (10 sets) alert
When near toner end
<List of Default values and set values for each destination>
26-73
Set value
Destination Toner preparation Purpose Setting
Toner near end message
message Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) tity) adjustment
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Section
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Operation/Procedure
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 3) Press [OK] key.
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
(Contents of set items)
Setting
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display Item/Display Content Default value
range
when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%. A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
when the toner near end status is reached. (M) (shade delete amount:
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
end status is reached.
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
(S) delete quantity) amount:
the setting value. adjustment 0.1mm/step)
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$ '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%. $ % '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed

1: Print Disable after toner near end
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
4: 100 sheets print Enable after toner near end 2.

NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
26-74
printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be Purpose Setting
resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this Section
case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
Operation/Procedure
tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.

2) Press [OK] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(51($5(1'6(77,1* Setting Default
$ 721(535(3$5$7,21<(612 Item/Display Content
$ range value
% 721(51($5(1'<(612
& 721(5(1'

A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
' 721(5(1'&2817 MODE OSA trial mode.
( 721(5(0$,/$/$57 (0 : YES 1 : NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
canceled.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
$ 26$75,$/02'(<(612
2. $

2.
26-78 27-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
operation panel. ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Section ber. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter a password with 10 key. (5 - 8 digits) Operation/Procedure
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [SET] key. 3) Press [SET] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( USER Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
523(3$66:25'6(77,1* FAX_NO.
35(6(17
1(: 6(7
SERVA Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
TEL_NO. If the connection process is not completed normally
when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may
be continuously made every time when the power is
turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
35(6(17
1(: 6(7
86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
27
27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function) 3$86(
Section
Operation/Procedure
27-4
Purpose Setting
0 Not detection Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
1 Detection auto send. (FSS function)
2) Press [OK] key. Section

The set value in step 1) is saved. Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/( 3) Press [OK] key.
$
$ ',6$%/(<(6

2.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for 0-3 0 1
send in NE-B
mode
NEB2 Send/Receive 1
in NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for 2
send in NE-F
mode
NFB2 Send/Receive 3
in NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when 1 - 15 3
busy
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when 1 - 15 1
error
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
G TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (C) 74% - 50% timing setting (C) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
H TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (M) 74% - 50% timing setting (M) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
I TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (Y) 74% - 50% timing setting (Y) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783
$ )6602'(1(%
$ % 5(75<B%86<
& 7,0(50,187(B%86<

' 5(75<B(5525
( 7,0(50,187(B(5525

) 721(525'(57,0,1*.
* 721(525'(57,0,1*&
+ 721(525'(57,0,1*0

, 721(525'(57,0,1*<
2.
27-5

7(67 &/26(
7$*6(77,1*
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- 35(6(17
1(: 6(7
tion allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.) (FSS function)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
27-6
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. $ )81&7,21<(612
$ % $/(57<(612
(FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Allow (Default)
1 Inhibit

27-9
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783 Purpose Setting
$ <(612
$ Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-

ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2.
3) Press [OK] key.
27-7 A FEED TIME 1 0- Threshold value of the paper

Purpose Setting 100 transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. B FEED TIME 2 0- Threshold value of the paper
(FSS function) 100 transport time between sensors
Section (RSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
Operation/Procedure
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. RETRY (11: Default)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. D JAM ALERT 1- Alert judgment threshold value
3) Press [OK] key. 100 for occurrence of continuous
jams
The set value in step 2) is saved. Alert judgment threshold value
for occurrence of continuous
A FSS 0 FSS function enable jams (Setting of the number of
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default) times of continuous jams as the
B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default) alert for continuous jams)
1 Alert call disable (Default: 10 times)
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to * Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.) 100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
*2 Alert send timing * Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.

6,08/$7,2112
Service call When pressing Service call. 7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is $ )(('7,0(
reached. $ % )(('7,0(
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for & *$,1$'-8670(175(75<
' -$0$/(57
a new product)
Alert resend
2.
Display Item
27-10
Occurrence Retry Content
Purpose Data clear Item name
date (Display) number
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
information. (FSS function) ADJ5 99:99:99 adjustment retry history
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits DSPF gain adjustment
Section
ADJ1 99:99:99 retry history
Operation/Procedure DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits (Only the DSPF model is
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ADJ1 99:99:99 displayed.)
2) Press [YES] key. DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ2 99:99:99
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ3 99:99:99
Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
ADJ4 99:99:99
Half tone process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history ADJ5 99:99:99
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only)

Paper transport time between sensors 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
'$7(5(75<
/68

/68
6,08/$7,2112 &/26( '(6.
7(67
'(6.
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5 ),1,6+(5
),1,6+(5
'63)
'63)
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-

27-12
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, half-tone
process control and the automatic registra-
27-11
tion adjustment error history.
Purpose Others (FSS Function)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication Section
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
Operation/Procedure
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
The high density, the half tone, and the automatic registration
Section adjustment error history are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner HV_ERR1 High density error history 1
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. HV_ERR2 High density error history 2
HV_ERR3 High density error history 3
Display Item HV_ERR4 High density error history 4
Occurrence Retry Content HV_ERR5 High density error history 5
Item name
date (Display) number H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial communication H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2
99:99:99 retry number history H_TONE ERR3 Half tone error history 3
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits display H_TONE ERR4 Half tone error history 4
99:99:99 * For DSPF1/DSPF2,
H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits only the DSPF model
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
99:99:99 is displayed.
DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF1 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99

6,08/$7,2112
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits 7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
99:99:99 '$7((5525&2'(
+9B(55
FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits +9B(55
+9B(55
99:99:99 +9B(55
+9B(55
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain +B721((55
ADJ1 99:99:99 adjustment retry history +B721((55

+B721((55
+B721((55
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits +B721((55
ADJ2 99:99:99 $8725(*$'-

$8725(*$'-
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits $8725(*$'-

$8725(*$'-
ADJ3 99:99:99 $8725(*$'-
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits

ADJ4 99:99:99
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [n] [p] key.
Code
Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time
passing time
sensors
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
/DSPF sensors 1
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2
sensors 3
sensors 4
sensors 5
sensors 6
sensors 7
sensors 8
sensors 9
sensors 10

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)

27-14

7(67 &/26(
)667(6702'(6(783
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection $ &211(&7,217(6702'(212))
$
test mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
1 : Oct. 24 2008
30 CPFD1
CLUD1
Tray 1 transport detection
Tray 1 upper limit detection
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
30-1 CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Purpose Operation test/check CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
Section CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
Operation/Procedure CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
played. CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
PPD2 Resist detection MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
POD1 Fusing rear detection MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
TFD2 Paper exit full detection
TFD3 Main unit right tray paper exit full detection
HPOS Shifter home detection 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
DSW_R Right door open/close detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection &66 &66 &66 &66
&3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection &66 &66 &66 &66
DHPD_K K phase detection 03)' 03/' 0723 0723
03('
1 DHPD_C C phase detection
(50-sheet machine only)
DHPD_M M phase detection
DHPD_Y Y phase detection
DHPD_CL CL phase detection

1TNFD Waste toner full detection
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detection
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
Primary transport belt separation CL detection
Primary transport belt separation BK detection
33
33-1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32' Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
32' 7)' 7)' +326 reader sensor and the control circuit.
'6:B5 '6:B& '6:B) '+3'B.
'+3'B&/ 71)' +/3&' 78'B&/ Section
78'B.
Operation/Procedure
played.
lighted.
CARD Card Yes/No detection

DATA Card number signal detection
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection
30-2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- &$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&.
sors and the detectors in the paper feed &$5' '$7$ &/2&.
section and the control circuits.

Section
Operation/Procedure
played.
lighted.

33-2 40-7
Purpose Data clear Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
Felica card. manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Section Paper feed
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The ID (IDM) information of Felica card in the HDD is deleted. 3) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Default
&$5',''$7$&/($5
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231
(A4)
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1*
$ 0$;326,7,21
$ % 3326,7,21
40
& 3326,7,21
' 0,1326,7,21
40-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
Section Paper feed 2.
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). 41-1
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation test/check
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). ment size sensor and the control circuit.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. played.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is lighted.
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width Close: Highlighted
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) sensor status Document present: Highlighted
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

3'6(1625&+(&.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 2&6: 3' 3' 3'
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 3' 3' 3' 3'
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

(;(&87(
1 : Oct. 24 2008
41-2 41-3
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
detection level. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section Section
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
place a document on the document table. sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The sensor level without document is recognized. The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
2) Set A3 (11 x 17") paper on the document table, and press
Item/Display Content Detection level range
[EXECUTE] key.
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625',63/$<
2&6:
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
(;(&87(
3'> @
3'> @

43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
1 [41-sheet machine]
Default value Destination
Setting
Item/Display Content Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 linkage
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B (NOTE)
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 180 175 180 175 180 {
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 115 110 115 110 115 {
C HL_E READY Ready standby TH_E set value 70 - 230 170 185 175 185 185 185 {
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 180 175 180 180 185 {
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 105 130 120 130 130 130 {
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225 {
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 180 175 180 180 185 {
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 130 120 130 130 130 {
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225 {
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 {
value
K WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set 30 - 200 30 30 30 30 30 30 {
value
L WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 30 - 255 115 180 115 180 115 180 {
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
range
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
R HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 190 190 190 190 190
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
U HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 150 150 160 160 160 160 {
Z HL_E E-STAR Preheating TH_E set value 30 - 200 150 150 160 160 160 160 {
AA PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM, TH_E 30 - 200 170 170 175 175 175 175 {
set value
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
AC HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value 0 - 255 200 200 200 200 200 200
AD HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value 0 - 255 140 140 140 140 140 140
AE HL_E HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_E set value 0 - 255 220 220 220 220 220 220
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 175 185 180 185 180 185 {
or below
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 30 - 200 120 130 125 130 125 130 {
or below
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L TH_E set value when WarmUp at 120qC or 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225 {
below
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME AF-AH applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 25 25 25 25 25 25
completion of Ready)
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 170 185 180 185 180 185 {
or above
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 30 - 200 120 130 125 130 125 130 {
or above
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H TH_E set value when WarmUp at 120qC or 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225 {
above
AM HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ-AL applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_E when 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130 {
WarmUp at alpha qC or above
AO HI_WU_END_TIME WarmUp completion time when WarmUp 0 - 255 45 45 45 45 45 45 {
at alpha qC or above
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when 70 - 230 165 180 175 180 180 180 {
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which SIM43-1- 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70
AN - AP is applied
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when 70 - 230 175 185 175 185 180 185 {
WarmUp at alpha qC or below
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB After rotating time when a job is completed 0 - 255 15 15 15 15 15 15
[50-sheet machine]
1
Setting
range
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 190 185 190 185 190 {
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 115 110 115 110 115 {
C HL_E READY Ready standby TH_E set value 70 - 230 185 195 185 195 195 200 {
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 195 190 195 190 195 {
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 115 140 130 140 150 150 {
F HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225 {
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 195 190 195 190 195 {
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 140 130 140 150 150 {
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225 {
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 {
value
K WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set 30 - 200 30 30 30 30 30 30 {
value
L WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 30 - 255 135 180 135 180 135 180 {
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
range
1 P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
R HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 190 190 190 190 190
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
U HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 155 155 155 155 165 165 {
Z HL_E E-STAR Preheating TH_E set value 30 - 200 155 155 155 155 165 165 {
AA PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM, TH_E 30 - 200 175 175 180 180 180 180 {
set value
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
AC HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value 0 - 255 200 200 200 200 200 200
AD HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value 0 - 255 140 140 140 140 140 140
AE HL_E HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_E set value 0 - 255 220 220 220 220 220 220
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 185 200 190 200 190 200 {
or below
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135 {
or below
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L TH_E set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 190 210 200 210 205 210 {
or below
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME AF-AH applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 25 25 25 25 25 25
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 185 195 190 195 190 195 {
or above
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120qC 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135 {
or above
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H TH_E set value when WarmUp at 120qC 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225 {
or above
AM HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ-AL applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_E when 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130 {
AO HI_WU_END_TIME WarmUp completion time when WarmUp 0 - 255 45 45 45 45 45 45 {
at alpha qC or above
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when 70 - 230 170 185 180 185 180 185 {
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which SIM43-1- 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70
AN - AP is applied
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when 70 - 230 185 200 190 200 190 200 {
WarmUp at alpha qC or below
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB After rotating time when a job is completed 0 - 255 15 15 15 15 15 15 {
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main center HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
TH_E Fusing thermister external HL_E Heater lamp external
<List of destination groups>
Group 1 Japan China AB_B

Group 2 U.S.A. Canada Inch
Group 3 Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
1 : Oct. 24 2008

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B805($'<
$ % +/B/05($'<
& +/B(5($'<
' +/B803/$,13$3(5%:
( +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:
) +/B(3/$,13$3(5%:
* +/B803/$,13$3(5&/
+ +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/
, +/B(3/$,13$3(5&/
- :$5083)8021+/B(7
. :$5083)802))+/B/07
/ :$5083(1'7,0(
2.
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex 70 - 230 170 175 170 175 175 180 {
TH_UM set value
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
TH_LM set value
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220 {
set value
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White plain paper duplex 0 - 60 40 40 40 40 40 40 {
applying number of sheets
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 230 170 175 170 175 175 180 {
value
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
value
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_E set 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220 {
value
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper duplex applying 0 - 60 40 40 40 40 40 40 {
number of sheets
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
TH_UM set value
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
TH_LM set value
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
set value
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White heavy paper duplex 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
value
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
value
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
value
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color heavy paper duplex applying 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
number of sheets
1 : Oct. 24 2008
[50-sheet machine]
1
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex 70 - 230 185 190 185 190 185 190 {
TH_UM set value
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
TH_LM set value
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220 {
set value
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White plain paper duplex 0 - 60 40 40 40 40 40 40 {
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 230 185 190 185 190 185 190 {
value
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 {
value
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_E set 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220 {
value
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper duplex applying 0 - 60 40 40 40 40 40 40 {
number of sheets
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
TH_UM set value
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
TH_LM set value
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
set value
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White heavy paper duplex 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 230 185 185 185 185 185 185
value
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
value
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
value
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color heavy paper duplex applying 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
number of sheets
<Code descriptions>

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83
$ % +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83
& +/B(3/$,13$3(5%:'83
' 3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17
( +/B803/$,13$3(5&/'83
) +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/'83
* +/B(3/$,13$3(5&/'83
+ 3/$,13$3(5&/'83$33&17
, +/B80+($9<3$3(5%:'83
- +/B/0+($9<3$3(5%:'83
. +/B(+($9<3$3(5%:'83
/ +($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
2.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. value
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Setting
Item/Display Content linkage
range Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
(NOTE)
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
under LL environment
B HL_LM READY LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
C HL_E READY LL Correction value for TH_E set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
D HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
value under LL environment
E HL_LM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
F HL_E PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_E set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_UM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
H HL_LM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
I HL_E PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T LL Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E 1 - 99 45 45 45
set value under LL environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
L WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL 1 - 99 80 80 80
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
N HL_LM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
O HL_E HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
P HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
Q HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
R HL_E OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
S HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
T HL_LM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
U HL_E ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
V HL_UM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
W HL_LM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
X HL_E GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
Z HL_E E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
AA PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating 1 - 99 55 55 55
TH_UM+TH_E set value under LL environment
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
(NOTE)
AB HL_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
AE HL E HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_E set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
LL environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
or below under LL environment
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50 50
Ready complete) under LL environment
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
or above under LL environment
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AM HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
complete) under LL environment
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in 1 - 99 45 45 45
WarmUp at alpha qC or above under LL environment
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for WarmUp completion time in WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50 50
at alpha qC or above under LL environment
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at 1 - 99 55 55 55
alpha qC or above under LL environment
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying 1 - 99 50 50 50
SIM43-1-AN - AP under LL environment
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at 1 - 99 55 55 55
alpha qC or below under LL environment
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB_LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing 1 - 99 50 50 50
a job under LL environment
* Item L: 1 Count = 1s Change

Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1qC change
* Item D, F: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item D and item F.
* Item G, I: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item G and item I.
[50-sheet machine]
1
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
B HL_LM READY LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
C HL_E READY LL Correction value for TH_E set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
D HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
E HL_LM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
F HL_E PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_E set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_UM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
H HL_LM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
I HL_E PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T LL Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E 1 - 99 45 45 45
set value under LL environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
L WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL 1 - 99 80 80 80
environment
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
(NOTE)
1
M HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
N HL_LM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
O HL_E HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
P HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
Q HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
R HL_E OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
S HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
T HL_LM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
U HL_E ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
V HL_UM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
W HL_LM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
X HL_E GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
Z HL_E E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_E set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
AA PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating 1 - 99 55 55 55
TH_UM+TH_E set value under LL environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
AE HL E HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_E set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
LL environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50 50
Ready complete) under LL environment
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 55 55 55
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AM HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
complete) under LL environment
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in 1 - 99 45 45 45
WarmUp at alpha qC or above under LL environment
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for WarmUp completion time in WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50 50
at alpha qC or above under LL environment
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at 1 - 99 55 55 55
alpha qC or above under LL environment
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying 1 - 99 50 50 50
SIM43-1-AN - AP under LL environment
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at 1 - 99 55 55 55
alpha qC or below under LL environment
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB_LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing 1 - 99 50 50 50
a job under LL environment

* Item D, F: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item D and item F.
* Item G, I: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item G and item I.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
<Code descriptions>


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//
$ +/B805($'<//
$ % +/B/05($'<//
& +/B(5($'<//
' +/B803/$,1%://
( +/B/03/$,1%://
) +/B(3/$,1%://
* +/B803/$,1&///
+ +/B/03/$,1&///
, +/B(3/$,1&///
- :$5083)8021+/B(7//
. :$5083)802))7//
/ :$5083(1'7,0(//
2.
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
under HH environment
B HL_LM READY HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
C HL_E READY HH Correction value for TH_E set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
D HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
value under HH environment
E HL_LM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
F HL_E PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_E set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_UM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H HL_LM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
I HL_E PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T HH Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E 1 - 99 50 50 50
set value under HH environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
L WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
Setting
(NOTE)
N HL_LM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
O HL_E HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
P HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Q HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
R HL_E OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
S HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
T HL_LM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
U HL_E ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
V HL_UM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
W HL_LM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
X HL_E GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Z HL_E E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
AA PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_UM+TH_E set value under HH environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AE HL E HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_E set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
or below under HH environment
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC or 1 - 99 50 50 50
below under HH environment
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
complete) under HH environment
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
or above under HH environment
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC or 1 - 99 50 50 50
above under HH environment
AM HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_E in 1 - 99 50 50 50
WarmUp at alpha qC or above under HH environment
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_HH Correction value for WarmUp completion time in WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50 50
at alpha qC or above under HH environment
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in 1 - 99 50 50 50
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying 1 - 99 50 50 50
SIM43-1-AN - AP under HH environment
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in 1 - 99 50 50 50
WarmUp at alpha qC or below under HH environment
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB_HH Correction value for the after rotation time when completing 1 - 99 50 50 50
a job under HH environment

1 : Oct. 24 2008
[50-sheet machine]
1
Setting Default value Destination
Item/Display Content range linkage
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
(NOTE)
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
B HL_LM READY HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
C HL_E READY HH Correction value for TH_E set value in Ready standby 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
D HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
E HL_LM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
F HL_E PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_E set 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_UM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H HL_LM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
I HL_E PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_E set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
HH environment
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T HH Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_E set 1 - 99 50 50 50
K WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
L WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
N HL_LM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
O HL_E HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
P HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Q HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
R HL_E OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
S HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
T HL_LM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
U HL_E ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
V HL_UM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
W HL_LM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
X HL_E GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
Z HL_E E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_E set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
AA PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_UM+TH_E set value under HH environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AE HL E HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_E set value under 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AH HL_E WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC or 1 - 99 50 50 50
below under HH environment
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Setting Default value Destination

Item/Display Content range linkage
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
(NOTE)
1
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in WarmUp at 120qC 1 - 99 50 50 50
AL HL_E WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_E set value in WarmUp at 120qC or 1 - 99 50 50 50
above under HH environment
AM HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50 50 50
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_E in WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50 50
at alpha qC or above under HH environment
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_HH Correction value for WarmUp completion time in WarmUp at 1 - 99 50 50 50
alpha qC or above under HH environment
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in 1 - 99 50 50 50
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying 1 - 99 50 50 50
SIM43-1-AN - AP under HH environment
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in 1 - 99 50 50 50
WarmUp at alpha qC or below under HH environment
AS ROT_TIME_AFTER_JOB_HH Correction value for the after rotation time when completing 1 - 99 50 50 50
a job under HH environment

<Code descriptions>


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
$ +/B805($'<++
$ % +/B/05($'<++
& +/B(5($'<++
' +/B803/$,1%:++
( +/B/03/$,1%:++
) +/B(3/$,1%:++
* +/B803/$,1&/++
+ +/B/03/$,1&/++
, +/B(3/$,1&/++
- :$5083)8021+/B(7++
. :$5083)802))7++
/ :$5083(1'7,0(++
2.
43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
duplex under LL environment
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
C HL_E PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black- 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
White plain paper duplex under LL environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
G HL_E PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
plain paper duplex under LL environment
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
heavy paper duplex under LL environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
K HL_E HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black- 1 - 99 50 50 50
White heavy paper duplex under LL environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 55 55 55
paper duplex under LL environment
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 55 55 55
O HL_E HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 50 50 50
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color 1 - 99 50 50 50
* Items D, H: 1 Count = 1s Change

1
[50-sheet machine]
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
C HL_E PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black- 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
White plain paper duplex under LL environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 55 55 55 {
G HL_E PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
plain paper duplex under LL environment
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
K HL_E HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E set value in Black-White 1 - 99 55 55 55
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black- 1 - 99 50 50 50
White heavy paper duplex under LL environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 55 55 55
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 55 55 55
O HL_E HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_E set value in Color heavy 1 - 99 50 50 50
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
(NOTE)
1
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color 1 - 99 50 50 50

<Code descriptions>


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83//
$ % +/B/03/$,1%:'83//
& +/B(3/$,1%:'83//
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17//
( +/B803/$,1&/'83//
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83//
* +/B(3/$,1&/'83//
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17//
, +/B80+($9<%:'83//
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83//
. +/B(+($9<%:'83//
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17//
2.
43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
duplex mode under HH environment
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
C HL_E PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_E Black-White plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
mode under HH environment
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
Black-White plain paper duplex under HH environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_E PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_E Color plain paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
Color plain paper duplex under HH environment
1 : Oct. 24 2008

Setting
(NOTE)
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_UM set value under HH environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_LM set value under HH environment
K HL_E HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_E set value under HH environment
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50
Black-White heavy paper duplex under HH environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_UM set value under HH environment
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_LM set value under HH environment
O HL_E HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_E set value under HH environment
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50
Color heavy paper duplex under HH environment

[50-sheet machine]
1 Default value Destination
Setting
(NOTE)
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
C HL_E PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_E Black-White plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
Black-White plain paper duplex under HH environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
G HL_E PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_E Color plain paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50 {
Color plain paper duplex under HH environment
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_UM set value under HH environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_LM set value under HH environment
K HL_E HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50 50
mode TH_E set value under HH environment
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50
Black-White heavy paper duplex under HH environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_UM set value under HH environment
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_LM set value under HH environment
O HL_E HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
TH_E set value under HH environment
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50 50 50
Color heavy paper duplex under HH environment

<Code descriptions>

1 : Oct. 24 2008

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83++
$ % +/B/03/$,1%:'83++
& +/B(3/$,1%:'83++
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17++
( +/B803/$,1&/'83++
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83++
* +/B(3/$,1&/'83++
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17++
, +/B80+($9<%:'83++
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83++
. +/B(+($9<%:'83++
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
range
machine machine
1 A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E Fusing temperature correction value NN environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
120qC common to item HL_UM and item HL_E
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Fusing temperature correction value NN environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
120qC item HL_LM
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E Fusing temperature correction value LL environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Fusing temperature correction value LL environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
120qC item HL_LM
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E Fusing temperature correction value HH environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Fusing temperature correction value HH environment power rising at less than 1 - 99 50 50
120qC item HL_LM
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 1 - 60 5 5
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 1 - 60 10 10
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 1 - 60 5 5
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time heavy paper 1 - 60 15 15
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time OHP 1 - 60 30 30
L COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool down time envelope 1 - 60 40 40
M FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval 1 - 20 6 6
N NN_120_WUP_COMP_TH_E Correction value for SIM43-4-C, G at 120qC or below in N/N WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50
O LL_120_WUP_COMP_TH_E Correction value for SIM43-22-C, G at 120qC or below in L/L WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50
P HH_120_WUP_COMP_TH_E Correction value for SIM43-23-C, G at 120qC or below in H/H WarmUp 1 - 99 50 50
Q HL UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 165 165
R HL LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 120 120
S HL E THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 195 195
T HL UM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_UM 70 - 230 165 165
U HL LM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_LM 30 - 200 120 120
V HL E THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_E 70 - 230 195 195
W HL UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 170 170
X HL UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 70 - 230 185 185
Y HL LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 30 - 200 125 125
Z HL E REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_E 70 - 230 220 220
AA HL UM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_UM 70 - 230 185 185
AB HL LM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_LM 30 - 200 130 130
AC HL E REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_E 70 - 230 220 220
AD HL UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 70 - 230 180 180
* Each temperature correction value: 1 count for 1qC change in temperature control
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change
* Each cool down time: 1 count = 1sec change
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(035(6(7
$ 11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B(
$ % 11BB)86B'83B+/B/0
& //BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B(
' //BB)86B'83B+/B/0
( ++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B(
) ++BB)86B'83B+/B/0
* 11BB)86B'83B&17
+ //BB)86B'83B&17
, ++BB)86B'83B&17
- &22/B'2:1B+($9<
. &22/B'2:1B2+3
/ &22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
2.
43-31 43-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
web cleaning motor. forcible operation of web cleaning when job
Section Fusing end.
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. 1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
"COMPLETE" is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.
Fusing web unit Operation Remark
installation detection Setting Default
state Item Display Item
range value
Fusing web unit Not operate * During this operation, A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1
installed the fusing web cleaning COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1
Fusing web unit not 10sec continuous feed counter is not CHECK operation
installed rotation counted up. condition when
job end
* The fusing web unit is used by installing to the fusing unit. For
B JOB END The fusing web motor is 1 - 200 100
checking the fusing web cleaning motor rotation, remove the COMP ACT forcibly operated when job
whole fusing unit and check with the door open. INTERVAL end.
Print quantity interval
C JOB END Number of forcible 1-5 1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(5:(%&/($1,1*&+(&. COMP ACT operations of the fusing
CNT web motor when job end

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-2%(1':(%&/($1,1*&2038/625<&+(&.
$ -2%(1'&203$&7&+(&.
$ % -2%(1'&203$&7,17(59$/
& -2%(1'&203$&7&17

(;(&87(
2.
Setting Default
44 Item/Display Content
range value
NOTE
PHT 1pixel half tone Normal Disable

process control (Disable
44-1 correction : 1 : NO)
Purpose Setting Enable/Disable setting Reverse
AR_AUTO Auto registration (Enable : Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
adjustment 0 : YES)
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Enable/Disable setting
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- AR_ERROR Auto registration Enable
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) adjustment execution
Operation/Procedure error check
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable
(The selected item is highlighted.) Enable/Disable setting
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) SENSITIVITY Toner density Disable
correction
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
PRT_HT Half tone process Enable
control printer
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE correction feedback
range value
HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable:
density process control (Disable
correction Correc-
Enable/Disable setting : 1 : NO)
Enable/Disable setting tion ON
HT Normal operation half Reverse Enable
(Enable : PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable Enable:
tone process control
0 : YES) Enable/Disable setting Correc-
tion ON
TC Transfer output Enable
correction

MD VG Membrane decrease Enable 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
grid voltage correction 02'(6(77,1*

+9 +7 7& 0'9*
MD LD Membrane laser power Disable 0'/' 0'(9 0''/ 0''/(9
voltage correction 71B+80 71B$5($ 71B/,)( 71B&29
Enable/Disable setting 71B352&21 71B(19 71B'5,3 71B63(1'

MD EV Membrane decrease Enable
3+7 $5B$872 $5B(5525 '0B3+$6(
environment grid
voltage correction 6(16,7,9,7< 357B+7 37&B(19 37&B(19
MD DL Membrane decrease Enable
discharge light quantity
(;(&87(
correction
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable
environment discharge
44-2
light quantity
correction Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Enable/Disable setting Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Enable density sensor (registration sensor).
correction
Enable/Disable setting Section Process
TN_AREA Toner density area Enable Operation/Procedure
correction When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
Enable/Disable setting matically.
TN_LIFE Toner density life Enable
correction
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
Enable/Disable setting played.
TN_COV Toner density print Enable If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
ratio correction
Enable/Disable setting Setting Default
TN_PROCON Toner density process Enable range value
control correction A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
Enable/Disable setting emitting quantity
TN_ENV Toner density Enable adjustment value
environment correction B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
Enable/Disable setting emitting quantity
TN_DRIP Toner density Enable adjustment value
correction C PCS_CL DARK Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0
unconditional supply D PCS_K DARK Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0
Enable/Disable setting E PCS_K GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0
TN_SPEND Toner forcible Disable the item B
consumption mode adjustment is
Enable/Disable setting completed.
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value
Setting Default Error name Error content
range value Registration substrate F REG_F GRND error
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper
min. value and lower values of the belt substrate
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 circuit, outside the range
difference Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
(Item E - Item F) scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper
I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56 and lower values of the belt substrate
light emitting circuit, outside the range
quantity adjustment
value F

J REG_F DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
dark voltage F 352&21*$,1$'-8670(17

3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B5/('$'-
K REG_F GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0 3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5'$5.
the item I adjustment 3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B5*51'
is completed. 3&6B.'$5.
L REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56 3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/70$;
light emitting 3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B)%(/70,1
quantity adjustment 3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/7',)
value R
5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B5%(/70$;
M REG_R DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0 5(*B)'$5. 5(*B5%(/70,1
dark voltage R 5(*B)*51' 5(*B5%(/7',)
N REG_R GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 256 0

the item J adjust- (;(&87(
ment is completed.
O REG_F BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value (F side) 44-4
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
Purpose Setting
min. value (F side)
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
difference sity process control operation.
(Item O - Item P) Section Process
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value (R side)
Operation/Procedure
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
min. value (R side) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 3) Press [OK] key.
difference
(Item R - Item S) NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 cially required.
potential F(K)
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 Setting Default
potential F(C) range value
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target 1 - 255 98
potential F(M) set value
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target 1 - 255 208
potential F(Y) set value
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
potential R(K) emitting quantity set
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 value
potential R(C) D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 emitting quantity set
potential R(M) value
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0 E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 - 255 4
potential R(Y) LIMIT target limit value
F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference 1 - 255 1
between the belt 1
Error name Error content
circuit substrate
Black sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error upper and lower limit
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of values
retry.
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) 0 - 255 60
Color sensor adjustment PCS_CL LED ADJ error STANDARD DIF reference calculation
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of difference
retry.
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 - 255 0
Substrate scan abnormality PCS_K GRND error STANDARD DIF reference calculation
Effective difference between the upper difference
and lower values of the belt substrate
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 - 255 60
circuit, outside the range
INTERVAL interval
Registration sensor F REG_F LED ADJ error
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 122
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
standard value
retry.
(yellow)
Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 132
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
standard value
retry.
(magenta)
L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 118
standard value
(cyan)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 44-6
range value
M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 5 Purpose Adjustment
standard value Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
(black) control forcibly.
N HV BK_GROUND Patch position 1 - 255 60
LIMIT substrate light
Section Process
receiving effective Operation/Procedure
range value Press [EXECUTE] key.
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783 (Refer to the table below.)
$ 3&6B&/7$5*(7
$ % 3&6B.7$5*(7
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
& /('B&/287387
' /('B.287387 Result display Content description

( 3&6$'-670(17/,0,7 COMPLETE Normal complete
) %(/7*5281'',)
ERROR Abnormal end
* %,$6B&/67$1'$5'',)
+ %,$6B%.67$1'$5'',)
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
, %,$63$7&+,17(59$/
- <B3$77$5*(7,'
. 0B3$77$5*(7,'
Details of error display Content description
/ &B3$77$5*(7,' CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
2. BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV data GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** level)
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Medium speed GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Low speed display) GB: 230 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL (LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 400
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD 0 - 1023 0
value
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP 0-4 0
MD C STEP display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** High density membrane decrease 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light 0 - 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
CRUM DESTINATION Machine side management CRUM - -
destination (Main unit data)
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
PROCON COUNT HT Half tone process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/01250$//
%/$&.B3*%B'9B
&<$1B3*%B'9B
0$*(17$B3*%B'9B
<(//2:B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B0*%B'9B%/$&.B/*%B'9B
&<$1B0*%B'9B&<$1B/*%B'9B
0$*(17$B0*%B'9B0$*(17$B/*%B'9B
<(//2:B0*%B'9B<(//2:B/*%B'9B
&3<351 27+(5
44-12 44-13
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor
high density process control and the image (image registration sensor F) calibration.
density sensor (registration sensor). Section
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- Operation/Procedure
ing)
1) Attach the calibration jig.
Operation/Procedure
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. Calibration is performed, and the data are displayed.
Display Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
TARGET CARB DATA Calibration plate 0 - 255 108
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate 1 - 255 108
(1 page) detection level
sensor value
SEAL ADJ Jig patch seal 1 - 255 108
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
DATA detection level when
emitting quantity
executing SIM 44-13
adjustment value
ADK_SL (K) Development -9.99 - 0
characteristics 9.99
6,08/$7,2112
gradient coefficient 7(67 &/26(

3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
(High density process 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 3&6B&/&$5%287 &/26(
control operation) 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17

3&6B&/'$5.
3&6B&/&$5%287
ADK_INT(K) Development -999.9 - 0 3&6B&//('$'-
3&6B&//('$'-
characteristics 999.9
intercept level (High
density process
control operation 0V)
TARGET (K) High density process 0.00 - 0
control target density 255.00
level (K)
TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0
(;(&87(
(C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
level (C/M/Y) (;(&87(
PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0

1-5 control nth time patch
44-14
(Page 1-2) density level 1 (n=1-
5) Purpose Operation data display
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
patch 2 (n=1-5) perature and humidity sensor.
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 3 (n=1-5) Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 LSU
patch 4 (n=1-5) Operation/Procedure
BK only The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
patch 5 (n=1-5)
BK only
Item/Display Content Display range
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main Temperature:
6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
detection temperature (qC) 0 - 255qC(r1qC)
(Page 1-2) n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Difference AD input value (AD AD value: 0-1023
patch 2 (n=6-10) value)
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper thermister main Temperature:
patch 3 (n=6-10) compensation temperature (qC) 0.0-255.0qC
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 AD value (AD value) (r0.2qC)
patch 4 (n=6-10) AD value: 0-1023
BK only TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper thermister main AD value:0-1023
n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 detection sensor AD value (AD
patch 5 (n=6-10) value)
BK only TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main A/D Temperature:
value (temperature qC) 0 - 255qC(r1qC)
AD value: 0-1023

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
TH_E Fusing external thermistor A/D Temperature:
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$< value (temperature qC) 0 - 255qC(r1qC)
&$5%'$7$
AD value: 0-1023
6($/$'-'$7$
$'.B6/.
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermister Temperature:
$'.B,17. -40.0 - 60.0qC
7$5*(7. (r0.1qC)
7$5*(7& AD value: 0-1023
7$5*(70
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor Humidity:
7$5*(7<
5.0-90.0% (r0.1%),
AD value: 0-1023
TH1_LSU LSU thermister 1 A/D value Temperature:
(temperature qC) 5.0-60.0qC
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+
(r0.1qC)
AD value: 0-255
Setting Default
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
range value
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725 AREA Area Correction value for -127 - 0
7+B80GHJ;;;
correction the environment 127
7+B80B$'GHJ;;;
7+B80B$';;;
value area
7+B/0GHJ;;; HUD Humidity Correction value for
7+B(GHJ;;; correction change in humidity
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
value
+80,',7<;;;
PRINT RATE Print ratio Correction value for
7+B/68GHJ;;
correction document print ratio
value
PROCON Process Correction value for
control high density process
correction control result
value
LIFE Life Correction value for
correction the developer life
44-16
value
Purpose Operation data display SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Correction for the 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control correction toner density
data. value sensitivity
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control 1 - 255 128
Section Developing system VO (M) development voltage value after
Operation/Procedure adjustment completion of
1) Select a target color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. control SIM25-02
voltage (at the medium
The toner density control data are displayed. (at the speed)
medium
Item/ Setting Default speed)
Content
Display range value
ALL VO (M) All the Control voltage
TONER The current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129 correction reference value
DEN_LT (M) output value (final value) at the reference which calculated all
medium speed control the correction values
TONER The current toner density reference 128 voltages for the auto
DEN_ST (M) value display (including all the (at the development
correction values) at the medium medium adjustment value
speed speed) (at the medium
TONER The current toner density sensor 129 speed)
DEN_LT (L) output value (final value) at the low AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control
speed VO (L) development voltage value after
TONER The current toner density reference 128 adjustment completion of
DEN_ST (L) value display (including all the control SIM25-02
correction values) at the low speed voltage (at the low speed)
(at the low
speed)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content ALL VO (L) All the Control voltage
range value
correction reference value
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value 1 - 255 128
reference which calculated all
(M) development after completion of
control the correction values
adjustment SIM25-02
voltages for the auto
value (at the medium
(at the low development
(At the speed)
speed) adjustment value
medium
(at the low speed)
speed)
AREA VO Area Control voltage -127 - 0
ALL (M) All the Correction reference
correction correction value for 127
correction value which
control the environment
reference calculated all the
voltage area
values correction values for
(At the the auto HUD VO Humidity Control voltage
medium development correction correction value for
speed) adjustment value control change in humidity
(at the medium voltage
speed) PRINT RATE Print ratio Control voltage
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value VO correction correction value for
(L) development after completion of control the document print
adjustment SIM25-02 voltage ratio
value (at the low speed) PROCON VO Process Control voltage
(At the low control correction value for
speed) correction the high density
ALL (L) All the Correction reference control process control
correction value which voltage result
reference calculated all the LIFE VO Life Control voltage
values correction values for correction correction value for
(At the low the auto value control the developer life
speed) development voltage
adjustment value SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Control voltage 1 - 999 500
(at the low speed) VO correction correction value for
control the toner density
voltage sensor
Setting Default
range value
ENV VO Environment Control voltage -127 - 0 Purpose Operation data display
correction correction value for 127 Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
control the high humidity level in the half tone process control opera-
voltage environment
tion.
Section Process
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Operation/Procedure
range value
AUTO DEVE Area in the Humidity area 1 - 14 8 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.
AREA auto display in the The toner patch density level made in the half tone process
development automatic developer
control operation is displayed.
adjustment adjustment
AREA Current area Current humidity Item/Display Content
area display
ID_n Patch data display (n=1-16)
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$<
721(5'(1B/70

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(5'(1B670
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
721(5'(1B/7/
37.37&37037< 37.37&37037<
721(5'(1B67/
%$6( ,'
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' %$6(
,'
,'
. & 0 < 1(;7
,'
,'

44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control 44-24
target. Purpose Operation data display
Section Process Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
Operation/Procedure the correction level in the half tone process
Press [EXECUTE] key. control operation.
The half tone process control target is set and the operation data Section Process
are displayed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal complete 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error Category Item/Display Content
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error approximation formula of
the minimum density
[YMCK] High density process control error
[YMCK] [LOW] Coefficient of the
approximation formula of
OTHER Other errors
the low density
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the

when connecting the low
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( density and the medium
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
density
[MID] Coefficient of the
the medium density
[HIGH] Coefficient of the
the high density
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section
connection output ratio
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control
(;(&87(
value reference value
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value
Category Item/Display Content

For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
control correction value +$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
[PRINTER_BASE_DITHER Printer half tone process $ /2:),(/'/2:(5/,0,7

$ % /2:),(/'833(5/,0,7
_VALUE] control reference dither
& 0,'),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
value ' 0,'),(/'833(5/,0,7
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT Printer auto density ( +,*+/,*+732,17
_VALUE] adjustment correction value

Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process
correction control value
value

. & 0 < 2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
>(;/2:@$%
>/2:@$%&
44-26
>&211(&7@$%
>0,'@$%& Purpose Adjustment/Setup

>+,*+@$%
>&211(&732,17@
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsory.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
. & 0 < 1(;7 The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.
COMPLETE Normal complete

44-25 ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
Purpose Setting ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
correction value for the half tone process
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
control.
error
Section Process OTHER Other errors
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

2) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key on the 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
touch panel. +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21

728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
4) Press [OK] key.
cially required.
Setting Default value

range K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 2
LOWER LIMIT approximate
(;(&87(
expression data
lower limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 40
44-27
UPPER LIMIT approximate
expression data Purpose Data clear
upper limit value
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 15
tone process control.
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data Section Process
lower limit value Operation/Procedure
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 144
UPPER LIMIT approximate
expression data 2) Press [YES] key.
upper limit value The correction data of the half tone process control are
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of 1-8 7 7 cleared.
POINT the highlight
correction amount

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
cially required.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process 0-3 0 3

clearing shut-off.) control Enable
Process control 1
Disable
BK process control 2
Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time control Enable
can be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control 1
Disable
Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Color process 0-2 0 0
ON the power and after passing control Enable
TIME. Process control 1
Disable
Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Color process 0-2 0 0
the machine are monitored only control Enable
during a job for every 2hours (set by Process control 1
item N). When the changes in the Disable
temperature and the humidity are BK process control 2
greater than the specified level (the Enable
set value of item O) in comparison
with the previous process control.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process con- F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
trol Enable/ NO of BK or M position OPC unit reaches Inhibit 1
Disable set- the specified level after turning the
power.
ting
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of BK position OPC drum unit Inhibit 1
reaches the specified level from
execution of the previous density
correction.
H REV2_CL YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
the specified level from execution of
the previous density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual Key operation 0-1 0 1
MODE(*1) process control key with key display
NO operation Key operation NO 1
display
Process control J DAY When the next warm-up if there is no Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
conditions color job after a color job after specified days
setting passing the specified days from judgment
execution of the previous color 1 - 999 days passing 1-
process control 999
K PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
L PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
M INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME"(h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
N HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring 1 - 24 2
time of "HUM" (h: hour)
O HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM
P BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the 1-999 15
BK position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
Q M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum 1-999 15
traveling distance of "REV2_CL (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
R COLOR BORDER Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK process control 0 - 999 0 20
M position OPC drum traveling is executed without
distance when executing the BK judgment of ratio of
process control the M OPC drum
traveling distance.
1 - 999(%) 1-
999
S BK ONLY Disable/Enable setting and setting of Enable 5 time 0-6 0 5
the number of repetition of the BK Disable 1-5 times 1-5
process control when monochrome Inhibit 6
print is continued.
T HT_DIF Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT 1 - 255 40
process control
Registration U RG_ON_SYNC CL Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON 0-2 0 0
adjustment ALL process control 1
setting CL/BK 2
V RG_TEMP_TIMER Execution timing setting after turning ON the power 0 - 240 (MINUTE) 60
W RG_PERM_TIMER Span setting from execution Disable to Enable 0 - 15 (HOUR) 1
X RG_HOUR_TIMER Span setting of timer execution 0-15 (Above)+(HOUR) 5
Secondary Y 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 200
transfer threshold value 1
cleaning setting Z 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 300
threshold value 2
AA 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 500
threshold value 3
*1: When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the
user process control execution button is displayed on the user sys-
tem setting menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the
allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually
and forcibly. However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This
point must be explained to the user clearly.
1 : Oct. 24 2008

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$ ,1,7,$/<(6
$ % 6:21

& 7,0(
' +80B/,0,7
( +80
) 5(9<(6
* 5(9B%.<(6
+ 5(9B&/<(6
, 5()5(6+02'(12
- '$<
. 3,;B5$7,2B%.
/ 3,;B5$7,2B&/
2.
44-29

7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(6(77,1*
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the $ &23<+93+7+7
$ % 35,17(5+93+7+7
process control during a job.

& )$;+93+7+7
Section Process ' 6(/)35,17+93+7+7
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key.
2.
Default
value
A COPY During copy 0-4 0 No 4 44-31
job execution
B PRINTER During print job 1 HV only 4
C FAX During FAX 2 HV o PHT 4 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
print job ual adjustment)
D SELF During self 3 HV o HT 4 Section Process
PRINT print 4 HV o PHT
Operation/Procedure
o HT
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
HV: High density process control lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
HT: Half tone process control 1) Select item A with [n] [p] key.
PHT: Not operate 2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
10 key.
3) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
5) Select item B with [n] [p] key.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
dure 4).
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Default
value
A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet 1 1-3 3
degrees print) (SET
(1)0q (2)45q (3)90q(4)135q (5)180q (6)225q (7)270q (8)315q VALUE)
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
90deg 90 Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet 2
degrees print)
(1)0q (2)90q (3)180q (4)270q
SET SET Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) 3
VALUE VALUE
B COLOR Phase adjustment value Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1-8 1
BKoCL 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Default
value
C PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 1-6 3
CS1 Main unit 1 stage 2 (CS2)
CS2 Main unit 2 stage 3
CS3 Option paper feed desk 1 stage 4
LCC LCC 6
[50-sheet machine]
1
Default
value
A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet 1 1-3 3
degrees print) (SET
(1)0q (2)45q (3)90q(4)135q (5)180q (6)225q (7)270q (8)315q VALUE)
90deg 90 Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet 2
degrees print)
(1)0q (2)90q (3)180q (4)270q
SET SET Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) 3
VALUE VALUE
B PHASE(C) C tandem phase setting Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1-8 2
The phase of C is 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
changed by 45q each time
in the range of 0 - 315q.
C PHASE(M) M tandem phase setting Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1-8 4
The phase of M is 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
D PHASE(Y) Y tandem phase setting Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1-8 5
The phase of Y is 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
E PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 1-6 3
CS1 Main unit 1 stage 2 (CS2)
CS2 Main unit 2 stage 3
LCC LCC 6

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % 3+$6(&
& 3+$6(0
' 3+$6(<

( 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [n] [p] buttons.
NOTE:
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
tion, this simulation is used.
Item/Display Default value
Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Current DV Bias Low speed mode less than 300[v] A A 0 0 0-5
voltage Heavy paper mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] B B 0 0 (*1)
450[v] or more C C 0 0
Middle speed mode less than 300[v] D D 0 0
300[v] or more, less than 450[v] E E 0 0
450[v] or more F F 0 0
High speed mode less than 300[v] G - 0 -
Monochrome mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] H - 0 -
450[v] or more I - 0 -
Time (T) from Low speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB J G 4 4 1-12
termination of Heavy paper mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] K H 3 3
continuous outputs 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] L I 1 1
to start of the next 240 [sec] or more M J 1 1
output operation
Middle speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB N K 4 4
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] O L 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] P M 1 1
240 [sec] or more Q N 1 1
High speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB R - 4 4
Monochrome mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] S - 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] T - 1 1
240 [sec] or more U - 1 1
<Use example>
(*1)
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
$ '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
$ % '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B

& '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
' '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
( '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
) '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
* '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
+ '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
, '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
- '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
. '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
/ '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
. & 0 < 2.
44-43 Item/Display Content Display

range
Purpose Data display H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing unit identification 0 - 255
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- number AD value
tion of the developing unit.
Section Developing system

Operation/Procedure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(9(/23(581,7$'021,725
The identification number and the identification signal level of the '9&+.,1'.
developing unit are displayed. '9&+.,1'&
'9&+.,1'0
'9&+.,1'<
Item/Display Content Display '9&+B$'B.
range '9&+B$'B&
A DVCH KIND K K color development unit 1-9 '9&+B$'B0
identification number '9&+B$'B<
B DVCH KIND C C color development unit 1-9

identification number
C DVCH KIND M M color development unit 1-9
D DVCH KIND Y Y color development unit 1-9

E DVCH_AD_K K color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
G DVCH_AD_M M color developing unit 0 - 255
identification number AD value
Setting Default
44-61 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image density sen- HIGH 1 - 99 50
sor. (The adjustment is made according to F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
the input of SIM44-13 to set the target value HIGH 1 - 99 50
of the color sensor gain adjustment.) G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Setting Default COPY) document)
range value K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
value document)
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
emitting quantity TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
adjustment value ENHANCEMENT)
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17,1387
$ 3&6B&/&$5%287 N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
$ % 3&6B&//('$'- (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50

O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
2. TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
46 S SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Single color
(Copy
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
document)
46-1 T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy (COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
mode. (copy document)
Section
Operation/Procedure
6,08/$7,2112
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch 7(67
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
&/26(
panel. $ $872

$ % 7(;7
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. & 7(;735,17('3+272
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each ' 7(;73+272
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. ( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * 0$3
+ /,*+7
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
adjustment value. / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2: +,*+ 2.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
sity is decreased.
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-2 46-4
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
mode. send mode.
Section Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density increased, and vice versa.
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value. Setting Default
range value
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
Setting Default
Item/Display Content D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 7(67
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 $ $872
$
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50

' 7(;73+272
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 ( 35,17('3+272
HIGH 1 - 99 50 ) 3+272*5$3+

* 0$3
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
2.
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document)
46-5
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
document)
send mode.
L LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50
document HIGH 1 - 99 50 Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@ 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
$ $872
$ % $872
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
& 7(;7 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
* 3+272*5$3+
increased, and vice versa.
+ 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
Setting Default
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< range value
/ /,*+7 A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+ 2.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@ When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
$ $8727(;7 increased, and vice versa.
$ % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272 [RSPF]

' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272 Setting Default
) 3+272*5$3+ range value
* 0$3
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment
(Low density side)
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 48
exposure adjustment
2. (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment
46-8 (Low density side)
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color (High density side)
balance RGB. E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 53
exposre adjustment
Section (Low density side)
Operation/Procedure F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch adjustment (high density)
panel.
[DSPF]
panel. Setting Default
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. range value
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) SIDEA: LOW exposure
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density adjustment
area and the high density area. (Low density side)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
target color is increased, and vice versa. SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
Default
Item/Display Content C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
value
LOW exposure
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction 50
adjustment
amount
(Low density side)
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction 50
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
amount
SIDEA: HIGH exposure
adjustment

(High density side)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'(
$ /2:'(16,7<32,17
SIDEA: HIGH mode exposre
$ % +,*+'(16,7<32,17
adjustment
(High density side)
HIGH exposure
adjustment
(High density)
% * 5 2.
46-9
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF/DSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] (or
[RSPF]) keys on the touch panel.
panel.
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content Density level Default
range value Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
SIDEB: LOW exposure
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
adjustment
(Low density side) C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47 D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
adjustment F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
LOW exposure I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
adjustment J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
SIDEB: HIGH exposure
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
adjustment
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
(High density side)
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH mode exposre P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
adjustment Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
(High density side)

HIGH exposure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
(High density) 7(;7 7(;73573+272 35,17('3+272 3+2727(;73+272
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50 0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*
SIDEB: R balance R
SIDEB: G balance G
SIDEB: B balance B

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (;(&87(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23<6,'($/2:
$ % 6&$16,'($/2:
& )$;6,'($/2:
' &23<6,'($+,*+ 46-16

( 6&$16,'($+,*+
) )$;6,'($+,*+ Purpose Adjustment

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
copy mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2& '63) 2.
46-10 panel.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
the gamma (for each color copy mode). item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Operation/Procedure When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
touch panel. (Point) value
3) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch A POINT1 Point 1 373 - 627 500
panel. B POINT2 Point 2 373 - 627 500
C POINT3 Point 3 373 - 627 500
D POINT4 Point 4 373 - 627 500
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each E POINT5 Point 5 373 - 627 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. F POINT6 Point 6 373 - 627 500
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) G POINT7 Point 7 373 - 627 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is H POINT8 Point 8 373 - 627 500
increased, and vice versa. I POINT9 Point 9 373 - 627 500
J POINT10 Point 10 373 - 627 500
TEXT Text K POINT11 Point 11 373 - 627 500
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo L POINT12 Point 12 373 - 627 500
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo M POINT13 Point 13 373 - 627 500
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo N POINT14 Point 14 373 - 627 500
MAP Map O POINT15 Point 15 373 - 627 500
LIGHT Light document P POINT16 Point 16 373 - 627 500
COPY ORG Copy document Q POINT17 Point 17 373 - 627 500
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are

scanned sequentially, and the output image density is
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
determined according to the average of the scanned
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$ 32,17 densities. (The output image density is even for all the
$ % 32,17 surface.)
& 32,17 AE WIDTH FULL The document density scan area in the monochrome
' 32,17
auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
( 32,17
) 32,17
the document width. This is not related to the prescan
* 32,17
mode.
+ 32,17 AE WIDTH PART The document density scan area in the monochrome
, 32,17 auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
- 32,17
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
. 32,17
mode.
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
46-21
Purpose Adjustment
46-19
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
Purpose Setting adjustment)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the Section
density scanning (exposure) of mono-
Operation/Procedure
chrome auto copy mode documents.
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
Section touch panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
Select an item to be set with touch panel. panel.
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
saved. * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
Default
Item/Display Content Set value 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
MODE2 increased, and vice versa.
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
Stop (for copy) STOP/
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
PRESCAN
value.
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX)
Density level Default
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
PRESCAN
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
setting NORMAL
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
SHARP
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$( J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
$(B02'( 02'( 02'(
$(B6723B&23< 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
$(B6723B)$; 2)) 21 L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
$(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1 M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
$(B:,'7+
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
)8// 3$57
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
NOTE: $ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
' 32,17
MODE 2 Normal gamma ( 32,17
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is ) 32,17
scanned, and the output image density is determined * 32,17
according to the scanned density. (The output image + 32,17

, 32,17
density is even for all the surface.)
- 32,17
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned . 32,17
sequentially, and the output image density is / 32,17
determined according to the density in each area of . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
document. (The output image density may not be

even for all the surface.)
46-23 46-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment
high density section (High density tone gap (Auto adjustment)
supported). Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
0 Enable
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
1 Inhibit
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 4) Press [OK] key.
range value
A CMY 0 CMY engine 0-1 0 The half tone correction target registration is processed.
(0 : ENABLE highest density
1 : DISABLE) correction mode :
Enable 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
1 CMY engine 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
highest density 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
correction mode : )257+,6$'-8670(17
Disable
B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0 : ENABLE density correction
1 : DISABLE) mode : Enable
1 K engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
(;(&87(
TARGET CYAN maximum
density correction
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 532

TARGET MAGENTA maximum 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
density correction (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5

3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
TARGET YELLOW maximum
density correction /,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500

TARGET BLACK maximum
density correction
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
and B to "0.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
gap is better.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
A and B to "1. 46-25
The tone gap may occur in high density part. Purpose Adjustment
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin-
values are changed, the density in the high density area is gle color copy mode)
changed. Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'( touch panel.
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/( 2) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
& &<$10$;7$5*(7 panel.
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
target color is increased, and vice versa.

Item/Display
range C M Y
2.
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
$ 5(' character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
$ % *5((1
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
& %/8(
' &<$1
is decreased.
( 0$*(17$ When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
) <(//2:
the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
vice versa.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
& 0 < 2. &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

46-26 ' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
Purpose Adjustment ( ('7(;76/23(
) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color

balance set value to the default.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2.
2) Press [YES] key.

The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
46-30
default value.

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(67$1'$5'5$7(6(783 scanning direction in the copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
sponding to the resolution mode with 10 key.
Setting Default
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1
SW (COPY: COLOR)
46-27
Resolution in the sub scanning direction
Purpose Adjustment/Setup (DPI)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy Mode Scan mode 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
images, texts, and line image edges. [Magnifica- [Magnifica- [Magnifica-
tion ratio] tion ratio] tion ratio]
Section
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200
Operation/Procedure RSPF 600 600 1200
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch DSPF 600 600 1200
panel. Mode2 OC 300 600 1200
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. RSPF 400 600 1200
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) OC 300 600 1200
Item/Display Setting Default

Content

(Copy mode) range value 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50 6&$15(62/87,216(77,1*
(SLOPE) gamma skew $

$ 6&$15(62/87,216:

adjustment

B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew
adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map 2.
mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map
mode)
46-32
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
density reproducibility in the monochrome
auto copy mode. Setting Default value
Section range C M Y
A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200
Operation/Procedure
B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 200 0
panel. D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
and the low density image is decreased. 5('%/$&.&2/25&23<$'-8670(17

$ 5('
$
[RSPF] % *5((1
& %/8(
Setting Default &<$1

range value 0$*(17$
<(//2:
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(for RSPF)
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 & 0 < 2.
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
[DSPF] 46-37
Setting Default Purpose Adjustment/Setup

range value Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color document repro-
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 ducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF) 1 - 250 196
Section
(SIDE1)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF) 1 - 250 196 Operation/Procedure
(SIDE2) 1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys on the touch panel.
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF) 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF) 1 - 250 196 4) Press [YES] key.
(SIDE2) This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel-
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 in the monochrome mode.
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 Setting Default
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 172
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 828

* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$ &23<2& the formula below.
$ % &23<'63)6,'(
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
& &23<'63)6,'(
' 6&$12&
( 6&$1'63)6,'(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
) 6&$1'63)6,'(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
* )$;2&
$ 55DWLR
+ )$;'63)6,'(
$ % *5DWLR
, )$;'63)6,'(

2.
46-36
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
Select Default
46-38 Item/Display (Copy mode) Content
button value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component (-) LUT1 judgment 0
amount in the color copy mode. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode (-) LUT1 judgment 1
key. NOMAL
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (+) LUT1
3) Press the black component amount select key. (+) LUT2
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
(except character and line image)
NOMAL
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
(+) LUT1
changes.
(+) LUT2
AUTO AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Select Default
Item/Display (Copy mode) Content (-) LUT1 judgment 3
button value
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL NOMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual) (+) LUT1
NOMAL (+) LUT2
(+) LUT1 AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 4
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL NOMAL
(-) LUT1 (+) LUT1
NOMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
(+) LUT2
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL NOMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) (+) LUT1
NOMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 6
(+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photographic NORMAL NOMAL
(-) LUT1 paper (+) LUT1
NOMAL (Manual) (+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Photograph %/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/
NOMAL (Manual)
/87 /87
(+) LUT1 7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
(+) LUT2 /87 /87

35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1 /87 /87
(-) LUT1 3+272 /87 /87 120$/
NOMAL /87 /87

7(;73+272 /87 /87 120$/
(+) LUT1 /87 /87
(+) LUT2 0$3 /87 /87 120$/
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL /87 /87
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/ 0$18$/ $872
NOMAL Text printed

(+) LUT1 (Manual)
46-39
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/ Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
NOMAL Text (Manual) images.
(+) LUT1 Section
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/ 1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys on the touch panel.
NOMAL Printed photo 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(Manual)
(+) LUT1 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(+) LUT2 Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1 numeric value to decrease moire.
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
NOMAL (Manual) Setting Default
(+) LUT1 range value
(+) LUT2 A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF
B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF
Setting Default
range value
C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
ON half tone ON Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 (Normal)
OFF half tone OFF
Section
E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON Operation/Procedure
F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 1) Set the original on the original table.
OFF half tone OFF 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
OFF half tone OFF and the scanned document image is outputted.
I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50

B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
$ h>'3,@2)) D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
$ % h>'3,@2))
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
& h>'3,@21
' h>'3,@2))
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
( h>'3,@21 G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
) h>'3,@2)) MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO)
* h>'3,@21
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
+ h>'3,@2))
, h>'3,@21 EXP3 Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
2.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-40
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (;32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/
$ $872
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) $ % (;32685(
Section & (;32685(
' (;32685(

Operation/Procedure ( (;32685(
1) Set the original on the original table. ) (;32685(
* (;(&87(02'($872
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
(;(&87( 2.
Setting Default
range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) send image density.
46-42
(Collective adjustment of all Purpose Adjustment/Setup
the modes)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Fine)
Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;$// Operation/Procedure
$ (;32685(/(9(/$//
$ 1) Set the original on the original table.

Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
(;(&87( 2. B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
Half tone
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Half tone
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Half tone G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 /Auto/Half tone
Half tone H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 H_TONE /Half tone
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 H_TONE /Half tone
EXP2 Fine/ 3 J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Fine/ 4 K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Fine/ 5 L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Fine/ 6 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1
Exposure 5 MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO)
AUTO Fine/ 7 EXP1 Super Fine 2
H_TONE Automatic/ /Exposure 1
halftone EXP2 Super Fine 3
EXP1 Fine/ 8 /Exposure 2
H_TONE Exposure 1 EXP3 Super Fine 4
/Half tone /Exposure 3
EXP2 Fine/ 9 EXP4 Super Fine 5
H_TONE Exposure 2 /Exposure 4
/Half tone EXP5 Super Fine 6
EXP3 Fine/ 10 /Exposure 5
H_TONE Exposure 3 AUTO Super Fine 7
/Half tone H_TONE /Auto
EXP4 Fine/ 11 /Half tone
H_ONE Exposure 4 EXP1 Super Fine 8
/Half tone H_TONE /Exposure 1
EXP5 Fine/ 12 /Half tone
H_TONE Exposure 5 EXP2 Super Fine 9
/Half tone H_TONE /Exposure 2
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- EXP3 Super Fine 10
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, H_TONE /Exposure 3
and press [EXECUTE] key. /Half tone
EXP4 Super Fine 11
H_TONE /Exposure 4
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( /Half tone
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
EXP5 Super Fine 12
$ $872
$ H_TONE /Exposure 5
% (;32685(
& (;32685(

/Half tone
' (;32685(
( (;32685(
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
) (;32685( ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
* $872+B721( and press [EXECUTE] key.
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(

- (;32685(+B721( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
. (;32685(+B721( (;32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1(
/ (;32685(+B721( $ $872
(;(&87( 2.
$ % (;32685(
& (;32685(

' (;32685(
( (;32685(
46-43 ) (;32685(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup * $872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. , (;32685(+B721(
(Super Fine) - (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
Section / (;32685(+B721(
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87( 2.
1) Set the original on the original table.

46-44
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup (;32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(

$ $872
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. $ (;32685(
& (;32685(
(Ultra fine)

' (;32685(
( (;32685(
Section ) (;32685(
Operation/Procedure $872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table. , (;32685(+B721(

- (;32685(+B721(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. . (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key (;(&87( 2.

46-45
Setting Default Purpose Adjustment/Setup
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
(600dpi).
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
1 Section
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
2
1) Set the original on the original table.
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
3 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
4 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 and the scanned document image is outputted.
5
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
tone Item/Display Content
range value
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
1/Half tone B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
2/Half tone D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
3/Half tone
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
4/Half tone
/Half tone 1
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
5/Half tone
/Half tone
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
/Half tone
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1
/Half tone
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2
/Half tone
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
Exposure 4
MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO)
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
Exposure 1
Exposure 5
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
Exposure 2
H_TONE Auto/Half
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
tone
Exposure 3
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
H_TONE Exposure
Exposure 4
1/Half tone
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
Exposure 5
H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7
H_TONE Half tone
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3 EXP1 600dpi/ 8
/Half tone H_TONE Exposure 1
/Half tone
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
/Half tone
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- EXP4 600dpi/ 11
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, H_TONE Exposure 4
and press [EXECUTE] key. /Half tone
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- Operation Setting Default
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, Item/Display Content
mode range value
and press [EXECUTE] key. PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
(COLOR) (C) 1 compres (MID
(Scanner (*1) sion DLE1)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (Color mode)) mode 1
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;'3,
$ $872
Low
$ % (;32685( compres
& (;32685( sion
' (;32685( MIDDLE Medium 1
( (;32685(
2 compres
) (;32685(
sion
* $872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
mode 2
, (;32685(+B721( Medium
- (;32685(+B721( compres
. (;32685(+B721( sion
/ (;32685(+B721(
MIDDLE Medium 2
(;(&87( 2.
3 compres
sion
mode 3
46-47 High
compres
Purpose Adjustment/Setup sion
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy PUSH SCAN D SCA MIDDLE Medium 0 0
and scan images (JPEG). (GRAY) N(G) 1 compres (MID
(Scanner (*1) sion DLE1)
Section
(Monochrome mode 1
Operation/Procedure half-tone Low
1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys on the touch panel. mode)) compres
sion
MIDDLE Medium 1
3) Press [OK] key. 2 compres
The set value is saved. sion
mode 2
Operation Setting Default Medium
mode range value compres
COPY A COPY LOW Low 0 0 sion
(COLOR) (C) compres (LOW) MIDDLE Medium 2
(COPY sion 3 compres
(COLOR (Color) sion
mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1 mode 3
compres High
sion compres
(Color) sion
HIGH High 2
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com-
compres
pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
sion
(Color) NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
LOWER Super 3 in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
low ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
compres reduced.
sion
(Color)
COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0

(GRAY) (G) compres (LOW) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(COPY sion &23<6&$10)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17

$ &23<&/2:
(Monochrome (Gray) $ % &23<*/2:
half-tone MIDDLE Medium 1 & 6&$1&0,''/(
mode)) compres ' 6&$1*0,''/(
sion
(Gray)
HIGH High 2
compres
sion
(Gray)
LOWER Super 3
2.
low
compres
sion
(Gray)
46-51 46-52
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper mode and the image mode heavy paper and the image process
process mode. mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
Section to the default values.)
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key Operation/Procedure
[PAPER/DITHER]. 1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
touch panel. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key on the 3) Press [YES] key.
touch panel.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
putted. &23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5

+($9<3$3(5 %/$&.('*( &2/25('*( &2/25('
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is %:

made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density.
Item/Display Content Color

HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
DITH1 Black edge K
DITH2 Color edge KCMY
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K
Density level Default 46-54

Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value Purpose Adjustment
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine half tone auto-
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
matic density adjustment (dither).
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 Section
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 Operation/Procedure
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
The high density process control is started to make 32 patch
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
self print. (A3 paper in the paper feed tray is used.)
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 2) Place the 32 patch self print on the document table, and press
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 [EXECUTE] key.
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 Scanning the 32 patch self print is started.
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 After scanning the 32 patch self print, the 16 patch self print is
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 automatically printed.
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 3) Press [OK] key.
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
After completion of the correction amount registration, the
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$ 32,17
BLACK EDGE Black edge
$ % 32,17 COLOR EDGE Color edge
& 32,17
COLOR ED Color error diffusion
' 32,17
( 32,17
B/W Monochrome error diffusion
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17 The 32 patch self print is printed.
, 32,17
- 32,17 6) Place the 32 patch self print on the document table, and press
. 32,17 [EXECUTE] key.
/ 32,17
. & 0 < 3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2.

Scanning the 32 patch self print is started.
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the
dither selection menu.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(',7+(5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong 1 3 (Auto) Applied to the auto copy
LEVEL image in auto copy mode emphasis mode only.
L Soft 2
emphasis
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Applied to the auto copy
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2 mode only.
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When it is set to ON, the
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 soft filter is applied and the
D COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) smoothness in the dark
ON copy mode ON 1 image area is improved.
(Roughness is reduced.)
E SINGLE COLOR : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON in sigle color copy mode ON 1
F 2 COLOR COPY : OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON to C/M/Y images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON to K images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
I COLOR PUSH : OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
J B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$ % $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
) &2/25&23<&0<21
* &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
Operation/Procedure
46-61
Purpose Adjustment/Setup panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
tion level.
3) Press [OK] key.
Section
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
Operation/Procedure cially required.
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
panel. the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. ments.
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- Item/Display Content
range value
cially required. A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from reference area
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu- adjustment
ments. B TEXT_IMAGE SIM display item: 0-6 3
Text/Image judgment
Setting Default priority level select
range value C TEXT_BLANK SIM display item: 0-6 4
A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 Text/Blank judgment
SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot priority level select
SCR] D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
B SEGMENT: etection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 threshold value
SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen adjustment
C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 E AE_AREA_LV SIM display item: 0-6 3
SWITCH [SMALL Dot in a small area Color AE judgment
SCR] target area adjustment
D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 value
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment: F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
Black text 1 detection division result
E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 adjustment:
ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment: For color copy
Color text 1 G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 detection division result
ADJUST [BK TXT 2 , adjustment: adjustment:
CL TXT 2] Black text 2, Color For monochrome copy
text 2 H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 detection division result
ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment: adjustment:
Chroma/Achroma For color scan
judgment I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4
H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 detection division result
ADJUST [TXT ON adjustment: adjustment:
BG] Text on background For monochrome scan
I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
ADJUST [SCR] adjustment: _LV_L_U density threshold value
Dot adjustment value
(lower limit)
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0

LV_L_O density threshold value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( adjustment value
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
(upper limit)
$ 6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@
$ % 6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
& 6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@ LV_C detection level
' 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@ adjustment (chroma)
( 6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@ M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
) 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
* 6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
_CC For color copy
+ 6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@
, 6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@ N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_MC For mono-
chrome copy
2.
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_CS For color scan
46-62
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the _MS For mono-
ACS, the area separation, the background chrome copy
image process, and the auto exposure Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
LV_L adjustment (value)
mode.
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Section LV_C adjustment (chroma)
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 photography 0-6 0 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
mode select threshold TEXT/PRINTED (color PUSH)
value PHOTO
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 photography 0-6 0 L COLOR PUSH : Text 1-9 3
mode select threshold TEXT (color PUSH)
value M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 photography 0-6 0 PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
mode select threshold N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
value PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 photography 0-6 0 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
mode select threshold TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
value P COLOR PUSH : Map 1-9 5
MAP color PUSH)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
09,(:-8'*(0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17

$ 6:B$&6 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$ % 7(;7B,0$*( %*5(029($'-8670(17
& 7(;7B%/$1. $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272

$ % &2/25&23<7(;7
' +7B/9
( $(B$5($B/9 & &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
) $(B/9B&& ' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
* $(B/9B0& ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
+ $(B/9B&6 ) &2/25&23<0$3
, $(B/9B06 * &2/25&23</,*+7
- $(B-8'*(B/9B/B8 + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. $(B-8'*(B/9B/B2 , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<

/ $(B-8'*(B/9B&
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
2.
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
46-63
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 46-74
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low Purpose Adjustment
density section.
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
Section adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust-
Operation/Procedure ment (Auto adjustment)
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch Section
panel. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin-
3) Press [OK] key. uously.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic
background and the low density image is increased. When the adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
and the low density image is decreased. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
Setting Default
Item/Display Content printed.
range value
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
TEXT/PRINTED (color copy) select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
PHOTO 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
B COLOR COPY : Text 1-9 3 is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
TEXT (color copy)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) ment pattern is printed.
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 5) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy) ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
F COLOR COPY : Map 1-9 5 result pattern is printed.
MAP (color copy)
7) Press [OK] key, and the half tone correction target is regis-
G COLOR COPY : Light document 1-9 6
LIGHT (color density) tered.
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5 NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
TEXT/PRINTED Character print adjustment operations in the both modes are completed all
PHOTO (color copy) the way. For example, when the copy color balance adjust-
(COPY TO COPY)
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simula-
I COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
tion is canceled, the adjustment result is not effective.
TEXT Character
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
48
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
48-1
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
panel.
46-90
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the high compression PDF When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ASIC. ratio is increased.
(Do not change default value in the field)
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
Section sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
Operation/Procedure A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
[BG LAYER] keys.
[RSPF]
2) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key.
Setting Default
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item/Display Content
range value
4) Press [OK] key. A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Setting Default B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
range value magnification ratio
A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0 adjustment (CCD)
SENSITIVITY selection C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0 surface magnification ratio
FINDLINES selection (Main scan)
C HOR Line detection 0-2 0 D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
FINDLINES SW SW (H) surface magnification ratio
D VERT Line detection 0-2 0 (Sub scan)
FINDLINES SW SW (V) E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0 surface magnification ratio
INDEXING SEL number (Main scan)
adjustment SW F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2 surface magnification ratio
INDEXING ADJ adjustment (Sub scan)
A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
[DSPF]
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1 Setting Default
INTENT selection range value
A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1 A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
LAYER INTENT 1 setting magnification ratio
B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1 adjustment (CCD)
INTENT 2 priority setting B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
7(67
&203$&73')6(77,1*6 surface magnification ratio
$ */<3+6(16,7,9,7< (Main scan)
$ % %*6:)25),1'/,1(6
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
& +25),1'/,1(66:
9(57),1'/,1(66:
( )*&2/25,1'(;,1*6(/
(Sub scan)
) )*&2/25,1'(;,1*$'- E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
(Main scan)
7(;7 &2/25 %*/$<(5 2.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 [HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68% 2) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch
& 63)0$,1 panel.
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
4) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
2.
Default value
Mode Setting
Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
Select range
machine machine
48-5 COLOR A RRM Resist 1 - 99 50 49
1
Purpose Adjustment motor
correction
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
value
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
B BTM Belt motor 1 - 99 45 45
Section Scanner section correction
Operation/Procedure value
C DM_K Drum K 1 - 99 43 43
motor
panel. correction
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
3) Press [OK] key. D DM_CL Drum CL 1 - 99 43 43
motor
correction
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is value
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- E DVM_K Developing 1 - 99 50 50
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform K motor
this adjustment. correction
value
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
F FSM Fusing 1 - 99 20 14
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
motor
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
correction
the adjustment value in the low speed mode. value
G DVM_CL Developing 1 - 99 50 50
Setting Default
Item/Display Content CL motor
range value
correction
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50 value
B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50 H PFM Paper 1 - 99 50 50
(Reference speed) transport
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50 motor
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 correction
(High speed) value
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 I POM Paper exit 1 - 99 45 45
(Reference speed) motor
correction
value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
MONO A RRM Resist 1 - 99 50 49
0272563(('$'-8670(17 motor
$ 05+,
correction
$ % 050,'
value
& 05/2
' 63)+,
( 63)0,' correction
value
C DM_K Drum K 1 - 99 43 43
motor
correction
value
D DVM_K Developing 1 - 99 50 50
2. K motor
correction
value
E FSM Fusing 1 - 99 20 14
48-6 motor
Purpose Adjustment correction
value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
motor.
Section
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Default value 3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
Mode Setting
Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet 4) Select a target firmware.
Select range
machine machine Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
1 HEAVY A RRM Resist 1 - 99 47 47
motor
correction 6) Press [YES] key.
value The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
correction
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
value
played.
C DM_K Drum K 1 - 99 43 43
motor
correction
value CONFIG Configuration data
D DM_CL Drum CL 1 - 99 43 43 ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half
motor ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main
correction ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN
value LANGUAGE Language support data program
E DVM_K Developing 1 - 99 50 50 (General term)
K motor GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
correction SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
value PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
F FSM Fusing 1 - 99 23 23 PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
motor DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section
correction
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
value
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
G DVM_CL Developing 1 - 99 50 50
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
CL motor
correction FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
value FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section
H FUSER Fusing 1 - 99 50 50 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
SETTING speed 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
select 4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section
timing 4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section
I RRM RRM speed 0 - 255 0 0 1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
START increasing 1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
start timing 4KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
J RRM RRM speed 0 - 255 38 38 4KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
END increasing
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
end timing
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section
cially required. DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
quality trouble may occur. FAX OPTION(BOOT) FAX2 Boot section (Japan only)
FAX OPTION(MAIN) FAX2 Main section (Japan only)

ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( PDL_FONT PDL font
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17
ANIMATION Animation data
$ 550
$ % %70 IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
& '0B. COLOR PROFILE Color profile
' '0B&/
WEB HELP WEB help
( '90B.
) )60
UNICODE UNICODE table
* '90B&/ ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section
+ 3)0 ACREM (MAIN) ACRE Main section
, 320
ACRE_DATA ACRE table
List of error displays in case of abnormal end

&2/25 0212 +($9< 2.
CONF Configuration data
ICUM ICU Main section former half
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
49 ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
LANG Language support data program
(General term)
49-1
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
Purpose SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. PCUB PCU Boot section
Section PCUM PCU Main section
DESKB Desk unit BOOT section
Operation/Procedure
DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the LCC4M Side LCC (A4) main section
operation panel section.) FINB Inner finisher BOOT section

FINM Inner finisher MAIN section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
FIN1B 1K finisher Boot section (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
FIN1M 1K finisher Main section
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
FIN4B 4K finisher Boot section ',5!0$18$/
FIN4M 4K finisher Main section

1PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
1PUNM Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
4PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
4PUNM Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
SCUB SCU Boot section
SCUM SCU Main section
DSPFB DSPF Boot section
DSPFM DSPF Main section

(Folder select display 1)
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
FAXM FAX1 Main section
FXOPB FAX2 Boot section (Japan only) 49-5
FXOPM FAX2 Main section (Japan only) Purpose
ESCP ESC/P font Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update.
PDL PDL font
ANIME Animation data
Section
IMGDT Image ASIC data Operation/Procedure
CORP Color profile 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
WEBHP WEB help 2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
UNICD UNICODE table update.
ACREB ACRE Boot section
3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
ACREM ACRE Main section
ACRED ACRE table
5) Press [YES] key.
The selected watermark is updated.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5 :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0

49-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
HDD.
50
Section
50-1
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is ment
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. Section
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- Operation/Procedure
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) 1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
The current version and the update version are displayed. panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
active from gray out. default.
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
updated. LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default

range value 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50 $ 55&$
edge edge reference $ % 55&%&6
adjust- position (OC) & 55&%&6
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50 ' 55&%/&&
value motor Tray ( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50 * /($'
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50 + 6,'(
E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50 , '(1$

ment paper - '(1%
. )52175($5
feed
/ 2)6(7B2&
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50 2.
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20 50-2
value area adjustment Purpose Adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30 the image loss. (This simulation is a simpli-
area adjustment fied version of SIM 50-1).
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20 Section
REAR void area
Operation/Procedure
adjustment
L Off- OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 50 1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
center center adjustment 2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
adjust- a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
ment
3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
M Magnifica SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust-
tion ratio _SPEED scanning
ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
correc- _OC magnification ratio
tion adjustment (CCD) adjustment values of L1 and L2.
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
scanning correction value scale.
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
print area value edge.
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 L1
value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value Paper lead
edge
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
the value is increased, the timing is delayed. L2
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi- 400% enlargement copy
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced. Fig. 1
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. 5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. Setting Default
Item/Display Description
(0.1mm/step) range value
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
step) measurem image lead edge to
ent value the scale of 10mm.
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. (Platen 400%,
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ 0.1mm increment)
step) B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. paper lead edge to
the image lead edge
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of (0.1mm increment)
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Setting Default
Item/Display Description
range value
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
area loss amount setting /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&

$ /
setting (When the $ % /
value adjustment value is & /($'
increased, the image ' 6,'(
loss is increased.) ( '(1$
) '(1%
D SIDE Side edge image 0 - 99 20
* )52175($5
loss amount setting
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the image
loss is increased.)
E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30 (;(&87(
adjustment adjustment (When

the adjustment value
is increased, the void
is increased.)
F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment (When
the adjustment value
is increased, the void
is increased.)
G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR amount adjustment
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the void is
increased.)
Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.

The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
50-5
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
Purpose Adjustment in the standard adjustment value range.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image Standard reference value: 3.0r2.0mm
position. (PRINTER MODE) When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
Section paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
Operation/Procedure adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [n] [p] key on the When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
touch panel. about 0.1mm.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
Setting Default
range value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the Setting Default
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the Item/Display Content
range value
adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
edge to the image lead edge is decreased. loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
about 0.1mm.
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 (SIDE1) edge image loss
$ '(1& amount setting
$ % '(1%
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
( '(1%&6 amount amount setting
) '(1%&6 G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
* '(1%&6 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
+ '(1%&6
setting
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
. 08/7,&2817 (SIDE2) edge image loss
/ 3$3(5&6 amount setting
(;(&87( 2. I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
50-6
Purpose Adjustment surface document
off-center
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
adjustment
the image loss. (RSPF/DSPF mode)
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
Section RSPF/DSPF front surface
Operation/Procedure magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
panel. [RSPF]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Setting Default
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) range value
[DSPF]
document scan
Setting Default position
range value adjustment (CCD)
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan document scan
position position
adjustment (CCD) adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
document scan loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
position amount amount setting
adjustment (CCD) setting
SIDE1
Setting Default L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
Item/Display Content L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
range value
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
Distance "a"
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
magnification ratio
(Sub scan) [DSPF]
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
back surface Item/Display Content
range value
magnification ratio
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
(Sub scan)
0.1mm unit) from the front
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing surface image lead edge to
is delayed. the scale of 10mm.
B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss 0.1mm unit) from the back
is increased. surface image lead edge to
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge, the scale of 10mm.
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow. C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) loss amount setting
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$ 6,'(
$ F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 30
% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'( G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
( 75$,/B('*(6,'( (SIDE2) loss amount setting
) /($'B('*(6,'(
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
* )5217B5($56,'(
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(

, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63) [RSPF]

. 6&$1B63(('B63)
Setting Default
2. range value
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
0.1mm unit) from the front
surface image lead edge to
50-7 the scale of 10mm.
Purpose Adjustment B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
0.1mm unit) from the back
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
surface image lead edge to
the image loss (RSPF/DSPF mode). (This
the scale of 10mm.
simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
6.) (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
Section RSPF/DSPF D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
Operation/Procedure (SIDE1) loss amount setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
panel.
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0. (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
RSPF duplex mode. (SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
surement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of
0.1mm. Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm) is increased.

50-10
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(1763)&$/&
&/26(
fication ratio and the off-center position.
$ / (The adjustment is made separately for
$ % / each paper feed section.)
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'( Section

( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
Operation/Procedure
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'( 1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'( panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
(;(&87(
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Large capacity tray)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnifica-

tion ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to
the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is
shifted to the rear frame side.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.

50-12 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center center adjustment
position adjustment. (The adjustment is B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
made separately for each scan mode.) center adjustment
Section C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $ 2&

$ % 63)6,'(
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is & 63)6,'(
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
2.
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
value
A CYAN (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment Item
(F side) List
B CYAN (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
C MAGENTA (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(F side)
D MAGENTA (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
E YELLOW (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
(F side)
F YELLOW (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
G MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
H PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual 3 Adjustment
paper feed pattern print
CS1 2 Tray 1 conditions setting
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection 0 Select 1
NO 1 Not select

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$ &<$1)5217
$ % &<$15($5
& 0$*(17$)5217
' 0$*(17$5($5

( <(//2:)5217
) <(//2:5($5
* 08/7,&2817
+ 3$3(5&6
, '83/(;12
(;(&87( 2.
50-21
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Sub scan-
ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment Item
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100 List
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
D MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 Adjustment
E PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual 2 pattern print
paper feed conditions
CS1 2 Tray 1 setting
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection 0 Yes 1
NO 1 No

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
$ &<$1
$ % 0$*(17$
& <(//2:
' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
(;(&87( 2.

1 : Oct. 24 2008

50-22
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
Purpose Adjustment ment data are displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [REGIST] or [DRUM POS]
or [ALL] key.
ALL The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning

direction and the sub scanning direction) and the OPC
drum phase adjustment are automatically performed.
REGIST The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning
direction and the sub scanning direction) is automatically
performed.
DRUM POS The OPC drum phase adjustment (automatic adjustment)
is automatically performed.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
ALL REGIST MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
Image (Auto image direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) 199.0
registration registration M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
adjustment/ adjustment) direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) 199.0
OPC drum Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
phase direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) 199.0
adjustment MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) 199.0
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) 199.0
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) -99.9 - - If the value is plus, R is
99.9 displayed to left side of
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) -99.9 - - numerical value. If the
99.9 value is minus, L is
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) -99.9 - - displayed to left side of
99.9 numerical value.
When the value is -4 -
+4, "(OK)" is place at
the back of the value.
For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
DRUM POS PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as
(Auto OPC adjustment 0q(1) o 45q(2) o 90q(3) o 135q(4) o 180q(5) o 225q(6) SIM44-31.
drum phase value BK o 270q(7) o 315q(8)
adjustment) o CL
1 Phase 2 Same item as
adjustment SIM44-31.
value C (50-sheet machine)
Phase 4
adjustment
value M
Phase 5
adjustment
value Y
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.

<Error displays in case of abnormal end > Error
Error display Error content Description
Error code
Error display Error content Description Sub 27 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation
code
Forcible - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during scanning REAR 27 value number result value is not
end error operation adjust- error sub within the
ment scanning color allowable range.
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed
error (Cyan) R
during operation
28 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the
- - OFF end Unconfirmed
REAR 28 error sub calculation result
operation during
scanning color value is above the
operation
(Cyan) R allowable range.
(Power OFF)
30 SUB Number of The pitch data
Basic 1 TONNER Toner Empty BK or ALL Color
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
error EMPTY 01 toner EMPTY
FRONT 30 scanning color specified value.
detection
(Magenta) F
2 BEFORE Other Other condition
31 SUB Pitch error sub The pitch data are
BEHAVIOR condition
MAGENTA scanning color not within the
02
FRONT 31 (Magenta) F allowable range.
4 SENSOR Calibration The target is not
32 SUB Adjustment The calculation
CALIBRATIO error reached by 3 times
MAGENTA value number result value is not
N 04 of retry of F or R
FRONT 32 error sub within the
5 TIME OVER Time error No data are
scanning color allowable range.
05 obtained for 90sec
(Magenta) F
from data
33 SUB Result value The variation in the
acquisition
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
7 PROCESS Process Process control
FRONT 33 scanning color value is above the
CONTROL 07 control error error detection
(Magenta) F allowable range.
Sub 10 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data
scanning FRONT 10 error sub number are not the
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
adjust- scanning color specified value.
REAR 35 scanning color specified value.
ment (Black) F
(Magenta) R
error 11 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are
FRONT 11 scanning color not within the
MAGENTA scanning color not within the
(Black) F allowable range.
REAR 36 (Magenta) R allowable range.
15 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data are
REAR 15 error sub not within the
MAGENTA value number result value is not
scanning color specified range.
REAR 37 error sub within the
(Black) R
16 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are (Magenta) R
REAR 16 scanning color not within the
(Black) R allowable range.
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
20 SUB CYAN Number of line The pitch data REAR 38 scanning color value is above the
FRONT 20 error sub number are not the (Magenta) R allowable range.
scanning color specified value.
(Cyan) F
YELLOW lines error sub number are not the
21 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are FRONT 40 scanning color specified value.
FRONT 21 scanning color not within the (Yellow) F
(Cyan) F allowable range.
22 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation YELLOW scanning color not within the
FRONT 22 value number result value is not FRONT 41 (Yellow) F allowable range.
error sub within the
YELLOW value number result value is not
(Cyan) F
FRONT 42 error sub within the
23 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the scanning color allowable range.
FRONT 23 error sub calculation result (Yellow) F
scanning color value is above the
(Cyan) F allowable range.
YELLOW error sub calculation result
25 SUB CYAN Number of The pitch data FRONT 43 scanning color value is above the
REAR 25 lines error sub number are not the (Yellow) F allowable range.
scanning color specified value.
(Cyan) R
YELLOW lines error sub number are not the
26 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are REAR 45 scanning color specified value.
REAR 26 scanning color not within the (Yellow) R
(Cyan) R allowable range.
YELLOW scanning color not within the
REAR 46 (Yellow) R allowable range.
YELLOW value number result value is not
REAR 47 error sub within the
(Yellow) R
YELLOW error sub calculation result
REAR 48 scanning color value is above the
(Yellow) R allowable range.

Error Error
Error display Error content Description Error display Error content Description
code code
Main 50 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data Main 77 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
scanning FRONT 50 lines error number are not the scanning MAGENTA value error result value is not
adjust- main scanning specified value. adjust- REAR 77 main scanning within the
ment color (Black) F ment color allowable range.
error 51 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are error (Magenta) R
FRONT 51 main scanning not within the 78 MAIN Result value The variation in the
color (Black) F allowable range. MAGENTA error main calculation result
55 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data are REAR 78 scanning color value is above the
REAR 55 lines error not within the (Magenta) R allowable range.
main scanning specified range. 80 MAIN Number of The pitch data
color (Black) R YELLOW lines error number are not the
56 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are FRONT 80 main scanning specified value.
REAR 56 main scanning not within the color (Yellow)
color (Black) R allowable range. F
60 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data 81 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
FRONT 60 lines error number are not the YELLOW main scanning not within the
main scanning specified value. FRONT 81 color (Yellow) allowable range.
color (Cyan) F F
61 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are 82 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
FRONT 61 main scanning not within the YELLOW value error result value is not
color (Cyan) F allowable range. FRONT 82 main scanning within the
62 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation color (Yellow) allowable range.
FRONT 62 value number result value is not F
error main within the 83 MAIN Result value The variation in the
scanning color allowable range. YELLOW error main calculation result
(Cyan) F FRONT 83 scanning color value is above the
63 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the (Yellow) F allowable range.
FRONT 63 error main calculation result 85 MAIN Number of The pitch data
scanning color value is above the YELLOW lines error number are not the
(Cyan) F allowable range. REAR 85 main scanning specified value.
65 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data color (Yellow)
REAR 65 lines error number are not the R
main scanning specified value. 86 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
color (Cyan) R YELLOW main scanning not within the
66 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are REAR 86 color (Yellow) allowable range.
REAR 66 main scanning not within the R
color (Cyan) R allowable range. 87 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
67 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation YELLOW value error result value is not
REAR 67 value error result value is not REAR 87 main scanning within the
main scanning within the color (Yellow) allowable range.
color (Cyan) R allowable range. R
68 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the 88 MAIN Result value The variation in the
REAR 68 error main calculation result YELLOW error main calculation result
scanning color value is above the REAR 88 scanning color value is above the
(Cyan) R allowable range. (Yellow) R allowable range.
70 MAIN Number of The pitch data Others 99 OTHER 99 Other errors Other errors
MAGENTA lines error number are not the
FRONT 70 main scanning specified value.
color
6,08/$7,2112
(Magenta) F 7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
71 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
MAGENTA main scanning not within the &/1*
FRONT 71 color allowable range. 0/1*
(Magenta) F </1*
3+$6(
72 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
&
MAGENTA value number result value is not 0
FRONT 72 error main within the <
(Magenta) F
73 MAIN Result value The variation in the
MAGENTA error main calculation result
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
FRONT 73 scanning color value is above the
(Magenta) F allowable range.
75 MAIN Number of The pitch data
MAGENTA lines error number are not the
REAR 75 main scanning specified value.
color
(Magenta) R
76 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
MAGENTA main scanning not within the
REAR 76 color allowable range.
(Magenta) R

1 : Oct. 24 2008
Item
50-24 Setting Related
classific Display Item content
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the range SIM
ation
market.) Phase PHASE_ADJ (C) Phase 1-8 50-22
1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, adjust- (50-sheet adjustment
ment machine) (1: This time
50-20, 21 and 22.
status value,
Section check 2: Previous
Operation/Procedure time value)
PHASE_ADJ Phase 1-8 50-22
NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and
(M) adjustment
is not necessary for the market.
(50-sheet (1: This time
machine) value,
Item
Setting Related 2: Previous
classific Display Item content
range SIM time value)
ation
PHASE_ADJ (Y) Phase 1-8 50-22
Regist- REG_EXE_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22
(50-sheet adjustment
ration executions of
machine) (1: This time
adjust- the registration
value,
ment adjustment
2: Previous
status (Auto
time value)
check execution)
PHASE_ADJ Phase 1-8 50-22
REG_SUC_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22
(41-sheet adjustment
success of the
machine) (1: This time
registration
value,
adjustment
2: Previous
(Auto
time value)
execution)
PHASE_STATE Phase state 1-8 50-22
REG_CNT Registration 0 - 99999999 -
(1: This time
adjustment
value,
registration
2: Previous
counter
time value)
REG_M_F Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22
PHASE_LEVEL Phase 0-99.9 50-22
(VALUE) correction (r0.1 unit)
deflection level (r0.1 unit)
amount in the
(before
main scan
weighting)
direction F in
PHASE Phase 0-99.9 50-22
the auto
_WEIGHT deflection level (r0.1 unit)
registration
(after
adjustment
weighting)
REG_M_R Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22
(1: This time
value,
amount in the
2: Previous
main scan
time value)
direction R in
Sensor REG_LED (F) Registration 1 - 255 44-02,
the auto
calibra- sensor current 70-11,
registration
tion light emitting 50-22
adjustment
status value F
REG_SUB Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22
check REG_LED (R) Registration 1 - 255 44-02,
sensor current 70-11,
amount in the
light emitting 50-22
sub scan
value R
direction in the
automatic REG_V (F) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
registration sensor current 70-11,
adjustment light receiving 50-22
value F
REG_M_F (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-20,
value 199.0 (r0.1 22 REG_V (R) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
correction unit) sensor current 70-11,
amount from light receiving 50-22
the previous value R
time, main REG_DARK (F) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
scan F sensor dark 70-11,
REG_M_R (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-20, potential F 50-22
value 199.0 (r0.1 22 REG_DARK (R) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
correction unit) sensor dark 70-11,
amount from potential R 50-22
the previous Sampling START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
time, main status (F)_U value Sub scan 300.00
scan R check (1) F (Rising) (r0.01 unit)
REG_SUB (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-21, START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
value 199.0 (r0.1 22 (F)_D value Sub scan 300.00
correction unit) F (Falling) (r0.01 unit)
amount from START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
the previous (R)_U value Sub scan 300.00
time, sub scan R (Rising) (r0.01 unit)
START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
(R)_D value Sub scan 300.00
R (Falling) (r0.01 unit)

Item Item
Setting Related Setting Related
classific Display Item content classific Display Item content
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22 Sampling TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22
status (F)_U value Main 300.00 status _MAIN (F)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit)
check (1) scan F (Rising) (r0.01 unit) check (1) all-color
START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22 average value
(F)_D value Main 300.00 Main scan F
scan F (Falling) (r0.01 unit) (Falling)
START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22 TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22
(R)_U value Main 300.00 _MAIN (R)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit)
scan R (Rising) (r0.01 unit) all-color
START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22 average value
(R)_D value Main 300.00 Main scan R
scan R (r0.01 unit) (Rising)
(Falling) TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _MAIN (R)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit)
_SUB (F)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) all-color
Sub scan F average value
(Rising) Main scan R
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 (Falling)
_SUB (F)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
Sub scan F _F_U linearity Sub 100.00
(Falling) scan F (Rising) (r0.01unit)
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 Sampling LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
_SUB (R)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) status _F_D linearity Sub 100.00
Sub scan R check (2) scan F (Falling) (r0.01unit)
(Rising) LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _R_U linearity Sub 100.00
_SUB (R)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) scan R (Rising) (r0.01unit)
Sub scan R LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
(Falling) _R_D linearity Sub 100.00
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 scan R (r0.01unit)
_MAIN (F)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) (Falling)
Main scan F LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
(Rising) _F_U linearity Main 100.00
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 scan F (Rising) (r0.01unit)
_MAIN (F)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
Main scan F _F_D linearity Main 100.00
(Falling) scan F (Falling) (r0.01unit)
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
_MAIN (R)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) _R_U linearity Main 100.00
Main scan R scan R (Rising) (r0.01unit)
(Rising) LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _R_D linearity Main 100.00
_MAIN (R)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) scan R (r0.01unit)
Main scan R (Falling)
(Falling) Sampling PITCH_SUB_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 status _U calculation (r0.01unit)
_SUB (F)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) check (3) value Sub scan
all-color F (Rising)
average value PITCH_SUB_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
Sub scan F _D calculation (r0.01unit)
(Rising) value Sub scan
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 F (Falling)
_SUB (F)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) PITCH_SUB_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
all-color _U calculation (r0.01unit)
average value value Sub scan
Sub scan F R (Rising)
(Falling) PITCH_SUB_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _D calculation (r0.01unit)
_SUB (R)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) value Sub scan
all-color R (Falling)
average value PITCH_MAIN_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
Sub scan R _U calculation (r0.01unit)
(Rising) value Main
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 scan F (Rising)
_SUB (R)_D reference pitch (r0.01unit) PITCH_MAIN_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
all-color _D calculation (r0.01unit)
average value value Main
Sub scan R scan F (Falling)
(Falling) PITCH_MAIN_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _U calculation (r0.01unit)
_MAIN (F)_U reference pitch (r0.01unit) value Main
all-color scan R (Rising)
average value
Main scan F
(Rising)

Item Item
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling PITCH_MAIN_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22 Sampling NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
status _D calculation (r0.01unit) status _M_R_U removal line
check (3) value Main check (6) number Main
scan R scan R (Rising)
(Falling) NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
Sampling ADJ_LINEAR Sampling -100.00 - 50-22 _M_R_D removal line
status linearity after 100.00 number Main
check (4) correction (r0.01unit) scan R
Sampling LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 (Falling)
status _S_F_U linearity 100.00 Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
check (5) average value (r0.01unit) status _MAX_S_F_U linearity
Sub scan F check (7) difference in
(Rising) the effective
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 line after
_S_F_D linearity 100.00 removing the
average value (r0.01unit) sampling noise
Sub scan F Line No. at
(Falling) MAX Sub
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 scanning F
_S_R_U linearity 100.00 (Rising)
average value (r0.01unit) VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
Sub scan R _MAX_S_F_D linearity
(Rising) difference in
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 the effective
_S_R_D linearity 100.00 line after
average value (r0.01unit) removing the
Sub scan R sampling noise
(Falling) Line No. at
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 MAX Sub
_M_F_U linearity 100.00 scanning F
average value (r0.01unit) (Falling)
Main scan F VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
(Rising) _MAX_S_R_U linearity
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 difference in
_M_F_D linearity 100.00 the effective
average value (r0.01unit) line after
Main scan F removing the
(Falling) sampling noise
Line No. at
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22
MAX Sub
_M_R_U linearity 100.00
scanning R
average value (r0.01unit)
(Rising)
Main scan R
(Rising) VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
_MAX_S_R_D linearity
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22
difference in
_M_R_D linearity 100.00
the effective
average value (r0.01unit)
line after
Main scan R
removing the
(Falling)
sampling noise
Sampling NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
Line No. at
status _S_F_U removal line
MAX Sub
check (6) number Sub
scanning R
scan F (Rising)
(Falling)
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22
_S_F_D removal line
_MAX_M_F_U linearity
number Sub
difference in
scan F (Falling)
the effective
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 line after
_S_R_U removal line removing the
number Sub sampling noise
scan R (Rising) Line No. at
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 MAX Main
_S_R_D removal line scanning F
number Sub (Rising)
scan R VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22
(Falling) _MAX_M_F_D linearity
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 difference in
_M_F_U removal line the effective
number Main line after
scan F (Rising) removing the
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 sampling noise
_M_F_D removal line Line No. at
number Main MAX Main
scan F (Falling) scanning F
(Falling)

Item Item
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22 Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22
status _MAX_M_R_U linearity status _MIN_M_F_D linearity
check (7) difference in check (7) difference in
the effective the effective
line after line after
removing the removing the
sampling noise sampling noise
Line No. at Line No. at MIN
MAX Main Main scanning
scanning R F (Falling)
(Rising) VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22 _MIN_M_R_U linearity
_MAX_M_R_D linearity difference in
difference in the effective
the effective line after
line after removing the
removing the sampling noise
sampling noise Line No. at MIN
Line No. at Main scanning
MAX Main R (Rising)
scanning R VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22
(Falling) _MIN_M_R_D linearity
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 difference in
_MIN_S_F_U linearity the effective
difference in line after
the effective removing the
line after sampling noise
removing the Line No. at MIN
sampling noise Main scanning
Line No. at MIN R (Falling)
Sub scanning Tempera- TEMP_ADJ_M1 Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
F (Rising) ture correction (r0.1unit)
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 correc- value in the
_MIN_S_F_D linearity tion value previous print
difference in check Main scan
the effective writing
line after TEMP_ADJ_M2 Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
removing the correction (r0.1unit)
sampling noise value in the
Line No. at MIN previous print
Sub scanning Main scan
F (Falling) magnification
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 ratio
_MIN_S_R_U linearity TEMP_ADJ Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
difference in _SUB correction (r0.1unit)
the effective value in the
line after previous print
removing the Sub scan
sampling noise Tempera- TEMP_BACK Temperature in 5.0-60.0 -
Line No. at MIN ture _TH1 the previous (r0.1qC)
Sub scanning check print
R (Rising) (Thermister 1)
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(r1unit) 50-22 TEMP_BACK Temperature in 5.0-60.0 -
_MIN_S_R_D linearity _TH2 the previous (r0.1qC)
difference in print
the effective (Thermister 2)
line after TEMP_TH1_F Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
removing the _HISTORY temperature (r0.1qC) 21, 22
sampling noise (Thermister 1)
Line No. at MIN F
Sub scanning
TEMP_TH1_R Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
R (Falling)
_HISTORY temperature (r0.1qC) 21, 22
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(r1unit) 50-22 (Thermister 1)
_MIN_M_F_U linearity R
difference in
TEMP_TH2_F Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
the effective
_HISTORY temperature (r0.1qC) 21, 22
line after
(Thermister 2)
removing the
F
sampling noise
TEMP_TH2_R_ Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
Line No. at MIN
HISTORY temperature (r0.1qC) 21, 22
Main scanning
(Thermister 2)
F (Rising)
R
Error ERROR Error record - 50-22
record HISTORY status check
status
check

Setting Default
range value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( FAX G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 30
$8725(*,675$7,21'$7$',63/$<
5(*B(;(B&17
send loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (3mm)
5(*B68&B&17
amount lead edge
5(*B&17 setting image loss
SPF amount
SIDE2 setting
H FRONT Back 0 - 100 20
_REAR surface (2mm)
(SPF_SIDE2) side image
loss
amount
setting
1(;7
. & 0 < %$&.
I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 20
(SPF_SIDE2) surface (2mm)
rear edge
50-27 image loss
Purpose Adjustment amount
setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
When A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 0
of scanned images in the FAX or image image loss (OC) edge (0mm)
send mode. send amount image loss
Section mode setting amount
(Except OC setting
Operation/Procedure
for FAX B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 0
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] and _REAR(OC) image loss (0mm)
key. copy) amount
2) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch setting
panel. C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 0
(OC) edge (0mm)
image loss
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) amount
[DSPF] setting
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
Setting Default loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
range value amount lead edge
FAX A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 30 setting image loss
send loss (OC) edge (3mm) SPF amount
amount image loss SIDE1 setting
setting amount E FRONT Front 0 - 100 0
OC setting _REAR surface (0mm)
B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 20 (SPF_SIDE1) side image
_REAR (OC) image loss (2mm) loss
amount amount
setting setting
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 20 F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
(OC) edge (2mm) (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
image loss rear edge
amount image loss
setting amount
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 20 setting
loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (2mm) G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
amount lead edge loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
setting image loss amount lead edge
SPF amount setting image loss
SIDE1 setting SPF amount
E FRONT Front 0 - 100 20 SIDE2 setting
_REAR surface (2mm) H FRONT Back 0 - 100 0
(SPF_SIDE1) side image _REAR surface (0mm)
loss (SPF_SIDE2) side image
amount loss
setting amount
F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 30 setting
(SPF_SIDE1) surface (3mm) I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
rear edge (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
image loss rear edge
amount image loss
setting amount
setting

[RSPF] Setting Default
Setting Default range value
Item/Display Content When D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
range value
FAX A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 30 image loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
send loss (OC) edge (3mm) send amount lead edge
amount image loss mode setting image loss
setting amount (Except SPF amount
OC setting for FAX SIDE1 setting
and E FRONT Front 0 - 100 0
B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 20
copy) _REAR surface (0mm)
_REAR (OC) image loss (2mm)
amount (SPF_SIDE1) side image
setting loss
amount
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 20
setting
(OC) edge (2mm)
image loss F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
amount (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
setting rear edge
image loss
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 20
amount
loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (2mm)
setting
amount lead edge
setting image loss G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
SPF amount loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
SIDE1 setting amount lead edge
setting image loss
E FRONT Front 0 - 100 20
SPF amount
_REAR surface (2mm)
SIDE2 setting
loss H FRONT Back 0 - 100 0
amount _REAR surface (0mm)
setting (SPF_SIDE2) side image
loss
F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 30
amount
(SPF_SIDE1) surface (3mm)
setting
rear edge
image loss I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
amount (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
setting rear edge
image loss
G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 20
amount
loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (2mm)
setting
amount lead edge
setting image loss A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
SPF amount
increased.
SIDE2 setting
H FRONT Back 0 - 100 20 1step = 0.1mm
_REAR surface (2mm)
loss 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
amount $ /($'B('*(2&
setting $ % )5217B5($52&
I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 30 & 75$,/B('*(2&
(SPF_SIDE2) surface (3mm) ' /($'B('*(63)B6,'(

( )5217B5($563)B6,'(
rear edge
) 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
image loss
* /($'B('*(63)B6,'(
amount + )5217B5($563)B6,'(
setting , 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
When A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 0

image loss (OC) edge (0mm)
send amount image loss
)$; 6&$11(5 2.
mode setting amount
(Except OC setting
for FAX B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 0 50-28
and _REAR(OC) image loss (0mm)
copy) amount Purpose Adjustment
setting Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 0 loss, void area, image off-center, and image
(OC) edge (0mm) magnification ratio.
image loss
amount Section
setting Operation/Procedure
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 16 scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment

7) Press [OK] key.
RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio adjustment REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
(Document table mode) RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification
* When an error occurs in the secondary transfer cleaning (clean-
ratio adjustment
ing is not completed when the final screen is displayed), the error
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
display is not made, but "FAILED IN THE CLEANING OF THE
image magnification ratio adjustment
(RSPF mode) SECONDARY TRANSFER UNIT" is displayed.
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
(each paper feed tray, duplex mode)
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
RESULT Adjustment result display 2&$'- %.0$*$'-
DATA Adjustment operation data display 63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification

ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
print.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is
printed.
4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

scanned.
6) Press [OK] key. 51
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel. 51-1
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern Purpose Adjustment/Setup
print.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is secondary transport voltage.
printed.
Section
Operation/Procedure
scanned.
panel.
6) Press [OK] key.
(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification
ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1(Front surface) or SIDE increased, the timing is delayed.
2(Back surface) or ALL(Both modes).
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
3) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
print.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is Default
printed. value
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the RSPF. A TC2 ON Secondary transfer voltage ON timing 40
TIMING setting
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is B TC2 OFF Secondary transfer voltage OFF timing 60
scanned. TIMING setting
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform proce-
dures 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back

surface. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7) Press [OK] key. 75$16&5,37,217,0,1*6(783

$ 7&217,0,1*
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center (Each paper feed $ % 7&2))7,0,1*
tray, duplex mode) adjustment
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.

2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust-
ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
(Two or more trays can be selected.)
printed. 2.

scanned.
When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the pro-
cedure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment
pattern printed with each paper.

51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF/DSPF resist roller. (This adjust-
ment is performed when there is a consid-
erable variation in the print image position
on the paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) (When DSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [REG1] or [REG2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
(When RSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
[DSPF]
Display/Item Content range 41-sheet 50-sheet
machine machine
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN _ HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)

1 : Oct. 24 2008

Display/Item Content range 41-sheet 50-sheet
machine machine
1 A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 50
(OHP)
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 50
(Envelope)
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 60
[RSPF]
Default value
Setting
Display/Item Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
range
machine machine
A SIDE1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)
F RANDOM_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A SIDE2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)

1 : Oct. 24 2008
Default value
Setting
Display/Item Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
range
machine machine
1 A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 50
(OHP)
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 50
(Envelope)
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 60
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 60
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 40 50
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40 50
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40 60
<Small size, Large size>

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter 53
than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer 53-6
than the LT size (216mm).
Purpose Adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
amount is decreased. RSPF/DSPF document width.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is Section
changed by 0.1mm.) Operation/Procedure
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17 The maximum width detection level is recognized.
$ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$ % 1250$/B3/$,1B/2: 3) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the A4R width.
& 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
' 1250$/B7+,1B/2:
( 5$1'20B3/$,1B+,*+ The A4R width detection level is recognized.
) 5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
5) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the A5R width.
* 5$1'20B7+,1B+,*+
+ 5$1'20B7+,1B/2: 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.

7) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the minimum
width.
5(*, 5(*, (1*,1( 2.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.

When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
53-8
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed. Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
erence and the RSPF/DSPF mode docu-
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
ment scan position.
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17 adjustment)
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table.
2) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.)
Setting Default
range value
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
(;(&87(
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
reference position
<MANUAL: RSPF/DSPF mode document scan position adjust-

53-7 ment>
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF document 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
size width sensor.
Setting Default
Section Item/Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A ADJUST RSPF/DSPF mode document 1 - 99 10
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch VALUE scan position adjustment
(Scanner stop position
panel.
adjustment)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the RSPF/DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
[RSPF]
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
Setting Default shifted by 0.1mm.
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 72

B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 499 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 805 $872 0$18$/
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 955
[DSPF]
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
$ $'B0$;
$ % $'B3
& $'B3
' $'B0,1
2.

55 56
55-1 56-1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Purpose Backup
required.) Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
control operations. (SOFT SW) PWB.)
Section Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
(1*,1(62)76:6(77,1*
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
6:1R 6:1R
'$7$ When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
ALL o HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD.
HDD o ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
SRAM o HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD.
(;(&87( (Including the FAX memory)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the
55-2 memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD.
HDD o SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
(including the FAX memory)
required.)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan- (memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the
ner control operation. (SOFT SW) FAX memory are also transferred to HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23<'$7$

$//+'' (1$%/(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+''$// ',6$%/(
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1*
((3520+'' ',6$%/(
6:1R 6:1R
+''((3520 ',6$%/(
'$7$
65$0+'' ',6$%/(

+''65$0 ',6$%/(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(;(&87(
56-2
55-3 Purpose Data backup
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
required.) SRAM, and HDD (including user authenti-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control- cation data and address data) to the USB
ler operation. (SOFT SW) memory. (Corresponding to the device
Section cloning and the storage backup.)
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0)362)76:6(77,1* 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
6:1R 6:1R
'$7$
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
(;(&87(

(Machine with the DSK installed)
56-3
Purpose Data backup
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
<IMPORT>
the USB memory.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT> Section
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE Operation/Procedure
3) Enter the password with 10 key. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
4) Press [SET] key. 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. <IMPORT>
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is <EXPORT>
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
<Data list outside the backup targets> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
(EEPROM/SRAM) Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
PWB Type Content NOTE displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Controller Machine serial No.
Product key information

Various counter Copy counter/FAX 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
send counter etc. (;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$

'2&),/(;3257 '2&),/,03257
Trouble history
PCU Machine serial No.
Various counter Maintenance counter
Machine adjustment execute
history
Trouble history
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Trouble history
(HDD)

Classifi-
Content NOTE
cation
Japanese User dictionary 56-4
FEP
Job end list Job end list display data Purpose Data backup
(The image send series include Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
the preserved job list.) USB memory.
Log Job log Read from WEB is
Section
enable.
New N/A Print history information Operation/Procedure
JAM history information 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Trouble history information
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
Same position continuous jam
count value 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Charging information Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Life information
Operation E-manual
manual

6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 (;3257-2%/2*'$7$
7(67 &/26(
(;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$ -2%/2*(;3257
+''(;3257 +'',03257
((352065$0(;3257 ((352065$0,03257


Setting Default
60 Item/Display Content
range value
C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
60-1 COLUMN 10BIT 2
Purpose Operation test/check 11BIT 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write) 12BIT 4
of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM). D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Section
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure
5CLOCK 3
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2
Start the test. SETTING 5CLOCK 1
VALUE 6CLOCK 2
Result display Description 7CLOCK 3
OK Success F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3
NG Fail SETTING 7CLOCK 1
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) VALUE 8CLOCK 2
INVALID Execution disable 9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
SLOT Description G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1
SLOT1 System memory (expansion) DIMM1 SETTING 3CLOCK 1
SLOT2 System memory (standard) DIMM2 VALUE 4CLOCK 2
SLOT3 Local memory (MFP expansion) DIMM4 5CLOCK 3
SLOT4 Local memory (MFP standard) DIMM3 H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
SLOT5 Local memory (Codec standard) DIMM5 SETTING 3CLOCK 1
SLOT6 Local memory (ACREA standard) - VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
VALUE - -
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 20CLOCK 1
3
J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
LATENC CL=2.5 1
Y CL=3 2
K TOTAL NONE Onboard DDR total 0-2 0 1
NUMBER 128M capacity 1
OF BYTE
MBYTES 256M 2
ON BYTE
(;(&87( BOARD
DDR
L NUMBER NONE Onboard DDR bunk 0-2 0 1
OF ON 1CHIP number 1
60-2
BOARD- SELECT
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the DDR 2CHIP 2
market.) CS-BANK SELECT
Function (Purpose) Used to set the MFP PWB onboard
SDRAM.

Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6'5$06(77,1*
Operation/Procedure $ 6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(
$
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch % 180%(52)52:%,7
& 180%(52)&2/801%,7

panel. ' 7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ( 75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
) 75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
3) Press [OK] key. * 75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
+ 7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
NOTE: Set to the default value. , 7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
- &$6/$7(1&<&/

Setting Default . 727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7(
range value / 180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0 2.
ENABLE setting setting

change of
flag Onboard
SPD
ENABLE DDR 1
setting
of B or
later
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
13BIT 2

1 : Oct. 24 2008
61
61-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
tion and laser detection. /687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
(;(&87(
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] , [PR600/
FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
De-fault value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
range linkage
machine machine
1 COPY A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 146 165
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 146 165
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 146 165
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 146 165
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 146 165
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 146 165
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 146 165
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 146 165
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 142 142
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 142 142
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 142 142
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 142 142
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 142 142
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 142 142
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 142 142
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 142 142
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 146 165
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 146 165
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 142 142
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 142 142
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 {
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 {
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 {
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 {
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 {
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AA LASER DUTY LOW(M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AB LASER DUTY LOW(Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 {

1 : Oct. 24 2008
De-fault value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 41-sheet 50-sheet
range linkage
machine machine
1 PR600/ A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 133 165
FAX B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 133 165
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 {
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 {
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 {
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 {
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 {
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 {
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 {
PR1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 133 165
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 133 165
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$ /$6(532:(50,''/(.
$ % /$6(532:(50,''/(.
& /$6(532:(50,''/(&
' /$6(532:(50,''/(&

( /$6(532:(50,''/(0
) /$6(532:(50,''/(0
* /$6(532:(50,''/(<
+ /$6(532:(50,''/(<

, /$6(532:(5/2:.
- /$6(532:(5/2:.
. /$6(532:(5/2:&
/ /$6(532:(5/2:&
&23< 35)$; 35 2.
61-4
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment +'')250$7
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust-

ment pattern. (LSU unit)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [n] [p] key on the touch panel.
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10 key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
Default 62-2
value
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper 3 Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
selection feed (CS2) (partial).
CS1 2 Tray 1 Section
CS2 3 Tray 2
Operation/Procedure
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC 2) Press [YES] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( +''5:7(673$57
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
$ % 3$3(5&6

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(;(&87( 2.
62-3
62 Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
62-1 Section
Purpose Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(except operation manual area). 2) Press [YES] key.
Section Read/write operations are performed.
Operation/Procedure

1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(67$//
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

62-6 62-8
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
hard disk. the system area and the operation manual
Section area)
1) Select the self diag area. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The self diag operation is performed. 2) Press [YES] key.
NOTE: Used to execute the hard disk format.
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
simulation to cheek the HDD. normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
SHORT S.T Partial area diag
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
NG" is displayed.

normal display. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Normal completion o "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed. +'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
Abnormal end o "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.

* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
6+25767 (1$%/(
(;7(1'('67 ',6$%/(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(

2) Press [YES] key.
62-7
Used to delete the job log data.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics normal display.
error log.
Section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure -2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$

ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
60$57(5525/2*35,17287
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-11
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
63
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5
63-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
panel.
[DSPF]
62-12
Purpose Setting GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format (odd number)
in a hard disk trouble. GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
(Even number)
Section
OFFSET Offset value
Operation/Procedure ODD (odd number)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. OFFSET Offset value
EVEN (even number)
2) Press [OK] key.
SMP AVE Reference plate
The set value is saved. ODD sampling average
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system value (ODD)
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system SMP AVE Reference plate
data storage area is cleared. EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
A 0 Enable TARGET Target value
1 Disable (Default) VALUE
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
ERROR Error code 0 No error
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/( CODE (0, 1 - 14) 1 STAGE1: Loop number
$ <(612
$
(for debug) over

2 STAGE2: The target value
is under the specified
value.
3 STAGE3: The gain set
value is negative.
4 END is not asserted.
(Gain adjustment)
5 (reserve)
2. 6 STAGE2: Underflow
7 Black shading error
8 Other error
62-13 9 END is not asserted.
Purpose Data clear (White shading)
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the 10 END is not asserted.
(Black shading)
operation manual area)
Section (Light quantity correction)
Operation/Procedure 12 END is not asserted.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Scan)
13 Register check error.
2) Press [YES] key. (When booting/Gain)
The operation manual data are deleted. 14 Register check error.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the (Before light quantity
normal display. correction)
DSPF FACE First scan DSPF white
WHITE reference level
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( LEVEL 1ST
+'')250$70$18$/:$7(50$5.$5($21/<
DSPF FACE Second scan DSPF
WHITE front surface white
LEVEL 2ND reference level
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

[RSPF]
63-2
Item/
Content NOTE
Display Purpose Adjustment
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
(odd number)
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value Section
(Even number) Operation/Procedure
OFFSET Offset value 1) (When DSPF model)
ODD (odd number)
Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
OFFSET Offset value
press [EXECUTE] key.
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate 2) (When RSPF model)
ODD sampling average Press [EXECUTE] key.
value (ODD) Used to perform shading.
SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN) normal display.
TARGET Target value
VALUE
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
BLACK Black output level 6+$',1*(;(&87,21
LEVEL 6(/(&72&6+$',1*'63)6+$',1*$1'35(66(;(&87(
ERROR Error code 0 No error

CODE (0, 1-14) 1 Loop number over
(for debug) 2 The target value is under
the specified value.
3 The gain set value is
negative.
(Gain adjustment)
5 (reserve)

6 Underflow 2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(
7 Black shading error

8 Other error
9 END is not asserted. 63-3
(White shading) Purpose Adjustment
(Black shading) Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
11 END is not asserted. ance and gamma auto adjustment.
(Light quantity correction) Section Scanner
12 END is not asserted. Operation/Procedure
(Scan)
13 Register check error.
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
(When booting/ on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
Before gain) ument table.
14 Register check error. 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. ([DSPF] key can be selected
(Before light quantity only when the DSPF is installed.)
correction)
RSPF First scan
WHITE RSPF white reference The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
LEVEL 1ST level formed.
RSPF Second scan When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
WHITE RSPF white reference normal display.
LEVEL 2ND level
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data

display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
*$,12''

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
*$,1(9(1
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2))6(72''
2&
2))6(7(9(1
603$9(2''
603$9((9(1
7$5*(79$/8(
%/$&./(9(/ &&&555
(5525&2'( 000***
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/67 <<<%%%
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/1'
% * 5 2& '63)
% * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&

63-4 63-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
Section sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- Operation/Procedure
ment table. 1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. ([DSPF] key can be selected SIM46-21 on the document table.
only when the DSPF is installed.) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned. Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
4) Select a data display mode. 7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(&+$575($',1*
&/26(
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data

COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the
SIT chart scan data
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of
the SIT chart scan data
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&

63-7
&&&555 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the
000***
<<<%%%
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
% * 5 (;(&87(
2&
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
SIM46-21 on the document table.
63-5 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color 4) Press [OK] key.
balance and gamma default setting. The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
Section adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
Operation/Procedure
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key. ([SIDE
B(DSPF)] key can be selected only when the DSPF is Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
installed.) NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color bal-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key ance is manually adjusted.
3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
B Point B target value
default.
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( E Point E target value
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
F Point F target value
6,'($2& 6,'(%'63)
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( BASE Background sampling value

Default
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( value
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
Target color DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
*+,-. balance target in the automatic color balance
012 operation is slightly shifted to
Magenta. When this target is
selected, the color balance is
converted into natural gray color
balance by the color table in an actual
copy mode and print is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural
. & 0 < 6(783 gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is
slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and
63-8 print is made.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan.
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
When this target is selected, the color
ment. balance is converted into the color
Section balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode
Operation/Procedure
and print is made.
2) Press [YES] key.

The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment is set to the default. 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(17
7$5*(77%/ '() '() '()
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(

64
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
64-1
63-11 Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the Operation/Procedure
copy mode auto color balance adjustment. 1) Set the print conditions.
Section Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Operation/Procedure Set the print conditions with 10 key.
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel. Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
below.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern
Pattern
Content generating NOTE
No. 6,08/$7,2112
section 7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17&2/256(59,&(
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC $ 35,173$77(51
$
2 Dot print - % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$

9 Each color 10% Each interval is 41.86mm
' '(16,7<),;(',)$

area (A4/A4E) (989dot). ( 08/7,&2817
density print ) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
10 8-color belt print * 3$3(5&6
11 4-color dot print + '83/(;12

, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
(sub scan)
15 16 gradations MFP ASIC When all colors are
+ M by N selected, print is made in
(center gradations CMY. . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
only): Sub scan) 16 gradations print

16 16 gradations The gradation is changed
+ M by N for every 256 dots.
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
17 All background Half tone When all colors are
(half tone) (MFP ASIC selected, print is made in
rear CMY.
18 256 gradations process) When all colors are
pattern selected, print is made in
(Other dither) CMY.
19 256 gradations 16 gradations are printed
pattern in the main scanning
(For text dither) direction, and feedback is
made, and the next 16
gradations are printed.
(16 x 16 patch print)
Print is made from 255
gradations, and 0-254
gradations are printed.
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print LSU-ASIC
(main scan)
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi

64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
below.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
<Print pattern of Item A> Pattern

Pattern
Content generating NOTE
Pattern No.
Pattern section
Content generating NOTE 17 All background Half tone -
No.
section (half tone) (MFP ASIC
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC 18 256 gradations after -
2 Dot print - pattern process)
9 Each color 10% (Other dither)
area (A4/A4R) 19 256 gradations -
density print pattern
10 8-color belt print (For text dither)
11 4-color dot print Print of each color is made 20 - - -
(sub scan) for every 1/4 of the sub 21 4-point dot print LSU-ASIC
scanning paper size. (main scan)
15 16 gradations MFP ASIC When all colors are 22 Slant line
+ M by N selected, print is made in 29 Dot print 1200dpi
(center gradations CMY.
only): Sub scan) 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations The gradation is changed
+ M by N for every 256 dots.
(center gradations
only): Main scan)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$ 35,173$77(51
$ % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$
' '(16,7<),;(',)$

( 08/7,&2817
) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
* 3$3(5&6
+ '83/(;12
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
(;(&87( 2.
64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 grada-
tions)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-5 3
(* For details, refer to the description
below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0-1 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard 0-2 0 1
HIGHQUALITY setting Fine image quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine text 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) 35,17(56(/)35,17

$ 35,173$77(51
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W) $ % '(16,7<
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous) & 08/7,&2817
4 Half tone pattern (COLOR) ' 3$3(5&6

( +$/)721(/2:
5 Half tone pattern (B/W)
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ',7+(5&$/,%
+ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description
below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0-1 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW)
setting (600dpi, 1bit) (HIGHQUALITY)
HIGHQUALITY Fine image quality 1
(600dpi, 4bit)
FINE Ultra Fine 2
(1200dpi, 1bit)
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0
PROFILE STANDARD For Photo image 1 (SHARP)
I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source SRGB 0-4 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 profile Gamma 1.6 1 (Gamma1.6)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE mode 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K TONER SAVE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
MODE OFF not set. 1
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1 COLOR 35,17(56(/)35,173&/

$ 35,173$77(51
2 B/W $ % ',7+(5&$/,%
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W & 08/7,&2817
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. 721(56$9(02'(2))
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern (* For 1-2 1
details, refer to the description below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone Photograph 0-1 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW)
setting (600dpi, 1bit) (HIGHQUALITY)
HIGHQUALITY Fine image quality 1
(600dpi, 4bit)
FINE Ultra Fine 2
(1200dpi, 1bit)
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0
PROFILE STANDARD For Photo image 1 (SHARP)
I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source SRGB 0-5 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 profile Gamma 1.6 1 (GAMMA1.6)
TONER SAVE Gamma 0.6 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K CMY INK OFF Ink simulation OFF 0-3 0 0 (OFF)
SIMULATION SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

6,08/$7,2112
Pattern No. Content 7(67
35,17(56(/)35,1736
&/26(
1 COLOR $ 35,173$77(51

$
2 B/W % ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. &0<,1.6,08/$7,212))
/ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-7 65-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pat- play section) detection coordinates.
tern of SIM46-21 is printed.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Touch the touch panel.
1) Set the print conditions. The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys. the touched position is displayed in real time.

;<
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No

B PROC YES 0 The half tone 0-1 1 Yes

ADJ process control
correction
value is

reflected.
NO 1 The half tone

process control
correction
value is not
reflected. 65-5
Purpose Operation check/test

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(3$7&+35,1702'(
input.
$ &23,(6
$ % 352&$'-12 Section

Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
(;(&87( 2.
<Check target key>
8.5 Inch LCD model 8.1 Inch LCD model

JOB STATUS DOCUMENT FILING
65 SYSTEM SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
HOME COPY
1 JOB STATUS
65-1 2 FUNCTION
Purpose Adjustment 3 SYSTEM SETTINGS
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- 4 1
play section) detection coordinates. 5 2
6 3
Section Operation panel section 7 4
Operation/Procedure 8 5
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the 9 6
screen. AUDIT CLEAR 7
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to 0 8
the simulation sub number entry menu. PROGRAM 9
CLEAR AUDIT CLEAR
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
STOP 0
CLEAR ALL/RESET PROGRAM
START (COLOR) CLEAR
START (MONO) STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (COLOR)
START (MONO)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&.
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(< 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(

67
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&/26(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
67-17
Purpose /,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
Function (Purpose) Printer reset

Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
)$&725< 6(59,&(
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
(;(&87(
NIC setting.)
normal display. 67-25

Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5 adjustment)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key on the
touch panel.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
67-24 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Purpose Adjustment/Setup increased, and vice versa.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
adjustment) the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure Setting Default
Item/Display
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. range value
A POINT1 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 1 - 99 50
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, C POINT3 1 - 99 50
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. D POINT4 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. E POINT5 1 - 99 50
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and F POINT6 1 - 99 50
the adjustment result is printed. G POINT7 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. H POINT8 1 - 99 50
I POINT9 1 - 99 50
The half tone correction target registration is processed.
J POINT10 1 - 99 50
K POINT11 1 - 99 50
L POINT12 1 - 99 50
M POINT13 1 - 99 50
N POINT14 1 - 99 50
O POINT15 1 - 99 50
P POINT16 1 - 99 50
Q POINT17 1 - 99 50

67-27

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment/Setup
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17 Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer
$ % 32,17 mode auto color balance adjustment.
& 32,17
' 32,17 Section Printer

( 32,17
Operation/Procedure
) 32,17
* 32,17 1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.

+ 32,17
, 32,17
2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet
- 32,17 printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
. 32,17
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
4) Press [OK] key.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
67-26 adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
sheet patch images.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
printer mode auto color balance adjust-
ment. NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal-
ance is manually adjusted.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure B Point B target value
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel. C Point C target value
D Point D target value
Default E Point E target value
value F Point F target value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1 G Point G target value
value table target in the automatic color balance
H Point H target value
select operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
I Point I target value
When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into natural gray J Point J target value
color balance by the color table in an K Point K target value
actual printer mode and print is made. L Point L target value
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment M Point M target value
target in the automatic color balance N Point N target value
operation is slightly shifted to natural O Point O target value
gray color balance. When this target is BASE Background sampling value
selected, the color balance is slightly
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.

DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
target in the automatic color balance 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(

%&'()
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. *+,-.
When this target is selected, the color /012
balance is converted into the color
balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)357(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-
. & 0 < 6(783
7$5*(77%/ '() '() '()


67-28 67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
of the printer mode auto color balance screen. (for PCL/PS)
adjustment. Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. touch panel.
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance 3) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key.
adjustment is set to the default. 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
balance as the factory color balance target. the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&( Setting Default
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
67-31 M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
Purpose Data clear N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Section Printer Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Display Content
2) Press [YES] key. SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
cleared. SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.) SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1 bit Photo

SCREEN6 1200dpi 1 bit Graphics
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1 bit
35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5
SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4 bit
SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1 bit
SCREEN10 Toner Save B/W
HEAVY PAPER Printer paper kind manual gamma
correction (Heavy paper)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
& 32,17
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
. & 0 < 6&5((1 (;(&87( 2.

67-34 67-36
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
printer high density section. (Support for sity section.
the high density section tone gap) Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
0 Enable
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
1 Disable
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Setting Default
range value
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(0: ENABLE density correction 35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17

$ $3$7&+,1387
1: DISABLE) mode : Enable $
1 CMY engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode : Enable
1 K engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
2.
correction
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 67-52
TARGET MAGENTA maximum
density correction Purpose Adjustment/Setup
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
TARGET YELLOW maximum printer screen. (for PCL/PS)
density correction
Section Printer
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density Operation/Procedure
correction 1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
A and B to "0." 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is
gap is reduced. reset to the default.
To increase the density in the high density section further, set
items A and B to "1. Item/Display Content
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5(1200dpi 1bit Photo)
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these SCREEN6(1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
values are changed, the density in the high density area is 600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1(600dpi 1bit Photo)
changed. SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
B/W SCREEN7(B/W 600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN8(B/W 600dpi 4bit)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
SCREEN9(B/W 1200dpi 1bit)
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/( SCREEN10(Toner Save B/W)
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7

6,08/$7,2112
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7 7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(53&/
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
+($9<3$3(5 '3,B%,7 '3,B%,7 %:
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

67-54

6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Adjustment 7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(',7+(5
&/26(
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
(Automatic adjustment for each dither) )257+,6$'-8670(17
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images. (;(&87(

selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 67-70
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the Purpose
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color Section MFP PWB
patch image (adjustment pattern). Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. 2) Press [YES] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
mality. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
4) Press [OK] key. the normal display.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed. NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.

6,08/$7,2112
Select item 7(67 &/26(
Content 65$0&/($5
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode (When 1200dpi mode is frequently used)
600dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 600dpi,
1bit mode.
the monochrome mode
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
selected.)
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
values.

[7]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE

MX-5001N C. Self diag operation
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trou- may not be stopped.
ble,this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows conditions.
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the Trouble/Warning

user. (Paper jam,consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by Trouble

a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
The content is displayed.
stopped.
Others -
Warning
A consumable No
OP

Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
the cause.
the consumable part.

Repair

Cancel the selfdiagnostic
message with the diag-

nostics (test
commands).
Reset

Standby
state
MX-5001N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
a. Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode
FAST
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan ScanTo FAX FAX List Notifica-
block (including Print
push pull HDD Send print print tion to
interruption)
host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 { { { { { {
HDD trouble E7 (03, 04)
HDD-ASIC self test
trouble
SCU communication E7 (80) { { { {
trouble A0 (02)
PCU communication E7 (90) {
trouble A0 (01)
Power controler trouble L8 (01, 20) {
Backup battery voltage U1 (01) {
fall
Controller fan motor L4 (30)
trouble
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60, 61, 65)
detection) A0 (10 - 12, 20)
Serial number U2 (30)
discrepancy
Vendor machine error U7 (50, 51) {
Memory error (included U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, {
not installed the 23, 24)
expansion RAM)
HDD registration data U2 (50) {
sum error
Image memory trouble, E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, 09, {
decode error 42, 46, 48, 49)
Special function error U2-60 { { { { { { { { {
Personal counter PC (--) {
installation trouble
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), {
L6 (10) *10
Connection trouble (PCU E7 (50)
detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10, 14), {
(motor, fusing, etc.) C4 (excluding 10), *10
F2 (22, 40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5, H7,
L4 (excluding 30),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09, 20, 21, 22, 51) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) U 11 { { { { U 11 U 11 U 11 {
troubles *10
Staple trouble F1 (08, 10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
*10
Saddle stitch section F1 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
trouble (21,31,41,43,45,47) *10
After-process trouble F1 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
(00,03,11,15,19,20,32, *10
33,34,36,37,38,39)
Other troubles EE (EL, EU) { { { { { { { { {

Operatable mode
FAST
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan ScanTo FAX FAX List Notifica-
block (including Print
push pull HDD Send print print tion to
interruption)
host
General PCU color PCU E7 (21 - 23), { { { {
system trouble F2 (23 - 25, 41 - 43, *11 *11 *11 *11 *11
65 - 67, 71 - 73,
75 - 77)
Process control trouble F2 { { { { { { { { {
(PCU detection) (22, 23, 24, 25, 39, 58) *12
PCU section error C4 (10) { { { { { { { { {
*16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16
Connection trouble (SCU SCU A0 (22)
detection)
SCU color system UC (02) U9 U9 U9 U9 U9 { { { {
troubles (SCU detection)
Anti copy system UC (20) { { { {
EEPROM faction U2 (80, 81) { { { {
Scanner section troubles L1,L3 { { { {
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles E7 (10, 11, 14) { { { {
(shading, etc.)
RSPF/DF trouble U5 U6 U6 U6 U6 U6 { { { {
General troubles in the E6 (10, 11, 14) { { { { { { { { {
SPF back surface
scanning section
{ : Operation enabled, : Operation disabled

U 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
U 6 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
U 9 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
* 10 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 11 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 11 : When the color mode is inhibited in "Color mode inhibit" setting of the system setting, the operation is performed in the monochrome
mode.
* 12 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 16 : Print is enabled. Displays "Call for service. CODE: **-**".
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message. When oper-
ations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U3, 6 perform the following procedures.
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When trouble is detected other than during the JOB operating, the trouble display is not made and the JOB that relates to the trouble part
cannot be selected.
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made.
* Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35.
(Sim.26-35)
0: ONCE; If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: ANY; Though same as the previous one, it is saved.

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6, PF, F3 trouble check When the power is turned
on, check is made in each
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP.
U2 Saved in each block.
PF Saved in the MFP.
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
(To the corre-
sponding block)
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
inhibition) cancel is initialized.)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel status
F3-12, F3-22 cancel is communicated.
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel
2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha Electri
Main Sub Trouble code content Option FAX Supply
detection nism city
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble (BK) PCU {
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU {
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU {
02 PTC heater open trouble PCU {
03 PTC heater short trouble PCU {
10 PTC no control PCU {
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU {
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU {
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU {
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP {
03 HDD trouble MFP {
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP {
05 Standard/Extension memory R/W error (MFP PWB) MFP {
06 Image data decode error MFP {
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) MFP {
09 Wrong memory size (Std./Ext. memory) (MFP PWB) MFP {
10 Shading error (Black level) SCU {
11 Shading error (White level) SCU {
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU {
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU {
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU {
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU {
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU {
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU {
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU {
42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) MFP {
46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP {
48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) MFP {
49 Water Mark data error MFP {
50 Engine connection trouble PCU {
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU {
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP {

1 : Oct. 24 2008
Trouble code
detection nism city
code code
E7 61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP {
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP {
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP {
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP {
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - 178) PCU {
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Overtoner) PCU {
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Undertoner) PCU {
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU {
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU {
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU {
10 Staple operation trouble PCU {
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU {
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU {
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU {
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU {
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU {
22 Finisher assist motor trouble PCU {
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU {
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU {
32 Finisher - Punch unit communication error PCU {
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU {
34 Punch operation trouble PCU {
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU {
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU {
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU {
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU {
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU {
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU {
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU {
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU {
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU {
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU {
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU {
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU {
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU {
39 Process thermister trouble PCU {
40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN) PCU {
42 Toner density sensor trouble (MAGENTA) PCU {
43 Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW) PCU {
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU {
49 LSU thermister trouble PCU {
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU {
1 51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (41-sheet machine) PCU {
CL drum phase sensor trouble (CYAN) (50-sheet machine)
52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (MAGENTA) (50-sheet machine) PCU {
53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (YELLOW) (50-sheet machine) PCU {
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU {
64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK) PCU {
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU {
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU {
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU {
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK) PCU {
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN) PCU {
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA) PCU {
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW) PCU {
74 Black CRUM error PCU {
75 Cyan CRUM error PCU {
76 Magenta CRUM error PCU {
77 Yellow CRUM error PCU {
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU {
(Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU {
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU {
H2 00 Thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Thermister open trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Thermister open trouble (TH_US) PCU {
03 Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU {
04 External heating thermistor open (TH_EX1) PCU {

Trouble code
detection nism city
code code
H2 05 External heating thermistor open (TH_EX2) PCU {
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
04 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_EX1) PCU {
05 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_EX2) PCU {
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
04 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_EX) PCU {
30 Thermister input circuit trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU {
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU {
12 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_US) PCU {
14 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_EX) PCU {
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU {
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU {
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU {
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU {
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU {
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU {
11 Shift motor trouble PCU {
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU {
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP {
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU {
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU {
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU {
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU {
45 Toner cooling fan trouble (Toner cooling fan 1, 2) PCU {
50 Process fan trouble PCU {
56 Rear cooling fan trouble PCU {
57 Toner cooling fan trouble (Toner cooling fan 3) PCU {
58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU {
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU {
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU {
02 Full wave signal error PCU {
20 Communication error of MFP/Mother board MFP {
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP {
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP {
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP {
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP {
10 SRAM user authentication index checksum error MFP {
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP {
22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP {
23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP {
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP {
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP {
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP {
60 Water Mark check error MFP
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU {
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU {
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU {
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU {
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU {
16 Document feed unit fan trouble SCU {
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU {
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU {
40 Document feed unit installation trouble SCU {
U6 00 Communication error of PCU/Desk paper feed unit PCU {
01 Desk paper feeding tray 1 lift trouble PCU {
02 Desk paper feeding tray 2 lift trouble PCU {
09 LCC lift trouble PCU {
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU {
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU {
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU {
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU {

Trouble code
detection nism city
code code
U6 50 Mismatched Desk unit PCU {
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU {
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP {
51 Vendor machine error MFP {
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU {
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU {
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP {
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP {
04 ACU ROM error MFP {
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP {
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP {
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) MFP {
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP {
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU {
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version(SCU) SCU {
3. Details of trouble code C4-00 PTC trouble

C1-10 Main charger trouble (BK) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The PTC unit is not properly installed.
Detail PCU PTC unit trouble.
Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly. Secondary transfer PWB trouble.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. PCU PWB trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Breakage of the high voltage harness. Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
MC/DV PWB trouble. Replace the secondary transfer PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. NOTE:
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB. When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
connector. /Replace. be made because of no replacement part:
Replace the MC/DV PWB. To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
Replace the PCU PWB. ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
operated tentatively.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
control, and the error detection.
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
Trouble content in SIM55-1 to "0".
Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed
properly. C4-02 PTC heater open trouble
There is an abnormality in the main charger.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector.
Breakage of the high voltage harness. Trouble content
MC/DV PWB trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause The PTU unit is not installed, or the eater line
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. conduction trouble.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. PCU PWB trouble.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB Connector, harness connection trouble.
connector. /Replace. Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
Replace the MC/DV PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
NOTE:
When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
be made because of no replacement part:
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
operated tentatively.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
in SIM55-1 to "0".

C4-03 PTC heater short trouble E6-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail SCU
Cause PTC unit trouble. Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check and remedy Check the DSPF PWB.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. E7-01 MFP image data error
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
NOTE:
When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot Trouble content
be made because of no replacement part: Detail MFP
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be MFP PWB trouble.
operated tentatively. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1". of the MFP PWB.
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater Replace the MFP PWB.
in SIM55-1 to "0". E7-03 HDD trouble
C4-10 PTC no control Trouble content

Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
Trouble content PWB and HDD.
Detail PCU HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
Cause The engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1". (FAT breakage).
The PTC control is not executed. (The PTC does not MFP PWB trouble.
operate.) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
When the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to of the MFP PWB and HDD.
"1", the PTC output, the heater control, and the error Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the
detection are disabled. When this setting is made in HDD.
case of a PTC unit trouble, the PTC function is Replace the HDD.
disabled regardless of the PTC trouble and printing Replace the MFP PWB.
operation can be performed.
Check & Remedy Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
(The mode returns to the normal PTC control mode.) E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
E6-10 Shading error (Black correction) Trouble content

Detail MFP
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
Trouble content An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
Detail SCU booting.
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness. Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
CCD unit trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check and remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD E7-05 Standard/Extension memory R/W
unit.
Check the CCD unit. error (MFP PWB)
Check the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content Memory access is disabled.
Detail MFP
E6-11 Shading error (White correction) Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Garbled memory data.
Trouble content The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Detail SCU Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
the memory.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Replace the expansion memory.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
Replace the MFP PWB.
plate.
CCD unit trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM E7-06 Image data decode error
abnormality.
Check and remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD Trouble content
unit. Detail MFP
Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
Cause Compressed image data abnormality.
lamp unit.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
Image data compression/transfer data garble.
plate.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job,
Check the DSPF PWB.
check the FAX PWB.
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.

E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K)
(MFP PWB)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Optical axis shift.
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
MFP memory slot. trouble.
DIMM trouble. BD PWB trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM.
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB.
Replace the DIMM.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
E7-09 Wrong memory size Replace the LSU.
(Std./Ext. memory) (MFP PWB)
Trouble content E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C)

Detail MFP
Cause A DIMM which is not 512MB is inserted into the Trouble content
default slot. Detail PCU
DIMM trouble. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Insufficient memory size. trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM. Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB
and the LSU cnt PWB.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.
E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M)
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality. Trouble content
SCU PWB abnormality. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Check the CCD unit. trouble.
Check the SCU PWB. Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB
and the LSU cnt PWB.
E7-11 Shading error (White correction) Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y)
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Trouble content
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. Detail PCU
CCD unit abnormality. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
SCU PWB abnormality. trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB
Check connection of the harness to the scanner and the LSU cnt PWB.
lamp unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
plate. LSU.
Check the CCD unit. Replace the LSU.
Check the SCU PWB.
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.

E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error E7-50 Engine connection trouble

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported
PWB and the control ASIC. by the machine specifications is detected in the PCU
Improper connection of the communication PWB.
connector between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PCU PWB trouble.
PWB (interface PWB). LSU trouble.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
cnt PWB (interface PWB) Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
PCU PWB or LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB
(interface PWB). E7-55 PWB information sum error
Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
(Engine detection)
Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error

E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error Detail PCU
Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
Trouble content
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Detail PCU
Malfunction due to noises
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
E7-60 Combination error between the MFP
E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) PWB and other PWB, firmware

Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause Image transfer trouble. Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
Detail Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
connector. MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Trouble content E7-61 Combination error between the MFP

Detail MFP
PWB and the PCU PWB
Cause Compression data abnormality.
Garbled data are produced in image compression/
transmission. Trouble content
ACRE ASIC PWB trouble. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB. Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB. PCU PWB.
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble. E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
Check & Remedy DIMM trouble.
Replace the PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
E7-49 Water Mark data error Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Malfunction due to noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.

E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Undertoner)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble. adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is
SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. 51 or less.
SCU PWB mother board connection trouble. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
Replace the mother board. density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB, PCU PWB trouble.
and the mother board. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the ground. Replace the developing unit.
Replace the SCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication

E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error error

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB motherboard connection trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises.
Replace the mother board. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB, finisher and the PCU PWB.
and the mother board. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check the ground. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the mother board. F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting opera-
tion trouble
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
Trouble content
error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ Detail PCU
139 - 178) Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Finisher control PWB trouble.
adjustment is outside of 128 r10.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
Detail PCU
roller lift motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the home position sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the developing unit.
F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
Trouble content
error (Overtoner)
Detail PCU
Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Finisher control PWB trouble.
adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 Home position sensor trouble.
or above. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner Check connection of the connector and the harness.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-21 Finisher fan trouble

Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Finisher fan motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor.
motor. Check connection between the finisher control PWB
Replace the staple motor. and the fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the fan.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-22 Finisher assist motor trouble

F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Motor harness short/open trouble.
Cause Grip motor trouble. Control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Grip arm trouble. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor
Home position sensor trouble. with SIM3-3.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the
Replace the grip motor. motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the grip arm.
F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation Trouble content
trouble Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock trouble.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble. Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor
Finisher control PWB trouble. with SIM3-3.
Check connection from the control PWB to the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
motor.
tray lift motor.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble

F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Motor lock trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Motor speed abnormality. Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Overcurrent to the motor. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the saddle motor with SIM3-
Finisher control PWB trouble. 3.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
alignment motor F. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble

R
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.

F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
error
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or Malfunction due to noises
disconnection between the finisher and the punch Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
unit. Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control
Finisher control PWB trouble. PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises.
The punch unit is in the adjustment mode. F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the punch unit. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW
adjustment.)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Punch shift motor trouble. F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
Cause Punch dust sensor trouble.
shifting.
Replace the punch shift motor.
Punch unit control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
harness. Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Replace the punch dust sensor.
F1-34 Punch operation trouble Replace the punch unit control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
Cause Punch motor trouble. trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble. Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in
Check & Remedy Check the punch operation. the saddle section.
Replace the punch motor. Detail PCU
Replace the finisher control PWB. Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Replace the home position sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the Home position sensor trouble.
harness. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper positioning motor.
F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Trouble content Replace the sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Harness disconnection. F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble
Punch control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Trouble content
Replace the punch paper edge sensor. Detail PCU
Replace the finisher control PWB. Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Replace the punch control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
alignment motor (FSPAM).
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor.

F1-45 Saddle staple trouble F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the Trouble content A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open
saddle section. sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the
Detail PCU discharge lamp.
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
Home position sensor trouble. (C) and the PCU PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle PCU PWB trouble.
staple motor. Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check the harness and the connector.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the sensor.
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)
F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble Trouble content A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the
Trouble content Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the discharge lamp.
finisher saddle transport section. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble. (M) and the PCU PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Fuse blown (24V line). Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Check the harness and the connector.
paper transport motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the sensor. F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
Trouble content A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open

F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the
discharge lamp.
Detail PCU Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit (Y) and the PCU PWB.
model is installed. Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check the harness and the connector.
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)

F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
Trouble content A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the Trouble content
discharge lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
(K) and the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K). Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the harness and the connector.
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN) F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble

Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample Cause The LSU detection temperature is outside of -28qC -
level 25 or less, or 231 or above) 78qC.
Connection trouble of the connector and the LSU thermistor trouble.
harness. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Check & Remedy Replace the LSU thermistor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the developing unit. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble
(MAGENTA)
F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
Drum drive section trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the developing unit. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Repair the drum drive section.
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble 1 F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble
(YELLOW)
(41-sheet machine)
Trouble content
CL drum phase sensor trouble (CYAN)
Detail PCU (50-sheet machine)
level 25 or less, or 231 or above).
Trouble content
harness. Detail PCU
Developing unit trouble. Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Drum drive section trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL".
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Repair the drum drive section.
F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU F2-52 CL drum phase sensor trouble
Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment (MAGENTA) (50-sheet machine)
trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Trouble content
Image density sensor dirt. 1 Detail PCU
Calibration plate dirt. Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Calibration plate solenoid trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Drum drive section trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor. PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL".
harness. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Clean the image density sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the calibration plate. harness.
Replace the calibration plate solenoid. Repair the drum drive section.
Use SIM44-2 to adjust the process control sensor
sensitivity.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
F2-53 CL drum phase sensor trouble F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M)
(YELLOW) (50-sheet machine)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Toner motor trouble.
1
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL".
Replace the drum phase sensor. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the Replace the toner density sensor.
harness. Connector/harness trouble.
Repair the drum drive section. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble

F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Toner cartridge trouble.
harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK) Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content Replace the developing unit.
Detail PCU
Toner density sensor trouble. F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Connector/harness trouble. (BLACK)
PCU PWB trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. Detail PCU
Replace the toner density sensor. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Connector/harness trouble. unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Replace the PCU PWB. specification.)
Replace the toner cartridge. Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the developing unit. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)
Trouble content
F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection
Detail PCU (CYAN)
Toner density sensor trouble. Trouble content
Connector/harness trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the toner density sensor. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner cartridge.

F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection F2-77 Yellow CRUM error
(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main PCU PWB trouble.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Connector/harness trouble.
specification.) Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
F2-78 Registration image density sensor
trouble (Transfer belt substrate
F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection reflection rate abnormality)
(YELLOW)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main sensitivity adjustment trouble).
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different PCU PWB trouble.
specification.) Connection trouble of the connector and the
Toner cartridge trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
F2-74 Black CRUM error Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
Trouble content
Detail PCU F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
Connector/harness trouble. CLUD1 sensor trouble
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-75 Cyan CRUM error Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD1.
Trouble content Replace the lift-up unit.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Connector/harness trouble. Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
F2-76 Magenta CRUM error CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. Replace the lift-up unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.

H2-00 Thermistor open trouble H2-05 External heating thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD2) (TH_EX2)

Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Fusing unit not installed. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature

H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) trouble (TH_UM)
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
PCU PWB trouble. Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Fusing unit not installed. harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Power unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermistor.
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content Replace the power unit.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the trouble (TH_LM)
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Harness and connector
connection trouble.
H2-03 Compensation thermistor open Power unit trouble.
trouble (TH_UM_AD1) Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the power unit.
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
Replace the PCU PWB. trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
H2-04 External heating thermistor open Cause Thermistor trouble.
(TH_EX1) PCU PWB trouble.
Fusing section connector connection trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Detail PCU
heater lamp.
PCU PWB trouble.
Fusing section connector connection trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
thermistor and the PCU PWB.

H3-04 Fusing section high temperature H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_EX1) trouble (TH_LM)

Cause Non-contact thermistor trouble. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
PCU PWB trouble. level within the specified time from turning ON the
Fusing section connector connection trouble. power relay.
Power unit trouble. Thermistor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Heater lamp trouble.
heater lamp. PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness. Power unit trouble.
Replace the power unit. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the heater lamp.
H3-05 Fusing section high temperature Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
trouble (TH_EX2) Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content Replace the interlock switch.
Detail PCU Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Cause Thermistor trouble. heater lamp.
PCU PWB trouble. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
Replace the thermistor. trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
trouble (TH_UM_AD2) power relay.
Thermistor trouble.
Trouble content Heater lamp trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
Power unit trouble.
power relay.
Interlock switch trouble.
Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the heater lamp.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the thermostat.
Power unit trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Interlock switch trouble. Replace the power unit.
Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Replace the interlock switch. H4-04 Fusing section low temperature
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the trouble (TH_EX)
heater lamp.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.

H4-30 Thermistor input circuit trouble H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(TH_UM) (TH_LM)

Cause The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
exceed the specified value (50 counts in AD value) level within the specified time from stopping a job
within the specified time from turning ON the due to fall in the fusing temperature.
HL_UM. Thermistor trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Thermostat trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble.
Power unit trouble. Interlock switch trouble.
Interlock switch trouble Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat.
Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit.
Replace the power unit. Replace the interlock switch.
Replace the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.
heater lamp.
H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(TH_US)
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
jam Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Detail PCU level within the specified time from stopping a job
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam due to fall in the fusing temperature.
paper remains.) Thermistor trouble.
POD1 sensor trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. Thermostat trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor. Power unit trouble.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the fusing unit. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermostat.
H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Replace the interlock switch.
(TH_UM_AD2) heater lamp.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from stopping a job
due to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.

H7-14 Recovery error from low fuser temp. L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
(TH_EX)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause The lock signal Is not detected within 1 sec when
Cause The specified temperature is not reached within the turning ON the paper feed motor when warming up,
specified time from job stop due to a fall in the fusing canceling a jam.
temperature. Paper feed motor trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Thermostat trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Heater lamp trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
PCU PWB trouble. motor.
Power unit trouble. Replace the paper feed motor.
Interlock switch trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Replace the power unit. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the fusing motor.
heater lamp.
Fusing motor trouble.
harness.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
Trouble content motor.
Detail SCU Replace the Fusing motor.
Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified Check connection of the connectors and the
time. harness.
Scanner unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Detail PCU
Replace the scanner unit.
the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble.
harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the scanner motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
developing motor.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble Replace the developing motor.
Trouble content harness.
Detail SCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified Replace the developing motor.
time. Replace the developing unit.
Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble. L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content
Scanner motor trouble.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
developing motor.
Replace the developing motor.
harness.
Replace the developing motor.

L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit, Trouble content
change in the separation position sensor Detail PCU
characteristics is not detected within the specified Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
time. specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
Detail PCU Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the
Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble. harness.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the fan.
transfer unit. Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Install the primary transfer belt unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Replace the transfer unit separation clutch.
Trouble content
L4-11 Shift motor trouble Detail PCU
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the power cooling fan operation.
Trouble content Power cooling fan trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause No change in the shifter home position sensor signal Connection trouble of the connector and the
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. harness.
Shift motor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
PCU PWB trouble. fan.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the power cooling fan.
harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
Shifter home position sensor trouble. Check/replace the connector or the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor. L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble
Replace the shift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content
Replace the shifter home position sensor. Detail PCU
Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble time.
LSU cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Connection trouble of the connector and the
Detail PCU harness.
Cause No change in the fusing pressure release sensor Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
signal is detected within the specified time after Replace the LSU cooling fan.
turning ON the fusing pressure release motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Fusing pressure release sensor trouble. Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Fusing pressure release motor trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Fusing pressure release level F, R trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Replace the fusing pressure release motor. Trouble content
Replace the fusing pressure release lever F, R. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation.
Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
Trouble content fan.
Detail MFP Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Cause Fan motor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector Check connection of the connector and the harness.
connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor.

L4-45 Toner cooling fan trouble L4-58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble
(Toner cooling fan 1, 2)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause When the toner cooling fan is operated, the fan specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
operation signal is not detected within the specified Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
time. PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
PCU PWB trouble. harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
harness. power.
Check & Remedy After turning ON the power, check to confirm that the Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
fan is rotating. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cooling fan. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
L4-50 Process fan trouble Trouble content

Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 7 sec
Detail PCU after starting rotation of the polygon motor.
Polygon motor trouble.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
LSU control PWB trouble.
specified time in the process fan operation.
Process fan trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
harness. motor.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Check connection of the connector and the harness.
power. Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the process fan. Replace the LSU.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the LSU control PWB.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error

L4-56 Rear cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause No full wave signal is detected.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the PCU PWB trouble
specified time in the rear cooling fan operation. Power unit trouble.
Rear cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
PCU PWB trouble. harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Replace the power unit.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
power.
Replace the rear cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB. L8-02 Full wave signal error
Trouble content
Detail PCU
L4-57 Toner cooling fan trouble Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
(Toner cooling fan 3) detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
45Hz or less.)PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Power unit trouble.
Detail PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the
Cause When the toner cooling fan is operated, the fan harness.
operation signal is not detected within the specified Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
time. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cooling fan trouble. Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check the power waveform.
harness.
Check & Remedy After turning ON the power, check to confirm that the
fan is rotating.
Replace the toner cooling fan.

L8-20 Communication error of MFP/ U2-10 SRAM user authentication index
Mother board checksum error

Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
MFP PWB trouble. basic data) check sum error.
Replace the mother board. MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the Strong external noises.
MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Check the ground of the main unit. Transfer the user index information data in the HDD
Replace the MFPC PWB. to the SRAM.
Replace the mother board. Replace the MFP PWB.
PC-- Personal counter not detected U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
sum error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause The personal counter is not installed. Detail MFP
The personal counter is not detected.
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the EEPROM socket contact trouble.
harness. MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB. Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall. U2-22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum
Detail MFP error
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Trouble content
Check & Check to confirm that the battery voltage is
Detail MFP
Remedy about 2.0V or above.
Cause The identifier which controls the communication
management table stored in the SRAM and the
FAX soft switch is not detected correctly.
U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content Strong external noises.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble. table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM
EEPROM socket contact trouble. are initialized when an error occurs, register the
MFP PWB trouble. deleted data again individually.
Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check the power environment.
U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual
data check sum error
U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
inconsistency Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum
error.
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause The check sum value for individual data of the
Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that communication table and the sender registration
before turning OFF the power is installed. does not match.
HDD trouble. MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related
cloning), import it. to the content of check sum error.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.

U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
authentication counter check sum
error Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Trouble content
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
Detail MFP SCU PWB trouble.
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Strong external noises. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufactur- and the adjustment values.
ing No. data inconsistency Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error

Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB. Trouble content
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the Detail PCU
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
MFP PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was Replace the PCU PWB.
mounted on the PWB before replacement is Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
mounted on the new PWB. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Replace the MFP PWB. simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Replace the PCU PWB. and the adjustment values.
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check

sum error U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail MFP
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause HDD trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Initialize the data (one-touch, group, program, etc.)
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
related to the check sum error by turning OFF/ON
the power.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
and the adjustment values.
Replace the HDD.
U2-60 Water Mark check error U5-00 Document feed unit communication
error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause Watermark data trouble Detail SCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data. Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Trouble content Replace the DSPF PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
and the adjustment values.

U5-16 Document feed unit fan trouble U6-00 Communication error of PCU/
Desk paper feed unit
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Detail PCU
not detected within the specified time. Cause Error when testing the communication line after
Fan motor trouble. turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the fan motor. Strong external noises.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Replace the DSPF PWB. Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Replace the desk control PWB.
U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail SCU U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble
Cause When STUD is not turned ON 5 times continuously
within the specified time. Trouble content
STUD/STLD sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Cause DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time
harness.
when lift-up operation.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
DLUD1 sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Lift unit trouble.
Replace the DSPF PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
trouble Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
Trouble content Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble. U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
harness.
Replace the DSPF PWB. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor. Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
Replace the DSPF PWB. when lift-up operation.
DLUD2 sensor trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
U5-40 Document feed unit installation Lift unit trouble.
trouble harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
Detail SCU Replace the desk control PWB.
Cause When two or more document feed units are Replace the lift unit.
detected. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness.
Document feeder trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.

U6-09 LCC lift trouble U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble

Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation
detected within the specified time after outputting the sensor signal is detected within the specified time
lift motor ON signal. after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
lift motor is stopped. varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble. Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble LCC control PWB trouble.
Lift mechanism trouble. Mechanism trouble.
Lift motor trouble. Paper transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper
sensor and the lift motor. transport motor.
Replace the lift motor rotation sensor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the lift mechanism. Replace the mechanism.
Replace the lift motor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble

U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
motor trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
Detail PCU to the LCC.
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor
LCC control PWB trouble.
rpm abnormality, overcurrent to the motor).
Power source unit trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
harness. line.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk Replace the power unit.
transport motor. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. U6-50 Mismatched Desk unit
Trouble content
U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Trouble content desk.
Detail PCU Desk control PWB trouble.
Cause Error when testing the communication line after Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Replace the desk control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
Improper combination between the main unit and the
Trouble content
LCC.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Check the connector and the harness in the
LCC.
communication line.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
Replace the LCC control PWB.

U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
communication error
Trouble content
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the Detail MFP
serial vendor. Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
Detail MFP by interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine operation, etc.
specifications (SIMI26-3). ROM trouble.
Vendor machine trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
MFP PWB trouble. again.
Connector, harness connection trouble. ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the A0-04 ACU ROM error
communication line. Change the specifications of the
vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the LCC control Trouble content
PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware update is failed because of turning
OFF the power during the firmware update
operation, etc.
U7-51 Vendor machine error Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to execute update of the firmware.
Trouble content
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor) A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
Detail MFP
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
code.
Check the connector and the harness in the Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
communication line. image ROM (color correction ROM).
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency

(MFP - PCU)
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause SCU PWB trouble (CPT-ASIC trouble) Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB. Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error PCU.
Trouble content
A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (MFP - SCU)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the SCU.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
Detail MFP SCU.
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
ROM trouble. version (MFP)
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
Trouble content
ROM trouble.
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.

A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data

version (SCU)
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version

[8] MAINTENANCE
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Maintenance list
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean S: Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate
Color items
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 Block/Item No.
Section Part name
calling k k k k k k k k k k k (Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Photocon- Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
ductor Cleaner blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
section MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Side seal F/R Mechanical -
Toner reception seal parts -
MC cleaner roller - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
Developing Developer (Y) Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
section Developer (M) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (C) - S S S S S S S S S S S
DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
Toner filter - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Toner Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
supply
section
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement parts
are described.)
Photocon- Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
ductor Cleaner blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
section MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Side seal F/R Mechanical -
Toner reception seal parts -
MC cleaner roller - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
Waste toner box
Developing Developer Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
section DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
Toner filter - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Toner Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
supply
section
Fusing section (Fusing unit/Upper heat roller and related parts)

Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
When Block/Item No.
Part name 200k 400k 600k 800k 1000k 1200k 1400k 1600k
calling (Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Upper heat roller Replace Mechanical S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-45)
Upper heat roller gear the whole parts S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-42)
Upper heat roller upper heat S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-44)
bearing roller unit.
Upper heat roller S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-43)
heat-insulation bush
MX-5001N MAINTENANCE 8 1
Fusing section (Others)
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Part name
replacement parts
are described.)
Lower heat roller Replace Mechanical S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-15)
Lower heat roller the whole parts S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-14)
bearing lower heat
roller unit.
Upper separation pawl/pawl spring S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-14,
[31]-15)
Non-contact thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-37)
Upper thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-48)
Lower thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-20)
Lower separation pawl/pawl spring S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-56,
[32]-57)
External heating roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-18)
External belt S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-17)
External heating roller bearing S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-13)
External heating collar S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-15)
External heating spring S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-5)
External thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-12)
Upper Web roller S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-19)
Pressure roller S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-21)
Web roller bearings S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-15)
Pressure roller bearing S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-10)
Winding regulation gear S S S S S S S S S S S
Web unit S S S S S S S S S S S
Lower CL roller S S S S S S S S S S S
Lower CL roller bearing S S S S S S S S S S S
CL pressure spring S S S S S S S S S S S
Fusing paper exit roller { { { { { { { { { { {
Gears
Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { {
Sections other than the fusing section

Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement parts
are described.)
LSU Dust-proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Cleaning base parts S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-35)
Transfer Intermediate transfer Mechanical - S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-1)
section belt parts
Primary transfer - S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-18)
cleaner blade
Primary transfer roller - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-9,
[28]-42)
Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-13)
drive gear
Primary transfer belt - { { { { {
drive roller
follower roller
tension roller
Belt CL brush - { { { { {
PTC opposed roller - { { { { {
Secondary transfer - S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-21)
belt
roller
idle gear
Secondary transfer - { { { { {
belt drive roller
belt follower roller
idle shaft
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement parts
are described.)
Transfer Secondary transfer Mechanical -
section backup blade parts
PTC unit - S S S S S (P/G No.: [20]-502)
Pro-reg sensor - { { { { { { { { { { {
Transfer cleaner seal -
F/R
Primary transfer toner -
reception seal
Filters Ozone filter Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [47]-40)
1 parts
Left cabinet filter { { { { { { { { { { {
Paper feed Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as
section Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { needed.
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { Reference:
Torque limiter About 100k
Transport, PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
Reverse, Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { {
Paper exit Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
section guides
Discharge brush
Gears
Paper dust removing { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-58)
unit
Drive Gears (Grease) Mechanical -
section Shaft earth sections parts -
(Conduction grease)
Belts -
Sensors
Scanner Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section CCD parts
Table glass/SPF glass { { { { { { { { { { { {
Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { {
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
RSPF Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as
section Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { needed.
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { Reference:
About 100k
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
Torque limiter
Discharge brush
Gears
Belts
DSPF Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as
section Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { needed.
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { Reference:
About 100k
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
Discharge brush
Torque limiter
No. 1 scanning plate { { { { { { { { { { { {
No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { { {
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { { {
section, white
reference glass
Mirror { { { { { { { { { { { {
Lens/CCD { { { { { { { { { { { {
Copy lamp/Reflector { { { { { { { { { { { {
OC mat { { { { { { { { { { { {
Gears (Grease)
Belts -
2. Details
A. Photoconductor section
Color items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
No. Part name Block/Item No.
calling k k k k k k k k k k k
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
2 Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
3 MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
4 Toner reception seal Mechanical -
5 Side seal F/R parts -
6 Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
7 MC cleaner roller Mechanical - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Waste toner box Mechanical
parts
2 Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
3 MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
4 Toner reception seal Mechanical -
5 Side seal F/R parts -
6 Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
7 MC cleaner roller Mechanical - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) 1) Open the front cover.
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
5mm 2) Remove the waste toner box.

Maintenance: Check at every 150K. (Replace as necessary.)
OPC DRUM
5mm
2
CLEANING BLADE
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures. 3) Remove the MC cleaner rod.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
PET
[Note]
Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
4) Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the 7) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit. (1position for each color)
Maintenance: Clean at every call.
T
PE
8) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit.
If there is no improvement, clean again.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained by cleaning again,
replace the MC cleaner rollers with spare ones.
5) Remove the MC cleaner roller from the MC cleaner rod.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K (color) or every 150K
(monochrome).
9) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove.
* Be careful to prevent against dirt of the MC cleaner roller.

(Prevent adhesion of the oils or the toner etc.)
10) Remove the screws and remove the fixing shaft.
6) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
2
A
B
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear 13) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec-
tion.
2
(monochrome).
1
1
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit.
(monochrome).
* When replacing, apply stearic acid powder to the OPC drum.
NOTE: Attach the cover so that it does not float on the opposite
side of the pawl.
1 3
* Don't touch the OPC drum surface. (excluding the area of

within 5mm from the both ends)
* Even if it wrapped with black paper, don't apply hard pres-
sure.
* Apply the stearic acid powder to the whole surface of the
OPC drum.
* Hold both ends, rotate twice by hand in the direction shown
in the figure. (For seating the drum cleaning blade.)
2
15) Remove the toner receiving seal.

Maintenance: Check at every 100K (color) or every 150K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
12) Remove the C-ring, carefully lift the hook, and push the drum
shaft. Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side
until it is caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
* When installing the drum shaft to a new drum, leave the
drum protection paper wrapped on the drum..
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
surface, and fit as indicated below.
Reference line
Reference
line
16) Remove the side seal F/R.
Maintenance: Check at every 100K (color) or every 150K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)

surface, and fit as indicated below.
00.3mm 00.3mm
00.3mm 00.3mm
17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the
DCH lens.
18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.

(monochrome).
B. Developing section
Color items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
2 DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
3 DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
4 Developer (Y) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (M) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (C) - S S S S S S S S S S S
5 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
2 DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
3 DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
4 Developer - S S S S S S S S S S S
5 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical
-
parts
3
4
5
5 3
(Note for servicing the DV roller) 2) Remove the waste toner box.
1. Prevent roller contamination
[Note]
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface.
1
When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section
to rotate it.
3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).

Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
Rotate this section manually.
A
B
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02. 4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
[Check method] (1position for each color)
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
1
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
1) Remove the front cabinet.
6) Remove the screws. NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum.
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
9) Remove the cover and the toner filter.

7) Hold the sections (A), and remove the DV cover in the arrow
direction (B).
(monochrome).
A
10) Remove the DV blade.

8) Remove developer material. Maintenance: Replace at every 100K (color) or every 150K
(monochrome).
NOTE: Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit
is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much devel-
oper in the developing unit, static electricity may be accu-
mulated in the unit. * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface, and fit with the reference.
surface when transporting developer or removing foreign
material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to 00.3mm
the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when 00.3mm
handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as
developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possi-
ble.
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R. NOTE: When replacing developer, use extreme care not to drop
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K (color) or every 150K developer on the drive section (marked with {).
(monochrome). NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.

surface, and fit with the reference so that the DV side seals
F and R are inserted between the DV cover R (A) and the
DV blade (B).
00.3mm
0 0.5mm
0 0.3mm 0 0.3mm
12) Insert the new developer.

(monochrome).
C. Toner supply section
Color items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
1) Open the front cover. 2) Lift the lock lever, and pull the toner cartridge out slowly and
horizontally.
Maintenance: Replacement is made by the user at every toner
empty condition.
D. LSU section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Dust-proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-35)
1) Open the front cover. 4) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port to which the
cleaning guide label is attached so that the cleaning base (A)
is under the cleaning rod (B). Move the cleaning rod back and
forth 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof glass.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2) Remove the waste toner box.
1
A
B
2
3) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.

PET
PET
5) Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.

Maintenance: Replace at every 150K.
E. Transfer section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Primary transfer Mechanical - S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-18)
cleaner blade parts
2 Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-13)
drive gear
3 Intermediate transfer - S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-1)
belt
4 Primary transfer belt - { { { { {
drive roller
5 Belt CL brush - { { { { {
follower roller
tension roller
8 PTC opposed roller - { { { { {
9 Primary transfer roller - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-9, [28]-42)
10 PTC unit - S S S S S (P/G No.: [20]-502)
11 Secondary transfer - S S S S S (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
12 Secondary transfer - { { { { {
belt follower roller
belt
belt drive roller
idle shaft
roller
17 Pro-reg sensor - { { { { { { { { { { {
18 Transfer cleaner seal -
F/R
19 Primary transfer toner -
reception seal
20 Secondary transfer -
backup blade
18
1
7 3
18
6
8
9
9 9
5 9 4
8
13
14
16
20
11
12
15
17
10 17
(Note for servicing the transfer unit)
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the transfer belt
surface. (Keep the transfer unit away from oil and dust.)
When replacing the transfer belt, hold the edge section (within
10mm from the edge) of the transfer belt.
Exposure surface of the transfer belt
[Countermeasures]
If oily dirt is erroneously attached to the transfer belt surface, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Use alcohol to remove oily dirt from the transfer belt.
10mm 2) Wipe alcohol trail completely away from the transfer belt sur-
10mm
face. (If alcohol residue remains on the transfer belt, its image
may be printed on copy paper.)
When rotating the transfer belt manually, use a screwdriver to 3) Apply Kynar powder to the cleaning blade to prevent reverse
turn the drive gear section as shown below. rotation of the cleaning blade.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the transfer belt is free from fingerprints or
oily dirt and that alcohol residue are completely removed or not by
the following method.
Make three continuous multi prints of half tone images on all the
surface of A3 (11" x 17") paper, and check the printed paper for
any alcohol residue images.
1) Open the front cover.
When installing the transfer unit, hold the handle to insert the unit
into the machine. When placing the transfer unit on the guide rail
of the machine and inserting the unit to the machine, the expo-
sure surface on both sides of the transfer belt may be touched
erroneously. Use enough care not to touch the exposure surface.
Also when the right door is opened, the exposure surface may be
touched. Use enough care in this case, too.
Exposure surface of the transfer belt
3) Open the right door. NOTE: After maintenance, when the transfer belt tension of the pri-
mary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power
again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to
the home position.
7) Remove the screws, and remove the maintenance cover.
4) Loosen the blue screw.
8) Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it.
5) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
NOTE: Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer belt.
A
B
9) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner
blade.
6) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer

unit.
10) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt [Installing method]
drive gear. Form the intermediate transfer belt into triangle. Slide the inter-
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. mediate transfer belt over the transfer frame.
11) Remove the parts.

NOTE: When installing, be careful not to bring the intermediate
transfer belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and
the gears. Use care not to touch the intermediate transfer
belt surface with bare hands.
When installing, position the belt so that the lot number
specified on the back surface of the bead is on the front
side.
14) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.
15) Clean the belt CL brush.

13) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side of the unit 90
degrees. Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
16) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the pri- 19) Remove the PTC unit.
mary transfer belt tension roller (B). Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. * After replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC
counter.
17) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. 20) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
18) After replacing the intermediate transfer belt, apply Kynar.

NOTE: Do not touch the intermediate transfer belt with bare hands. 1
Be careful not to scratch or fold it.
2
a) Place the primary transfer unit on a flat surface with the
top surface upward, and apply Kynar (UKOG-0123FCZZ)
to all the top surface of the belt. 21) Remove parts as outlined below.
NOTE:
When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface,
use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and
not to attach a foreign material.
NOTE:
When installing the cleaner unit, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt so that the section where Kynar was applied
comes to the blade edge section, and install it.
b) After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of
background copy on A3 paper.
22) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame. 26) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.
23) Remove parts as outlined below.

27) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor.

24) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

25) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the second-
ary transfer idle shaft.
F. Fuser section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
No. Part name
replacement parts
are described.)
1 Lower heat Replace Mechanical S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-15)
roller the whole parts
2 Lower heat lower heat S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-14)
roller bearing roller unit.
3 Upper separation pawl/ S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-14,
pawl spring [31]-15)
4 Non-contact thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-37)
5 Upper thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [31]-48)
6 Lower thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-20)
7 Lower separation pawl/ S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-56,
pawl spring [32]-57)
8 External heating roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-18)
9 External belt S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-17)
10 External heating roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-13)
bearing
11 External heating collar S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-15)
12 External heating spring S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-5)
13 External thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-12)
14 Upper Web roller S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-19)
15 Pressure roller S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-21)
16 Web roller bearings S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-15)
17 Pressure roller bearing S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [30]-10)
18 Winding regulation gear S S S S S S S S S S S
19 Web unit S S S S S S S S S S S
20 Lower CL roller S S S S S S S S S S S
21 Lower CL roller bearing S S S S S S S S S S S
22 CL pressure spring S S S S S S S S S S S
23 Fusing paper exit roller { { { { { { { { { { {
24 Gears
25 Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { {
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 1000 1200 1400 1600 Block/Item No.
No. Part name 200k 400k 600k 800k
calling k k k k (Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
26 Upper heat roller Replace Mechanical S S S S S S S S
27 Upper heat roller gear the whole parts S S S S S S S S
28 Upper heat roller upper heat S S S S S S S S
bearing roller unit.
29 Upper heat roller heat- S S S S S S S S
insulation bush
3 25
23
3
3
3
24
25
7
7 28 29
7 27
4 26
7
6
28
29
16 11 12 10
1
14 9
13
2
19
18 8
11
12 10
21 22
17
11
20
13
11
17 8 21
15
22
(1) Fusing paper exit roller cleaning 2) Clean the fusing paper exit roller.
1) Pull out the right door unit. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
(2) Web unit removal (4) Pressure roller bearing/pressure roller removal
1) Remove the screw and the step screw. Release the fusing 1) Remove the web spring, and remove the pressure roller bear-
lever, and remove the fusing unit. ing.
2) Remove the pressure roller.
2
1 2
3
1 1
2) Disconnect the connector, remove two screws, and remove

the web unit.
* When installing, engage the harness with the rib.
(5) Web roller/winding regulation gear removal

1) Remove the left and the right springs, and remove the web
operation shaft.
(3) Web roller bearing removal

1) Remove the screw, and remove the web roller bearing.
2) Remove the web roller (on the winding side). 4) Remove the web roller (on the feed side) and the winding reg-
Maintenance: Replace at every 150K. ulation gear.
* When installing, check to confirm that there are one concave Maintenance: Replace at every 150K.
section on the front side and two concave sections on the * When installing, fit the concave section and the convex sec-
rear side, and be sure to engage them securely. tion of the gear on the front side to engage securely.
* When installing, engage the concave section (one position)
on the front side with the spring pin and two concave sec-
tions on the rear side with the web roller (on the feed side).
[Route diagram]
3) Remove two web tension shafts.

* When installing, insert the rear side first. Note that the front
side (gear side) of the shaft is narrower.
[Note for installation]

Turn the gear (B) in the arrow direction, and set so that the lead
edge of the green line (A) of the web roller can be seen.
B A
(6) CL pressure spring/lower CL roller/

lower CL roller bearing removal
1) Open the paper guide.
2) Remove the CL pressure spring, and remove the lower CL 2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
roller and the lower CL lower bearing. the upper thermistor.
NOTE: When assembling and disassembling, be careful not to Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
scratch the heat roller.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing upper harness

cover. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector.
Remove the external thermistors (2 positions).
(7) Thermistor removal

1) Remove the screw, and remove the interface harness and
remove the fusing upper cover.
NOTE: Hang the hook on the black harness of the external ther-
mister, and put the lead wires to the lower side.
First, insert the black first, and then hang the white harness
on it.
WHITE
* After installation, check to confirm that the harness of the

external thermister can be seen through the hole in the fus-
ing upper cover.
BLACK
4) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the (8) External heating unit removal
non-contact thermistor. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing upper cover assem-
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. bly.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal on the primary

side of the thermostat (2 positions).
Disconnect the connector of the thermistor.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing lower cover.
6) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the

lower thermistor.
3) Remove two external heating springs, and disengage the hook

and remove the external heating unit.
(External heading spring) Maintenance: Replace at every
300K.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
4) Remove the screw, and remove the external lamp holder. (9) Upper and lower heat roller section
1) While pressing the pressure lever on the rear side downward
with longnose pliers, push up the pressure release lever to
release the pressure of the upper and lower heat rollers.
2) Remove two screws, and open the lower heat roller section.
5) Remove the screw and remove the terminal. Pull out the exter-
nal heater lamp.
1
COLOR: RED (120V series 41-sheet machine)
(230V series 41/50-sheet machine)
BLACK (120V series 50-sheet machine)
COLOR: WHITE
NOTE: Before releasing the pressure, wait for 10 sec from turning
OFF the sub power SW.
6) Remove the step screw, and remove the external heating roller
bearing (A). Turn the external heating collar (B) and remove
the external heating roller (C) and the external belt (D).
C
A
3) Disengage the hook of the lower separation pawl spring (B) 5) Lift the lead edge (C) of the upper separation pawl (A) and
from the rib, and remove four lower separation pawls (A) and remove the upper separation spring (B) and the upper separa-
four lower separation pawls springs (B). tion pawl (A).
2 A B A B
4) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing rear PG.
NOTE: The upper separation adjustment plate (D) is factory

adjusted. Do Not touch screws and re-adjust the plate.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the upper lamp holder F.
Disconnect the lamp connector on the rear side, and remove
the upper lamp harness from the upper lamp holder R.
NOTE: Put the upper heater lamp harness on the bent section
beside the upper lamp holder F and pass through the
clamp.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
7) Disconnect the connector on the front side of the upper heater 9) Remove the C-ring, and remove the upper heat roller heat-
lamp, and remove the upper heater lamp from the front side. insulating bush, the upper heat roller heat-insulating bearing,
the upper heat roller gear, and the upper heat roller.
A 1
RED
(41-sheet machine)
BLACK
(50-sheet machine)
A
WHITE
NOTE: When installing, check to confirm that the harness color on

the rear side is red or black.
NOTE: When installing, check to confirm that the section (A) of the
lower heater lamp is securely engaged with the lamp
holder.
8) Remove the fixing spring (A), and remove the upper heat roller
assembly.
NOTE: When installing, apply BARRIERTA grease (JFE552) to the
sections (A) of the upper heat roller side sleeves.
10) Remove the screw, and remove the clamp, the fusing upper
cover, and the lower lamp holders F/R.
B
NOTE: Note that the lamp harness is engaged with the fusing
B upper cover.
NOTE: Attach the clamp on the front side to the left side apart from
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the flange (B) of the bear- the lamp, and the clamp on the rear side to the right side.
ing is on the outside of the upper stay frame.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
NOTE: When installing the fusing upper cover RAS, be careful not 13) Remove the C-ring, and remove the lower heat roller bearing
to pinch the wires. and the lower heat roller.
11) Remove the lower heater lamp.
NOTE: Apply BARRIERTA grease (JFE552) to the section (A) of

1 the lower heat roller.
RED
(41-sheet
A machine)
BLACK
(50-sheet
machine)
A
A
WHITE
holder.
12) Remove the lower heat roller assembly.
A A
NOTE: When installing, check to confirm that the groove section

(A) of the lower heat roller is engaged with the frame.
1 : Oct. 24 2008
G. Filter section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Ozone filter Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [47]-40)
1 parts
2 Left cabinet filter { { { { { { { { { { {
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
Maintenance: Replace filter at every 150K. 1
H. Paper feed section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as needed.
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { Reference: About 100k
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
6 Sensors
7 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
1
2
4
5 6
6
6 6
6
3
2
6 6
1 5
1
6 6
5 2
6
4 4
6 6
3 3
5 5
1) Remove the pickup cover. 5) Remove the paper guide.
6) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(b).
(B).
3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller. 7) Remove the separation roller.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
4) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
I. Paper transport section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Paper dust removing parts { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-58)
unit
3 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Sensors
5 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
3
1
4
4
3
1) Open the right door. 2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
B C
1 : Oct. 24 2008
J. Duplex/Paper exit section

Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Discharge brush Mechanical
2 Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Sensors
1
4 Gears
5 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
3 3
1
3 3
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive). 4) Open the right door.
2) Open the ADU open/close door.
5) Remove the reverse PG unit.
6) Clean the transport roller 13 (Drive).

3) Clean the transport roller 10 (Drive) (A), and the transport Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
roller 11 (Drive) (B).
1 : Oct. 24 2008
K. Drive section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical -
2 Shaft earth sections parts -
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts -
4 Sensors
1
4 3 4
1
(FLOIL G313S)
2
(FLOIL GE-676)
41-sheet machine only
1
3 50-sheet machine only
(HANARL FL955R)
L. Scanner section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
CCD parts
2 Table glass/SPF glass { { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails
5 Drive belt/drive wire
6 Sensors
4 4
2
2
4
5
6
5
5
1
1
1
M. RSPF section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as needed.
2 Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { Reference: About 100k
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Discharge brush
6 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Sensors
8 Belts
9 Gears
8
7 6
4
2
1
7
3
6
7
5
7
1) Open the paper feed unit.
2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Remove the holder guide, and remove the paper feed roller
and the pickup roller.
4) Remove the cover and remove the separation roller.

N. DSPF section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650
1 Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { Replace as needed.
2 Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { Reference: About 100k
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
6 Discharge brush
7 No. 1 scanning plate { { { { { { { { { { { {
8 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { { {
section, scanning
glass
9 No. 2 scanning { { { { { { { { { { { {
section, white
reference glass
10 Lens/CCD { { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Mirror { { { { { { { { { { { {
12 Copy lamp/Reflector { { { { { { { { { { { {
13 Gears (Grease)
14 Belts -
15 OC mat { { { { { { { { { { { {
1
4
5 2
3
5
7
5 15
5
5
6
10
14
10 12
12 14
8
11 13
14
9
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the paper 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower
feed cover. cover.
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the reverse pressure release

lever. Remove the separation roller.
2) Remove the pawl, and remove the paper feed PG upper cover.
2
7) Open the DSPF unit, and clean the No.1 scanning plate.
3) Remove the pawl. Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove

the pickup roller from the pickup roller holder.
2
8) Open the lower door.
4) Remove the paper feed roller. 1

9) Remove the cleaner. 13) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.
2 3
14) Remove the screw. Remove the pawl. Remove the rear cabi-
10) Use the cleaner to clean the scanning glass (surface).
net.
2
15) Open the DSPF unit, and remove the OC mat from the left
11) Use the cleaner to clean the white reference glass. edge.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
12) Close the DSPF unit. Open the upper door, and remove the * When assembling, place the OC mat on the document table
screw. to fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit.
16) Remove the connector from the DSPF CL inverter PWB. 20) Remove the screw, and remove the DSPF copy lamp.
17) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the lower door.
21) Clean the scanning glass (back surface).
2
1
22) Remove the screw, and remove the reflector.

18) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the white reference plate.
19) Remove the screw, and remove the scanning section cover.
23) Remove the screw, and remove the transport PG upper.
Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.
24) Remove the screw, and remove the harness cover. Disconnect 28) Clean the lens (a) and the CCD (b).
the connector. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
* When assembling, arrange the harness so that it is placed in
the lower position than the rib height.
1
b
a
2
25) Remove the step screw, and remove the screw. Remove the 29) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
optical fixing plate. Remove the optical unit.
2
3
26) Remove the pawl. Remove the dust-proof cover. Remove the
screw, and remove the dark box. 30) Clean the mirror.
27) Remove the pawl, and remove the lens cover.
3. Maintenance and disassembly d. Drum cartridge system counters
A. Maintenance timing display Print job

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when Code Content Enable/
Disable
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
DK The drum cartridge life end (K) reaches 150,000 Enable
messages and the counters is shown blow.
sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless) drum (K) reaches 840K.
DC The drum cartridge life end (C) reaches 100,000 Enable
a. Maintenance counter sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
drum (C) reaches 840K.
Print job
DM The drum cartridge life end (M) reaches 100,000 Enable
Code Content Enable/
Disable
drum (M) reaches 840K.
TA When the maintenance counter (total) reaches 90% of Enable
DY The drum cartridge life end (Y) reaches 100,000 Enable
the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-
38 is print stop).
drum (Y) reaches 840K.
When the maintenance counter (total) reaches the set
value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum
print allowing).
counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
CA When The maintenance counters (color) reaches Enable
ing distance of the drum) clear).
90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of
SIM26-38 is print stop). e. Developer cartridge system counters
When The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is Print job
print allowing). Code Content Enable/
AA WhenThe maintenance counters (both of total and Enable Disable
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 VK The developer life end (K) reaches 150,000 sheets, or Enable
(When the setting of SIM26-38 is print stop). the accumulated number of rotations of the developer
When The maintenance counters (both of total and (K) reaches 840K.
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the VC The developer life end (C) reaches 100,000 sheets, or Enable
setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing). the accumulated number of rotations of the developer
(C) reaches 840K.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte- VM The developer life end (M) reaches 100,000 sheets, Enable
nance counters (total, color) clear). or the accumulated number of rotations of the
b. Transfer unit system counters developer (M) reaches 840K.
VY The developer life end (Y) reaches 100,000 sheets, or Enable
Print job the accumulated number of rotations of the developer
Code Content Enable/ (Y) reaches 840K.
Disable
TK1 The primary transfer unit life end reaches 300,000 Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
sheets. oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
TK2 The secondary transfer unit life end reaches 300,000 Enable lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
sheets. (2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary a. Maintenance counter
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit, Print job
days of use of the transfer unit) clear). Code Content Enable/
Disable
c. Fusing unit counter TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the set Disable
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
Print job Disable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the set Disable
Disable
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
FK1 The fusing upper heat roller life end reaches 200,000 Enable Disable.
sheets.
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and color) Disable
FK2 The fusing lower/external heat roller life end reaches Enable reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is
300,000 sheets. set to Print Disable.
FK3 The fusing web life end reaches 150,000 sheets. Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing nance counters (total, color) clear).
unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear). (3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
Print job
Disable
- Waste toner full Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
*Firmware types
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Flash ROM1 CONTENTS

MAIN ALL The following All the contents
1. Outline BODY ICU (PROG1) ANIME
BOOT MAIN
A. Cases where update is required CONFIG
ROM update is required in the following cases: ESCP FONT
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. UNI CODE
XIO FONT
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the
PROFILE
machine.
ICU (PROG2) SPDL
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for
LANG
repair to the machine.
GRPH
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be WEB HELP
repaired. MAIN
IMG-ASIC IMG DATA ROM
B. Notes for update
SCU SCU (MAIN)
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update PCU PCU (MAIN)
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs FAX1 FAX1 (MAIN)
installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations OPTION 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K (MAIN)
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER (MAIN)
LCC A4 LCC_A4 (MAIN)
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware DESK DESK (MAIN)
There are following methods of update of the firmware. PUNCH PUNCH (MAIN)
1) Firmware update using media 4K FINISHER 4KFIN (MAIN)
4K PUNCH 4KPUNCH (MAIN)
2) Firmware update using FTP
ACRE ACRE (MAIN)
3) Firmware update using Web page ACRE_DATA
4) Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown)
2. Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
The media used for the update must have a minimum of 60MB of
storage capacity.
The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-5001N FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 1

(1) Firmware update procedure from the USB memory 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]
The firmware update executes by SIM49-01. becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
firemware.
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware
into the main unit.

2) Enter the SIM49-01. Press the key of the file to be updated. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
The screen transfers to the update screen. &21),* &855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72

,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
6,08/$7,2112 /$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72

7(67 &/26(
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
* The number of key changes according to the number of the 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE
STORED ON [OK]" is displayed on the screen. Insert the
media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open the
file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen
waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is
pulled out on the file list screen, the error is detected by the At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
[FILE] key pressing, and the first screen appears. screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively. 6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72 &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
2.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.
4) Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are upgraded successfully.
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and played.
cannot be pressed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6,08/$7,2112 (55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
7(67 &/26( ,&803&86&8
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72 2.
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
* When the power supply is turned off due to a black out etc. while
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
updating or when the update terminated abnormally, a part of the
main program stored in HDD may be damaged and may not
* Press the selected key again to release the selection. booted normally.
* Press [ALL] key to select all items. In this case, the emergency update described later must be exe-
cuted.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update the firmware.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
special firmware upgrade page appears. pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
MX-5000N
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Emergency update (incase of an HDD 5) Check the update result.
breakdown) When writing the program both to the HDD and to the Flash
ROM is normally completed, the following message is dis-
The HDD of this machine stores the main program along with the
played.
sophisticated variations.
When, therefore, the HDD breaks down, or when the HDD must be
replaced with another HDD, or when the main program is damaged
by turning OFF the power during the firmware updating, the firm- EmergencyUpdateMode
ware (main program) must be rewritten into the HDD by the follow- Update Succeeded
ing procedures. It is called the emergency update.
[Conditions where the emergency update is required]
The emergency update is required in the following cases:
1) "Main Program Error" is displayed on the panel. If writing to either of the HDD or the Flash ROM is failed, the
It means that the data are destroyed and that replacement of following message is displayed.
the HDD is not required. The problem can be settled by execu-
tion of the emergency update only.
2) "HDD Trouble (E7-03)" is displayed on the panel. EmergencyUpdateMode
It means a HDD breakdown. The HDD must be replaced with a Update Failed
new one, and the emergency update must be executed.
* When U2-05 (HDD/EEPROM/SRAM abnormality) or U2-50
(HDD data abnormality related to IMS) occurs, execute SIM16
only, and there is no need to execute the emergency update. In this case, if Update Failed is displayed, it may the HDD
[Environment necessary for the emergency update] has been broken down probably. Replace the HDD with a new
1) The MFP with the HDD where the firmware is rewritten one, and execute the emergency update again.
2) The USB memory which stores the firmware for the emer- 6) Turn OFF the main power.
gency upgrade. 7) Remove the USB memory from the USB port.
File name: emupdate_J2.sfu 8) Turn ON the main power.
* The firmware must be stored in the root folder of the USB 9) Check the system operates normally.
memory. 10) When the HDD is replaced, use SIM49-5 to upload the water-
[Emergency update procedures] mark data.
1) Insert the USB memory which stores the firmware for the 11) Select the folder for updating, and press [EXECUTE] and
emergency update into the USB port. [YES] keys in this order to start the updating procedures.
2) Turn on the main power. [Note]
The firmware for the emergency update in the USB memory is It takes about 6 minutes for the emergency update.
automatically recognized to start reading the USB memory. Never turn OFF the main power until the emergency update is
It takes about 1 minute, and the booting animation is displayed completed.
during this period.
When the emergency update is completed, be sure to remove
3) Check to confirm that "EmergencyUpdateMode" is displayed the USB memory for the emergency update. The machine does
on the panel. not boot normally with the USB memory inserted.
After that, the process is automatically executed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
4) Check the procedure.

When the process is going on normally, the following message
is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
Updating ....10%

1

(1)
PTC UNIT
MX-5001N
PTC_HEATER
DERIVERY UNIT 2TC PTC_HV DSPF UNIT

1 : Oct. 24 2008
POD1 POFM_F SPOD STRC SPFC SLUM SPED1 SPLS1

DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD SPPD5
FUFM RCFM PCSFM1 PCSFM2
STUD STRRC SRRC SPUM SPED2 SPLS2
POD2 POFM_R SPPD4
MX-4101N/5001N
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT STLD STRRBC SRRBC SPFM SCOV
SPPD3
1. Block diagram
TFD2 OSM
1TUD_K 1TUD_CL DVCRUM_K DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y
SPPD1 SFPFAN SPOM
SPPD2
HPOS FUM
A. System block diagram
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT DSPF DRIVER

SPRANDOM
PWB CL
SOCD
TM-DRV
ADUM_L PWB CCD PWB
HLPCD
POM DSPFcnt
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y ROCD CL INVERTER
PWB PWB
PRM 50ppm only 50ppm only
WEB_M DM_M
DM_K DM_C (DM_CL) DM_Y
DRV_ SCANNER UNIT
ADUM_H SUB
PWB Option Option
Option
1TURC DVM_K DVM_CL
BTM AUDITOR
KEYBORD KEYBORD CARD
FUSER UNIT READER PNC
DHPD_M
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
DHPD_K
1TURC_R (DHPD_CL)
TH1_FU HL1_U 50ppm only 50ppm only USB
USB USB CN CL
DHPD_C DHPD_Y PWB ORS_LED
RRM CONV CONV
PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L
CL INVERTER
PWB OCSW
OPERATION UNIT
SCNC
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
PWB
TH3_FU HL_EX1 USB TOUCH
CCD ORS-PD
HUB PANEL
PWB
PWB
DV_K UNIT DV_C UNIT DV_M UNIT DV_Y UNIT LVDS
TH4_FU PWB
HL_EX2 REGIST SENSOR UNIT MIM
LCD
TCS_K TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y INVERTER
PWB
REGS_F
TH5_FU MOTHER- MHPS
WEBD or MOTHER
HUB
PWB
DVTYP_K DVTYP_C DVTYP_M DVTYP_Y PWB OPE
PWB
REGS_R
PS UNIT POWER SW
PWB
PCSS
PPD1 DSW_R ITC MC OZFM CCFM PSFM2
MOTHER
PCU
PWB
PPD2
CSS1 CSS2 CAFM PSFM
RIGHT DOOR UNIT MFPFM

HDD
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT MFPC
OPTION LSU UNIT
MX-5001N ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 1

PWB
CCFM
APPD1 POD3 FAX2
PAPER FEED 1 PAPER FEED 2
UNIT UNIT LD PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
APPD2 TFD3 OPTION LD_K

PWB
RD I/F HL
CPUC1 CPUC2 CPFD1 CPFD2 COINVENDER
PWB PWB
LD_C
DSW_ADU PWB
FIN 1K
CPFC CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2
DESK LCC FIN INNER LSU CNT
PWB LD_M
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT PWB
CPED1 CPED2 DH_DESK DH_DESK

MPWD MPLD1 PFM DCPS TH1_LSU
LD_Y
PWB
HPFM CSPD1 CSPD2

BD_K
MPED MPUC
PWB
DHSW
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB PGM
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS PWB
MSW
WH
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS
DH1
AC IN
OPTION Standards : Only Japan

1
(2)
PTC UNIT
PTC_HEATER
DERIVERY UNIT 2TC PTC_HV RSPF UNIT
POD1 POFM_F
DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD SPPD1 SOCD
FUFM RCFM PCSFM1 PCSFM2 SGS SPLS1
1 : Oct. 24 2008
POD2 POFM_R
SPPD2 SCOV
SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT
TFD2 OSM
MX-4100N/5000N
SPPD3 SPED
SPRM SPPD5 SPWS
HPOS FUM PROCESS DRIVE UNIT SPFC SRRC
RSPF
TM-DRV PWB
ADUM_L PWB
HLPCD
POM
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y

WEB_M DM_M
DRV_ SCANNER UNIT
ADUM_H SUB
PWB Option Option
Option
1TURC DVM_K DVM_CL
BTM AUDITOR
DHPD_M
DHPD_K
1TURC_R (DHPD_CL)
USB USB CN CL
RRM CONV CONV
PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L
CL INVERTER
PWB OCSW
OPERATION UNIT
SCNC
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
PWB
CCD ORS-PD
HUB PANEL
PWB
PWB
TH4_FU PWB
LCD
PWB
REGS_F
TH5_FU MOTHER- MHPS
WEBD or MOTHER
HUB
PWB
PWB
REGS_R
PS UNIT POWER SW
PWB
PCSS
MOTHER
PCU
PWB
PPD2
CSS1 CSS2 CAFM PSFM

HDD

OPTION LSU UNIT
PWB
CCFM
APPD1 POD3 FAX2
UNIT UNIT LD PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS
PWB
RD I/F HL
PWB PWB
LD_C
DSW_ADU PWB
FIN 1K
PWB LD_M

LD_Y
PWB
HPFM CSPD1 CSPD2

BD_K
MPED MPUC
PWB
DHSW
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB PGM
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS PWB
MSW
WH
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS
DH1
AC IN

SATA2 Keyboard USB HOST LCD Pannel SCANNER Control
(Opt) TYPE-A CN
HDD (FRONT) LVDS System (SCU)
SATA
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM
SYSTEM Memory
Memory
DDR2 DIMM DIP
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA USB HUB
Device Interface Interface SWITCH Controller
SLOT Controller USB2.0
0 1
Host
Controller
B. MFP controller PWB
SDRAM SDRAM
Controller 64Mbx2 PCU
DDR/DDR2 IF HDD ASIC
Giga
LAN JACK RTC
BitEther GMII RTC
RJ45 Controller
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI-Express Interface
(4Lane) Interface (x10)
Interface
SOC (4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
Local-Bus LCDC
Controller
Controller
D-SUB9 RS232C
MPC8533E Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON. (4lane)
1000MHz
PCI-Express
able
Interface
Interrupt
Program-
Controller
(1lane)
256Kb
Local Bus EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART Controller
Controller
Controller
Board to Board Connector
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
PCI
Express
FPDLINK FPDLINK FPDLINK LVDS
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
CPLD SW
PCI-Express SCAN LSU
Interface
PIC
Micon.
PCI Express ACRE
Clock ROM FLASH
Generater
MFP ASIC
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video In Memory
Out
Controlller
SRAM Mother PWB
4Mbit
I2C
FAX

PROGROM & OPT Local Memory
(2nd) SRAM
CN FLASH DIMM DDR2 DIMM
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
1Mbit
H8S/2373
PROGROM
FLASH DIMM
Video In
Out
SMIC
HCSL
Clock
Codec ASIC
79MHz
ACRE ASIC
SLOT
Connecter
DDR2 DIMM
ACRE-DSP OPTION
ACRE Local Memory
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
MFPC PWB ACRE PWB (MX-EBX3)

(1)
C. PCU PWB
Stepping Motor
Fuser Unit HV
HLcontrol Pout motor (POM)/ADU motor High (ADUH)/ FAN
MC/TC unit ADU motor Low (ADUL)/Shifter motor (OSM)/
HL_UM/LM/US/EX PoutFAN (POFM1/2)/
PSF motor (PFM)/
MX-4101N/4100N
PMC OzoneFAN (OZFM)

Horizontal paper feed motor ( HPFM)/
IC25 Resist motor (RRM)/Drum motor K (DM_K/CL)/
IC33 Toner motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)/ Drum lamp
EEPROM
RESET IC Belt motor (BTM) (DL_K/C/M/Y)
(64kbit)
Fusing separates motor (PRM)
PWM Load Contorl Output
X1 Adress bus CRUM MPGS/CPUC1/CPUC2/CPFC/
Xtal FlashROM CRUM_K/C/M/Y 1TRUC/1TURC_R/PCSS/LSUSS_B/
Data bus Sensor Input
19.6608MHz (16Mbit) MPUC/MPFS/PCSFM1_V/PCSFM2_V/
1TUD_K/POD1/APPD1/APPD2/HLPCD PSFM_V/OZFM_V/POFM_V
HV Error
IC26 PTC_ERR/MC_CL_ERR/MC_BK_ERR
SRAM Motor Lock Detect
(1Mbit) PCSFM2_LD
MFP
UART Sensor Input

Synchronous Motor DC brushless Motor DHPD_K/C/M/Y/
Mother SCI 1TNFD/WEBD/1TUD_CL/POD2/HPOS/POD3/
WEBM FUM/DVM_BK/DVM_CL
IC54 CLUD1/CLUD2/MPFD/APPD3/CPED1/CPED2/
PMCASIC CPFD1/CPFD2/CSPD1/CSPD2/PPD1/TFD2
CLK BUN Drum Lamp Open Detect
PWM DL_OPEN_K/C/M/Y
LSU DC brushless Motor Coin Vendor PTC Heater Open Detect
CPFM CV_START/CV_COUNT/ PTCHT_OPEN
Option CV_COLOR1/CV_COLOR0/ Motor Lock Detect
Synchronous Motor DVM_CL_LD/DVM_K_LD/POFM_LD1/POFM_LD2/
CV_CA/CV_SIZE0/CV_SIZE1/
WTNM PCSFM1_LD/FUM_LD/RCFM_LD/OZFM_LD/
IC36 CV_SIZE2/CV_SIZE3/
UART PSFM_LD/CCFM_LD/CPFM_LD/
LCC CPU CV_STAPLE/CV_DUPLEX/
CLK IC32 Fuser Thermistor Open Detect
H8S/2373 THOPEN_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2/UMCS
I/O ASIC Coin Vendor
CV_COPY/CV_CLCOPY
UART
DESK
Load Contorl Output
RCFM_V/CCFM_VL/ADUGS/ D/A Converter
CPFM_GAIN/CLUM1/CLUM2/ Toner sensor
UART Sensor Input CCFM_V/WH_PR/FAX_LED (TSG_BK/C/M/Y)
FIN Resist sensor
IC24 CSS11/12/13/14/21/22/23/24
I/O GA Motor Lock Detect (RES_R_LED/RES_F_LED)
CAFM_LD/PSFM2_LD/FUFM_LD

Load Control Output PTC HEATER
CAFM_V/FUFM_VL/FUF M_VH
MUX Sensor Input

HC151 MPED/DSW_ADU/TFD3/MPLD/
RD I/F PWB MPLD2/MTOP1/MTOP2
Sensor Input
PPD2 Analog Input
Fuser Themistor
(TH_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2/UM_CS/UM_D)
Toner Detector (TCS_K/C/M/Y)
IC21 Analog Input Process Cont.CL sensor (PCS_CL)
Analog Temp/Hum Sensor (TH_M/HUM_M) process Cont.BK sensor& Resist sensor (REGS_F/R)
SW LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU)
DV Detector (DVTYP_K/C/M/Y)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD)
1
(2)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
Stepping Motor
Drum motor K (DM_BK/DM_C/DM_M/DM_Y)/
Belt motor (BTM)
Fuser Unit HV FAN
HLcontrol MC/TC unit
MX-5001N/5000N
Stepping Motor PoutFAN (POFM1/2)/

HL_UM/LM/US/EX Pout motor (POM)/ADU motor High (ADUH)/ OzoneFAN (OZFM)
PMC ADU motor Low (ADUL)/Shifter motor (OSM)/
IC25 PSF motor (PFM)/
IC33 Drum lamp
EEPROM Horizontal paper feed motor ( HPFM)/
RESET IC (64kbit) (DL_K/C/M/Y)
Resist motor (RRM)/
PWM Toner motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)/
X1 CRUM Fusing separates motor (PRM)
Adress bus Load Contorl Output
Xtal FlashROM CRUM_K/C/M/
Data bus Y MPGS/CPUC1/CPUC2/CPFC/
19.6608MHz (16Mbit) 1TRUC/1TURC_R/PCSS/LSUSS_B/
Sensor Input MPUC/MPFS/PCSFM1_V/PCSFM2_V/
IC26 HV Error
SRAM PTC_ERR/MC_CL_ERR/MC_BK_ERR
(1Mbit) Motor Lock Detect
MFP
PCSFM2_LD
UART
Synchronous Motor DC brushless Motor Sensor Input
Mother SCI FUM/DVM_BK/DVM_CL DHPD_K/C/M/Y/
WEBM
IC54 1TNFD/WEBD/1TUD_CL/POD2/HPOS/POD3/
PMC ASIC CLUD1/CLUD2/MPFD/APPD3/CPED1/CPED2/
CLK BUN CPFD1/CPFD2/CSPD1/CSPD2/PPD1/TFD2
LSU PWM DC brushless Motor Drum Lamp Open Detect
Coin Vendor DL_OPEN_K/C/M/Y
CPFM
CV_START/CV_COUNT/ PTC Heater Open Detect
Option Synchronous Motor CV_COLOR1/CV_COLOR0/ PTCHT_OPEN
WTNM CV_CA/CV_SIZE0/CV_SIZE1/ Motor Lock Detect
IC36 CV_SIZE2/CV_SIZE3/ DVM_CL_LD/DVM_K_LD/POFM_LD1/POFM_LD2/
UART
LCC CPU CV_STAPLE/CV_DUPLEX/ PCSFM1_LD/FUM_LD/RCFM_LD/OZFM_LD/
CLK IC32 PSFM_LD/CCFM_LD/CPFM_LD/
H8S/2373 Coin Vendor
I/O ASIC Fuser Thermistor Open Detect
CV_COPY/CV_CLCOPY THOPEN_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2/UMCS
UART
DESK
Load Contorl Output
FIN Resist sensor
IC24 CSS11/12/13/14/21/22/23/24

Load Contorl Output PTC HEATER
CAFM_V/FUFM_VL/FUFM_VH
MUX Sensor Input

Sensor Input
PPD2 Analog Input
Fuser Themistor
D. Scanner control PWB
3.3V DSPFcnt DSPF model
1.8V Page Memory

CCD-R RGB 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
(DSPF side) Tr Rx FPD Link
10V Tr 35bit
Tr AFE SCN
3line color CCD Tr ASIC
LVDS IC Tx
TCD2716ADG Tr 28bit
(Medusa)
Tr AFE_CS 10V/5V/3V
BUFFER Two serial systems

BUFFER AD_CLK
AFE_CSTG
CPU
SH, 1, others Timing 5V/3.3V motor DRIVER H8S/2373
(74VHCT
generator sensors 244)
F-ROM
Oscillator SRAM
(DIMM)
DRIVER
PWB
F-ROM
(for Shading DATA storage)
CL 24V
12V
5V Communication, others
3.3V
Power supply
3.3V
1.8V To CPU
CCD-F
(Machine side) Tr RGB DATA
10V Tr
Tr Image data
AFE
3line color CCD Tr
TCD2716ADG Tr SCNcnt line buf
Tr AFE_CS Oscillator 16 (8Mx16bit)
line buf
BUFFER 16 (8Mx16bit)
BUFFER AD_CLK clk SS LVDS IC Rx
RGB Rx FPD Link
28bit
35bit
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus mother
SH, 1, others Timing 5V/.33V 10V/5V/3V

generator SCN
ASIC BUS
Oscillator
3.3VPD SW
LVDS IC Tx
Two serial systems 1.5V Image data 28bit
CS3
12 10V CTRL_A10V IPD/IDOCC

12 5V CTRL_A5V
5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
1.2V
Mirror
.Motor 3.3VPD
MOTOR
DRIVER
Copy Lamp BUSBUF

powdown
MHP sensor
CPU CS2 CS0
RSPF UN H8S/2373 F-ROM
SRAM
RSPF model MOTOR (DIMM)
DRIVER
E2PROM
uart, others
HC151 SEL_A/B/C
Sensors CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT) IO ASIC

or LCDs detection
LVDS PWB (8.1 inch mono) PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1
PNL_SEL2 HC151 LCD_SKT
PNL_SEL3 LCDs detection
Touch panel
CCFT_CPU
INV PWB /CCFT
nLCD_DISP
Vcc REG (ON/OFF)
8.5 inch Rx
LCD 28bit
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
Original size sensor PDSEL2
PD
5V2
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V2
Buzzer /BZR
LED matrix LED drive circuit

E. LSU PWB
TH
Thermistor
Thermistor output
AMP
ID[0:0]
Hardware reset I2C BUS I2C
Reset input Reset IC ROM
ASIC
CHIP-2
Motor control PGM_CK
PGM_START
Interruption output (PGM_BREAK) 3
JOBEND_INT
Polygon O.C.
Polygon
ASIC control PGM_LOCK
PCU I/F motor
CHIP-2
PCU SCK Register etc...
RSV_DAT
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN control
O.C. O.C.
LSU
ASIC FANSTABLE
FAN
Clock synchronous serial communication CHIP-2
CLK_C_EN
TRANS_DAT
CLK_M_EN
ASIC
CHIP-2 CLK_A_EN
Print trigger input PCU_TRG LSU_ASIC

CHIP-1 3 PIC
Oscillator SYSCLK Serial transfer

S/S
(System CK) LD control DA_CLK
DA_DT Vref YMCK x2
Serial DA_LD Serial 8
ASIC
D/A I/F D/A
CHIP-2
ECLK ECLK nSHMY x2 4

LVDS/Driver
HSYNC HSYNC LD_ENB MY 2

O.C.
VSYNC_M/Y
4 VSYNC LD5V
VSYNC_K/C ASIC LD control
Main Scan/ (APC etc...) LDERR YMCK
CHIP-2 Sub scan
Image transfer CK ECKL timing control BD
HSYNC HSYNC nSHB MY x2

ASIC
FPD-LINK/Reciver
CHIP-2
ASIC
LD_CHK 1/2/3/4 4
CHIP-2
35:5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A: M1 circuit
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B: M2 circuit
35:5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C: Y1 circuit
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D: Y2 circuit
VIDEOIF_ACT
OSCCLK_C Oscillator CLK_C_EN

(Color CK)
OSCCLK_M Oscillator CLK_M_EN
Print trigger chain (Monochrome CK)
OSCCLK_A Oscillator CLK_A_EN

(Heavy paper CK)
LD
ID[0:1] BD
I2C bus I2C
MFP Hardware reset ROM
Motor control
Interruption output Polygon
PCU I/F control Reserve circuit for LDD made by AKM
Clock synchronous serial communication AKM_SDCLK
Register etc... FAN control
SCK
RSV_DAT AKM_APCSEL_CMYK
TRANS_RST nSHB MY x2 4
nSHB KC x2
TRANS_DAT
AKM_RESET_LDD
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP-2 AKM_CS_CMYK 4
AKM LDD serial communication

VSYNC_K/C LD control
AKM_SCK
ECLK Main Scan/ AKM_SDT 2
Serial
Sub scan
D/A I/F
HSYNC timing control
nSH KC x2 4
LD_ENB KC 2
LD control O.C.
(APC etc...)
BD LD5V
nSHB KC x2
FPD-LINK/Reciver
35:5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A: K1 circuit
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B: K2 circuit
35:5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C: C1 circuit
DT_C2+- 2
Channel D: C2 circuit

P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
SCN Cnt
P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
RxD TxD[2]
F. Serial communication
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN

P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0] Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
P.U.
PD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD
RxD
P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
TxD_FIN
CPU DTR_SCAN
O.C. Schmit Inv. DSR_SCAN
H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RxD_SCAN
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
P.U.
P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD CLR[PIC]
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD REQ[PIC]
P.D.
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK MFPC
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
O.C. O.C. I/F ASIC
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C. (Optional) H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mot her MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC DSPF Cnt(for DSPF model)
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[3]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX (D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[3]
I/O RxD_FAX (D)
DSR_LCC LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) ) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[4]
TxD_FAX (CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[4]
RxD_FAX (CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
I/O ASIC ASIC
A[4:0] P.U.
RTS[3]
PD65892GC- DTR_FAX (D)
D[15:8] TxD
103 Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[3]
PIC DSR_FAX (D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[4]
DTR_FAX (CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[4]
2nd FAX DSR_FAX (CS)
(same as 1st) 1st FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Optional) (for FG Model)
(1)
DC POWER SUPPLY
F101
Voltage
Generation
T5AH/250V
+ 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
no-mounting D204
+
F001
A1
~
~
15A/250V
-
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
MX-4101N/4100N (120V)
15A/250V F002
A3 VR3 T2AH/250V
N
FW Voltage
G. AC power line diagram (120V)
X001 Generating Generation

F201 +24V1
F3 Circuit
+24V2
+24V3
T2.0AH/250V no- T8AH/250V
+24V4
mounting +24V5
VR2
+12V
WH-L WH-N +5VN
+3.3V
HL PWB
L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION INT24V1
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
OPTION CCD
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WH_CNT
NO TD2

TD1 TD3 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V3
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 4 SSR4
MAIN UNIT 1 1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_EX HLOUT_US HLOUT_LM
10W
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
DESK
10W
DESK drawer
THERMOSTAT TS_EX2 THERMOSTAT TS_EX1
LCC HL_EX1 HL_LM

10W
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
HL_EX2
HL_UM THERMOSTAT TS_MAIN

14W LSU
LSU
OPTION
FUSING UNIT
1
(2)
DC POWER SUPPLY
Voltage
Conversion
+ 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
no-mounting D002
+
F001
A1
~
~
1 : Oct. 24 2008
15A/250V
-
VR1 N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
MX-5001N/5000N (120V)
20A/250V F002
A3 VR3 T2AH/250V
N
FW
X001 Generating Voltage
F003 Conversion
Circuit +24V1
F3
+24V2
T2.0AH/250V no- T8A/500V +24V3
+24V4
mounting +24V5
VR2 +12V
WH-L WH-N +5VN
+3.3V
HL PWB
L1
RY1
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
OPTION CCD
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WH_CNT
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V3
MAIN UNIT 1 1 1 1
10W
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
DESK
10W
DESK drawer
LCC HL_EX1 HL_LM

10W
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
HL_EX2
HL_UM THERMOSTAT TS_UM

14W LSU
OPTION
LSU
FUSING UNIT
(1)
DC POWER SUPPLY
Reactor
F101
10mH Voltage
3A Generation
T2.5A/250V
+ 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
no-mounting D204
+
F001
A1
~
~
T8AH/250V
-
VR1 N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
MX-4101N/4100N (200V)
T10AH/250V F002
A3 VR3 T1AH/250V
F2
N
T10AH/250V FW Voltage
H. AC power line diagram (200V)
X001 Generation
Generating F201
Circuit +24V1
F3 F4
+24V2
+24V3
T2.0AH/250V no- T2.0AH/250V T4AH/250V
+24V4
mounting +24V5
VR2 +12V
WH-L WH-N +5VN
+3.3V
HL PWB
L1
RY1
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
OPTION CCD
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WH_CNT
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V3
MAIN UNIT 1 1 1 1
10W
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
DESK
10W
DESK drawer
LCC HL_EX1 HL_LM

10W
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
HL_EX2
HL_UM THERMOSTAT TS_MAIN

14W LSU
LSU
OPTION
FUSING UNIT
1
(2)
DC POWER SUPPLY
Voltage
Conversion
AC PWB + 5Vo
+ 5VL
no-mounting D002
+
F001
A1
~
~
1 : Oct. 24 2008
T8AH/250V
-
VR1 N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
MX-5001N/5000N (200V)
T10AH/250V F002
A3 VR3 T8AH/250V
F2
N
T10AH/250V FW
X001 Voltage
Generating Conversion
F003
F3 F4 Circuit +24V1
+24V2
T2.0AH/250V no- T2.0AH/250V T5A/500V +24V3
+24V4
mounting +24V5
+12V
VR2 +5VN
WH-L WH-N +3.3V
HL PWB
L1
RY1
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
OPTION CCD
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WH_CNT
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V3
MAIN UNIT 1
HLOUT_UM
1
HLOUT_EX
1
HLOUT_US
1
HLOUT_LM
10W
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
DESK
10W
DESK
drawer
LCC HL_EX1 HL_LM

10W
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
HL_EX2
HL_UM THERMOSTAT TS_UM

14W LSU
OPTION
LSU
FUSING UNIT
1
INT24V1 INT24V1
INT24V2 P-GND
CPFM P-GND
24V3 24V3
TM DRIVER
P-GND PWB TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y PRM L
5VN
INT24V1 41cpm
F401(41cpm) F101(50cpm) 5VNPD DMCL
1 : Oct. 24 2008
3.3V 3.3V 5VN

FUSE
D-GND D-GND 24V2 ADM_U DMBK BTM
DRIVER SUB 50cpm
5VN 5VN OSM
D-GND D-GND P-GND PWB
12V 12V DMC DMM DMY
24V1 24V1 24V1
F403(41cpm) F103(50cpm) INT24V1 INT24V1
24V3 24V3 RDSW 5VN HL_PR HL_UM HL_LM HL_EX2
HL_EX1
P-GND P-GND PCU PWB P-GND DRIVER MAIN
FUSE
P-GND P-GND 5VNPD PWB HPFM RRM PFM POM ADUM_L
FW FW HL PWB
D-GND 5VN HL_UM

FDSW
5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB HL_LM
FET
24V2 P-GND HL_EX1

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
/INT_CNT HL_EX2
INT24V1 INT24V1
I. DC power line diagram (120V)
P-GND P-GND INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F402(41cpm) F102(50cpm) INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND
FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
PFM
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1
24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD UN
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM
D-GND D-GND A10V 24V INVERTOR

12V 12V 24V3 24V3 A5V P-GND PWB
24V3 24V3 P-GND P-GND A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND 12V 12V D-GND
5VN 5VN
3.3V 3.3V
12V D-GND D-GND CL
5VL 5VO 5VO 24V INVERTOR
5VO P-GND PWB CL
3.3V
D-GND
MFPC PWB 24V1 ORS LED

24V 24V PWB
P-GND P-GND
5VN 5VN FAX
3.3V 3.3V 24V_EXT 24V_EXT
D-GND D-GND P-GND P-GND
5V_EXT 5V_EXT
F405(41cpm) F105(50cpm) D-GND AVCC AVCC
24V5 24V5 SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
P-GND P-GND USB I/F PWB PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF/DSPF
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER
D-GND D-GND option
F404(41cpm) F104(50cpm) 5V
24V4 24V4 D-GND CARD READER
P-GND P-GND
FUSE 5VN 5VN LCC option
D-GND D-GND D-GND USB CONVERSION PWB
PSU D-GND D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN DESK
D-GND
D-GND
option
1
INT24V1 INT24V1
INT24V2 P-GND
CPFM P-GND
24V3 24V3
TM DRIVER
P-GND PWB TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y PRM L
5VN
INT24V1 41cpm
F401(41cpm) F101(50cpm) 5VNPD DMCL
1 : Oct. 24 2008
3.3V 3.3V 5VN

FUSE
D-GND D-GND 24V2 ADM_U DMBK BTM
DRIVER SUB 50cpm
5VN 5VN OSM
D-GND D-GND P-GND PWB
12V 12V DMC DMM DMY
24V1 24V1 24V1
F403(41cpm) F103(50cpm) INT24V1 INT24V1
24V3 24V3 RDSW 5VN HL_PR HL_UM HL_LM HL_EX2
HL_EX1
P-GND P-GND PCU PWB P-GND DRIVER MAIN
FUSE
P-GND P-GND 5VNPD PWB HPFM RRM PFM POM ADUM_L
FW FW HL PWB
D-GND 5VN HL_UM

FDSW
5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB HL_LM
FET
24V2 P-GND HL_EX1

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
/INT_CNT HL_EX2
INT24V1 INT24V1
J. DC power line diagram (230V)
P-GND P-GND INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F402(41cpm) F102(50cpm) INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND
FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
PFM
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1
24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD UN
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM
D-GND D-GND A10V 24V INVERTOR

12V 12V 24V3 24V3 A5V P-GND PWB
24V3 24V3 P-GND P-GND A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND 12V 12V D-GND
5VN 5VN
3.3V 3.3V
12V D-GND D-GND CL
5VL 5VO 5VO 24V INVERTOR
5VO P-GND PWB CL
3.3V
D-GND
MFPC PWB 24V1 ORS LED

24V 24V PWB
P-GND P-GND
5VN 5VN FAX
3.3V 3.3V 24V_EXT 24V_EXT
D-GND D-GND P-GND P-GND
5VO 5V_EXT 5V_EXT
F405(41cpm) F105(50cpm) AVCC AVCC
24V5 24V5 D-GND USB HUB PWB SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
P-GND P-GND PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF/DSPF
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER
D-GND D-GND option
F404(41cpm) F104(50cpm) 5V
24V4 24V4 D-GND CARD READER
P-GND P-GND
FUSE 5VN 5VN LCC option
D-GND D-GND D-GND
PSU D-GND D-GND
D-GND D-GND USB I/F PWB
24V4
P-GND
5VN DESK USB CONVERSION PWB
D-GND
D-GND
OPTION
option
Main unit DSPF CNT PWB DSPF CCD PWB (1)
A. DSPF
SCN cnt PWB (DSPF interface harness C2)

CN16 CN6
GND 1 1 GND
GND 2 2 GND
3.3V 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 4 4 3.3V
5V 5 5 5V
12V 6 6 12V
24V 7 7 24V
(DSPF CCD harness C2)
24V 8 8 24V CN4 CN1
2. Actual wiring chart
24V 9 9 24V GND 1 41 GND

DSPF CNT PWB section 1/2
GND 10 10 GND AFE_RDD 2 40 AFE_RDD

B10B-PH-K-S B10B-PH-K-S AFE_WRD 3 39 AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK 4 38 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 5 37 AFE_CS
/RES_CCDAD 6 36 /RES_CCDAD
GND 7 35 GND
A3.3V 8 34 A3.3V
A3.3V 9 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 10 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 11 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 12 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 13 29 A3.3V
(DSPF interface harness C2)
CN17 CN8 GND 14 28 GND
GND 1 1 GND A5V 15 27 A5V
nPOF_SCN 3 3 POF_DSPF A5V 16 26 A5V
GND 5 5 GND A5V 17 25 A5V
/LVDS_STBY 7 7 /LVDS_STBY GND 18 24 GND
/STANDBY 9 9 /STANDBY A10V 19 23 A10V
nFWP_SCN 11 11 /FWP_SCN A10V 20 22 A10V
SCANUP 13 13 SCANUP GND 21 21 GND
RES_EXT/ 15 15 nRES_EXT/ RA- 22 20 RA-
GND 17 17 GND RA+ 23 19 RA+
FROM_DSPFCPU_INT/ 19 19 TO_SCANCPU_INT/ GND 24 18 GND
GND 21 21 GND RB- 25 17 RB-
_RXD_DSPF 23 23 nRXD_SCAN RB+ 26 16 RB+
_TXD_DSPF 25 25 nTXD_SCAN GND 27 15 GND
_RTS_DSPF 27 27 nRTS_SCAN RC- 28 14 RC-
_CTS_DSPF 29 29 nCTS_SCAN RC+ 29 13 RC+
DSCANDATA0- 2 2 SCANDATA0- GND 30 12 GND

DSCANDATA0+ 4 4 SCANDATA0+ CLK- 31 11 CLK-
GND 6 6 GND CLK+ 32 10 CLK+
DSCANDATA1+ 10 10 SCANDATA1+ RD- 34 8 RD-
GND 12 12 GND RD+ 35 7 RD+
DSCANDATA2+ 16 16 SCANDATA2+ RE- 37 5 RE-
GND 18 18 GND RE+ 38 4 RE+
DSCANCLKOUT- 20 20 SCANCLKOUT- GND 39 3 GND
DSCANCLKOUT+ 22 22 SCANCLKOUT+ AFE_CSTG 40 2 AFE_CSTG
GND 24 24 GND GND 41 1 GND
DSCANDATA3- 26 26 SCANDATA3- FI-RE41S-VF
DSCANDATA3+ 28 28 SCANDATA3+
GND 30 30 GND
501190-3017 501190-3017
(2)
1 SGND
SPPD2
2 D_SPPD2
Paper pass 2
DSPF CNT PWB 3 5V
B3B-PH-K-S
(DSPFcnt sensor harness C2)
CN2
GND 1 1 SGND
SPPD3
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3
Paper pass 3
5V 3 3 5V
DRIVER PWB GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
(DSPF DRIVER interface)
D_SPPD3 11
CN6 CN1 5V 4
5V 1 1 5V GND 14 1 SGND
SPPD4
SGND 2 2 SGND D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4
Paper pass 4
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN 5V 5 3 5V
SGND 4 4 SGND GND 15 1 SGND 3 B3B-PH-K-S
DSPF CNT PWB section 2/2
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1 D_SPPD5 12 2 D_SPPD5 2

(DSPF PPD5 interface harness)
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM 5V 6 3 5V 1
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV 5V (Sensor) 8 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD D_ROCD 18 1 SGND
SPPD5
D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPUM_INA GND 17 2 D_SPPD5
Paper pass 5
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPUM_IN/A D_SOCD 13 3 5V
D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPUM_INB GND 16 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPUM_IN/B 5V (Sensor) 7
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA B18B-PHDSS-B ROCD
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A 1 D_ROCD Lower cover
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB 2 SGND open/close
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B 292161-2 detection
D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPOM_ENA
D_SPOM_STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPOM_MODE 1 D_SOCD
D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPOM_DIR 2 SGND SOCD
Book detection
24V 21 21 24V 3 5V (Sensor)
PGND 22 22 PGND 175487-3
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
(DSPF LAMP FFC C2)
PGND 26 26 PGND CN5
B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B 24V 1 5 24V
24V 2 4 24V
CN3 CN3 LAMP 3 3 LAMP CL-INV-R
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF PGND 4 2 PGND
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF PGND 5 1 PGND
D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1 5597-05CPB7F
D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2

D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA 2 PGND
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB 1 PGND
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
CL
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK CN7
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3.3V 1
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC GND 2
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC CPU_RXD 3
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS CPU_TXD 4
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC NC 5
5V 23 23 5V NC 6
SGND 24 24 SGND BM06B-GHS-TBT
B24B-PHDSS-B B24B-PHDSS-B
1 D_SOCV
(3)
SCOV
2 SGND
D_SPLS1 1 Cover open
SPLS1 3 5V (Sensor)
SGND 2 DRIVER PWB
Length detection 175487-3
(Short) 5V (Sensor) 3 (DSPF tray harness) CN1
175487-3 2 D_SPLS1 (DSPF paper feed harness C2)
CN4
1 SGND
D_SOCV 6 1 D_SPED1
3 5V (Sensor) SPED1
SGND 1 2 SGND
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2 Paper empty
SPLS2 5V (Sensor) 5 3 5V (Sensor) upper
SGND 2 9 SGND
Length detection D_SPED1 8 175487-3
(Long) 5V (Sensor) 3 7 5V (Sensor)
SGND 2
DRIVER PWB
175487-3 4 VAREF
5V (Sensor) 7
(SPFSWVR harness) 5 D_SPWS
D_STUD 10 1 D_STUD
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 6 AGND STUD
SGND 3 2 SGND
VAREF 1 VAREF 3 B9B-PH-K-S Tray upper limit
SPWS 5V (Sensor) 9 3 5V (Sensor)
Width detection D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2
SGND 4 175487-3
VR AGND 3 AGND 1
D_RANDOM 12
PHNR-03-H
5V 11
1 SGND
SGND 17 SPRD
2 D_RANDOM
D_SPPD1 14 Random
3 5V detection
5V 13
PHR-3
24V_TR 15
SPED2 D_SPED2 1
/D_SPFC 16
Document SGND 2
(DSPF paper exit sensor harness) SGND 18 1 SGND
detection 5V (Sensor) 3 CN2 SPPD1
B18B-PHDSS-B 2 D_SPPD1
175487-3 4 D_SPED2 Paper pass 1
3 5V
1 SGND
PHR-3
3 5V (Sensor)
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD SMP-02V-BC
STLD
2 2 SGND 1 24V_TR 1 SPFC
Tray lower limit SGND
detection 5V (Sensor) 3 5 5V (Sensor) 2 /D_SPFC 2 Paper feed clutch
175487-3 8 D_SPOD SMR-02V-B
9 SGND
7 5V (Sensor) (DSPF ground harness) F-GND F-GND
STLD D_SPOD 1 10 NC(SGND) (DSPF clutch interface harness C2) 179228-4+292254-4
Tray lower limit SGND 2 B10B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 4
detection 5V (Sensor) 3 2 D_STSET 3 STMPS
175487-3 3 /D_STMP 2 Finish stamp
4 24V_TR 1
179228-4
CN5 CN9
1 D_SLUM/B SGND 1
2 D_SLUM/A D_STSET 2
SULM
3 D_SLUMB /D_STMP 3
Lift-up motor
4 D_SLUMA 24V_TR 4 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
5 24V_TR /D_STRRBC 5 2 /D_STRRC 1 STRRC
B5B-PH-K-S 24V_TR 6 1 24V_TR 2 No.1 resist roller
/D_STRRC 7 PHNR-02-H

24V_TR 8 SMP-06V-NC
D_SPFM/B 11 1 D_SPFM/B 1
CN8
D_SPFM/A 13 2 D_SPFM/A 2
1 D_SPOM/B
D_SPFMB 19 3 D_SPFMB 3 SPFM
SPOM 2 D_SPOM/A Transport motor
D_SPFMA 17 4 D_SPFMA 4
Paper exit motor 3 D_SPOMB
24V_SPFM 23 5 24V_SPFM 5
4 D_SPOMA
24V_SPFM 24 6 24V_SPFM 6
B4B-PH-K-S
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-06V-N
24V_TR 10
/D_SRRC 20
CN7 24V_TR 12
1 D_SPUM/B NC(FAN_PWM) 26
2 D_SPUM/A FAN_LOCK 28
SPUM 3 D_SPUMB PGND 25 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
Paper feed motor 4 D_SPUMA 24V_TR 27 2 /D_SRRC 1 SRRC
5 24V_SPUM 24V_TR 14 1 24V_TR 2 Resist
6 24V_SPUM /D_STRC 18 PHNR-02-H
B6B-PH-K-S NC 15 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
NC 16 1 NC(FAN_PWM) 4
NC 21 2 FAN_LOCK 3
FAN
NC 22 3 PGND 2
B28B-PHDSS-B 4 24V_TR 1
PHNR-04-H
SMP-02V-NC
2 /D_STRC 2
STRC
1 24V_TR 1
SMR-02V-N
B. RSPF
179228-3(BLACK)
RSPF DRIVER PWB (SPF paper entry 2 sensor)
SCN-CNT PWB HF main unit - RSPF interface harness P2 SPPD2
1 +5VPD
CN16 PHR-10 2 SPPD2
GND 1 Transport interface harness P2 3 GND
GND 2 CN G PHR-13 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC Transport harness P2 VHPGP1A73A+-18
3.3V 3 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD 1 179228-3(BLACK)
3.3V 4 (NC) SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2 2 (SPF scan front sensor)
5V 5 GND 3 3 GND 3 SPPD3
12V 6 (NC) +5VPD 4 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
24V 7 (NC) SPPD3 5 5 SPPD3 5 2 SPPD3
24V 8 GND 6 6 GND 6 3 GND
24V 9 SOCD 7 7 SOCD 7 VHPGP1A73A+-18
GND 10 GND 8 8 GND 8 179228-3
B10B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) +5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD_SOCD 9 (SPF open/close sensor)
RSPF connecting harness P2 +5VPD 10 10 +5VPD 10 SOCD
SPPD5 11 11 SPPD5 11 1 SOCD
XADR-34V/XADRP-34V CN A GND 12 12 GND 12 2 GND
1 GND 1 1 GND (NC) 13 (NC) 3 +5VPD_SOCD
2 GND 2 2 GND B13B-PH-K-S VHPGP1S73P+-18
3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 179228-3(BLACK)
4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 (SPF reverse rear sensor)
5 +24VPD 5 5 +24VPD SPPD5
CN15 6 +24VPD 6 6 +24VPD 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 1 7 +5V 7 7 +5V 2 SPPD5
SPPD2 2 8 AVCC 8 8 AVCC 3 GND
SPFMCK 3 9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPFMM1 4 10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1
SPFMM2 5 11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
SPFMO1 6 12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1
SPFMO2 7 13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2
SPRMA 8 14 SPRMA 14 14 SPRMA SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SPRMA/ 9 15 SPRMA/ 15 15 SPRMA/ 1 +24VPD_SRRC 1 SRRC
SPRMB 10 16 SPRMB 16 16 SPRMB 2 SRRC/ 2
(SPF resist roller clutch)
SPRMB/ 11 17 SPRMB/ 17 17 SPRMB/
SPRMO1 12 18 SPRMO1 18 18 SPRMO1 CN E PHR-11 179228-3
SGS 13 19 SGS 19 19 SGS +24VPD_SRRC 1 (SPF document empty sensor)
STMPS 14 20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS SRRC/ 2 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S SPED
SRRC 15 21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC SPED 3 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
SPFC 16 22 SPFC 22 22 SPFC GND 4 2 GND 2 2 GND
SPWS 17 23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS +5V_SPED 5 3 +5V_SPED 3 3 +5V_SPED
SELA 18 24 SELA 24 24 SELA +5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4 VHPGP1S73P+-18
SELB 19 25 SELB 25 25 SELB SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5 179228-3(BLACK)
SELC 20 26 SELC 26 26 SELC GND 8 6 GND 6 (SPF paper entry sensor)
SSELO 21 27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO +24VPD 9 7 +24VPD 7 SPPD1
SPPD4 22 28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4 GND 10 (NC) 8 +24VPD_SW 8 1 +5VPD
SPFFAN 23 29 SPFFAN 29 29 SPFFAN +24VPD_SW 11 Paper feed harness P2 2 SPPD1
SPPD3 24 30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3 B11B-PH-K-S 3 GND
SPPD5 25 31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 VHPGP1A73A+-18
5VPD 26 32 5VPD 32 32 5VPD
GND 27 33 GND 33 33 GND PS-187-2V
(NC) 28 (NC) 34 GND 34 34 GND SCOV (SPF cover SW)
B28B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PHDR-28VS-1 PHDR-34VS-1 B34-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 1 +24VPD
2 +24VPD_SW
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
CN B PHR-7-R 179228-4 / 292254-4 / 179228-4

GND 1 1 GND 1
STMPU 2 2 STMPU 2 STMPS
STMPS/ 3 3 STMPS/ 3
+24VPD_STMPS 4 4 +24VPD_STMPS 4 (Stamp solenoid)
+5VPD 5
(SPF reverse gate
CN C SPPD4 6 front sensor)
1 +24VPD_SGS GND 7 179228-3(BLACK)
SGS (NC) 2 (NC) B7B-PH-K-R SPPD4
3 SGS/ 1 +5VPD
(SPF document paper exit gate solenoid) PHR-3 B3B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD4
3 GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
Base tray harness P2
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4

CN F SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-3 179228-3
1 SPFMA/ (SPF document
2 +24VPD SPLS1 length short sensor)
SPFM 3 SPFMA 1 SPLS1
4 SPFMB 2 GND
(SPF transport
5 +24VPD 3 +5VPD_SPLS1
motor) 6 SPFMB/ VHPGP1S73P+-18
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S 179228-3
(SPF document
SPLS2 length long sensor)
CN D PHR-12 1 SPLS2
SPLS1 1 2 GND
GND 2 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
+5VPD_SPLS1 3 VHPGP1S73P+-18
SPLS2 4
GND 5
CN H +5VPD_SPLS2 6 SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1 SPRMA/ AVCC 7 1 AVCC 1
2 +24VPD SPWS 8 2 SPWS 2
SPWS
3 (SPF document
SPRM 3 SPRMA GND 9 3 GND width sensor)
4 SPRMB SPFC/ 10
(SPF paper feed (NC)
5 +24VPD GND 11
reverse motor) 6 SPRMB/ +24VPD_SW_SPFC 12
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-R B12B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1 SPFC/ 1 SPFC
2 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2
(SPF paper feed clutch)
Document tray harness P2
(1)
(MSW harness: other than SEC)

(AC CORD) CN1(B03P-VL) AC PWB CN2(B03P-VL-K) CN2(B5P-VH-B) (DC main harness P2) CN10
1 L_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 D-GND 1 1 D-GND
2 NC NC 2 PS-250(RED) D-GND 2 2 D-GND
C. Main unit
3 N_IN MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 1 5VO 3 3 5VL

CN6(B2P3-VH-R) CN3(B03P-VL-R) PS-250(RED) 5VL 4 4 5VL
1 N_WH MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin 1 5VL 5 5 5VO
2 NC NC 2 PS-250 MSW 6 3.3V
3 L_WH MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin 1 7 5VN
PS-250 8 12V
CN5(B03P-VL-E) CN3(B03P-VH-B) 9 24V3
1 L_HL (Japan only) 3.3V 1 10 P-GND
(AC-HL harness PA2: other than SEC) 2 NC 3.3V 2 B10P-VH
3 N_HL D-GND 3
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
REACTOR MOTHER PWB
Power supply section (P1)
1 24V2 CN6(B03B-PASK-1) CN15

2 NC DCCNT1 1 4 n DCCNT1
CN1 3 NC NC 2 5 n DCCNT2
L_HL 1 4 D-GND CN4(B3P4-VH-R) CN1(B2P3-VH-B) DCCNT2 3
NC 2 L_DC 1 3 L_DC 3 5VNPD
N_HL 3 NC 2 2 NC CN4(B6P-VH-B) 2 D-GND
B03P-VL(WH) NC 3 1 N_DC 5VN 1 1 INT5V
HL PWB N_DC 4 5VN 2 B05B-PH-K-S
(AC-DC reactor harness 100V) 5VN 3 TO LCC(P15)
(AC-DC harness 120V/200V) 5VN 4 TO INSERTOR(P16)

(AC-WH harness ) D-GND 5 CN4
D-GND 6 TO LCC(P15) 1 INT5V
PS-187 3 D-GND
L_WH 1 DC PWB CN5(B04P-VH-B) 5 5VNPD
WH_SW 12V 1 B26B-PHDSS
(EX200V ONLY) 12V 2
L_WH 1 CN9(B2P3-VH-B-BLUE) NC 3
PS-187 1 PS Rec-IN NC 4 PCU PWB
REACTOR 2 NC CN7(B8P-VH-B)
3 PS Rec-OUT FW 1 CN2
CN1 P-GND 2 1 24V1
1 WH-L P-GND 3 2 P-GND
2 NC To P2 3 24V2
3 WH-N P-GND 4 4 P-GND
B2P3-VH-R NC(P-GND) 5 5 24V3
P-GND 6 TO INSERTOR(P16) 6 D-GND
WH PWB (AC-HL harness PA2: other than SEC) SCANNER UNIT P-GND 7 TO LCC(P15) 7 12V
(SCN-WH harness ) NC(P-GND) 8 8 D-GND
CN2 R EL-2Pin P R EL 2PIN P 9 5VN
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 CN8(B7P-VH-B) 11 3.3V
NC 2 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH NC(24V1) 1 12 FW

WH-L(SCAN) 3 24V1 2 10 NC(D-GND)
B2P3VH-BL JPN:OPTION 24V2 3 To P2 B12P-XL
EX100V:OPTION 24V3 4
CN3 EX120V:OPTION 24V3 5
WH-N(DESK1) 1 EX200V:OPTION 24V4 6 TO LCC(P15) SMR-3 SMP-3 CN5
NC 2 WH 24V5 7 TO INSERTOR(P16) 2 2 23 P-GND
WH-L(DESK1) 3 3 3 22 PSFM2_LD
B2P3-VH JPN:STANDARD
PSFM2 1 1 21 PSFM2_V
EX100V:OPTION
CN4 EX120V:OPTION NAME SMP-3 SMR-3
WH_N(LSU) 1 EX200V:OPTION 5VL MFP 3 3 15 P-GND
WH_N(DESK/LCC) 2 5VO FAX 2 2 13 PSFM_LD
NC 3 To P15 5VN OTHER
PSFM 1 1 11 PSFM_V
WH_L(DESK/LCC) 4 24V1 ENGINE
WH_L(LSU) 5 24V2 ENGINE 1 1 12 0ZFM_V
B4P(5-3)-VH 24V3 ENGINE 2 2 14 /0ZFM_CNT
24V4 LCC,DESK
OZFM 3 3 16 P-GND
(Ozone fan)
CN5 24V5 FINISHER 4 4 18 OZFM_LD
WH_PR 1 SMP-4 SMR-4
NC 2 19 WH_PR
24V3 3 20 24V3
B03B-PH-K-R (DC main harness P2) B24B-PHDSS
(2)
DSW-R (Upper main harness CJ2) CN17

24V1 1 1 24V1
24V(RDSW) 2 2 24V(RDSW)
PS-187-2V 3 24V(RDSW)
4 24V(FDSW) INTCNT
DSW-F (HL I/F harness CJ2) P EL-2Pin R 5 INT24V1
24V(RDSW) 1 24V(RDSW) 1 To P14 6 P-GND
PS-187 2 24V(FDSW) 2 7 5VN
24V(FDSW) B7P-VH
Front section (P2)
SPS-51T-187 CN3
1 5VNPD
To P14 2 P-GND
CN8 (DC main harness P2) 3 INT24V1
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2
P-GND 2 6 P-GND
INT24V1in 3 4 INT24V1in
N,C 4
AC /INT_CNT 5 7 /INT_CNT
PWB 24V2 7 B7P-VH
24V2 6 CN8 CN2
B7P-VH-B 3 24V2 3 24V2
B7P-VH-B DCPS B12P-XL
P SM-5Pin R (HL I/F harness CJ2) P DF1B-24DE S CN6 (Upper main

5 24V3 5 1 24V3 1 1 24V3 CN6 harness CJ2) CN14
PRM 4 PRM_A 4 3 PRM_A 3 8 PRM_A TM-DRV PRM_A 9 20 PRM_A PCU PWB
3 PRM_B 3 5 PRM_B 5 4 PRM_B PWB PRM_B 5 22 PRM_B
(Fusing pressure
2 PRM_/A 2 7 PRM_/A 7 6 PRM_/A PRM_/A 7 24 PRM_/A
release motor)
1 PRM_/B 1 9 PRM_/B 9 2 PRM_/B PRM_/B 3 26 PRM_/B
HLPCD B10B-PNDZS B10B-PNDZS
(Fusing pressure detection)
5VN 1 11 5VN 11 28 5VN
HLPCD 2 13 HLPCD 13 30 HLPCD
D-GND 3 15 D-GND 15 32 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3
P SL-2Pin R
TNM 1 WTNM_1 1 17 WTNM_1 17 11 WTNM_1
(Waste toner motor) 2 WTNM_2 2 19 WTNM_2 19 13 WTNM_2
1TNFD
(Waste toner full detection)
1TNFD 1 21 1TNFD 21 7 1TNFD

6-179228-2
(Sirocco interface harness PA2)
PAP PA-3Pin PALR R SM-6Pin P
Toner cooling 1 PCSFM1_V 1 1 PCSFM1_V 1 2 PCSFM1_V 2 1 PCSFM1_V
fan 1 2 PCSFM1_LD 2 2 PCSFM2_V 2 4 PCSFM2_V 4 3 PCSFM2_V
3 P-GND 3 3 PCSFM1_LD 3 6 PCSFM1_LD 6 15 PCSFM1_LD
(Sirocco fan) 4 PCSFM2_LD 4 8 PCSFM2_LD 8 17 PCSFM2_LD
5 P-GND 5 10 P-GND 10 19 P-GND
PAP PA-3Pin PALR 6 N,C 6
Toner cooling 1 PCSFM2_V 1 1 /RCFM_V 1 25 /RCFM_V
2 PCSFM2_LD 2
Machine R cooling fan 2 RCFM_LD 2 23 RCFM_LD
fan 2
3 P-GND 3 ( 80FAN) 3 D-GND 3 18 D-GND
(Sirocco fan) P SM-3Pin R B32B-PHDSS
(SCN-mother harness P2)
R SM-6Pin P (Upper main harness CJ2) R SM-6Pin P
1 /C_CARD 1 14 /C_CARD 14 1 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD
CARD 2 /C_SEL 2 16 /C_SEL 16 2 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL
3 /C_CLOCK 3 18 /C_CLOCK 18 3 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK
READER 4 /C_DATA 4 20 /C_DATA 20 4 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA
5 5V 5 22 5V 22 5 5V 5 5 5V SCNcnt PWB
(OPTION) 6 D-GND 6 24 D-GND 24 6 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
1
(3)
:D1.25-M3(Ni)
600W P SL R (Fusing harness CJ2) P Drawer RWZ R (HL I/F harness CJ2) CN2
HL_UM 1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 N-HL(UM)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
#18 #18 2 N,C

R SL P 4 L-HL U 4 3 N-HL(EX)
TS MAIN #16 #16 B03P-VL-K
(Harness CJ2 between TS-HL_UM)
R YL P 5 N-HL(US) 5 CN4 HL PWB
TS LOW #18 3 L-HL U
(Harness P2 between (Harness CJ2 between TS) 2 N,C N,C 8
TS-HL LOW) 1 L-HL(LM) /HL_PR 7
6 N-HL(LM) 6 B03P-VL-RD HL_OUT_EX 6
Fusing unit section (P3)
HL_LM HL_OUT_LM 5
300W P YL R #18 #18
HL_OUT_US 4
450W CN3 HL_OUT_UM 3
HL_EX1 1 N-HL(US) D-GND 2
TS EX2 TS EX1 2 L-HL(LM) 2 2 N,C INT24V1 1
#16 #16 3 N-HL(LM) B08B-PASK
450W
HL_EX2 B2P3-VH
3 N-HL(EX) 3
#16 #16
Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement
Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1 2 3 3 2 1
A10
A10
CN14
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6
INT24V1 4
R SM-3pin(BK) P (Fusing harness CJ2) View from Fuser unit side View from Body side D-GND 6
BK 1 TH_UM_IN 1 HL_OUT_US 8
RTH(MAIN) WH 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 HL_OUT_LM 10
BL (Upper main
Non-contact 3 D-GND 3 (HL I/F harness CJ2) P DF1B-20DE E CN13 HL_OUT_EX 12
a. Fusing unit section (MX-4101N/4100N) (MX-5001N/5000N (for 200V))
harness CJ2)
B-1 TH_UM_IN B-9 18 TH_UM_IN 18 8 TH_UM_IN HL_OUT_UM 14
B-2 D-GND B-8 16 D-GND 16 6 D-GND /HL_PR 16
R SM-2pin P B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN B32B-PHDSS
RTH(SUB) 1 TH_US_IN 1 B-4 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND 12 2 D-GND
2 D-GND 2 B-5 TH_LM_IN B-5 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN
Contact B-6 D-GND B-4 8 D-GND 8 7 D-GND
B-7 TH_EX2_IN B-3 6 TH_EX2_IN 6 5 TH_EX2_IN
R SM-2pin P B-8 D-GND B-2 4 D-GND 4 3 D-GND
RTH(LOW) 1 TH_LM_IN 1

2 D-GND 2
Contact B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 1 TH_UMCS_IN
RCZR 9PIN
R SM-4pin P
RTH(EX2) 1 TH_EX2_IN 1
2 D-GND 2
Contact
RTH(EX1) 3 TH_EX1_IN 3 A-1 TH_EX1_IN A-10 19 TH_EX1_IN 19 10 TH_EX1_IN

4 D-GND 4 A-2 D-GND A-9 17 D-GND 17 11 D-GND
Contact A-3 5VN A-8 15 5VN 15 12 5VN
A-4 WEBD A-7 13 WEBD 13 13 WEBD
(WEB harness C2) A-5 D-GND A-6 11 D-GND 11 14 D-GND
P SM-2pin R A-6 A-5 9 9 B34B-PHDSS
1 WEBD 1 A-7 A-4 7 7
WEB-END 2 D-GND 2 A-8 A-3 5 5
A-9 A-2 3 3
A-10 A-1 1 1
RCZR 10PIN
1
:D1.25-M3(Ni)
600W P SL R (Fusing harness 50 C2) P Drawer RWZ R (HL I/F harness 50 CJ2) CN2
HL_UM 1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 N-HL(UM)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
#18 #18 2 N,C

R SL P 4 L-HL U 4 3 N-HL(EX)
TS MAIN #16 #16 B03P-VL-K
(Harness CJ2 between TS-HL_UM)
R YL P 5 N-HL(US) 5 CN4 HL PWB
TS LOW #18 3 L-HL U
(Harness P2 between (Harness CJ2 between TS) 2 N,C N,C 8
TS-HL LOW) #18 #18 1 L-HL(LM) /HL_PR 7
HL_LM 6 N-HL(LM) 6 B03P-VL-RD HL_OUT_EX 6
300W P YL R HL_OUT_LM 5
HL_OUT_US 4
550W CN3 HL_OUT_UM 3
HL_EX1 #14 #14 1 N-HL(US) D-GND 2
TS EX2 TS EX1 2 L-HL(LM) 2 2 N,C INT24V1 1
3 N-HL(LM) B08B-PASK
550W
HL_EX2 B2P3-VH
#14 #14
3 N-HL(EX) 3
Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement
Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer

b. Fusing unit section (MX-5001N/5000N (for 100V/120V))
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1 2 3 3 2 1
A10
A10
CN14
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6
INT24V1 4
R SM-3pin(BK) P (Fusing harness 50 C2) View from Fuser unit side View from Body side D-GND 6
RTH(MAIN) WH 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 HL_OUT_LM 10
Non-contact BL (Upper main
3 D-GND 3 (HL I/F harness 50 CJ2) P DF1B-20DE E CN13 HL_OUT_EX 12
harness CJ2)
R SM-2pin P B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN B32B-PHDSS
RTH(SUB) 1 TH_US_IN 1 B-4 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND 12 2 D-GND
Contact 2 D-GND 2 B-5 B-5 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN
B-6 B-4 8 D-GND 8 7 D-GND
B-7 TH_EX2_IN B-3 6 TH_EX2_IN 6 5 TH_EX2_IN
R SM-2pin P B-8 D-GND B-2 4 D-GND 4 3 D-GND
RTH(LOW) 1 TH_LM_IN 1

Contact 2 D-GND 2
B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 1 TH_UMCS_IN
RCZR 9PIN
R SM-4pin P
RTH(EX2) 1 TH_EX2_IN 1
Contact 2 D-GND 2
RTH(EX1) 3 TH_EX1_IN 3 A-1 TH_EX1_IN A-10 19 TH_EX1_IN 19 10 TH_EX1_IN

Contact 4 D-GND 4 A-2 D-GND A-9 17 D-GND 17 11 D-GND
A-3 5VN A-8 15 5VN 15 12 5VN
(WEB harness C2) A-5 D-GND A-6 11 D-GND 11 14 D-GND
P SM-2pin R A-6 A-5 9 9 B34B-PHDSS
1 WEBD 1 A-7 TH_LM_IN A-4 7 7
WEB-END 2 D-GND 2 A-8 D-GND A-3 5 5
A-9 A-2 3 3
A-10 A-1 1 1
RCZR 10PIN
(4)
Separation electrode UN_K

1TUD_K
(Transfer separation sensor K) (PTC heater harness CJ) (Upper main harness CJ2) CN16
1TUD_K 1 1 1TUD_K 1 19 1TUD_K
5VNPD 3 3 5VNPD 3 21 5VNPD
GP1S73 179228-3 4 PTC_HEAT 4 22 PTC_HEAT
P SM-4Pin R B28B-PHDSS
Heater electrode
HVT section (P4)
SRA-21T-3
PTC UN (PTC-shield harness P2)
PTC electrode PTC PTC CN1 (Upper main harness CJ2) CN15
PS-110(WH) B2P-VH INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 D-GND
/TC_DATA 3 6 /TC_DATA
SRA-21T-4
2nd TC /TC_CLK 4 8 /TC_CLK
PWB /TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD
(Secondary transfer separation harness) /HV_REM 6 5 /HV_REM
2-TC 2-TC PTC_ERR 7 7 PTC_ERR
PS-187(BLUE) PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8 9 /PTC_CLK
B8B-PASK B30B-PHDSS
(MC-BK harness) CN1 (Paper feed main harness CJ2) CN6

MC-K MC-K INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
PS-187 PS-250(RED) P-GND 7 29 D-GND
GB-K (SPRING) GB-K /HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
/HV_CLK 5 25 /HV_CLK
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K /HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
GB-C (SPRING) GB-C MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
(MC interface harness) BS-C (SPRING) BS-C B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
MC-C CN2
PS-187 GB-M (SPRING) GB-M INT24V2 1
MC-M P-GND 2 PCU PWB
PS-187 (MC interface harness) BS-M (SPRING) BS-M 1TC-REV 3
MC-M
MC PWB 1TC-Y-CC 4
PS-187 GB-Y (SPRING) GB-Y 1TC-M-CC 5
MC-Y 1TC-C-CC 6
PS-187 BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y 1TC-K-CC 7
HV_REM 8
(MC harness PA2) N,C 9
MC-Y MC-CL B9B-PASK
PS-187 PS-250

(Paper feed main harness CJ2)
CN1
(1TC harness P2) N,C 9
1TC-K 1TC-K HV_REM 1
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 1TC-K-CC 2
1TC-C 1TC-C 1TC-C-CC 3
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 1TC-M-CC 4
1TC-M 1TC-M
1st TC 1TC-Y-CC 5
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 PWB 1TC-REV 6
1TC-Y 1TC-Y P-GND 7
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 INT24V2 8
B9B-PASK
1TUD_CL
(Transfer separation sensor CL) (Transfer belt separation harness CJ2) P SM-3Pin R (Upper main harness CJ2) CN16
1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 1 23 1TUD_CL
GP1S73 179228-3 B28B-PHDSS
Separation electrode UN_CL
(5)
DVM_K (DV motor BK) (Process drive harness CJ40/CJ50) CN11 CN16 (Upper main harness CJ2) (CRUM harness PA2) CRUM(BLACK)
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
P-GND 2 5 P-GND /CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
/DVMK_CK 4 9 /DVMK_CK /CRM_K_CK 11 3 /CRM_K_CK 3 3 /CRM_K_CK
/DVMK_D 5 11 /DVMK_D D-GND 5 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
DVMK_LD 7 13 DVMK_LD TSR-04V-K
NC 3
NC 6 CRUM(CYAN)
B07B-PASK DVM_CL(DV motor CL) 5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2 /CRM_C_DT 13 6 /CRM_C_DT 6 4 /CRM_C_DT
P-GND 2 6 P-GND /CRM_C_CK 15 7 /CRM_C_CK 7 3 /CRM_C_CK
/DVMC_CK 4 10 /DVMC_CK D-GND 7 8 D-GND 8 1 D-GND
/DVMC_D 5 12 /DVMC_D TSR-04V-K
DVMC_LD 7 14 DVMC_LD
BRAKE (Not used) 3 CRUM(MAGENTA)
CW/CCW 6 5VN 2 9 5VN 9 2 5VN
B07B-PASK /CRM_M_DT 10 10 /CRM_M_DT 10 4 /CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK 12 11 /CRM_M_CK 11 3 /CRM_M_CK
TSR-04V-K
Process drive unit section 1/2 (P5)
2 INT24V2 CRUM(YELLOW)
4 INT24V2 5VN 4 13 5VN 13 2 5VN
6 P-GND /CRM_Y_DT 14 14 /CRM_Y_DT 14 4 /CRM_Y_DT
8 P-GND /CRM_Y_CK 16 15 /CRM_Y_CK 15 3 /CRM_Y_CK
10 /DVMC_CK D-GND 8 16 D-GND 16 1 D-GND
12 /DVMC_D P SM-18Pin R TSR-04V-K
14 DVMC_LD
R SM-3Pin P
/CAFM_V 26 1 /CAFM_V 1
CAFM_LD 27 2 CAFM_LD 2
CAFM
P-GND 28 3 P-GND 3 (Drive unit duct)
R SM-2Pin P B28B-PHDSS
1TURC 1 24V3 1 15 24V3
(Primary transfer 2 1TURC 2 16 1TURC
separation clutch)
DHPD_K
(Phase detection BK)
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K CN5
D-GND 2 18 D-GND +24V 1
5VNPD 3 19 5VNPD +24V 2
GP1S73 179228-3 CN15 (Upper main harness CJ2) CN3 TMK_A 3
20 DHPD_CL 24V3 22 12 24V3 TMK_/A 4 TNM_K
21 D-GND TNM_Y_/B 11 1 TMY_/B TMK_B 5
22 5VNPD TNM_Y_B 13 3 TMY_B TMK_/B 6
TNM_Y_/A 15 5 TMY_/A CN4

TNM_Y_A 17 7 TMY_A +24V 1
DHPD_CL/M P-GND 19 9 P-GND +24V 2
(Phase detection CL/M) TNM_K_/B 21 17 TMK_/B TMC_A 3
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M TNM_K_B 23 15 TMK_B TMC_/A 4 TNM_C
D-GND 2 24 D-GND TNM_K_/A 25 13 TMK_/A TMC_B 5
5VNPD 3 25 5VNPD TNM_K_A 27 11 TMK_A TMC_/B 6
GP1S73 179228-3 P-GND 29 19 P-GND CN2
P-GND 12 2 P-GND +24V 1
26 DHPD_Y TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A +24V 2
27 D-GND TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A TMM_A 3
28 5VNPD TNM_M_B 18 6 TMM_B TMM_/A 4 TNM_M
TNM_M_/B 20 4 TMM_/B TMM_B 5
TNM_C_A 24 20 TMC_A TMM_/B 6
TNM_C_/A 26 18 TMC_/A CN1
R SM-2Pin P TNM_C_B 28 16 TMC_B +24V 1
1TURC_R 1 24V3 1 29 24V3 TNM_C_/B 30 14 TMC_/B +24V 2
(Primary transfer
separation reverse 2 1TURC_R 2 30 1TURC_R B30B-PHDSS B20B-PNDZS TMY_A 3
clutch) B30B-PHDSS TMY_/A 4 TNM_Y
TMY_B 5
TMY_/B 6
PCU PWB
(6)
41CPM 50CPM
1 : Oct. 24 2008
BTM (Belt motor) (Process drive harness CJ40) CN1 BTM (Belt motor) (Process drive harness CJ50) CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1 INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1 INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
BTM_B 4 3 BTM_B BTM_B 4 3 BTM_B
BTM_B/ 6 4 BTM_B/ BTM_B/ 6 4 BTM_B/
BTM_A/ 3 5 BTM_A/ BTM_A/ 3 5 BTM_A/
BTM_A 1 6 BTM_A BTM_A 1 6 BTM_A
B6B-XH B6B-PASK-1 B6B-XH 7 N,C
B7B-PASK-1
R SM-6Pin P (Process drive harness CJ40) CN2 R SM-6Pin P (Process drive harness CJ50) CN2
Process drive unit section 2/2 (P6)
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1 5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1

6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1 6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
DMBK 3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B 3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
DMBK 4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
(Drum motor BK)
(Drum motor BK)
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/ 1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A 2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1 7 INT24V1
DMCL (Drum motor CL) 8 INT24V1 8 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 9 DMCL_B DMC (Drum motor C) 9 DMC_B
INT24V1 5 10 DMCL_B/ INT24V1 2 10 DMC_B/
DMCL_B 3 11 DMCL_A/ INT24V1 5 11 DMC_A/
DMCL_B/ 1 12 DMCL_A DMC_B 3 12 DMC_A
DMCL_A/ 6 B12B-PASK-1 DMC_B/ 1 B12B-PASK-1
DMCL_A 4 DRIVER DMC_A/ 6 DRIVER
PHR-6 SUB DMC_A 4 SUB
PHR-6
PWB PWB
DMM (Drum motor M) (Process drive harness CJ50) CN1

INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DMM_B 3 3 DMM_B
DMM_B/ 1 4 DMM_B/
DMM_A/ 6 5 DMM_A/

DMM_A 4 6 DMM_A
PHR-6 7 INT24V1
8 INT24V1
DMY (Drum motor Y) 9 DMY_B
INT24V1 2 10 DMY_B/
INT24V1 5 11 DMY_A/
DMY_B 3 12 DMY_A
DMY_B/ 1 13 N,C
DMY_A/ 6 B13B-PASK-1
DMY_A 4
PHR-6
(7)
DV un DL_BK (Discharge lamp BK) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness) CN10
NC 2
BLACK /DL_BK 3 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK
TCS_K 53254-0310
(Toner density sensor BK) (DV harness CJ2)
5VN 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 5 5VN
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 11 D-GND
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND
3.6K 2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
3 TNCRU_K 3 2 TNCRU_K 9 17 TNCRU_K
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
DL and DV section (P7)
C QR/P8-8P P
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A)
BS-K (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_C (Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
CYAN /DL_C 3 10 /DL_C 1 21 /DL_C
TCS_C 53254-0310
(Toner density sensor CYAN) (DV harness CJ2)
5VN 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 25 5VN
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 33 D-GND
3.6K 2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
3 TNCRU_C 3 2 TNCRU_C 9 37 TNCRU_C
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN

C QR/P8-8P P PCU PWB
BS-C (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
MAGENTA /DL_M 3 10 /DL_M 1 2 /DL_M
TCS_M 53254-0310
(Toner density sensor MAGENTA) (DV harness CJ2)
5VN 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 6 5VN
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 14 D-GND
3.6K 2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M

3 TNCRU_M 3 2 TNCRU_M 9 18 TNCRU_M
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
C QR/P8-8P P
BS-M (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
YELLOW /DL_Y 3 10 /DL_Y 1 22 /DL_Y
TCS_Y 53254-0310
(Toner density sensor YELLOW) (DV harness CJ2)
5VN 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 26 5VN
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 34 D-GND
3.6K 2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
3 TNCRU_Y 3 2 TNCRU_Y 9 38 TNCRU_Y
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-1
BS-Y (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
(8)
(LSU-BD harness PA) CN1 (LSU LD harness P2) CN7

BD PWB CN1 +5V 50 1 5V_LD
D-GND 4 1 D-GND +5V 48 2 5V_LD
n BD 3 2 n BD
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN DT_K1+ 11 14 DT_K1+
B4B-PH-K-S 5 D-GND DT_K1- 9 12 DT_K1- MOTHER-LSU harness PA2
6 LSUTH1 GND 13 10 D-GND CN3 CN4
LSU TH1 7 NC nSH_K1 4 9 /SH_K1 3.3V CN 2 1 3.3V CN
D-GND 4 GND 6 7 D-GND D-GND 1 8 D-GND
LSU section (P8)
B7B-PH-K-S
LSUTH1 3 nSH_K2 8 5 /SH_K2 5V CN 4 5 5V CN
NC 2 GND 10 3 D-GND D-GND 3 7 D-GND
NC 1 nLDERR_K 12 17 /LDERR_K 24V 5 2 24V
B4B-PH-K-S DT_K2+ 5 8 DT_K2+ P-GND 6 4 P-GND
DT_K2- 3 6 DT_K2- S06B-XASK-1
(Polygon motor GND 7 4 D-GND
POLYGON MOTOR harness PA) CN2 VREF_K1 16 15 VREF_K1 CN4
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK VREF_K2 14 13 VREF_K2 5VLD 1 6 5VLD
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK nENB_K 18 11 /ENB_K D-GND 2 12 D-GND
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK /SCK_LSU 4 14 /SCK_LSU
/START 4 3 /START D-GND 3 15 D-GND
P-GND 5 2 P-GND nSH_YMC1 40 49 /SH_C1 /TRANS_DAT 5 13 /TRANS_DAT
24V1 6 1 24V1 GND 42 47 D-GND D-GND 6 18 D-GND
B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-K-S nSH_YMC2 44 45 /SH_C2 /RST_DAT 8 16 /RST_DAT
GND 46 43 D-GND LSU_ASIC_RST 7 10 LSU_ASIC_RST
DT_C1+ 23 50 DT_C1+ /TRANS_RST 9 11 /TRANS_RST
DT_C1- 21 48 DT_C1- JOBEND_INT 10 17 JOBEND_INT
CN6 GND 25 46 D-GND TH_LSU 11 20 TH_LSU
1 24V nLDERR_C 20 41 /LDERR_C /PCU_TRG 12 19 /PCU_TRG
LSU_FAN 2 /FANRDY VREF_C1 24 39 VREF_C1 VSYNC_K_N 13 28 VSYNC_K_N
3 GND LD VREF_C2 22 37 VREF_C2 VSYNC_K_P 14 27 VSYNC_K_P
B3B-PH-K-S DT_C2+ 17 44 DT_C2+ LSU VSYNC_C_P 15 26 VSYNC_C_P
PWB DT_C2- 15 42 DT_C2- VSYNC_C_N 16 25 VSYNC_C_N
GND 19 40 D-GND
PWB VSYNC_M_N 17 24 VSYNC_M_N
nENB_YMC 38 35 /ENB_C VSYNC_M_P 18 23 VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P 19 22 VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N 20 21 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_M1+ 47 38 DT_M1+ S20B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS
DT_M1- 45 36 DT_M1-
GND 49 34 D-GND MOTHER
nLDERR_M 32 33 /LDERR_M PWB
VREF_M1 36 31 VREF_M1 CN5 CN5
VREF_M2 34 29 VREF_M2 CH0_N 1 23 CH0_N
DT_M2+ 41 32 DT_M2+ CH0_P 2 24 CH0_P
DT_M2- 39 30 DT_M2- D-GND 3 22 D-GND
GND 43 28 D-GND D-GND 4 21 D-GND

CH1_N 5 19 CH1_N
CH1_P 6 20 CH1_P
DT_Y1+ 35 26 DT_Y1+ CH2_N 7 17 CH2_N
DT_Y1- 33 24 DT_Y1- CH2_P 8 18 CH2_P
nLDERR_Y 26 27 /LDERR_Y D-GND 10 15 D-GND
VREF_Y1 30 25 VREF_Y1 CLCLK_N 11 13 CLCLK_N
VREF_Y2 28 23 VREF_Y2 CLCLK_P 12 14 CLCLK_P
DT_Y2+ 29 20 DT_Y2+ CH3_N 13 11 CH3_N
DT_Y2- 27 18 DT_Y2- CH3_P 14 12 CH3_P
(Harness PA2 between MOTHER-LSU) (LSUSS-BK harness PA2) GND 31 16 D-GND D-GND 15 10 D-GND
CN20 P R R P D-GND 16 9 D-GND
INT24V1 1 1 1 1 1 LSUSS- CH4_N 17 7 CH4_N
NC 2 2 2 2 2 LDCHK_1 1 19 LDCHK_1 CH4_P 18 8 CH4_P
/LSUSS_B 3 SM-2Pin SM-2Pin
BK LDCHK_2 2 21 LDCHK_2 ECLK_LSU_N 19 5 ECLK_LSU_N
501571-5007 501190-5017 ECLK_LSU_P 20 6 ECLK_LSU_P
PCU P R SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 D-GND 21 4 D-GND
PWB CCFM_V 4 1 1 D-GND 22 3 D-GND
CCFM_LD 7 2 2 HSYNC_LSU_P 23 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
P-GND 6 3 3 CCFM FG FG HSYNC_LSU_N 24 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
CCFM_CNT 5 SM-3Pin S24B-PHDSS B24B-PHDSS
B7B-PH-K-S
(9)
PHNR-12-H +
CLUD1(CS1 lift-up detection) (Paper feed unit harness cs1 P2) BU12P-TR-P-H (Size detection harness CJ2) CZW-40Pin (Paper feed main harness CJ2) CN9
5VNPD 1 10 5VNPD 3 A-20 5VNPD A-1 1 5VNPD
CLUD1 2 11 CLUD1 2 A-19 CLUD1 A-2 3 CLUD1
D-GND 3 12 D-GND 1 A-18 D-GND A-3 5 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3 CPED1(CS1 paper empty detection)
5VNPD 1 7 5VNPD 6 A-17 5VNPD A-4 7 5VNPD
CS1 CPED1 2 8 CPED1 5 A-16 CPED1 A-5 9 CPED1
PAPER D-GND 3 9 D-GND 4 A-15 D-GND A-6 11 D-GND
CPFD1
FEED (CS2 paper entry detection) GP1A73 179228-3
UN 5VN 1 4 5VN 9 A-14 5VN A-7 13 5VN
CPFD1 2 5 CPFD1 8 A-13 CPFD1 A-8 15 CPFD1
D-GND 3 6 D-GND 7 A-12 D-GND A-9 17 D-GND
GP2A200L 179228-3 DSW_C (Right lower door open/close detection)
5VN 1 1 5VN 12 A-3 5VN A-18
DSW_C 2 2 DSW_C 11 A-2 DSW_C A-19
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 10 A-1 D-GND A-20
Paper feed unit section (P9)
GP1A73 179228-3 CSPD1 (CS1 remaining

paper quantity detection)
5VNPD 1 A-11 5VNPD A-10 19 5VNPD
CSPD1 2 A-10 CSPD1 A-11 21 CSPD1
D-GND 3 A-9 D-GND A-12 23 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3
CSS1
(CS1 paper size detection)
NC 1
CSS11 3 A-7 CSS11 A-14 27 CSS11
CSS12 4 A-6 CSS12 A-15 29 CSS12 PCU
CSS13 5 A-5 CSS13 A-16 31 CSS13
CSS14 6 A-4 CSS14 A-17 33 CSS14
PWB
S6P-PH-K-S
CLUD2 PHNR-9-H +
(CS2 lift-up detection) (Paper feed unit harness cs2 P2) BU09P-TR-P-H
5VNPD 1 7 5VNPD 3 B-20 5VNPD B-1 2 5VNPD
CLUD2 2 8 CLUD2 2 B-19 CLUD2 B-2 4 CLUD2
D-GND 3 9 D-GND 1 B-18 D-GND B-3 6 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3 CPED2
CS2 (CS2 paper empty detection)
PAPER 5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 6 B-17 5VNPD B-4 8 5VNPD
FEED CPED2 2 5 CPED2 5 B-16 CPED2 B-5 10 CPED2
UN D-GND 3 6 D-GND 4 B-15 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND
CPFD2
(CS2 paper entry detection) GP1A73 179228-3
5VN 1 1 5VN 9 B-14 5VN B-7 14 5VN
CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2 8 B-13 CPFD2 B-8 16 CPFD2

D-GND 3 3 D-GND 7 B-12 D-GND B-9 18 D-GND
GP2A200L 179228-3
CSPD2 (CS2 remaining
paper quantity detection)
5VNPD 1 B-11 5VNPD B-10 20 5VNPD
CSPD2 2 B-10 CSPD2 B-11 22 CSPD2
D-GND 3 B-9 D-GND B-12 24 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3
CSS2
(CS2 paper size detection)
NC 1
D-GND 2 B-8 D-GND B-13 26 D-GND
CSS21 3 B-7 CSS21 B-14 28 CSS21
CSS22 4 B-6 CSS22 B-15 30 CSS22
CSS23 5 B-5 CSS23 B-16 32 CSS23
CSS24 6 B-4 CSS24 B-17 34 CSS24
S6P-PH-K-S B34B-PHDSS
CN8
29 5VN
28 DSW_C
27 D-GND
B30B-PHDSS
CPFM (Paper feed motor) (Paper feed main harness CJ2) CN6
INT24V2 1 32 INT24V2
P-GND 2 30 P-GND
/CPFM_GAIN 3 28 /CPFM_GAIN
/CPFM_CK 4 26 /CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D 5 24 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 22 CPFM_LD
NC 7 B32B-PHDSS
B07P-PASK
R SM-2Pin P (Paper feed drive harness CJ2) (DC main harness CJ2) CN5
CPFC 1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC
(Vertical transport clutch) 2 24V3 2 2 24V3 2 2 24V3 PCU PWB
3 /CPUC1 3 3 /CPUC1
4 24V3 4 4 24V3
R SM-2Pin P 5 /CPUC2 5 5 /CPUC2
CPUC1 1 /CPUC1 1 6 24V3 6 6 24V3
(CS1 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 2 7 P-GND 7 7 P-GND
8 /CLUM1 8 8 /CLUM1
(10) Paper feed drive unit section (P10)
9 P-GND 9 9 P-GND
R SM-2Pin P 10 /CLUM2 10 10 /CLUM2
CPUC2 1 /CPUC2 1 R SM-10Pin P B24B-PHDSS
(CS2 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 2
CLUM1(CS1 lift-up motor) ADUML (ADU lower motor) (Paper feed drive harness CJ2) CN2
P-GND 1 INT24V1 2 7 INT24V1
/CLUM1 2 INT24V1 5 8 INT24V1
B2P-PH-K-S ADUML_B 6 9 ADUML_B
ADUML_B/ 3 10 ADUML_B/
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor) ADUML_A/ 1 11 ADUML_A/
P-GND 1 ADUML_A 4 12 ADUML_A
/CLUM2 2 PHR-6 B12B-PASK-1
B2P-PH-K-S R frame
HPFM
(Horizontal transport motor) (Paper feed drive harness CJ2) CN1
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
HPFM_B 6 3 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 3 4 HPFM_B/
HPFM_A/ 1 5 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 4 6 HPFM_A

PHR-6 B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
PFM (PS front motor) (Paper feed drive harness CJ2) CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1 DRIVER
PFM_B 6 3 PFM_B
PFM_B/ 3 4 PFM_B/
MAIN PWB
PFM_A/ 1 5 PFM_A/
PFM_A 4 6 PFM_A
PHR-6
Paper feed drive
RRM (PS motor) (Paper feed drive harness CJ2)

INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1
INT24V1 6 8 INT24V1
RRM_B 3 9 RRM_B
RRM_B/ 5 10 RRM_B/
RRM_A/ 4 11 RRM_A/
RRM_A 2 12 RRM_A
B6P-PH-K-R 13 N,C
Process drive B13B-PASK-1
RESI SENSOR F (Process control sensor UN harness PA2)
5VNPD 1
D-GND 2
REGS_F 4
/REGS_F_LED 3
PCS_F 5
OMRON 179228-5
(Paper feed main harness CJ2) CN6

1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND
PROCON 3 REGS_F 3 5 REGS_F
SENSOR 4 /REGS_F_LED 4 7 /REGS_F_LED
UN RESI SENSOR R 5 5VNPD 5
PCS_R 5 6 D-GND 6
(11) PS unit and Process control unit section (P11)
5VNPD 1 7 NC 7
D-GND 2 8 PCS_CL 8 9 PCS_CL
REGS_R 4 9 NC 9 PCU
/REGS_R_LED 3 10 5VNPD 10 2 5VNPD
OMRON 179228-5 11 D-GND 11 4 D-GND PWB
12 REGS_R 12 6 REGS_R
13 /REGS_R_LED 13 8 /REGS_R_LED
PCSS 2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 11 /PCSS
(Process control 1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 13 24V3
shutter solenoid)
R SM2P P 16 NC 16
17 NC 17
18 NC 18
R SM-18Pin P
PROCON SENSOR UN
PPD1 (PS front sensor) (PS UN harness PA2) BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H (Paper feed main harness CJ2)

PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 12 PPD1
GP1A73 179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 16 5VNPD
PS UN 2 PPD2 5 18 PPD2
1 D-GND 6 20 D-GND
PPD2 (PS sensor) B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
D-GND 3
GP2A200 179228-3
PS UN
(Paper feed
R SM-2Pin P (Right door harness CJ2) CN7
main harness CJ2)
ADU 1 24V3 1 9 24V3 9 23 24V3
gate solenoid 2 /ADUGS 2 25 /ADUGS 25 24 /ADUGS
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
TFD3 (Right paper exit (Right paper exit, reverse PG
(Right paper full detection) CN2 D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 13 D-GND
UN harness) interface harness CJ)
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 2 SIN3
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2 2 D-GND SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 16 SELIN1
5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 3 SELIN2
POD3
(Right paper exit detection) GP1S73 179228-3 SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 15 SELIN3
POD3 1 3 POD3 4 4 POD3 APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 4 APPD1
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 5 D-GND APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 18 APPD2
5VLED4 3 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 APPD3 9 5 APPD3 5 5 APPD3
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H POD3 10 21 POD3 21 17 POD3
7 DSW_ADU MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 6 MPFD
DSW_ADU
(ADU open/close detection) 8 D-GND 5VN 16 10 5VN 10 10 5VN
DSW_ADU 1 9 5VLED2 MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 7 MPWD
(12) Right door unit section (P12)
D-GND 2 10 APPD1 TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 19 TH_M

5VLED2 3 11 D-GND HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 8 HUD_M
GP1S73 179228-3 12 5VLED5 S16B-PHDSS-B
13 APPD3 15 24V3 15 9 24V3
APPD1
(ADU transport detection 1) 14 GND 31 /MPGS 31 14 /MPGS
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 15 5VLED 30 /MPFS 30 22 /MPFS
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 16 NC RIGHT 14 24V3 14 11 24V3
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 S16B-PHDSS-B DOOR I/F 1 /MPUC 1 28 /MPUC 28 20 /MPUC
GP1S73 179228-3 (ADU transport 1 interface harness) PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H 2 24V3 2 13 24V3 13 12 24V3
PWB R SM-2Pin P B24B-PHDSS
11 NC 11
12 NC 12
16 NC 16
22 NC 22
24 NC 24
APPD2
(ADU transport detection 2) (Right door harness CJ2) CN3(1/2) 26 NC 26
APPD2 1 4 APPD2 27 NC 27
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 29 NC 29
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 P QR/P4 32Pin S
GP1S73 179228-3
CN3(2/2)
MPLD (Manual feed paper
(Manual feed tray harness ) (Right door harness CJ2) NC (GND) 11 PCU PWB
(Manual feed tray
length detection 1) PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H NC (5VLED) 12 MPUC
harness )
MPLD 1 1 NC 9 3 MPLD 12 16 MPLD NC (GND) 17 (Manual paper feed clutch)
D-GND 2 2 NC 8 1 MPLD2 14 13 MPLD2 NC (GND) 21 R SM-2Pin P
5VLED12 3 3 NC 7 4 5VLED12 11 18 5VLED12 NC (GND) 23 (Multi upper UN harness P2) 1 24V3 1 MPFS
4 MPLD 6 (Right door
GP1S73 179228-3 NC (GND) 26 PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 2 /MPFS 2 (Manual feed pick-up clutch)
harness CJ2)

5 D-GND 5 5 5VN 10 19 5VN NC (GND) 30 8 24V3 1
MPWD(Manual feed paper MPED (Manual feed
width detection) 6 5VLED12 4 6 MPWD 9 20 MPWD NC 32 7 /MPFS 2 paper empty detection)
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 1 D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
VR_PWB PHNR-03-H 5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 179228-3 GP1S73
MTOP2 (Manual feed tray
extension detection) NC (FAX_D) 1 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 22 MTOP2 NC (GND) 2 2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
D-GND 2 5VLED6 3 3 5VLED6 6 1 5VLED6 5
5VLED13 3 8 5VLED13 7 24 5VLED13 5 24V3 1
MTOP1 (Manual feed tray
reduction detection) GP1S73 179228-3 2 D-GND 4
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 25 MTOP1 MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
D-GND 2
1
3
5
2
4
6
MPFD (Manual feed

5VLED9 3 10 5VLED9 5 27 5VLED9 paper entry detection)
GP1S73 179228-3 TH&HUD (Temperature humidity sensor) MPFD 1
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 28 5VN D-GND 2
24V3
24V3
24V3
HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 29 HUD_M 5VLED6 3

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 14 D-GND GP1S73 179228-3

TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 31 TH_M DF11-6DP-SP2
ZHR-4 2 5VLED4 13 15 5VLED4 P SM-2Pin R
S32B-PHDSS-B MPGS 1 24V3 1
1 3 5 4 2 7 6 8
(Manual feed gate solenoid) 2 /MPGS 2
DF11-8DP-SP1 (Multi lower UN harness)
ADUHM (ADUH motor) (Paper exit UN harness CJ2) P DF1B-26Pin S (Upper main harness CJ2) CN3/CN4
ADMH_A 1 21 ADMH_A 21 6 ADMH_A
ADMH_A/ 4 22 ADMH_A/ 22 5 ADMH_A/ DRIVER
ADMH_B/ 6 23 ADMH_B/ 23 4 ADMH_B/ SUB PWB
ADMH_B 3 24 ADMH_B 24 3 ADMH_B
INT24V1 2 25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 26 INT24V1 26 1 INT24V1
PHR-6 B06B-PASK
R SM-4Pin P (Paper exit UN harness CJ2) (Upper main harness CJ2) CN13
1 POFM_V 1 6 POFM_V 6 20 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 2 7 /POFM_CNT 7 21 /POFM_CNT
POFM 1 3 P-GND 3 11 P-GND 11 24 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 4 8 POFM_LD1 8 22 POFM_LD1
R SM-4Pin P 9 POFM_LD2 9 23 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 1 R SM-6Pin P
2 /POFM_CNT 2 5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 15 24V2
POFM 2 3 P-GND 3 1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 16 /OSM_/B
(13) Paper exit unit section (P13)
4 POFM_LD2 4 OSM 2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 17 /OSM_/A

(SHIFTER MOTOR)
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 18 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 19 /OSM_A
6 NC 6
TFD2
(Paper exit full detection) 13 TFD2 13 26 TFD2
5VNPD 3
TFD2 2
D-GND 1 14 POD2 14 27 POD2
PCU PWB
GP1A71 PHR-3 POD2 (Paper exit detection)
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 15 HPOS 15 28 HPOS
D-GND 3
HPOS (SHIFTER HP) LG248NL 179228-3
5VNPD 1 16 POD1 16 29 POD1
HPOS 2 17 D-GND 17 30 D-GND
D-GND 3 12 5VNPD 12 25 5VNPD
4
1
2
3
8
7
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
LG248NL 179228-3 POD1(Fusing rear detection) 18 WEB_M1out 18 31 WEB_M1out
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5VNPD 1 19 WEB_M2out 19 32 WEB_M2out

POD1 2 B34B-PHDSS
D-GND 3
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
LG248NL 179228-3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-4DP-SP1 SSJC6-4
P SL-2Pin R SSJC6-6
WEBM 1 WEB_M1out 1
(WEB motor) 2 WEB_M2out 2
P SM-3Pin R (Upper main harness CJ2) CN13

1 FUFM_/V 1 33 FUFM_/V
FUFM 2 FUFM_LD 2 34 FUFM_LD
(Fusing cooling fan) 3 P-GND 3
CN15
19 P-GND
FUM (Fusing motor) (Paper exit UN harness CJ2) R SM-12Pin P (Upper main harness CJ2) CN14
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 2 INT24V1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2 5 P-GND
NC 3 3 /FUM_CK 3 27 /FUM_CK
/FUM_CK 4 4 /FUM_D 4 29 /FUM_D
/FUM_D 5 5 FUM_LD 5 31 FUM_LD
FUM_LD 6 6 NC 6 B32B-PHDSS
PHR-6-R
POM (Paper exit motor) (Upper main harness CJ2) R SM-6Pin P (Paper feed drive harness CJ2) CN2
POM_A/ 1 7 POM_A/ 7 1 POM_A/ 1 5 POM_A/
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 2 INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
POM_B/ 3 9 POM_B/ 9 3 POM_B/ 3 4 POM_B/ DRIVER
POM_A 4 10 POM_A 10 4 POM_A 4 6 POM_A MAIN
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 5 INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1 PWB
POM_B 6 12 POM_B 12 6 POM_B 6 3 POM_B
PHR-6 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 B12B-PASK-1
FG FG
1
CN12 (Upper main harness CJ2) CN4

DMCLCNT 1 1 DMCLCNT
CN CN19 DMCL_/A 3 3 DMCL_/A
/MPFC_RES 1 28 D-GND DMCL_A 5 5 DMCL_A
D-GND 2 27 D-GND DMCL_B 7 7 DMCL_B
PCU_TXD 3 26 D-GND DMCL_/B 9 9 DMCL_/B
1 : Oct. 24 2008
PCU_DTR 4 25 D-GND DMKCNT 11 11 DMKCNT

PCU_RXD 5 24 /MPFC_RES DMK_/A 13 13 DMK_/A
PCU_DSR 6 23 PCU_RES DMK_A 15 15 DMK_A
/FAX_LED 7 22 PCU_TXD DMK_B 17 17 DMK_B
/POF 8 21 D-GND DMK_/B 19 19 DMK_/B
D-GND 9 20 PCU_RXD N,C 21 21 N,C(RRMCNT) DRIVER
LSU_RST 10 19 PCU_DTR 23 N,C(RRM_/A)
TRANS_RST 11 18 /FAX_LED 25 N,C(RRM_A)
SUB PWB
D-GND 12 17 PCU_DSR D-GND 2 2 D-GND
SCK 13 16 D-GND BTMCNT 4 4 BTMCNT
TRANS_DAT 14 15 /POF BTM_/A 6 6 BTM_/A
MOTHE
(14) PCU PWB - Other PWB (P14)
D-GND 15 14 TRANS_RST BTM_A 8 8 BTM_A

BTM_B 10
41CPM
R PWB RSV_DAT 16 13 LSU_RST 10 BTM_B
JOBEND_INT 17 12 SCK BTM_/B 12 12 BTM_/B
TH1_LSU 18 11 D-GND 14 N,C(RRM_B)
D-GND 19 10 D-GND 16 N,C(RRM_/B)
AKM_SCK 20 9 TRANS_DAT ADUMUCNT 14 18 ADUMUCNT
AKM_SDT# 21 8 JOBEND_INT ADUMU_/A 16 20 ADUMU_/A
D-GND 22 7 RSV_DAT ADUMU_A 18 22 ADUMU_A
AKM_CS_K 23 6 /PCU_TRG ADUMU_/B 20 24 ADUMU_/B
AKM_CS_C 24 5 TH1_LSU ADUMU_B 22 26 ADUMU_B
AKM_CS_M 25 4 D-GND B22B-PHDSS B26B-PNDZS-1
AKM_CS_Y 26 3 D-GND CN17 CN5
/PCU_TRG 27 2 D-GND INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
D-GND 28 1 D-GND P-GND 6 2 P-GND
28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT 5VN 7 3 5VN
B7P-VH B3P-VH-E(BLUE)
PCU PWB
CN4 (Paper feed main harness CJ2) CN8
ADUMLCNT 1 1 ADUMLCNT CN6
ADUML_/A 3 3 ADUML_/A 1 INT24V1
ADUML_A 5 5 ADUML_A CN12 2 P-GND
ADUML_B 7 7 ADUML_B N,C(BTM_B) 10 3 5VN
ADUML_/B 9 9 ADUML_/B N,C(BTM_/B) 12 B3P-VH(naturel)
POMCNT 11 11 POMCNT N,C(DMK_B) 17
POM_/A 13 13 POM_/A N,C(DMK_/B) 19
POM_A 15 15 POM_A N,C 21 CN5 DRIVER
DRIVE POM_B 17 17 POM_B DMCL_CNT 1 10 DMCL_CNT
POM_/B 19 19 POM_/B DMCL_CK 3 3 DMCL_CK SUB
R MAIN RRMCNT 21 21 RRMCNT DMC_EN 5 7 DMC_EN

RRM_/A 23 23 RRM_/A DMM_EN 7 8 DMM_EN
PWB
PWB RRM_A 25 25 RRM_A DMY_EN 9 6 DMY_EN
D-GND 2 2 D-GND DMBk_CNT 11 9 DMBk_CNT
HPFMCNT 4 4 HPFMCNT DMBk_CK 13 11 DMBk_CK 50CPM
HPFM_/A 6 6 HPFM_/A DMBk_EN 15 15 DMBk_EN
HPFM_A 8 8 HPFM_A D-GND 2 2 D-GND
HPFM_B 10 10 HPFM_B BTM_CNT 4 17 BTM_CNT
HPFM_/B 12 12 HPFM_/B BTM_CK 6 19 BTM_CK
RRM_B 14 14 RRM_B BTM_EN 8 21 BTM_EN
RRM_/B 16 16 RRM_/B ADUMU_CNT 14 16 ADUMU_CNT
PFMCNT 18 18 PFMCNT ADUMU_/A 16 18 ADUMU_/A
PFM_/A 20 20 PFM_/A ADUMU_A 18 20 ADUMU_A
PFM_A 22 22 PFM_A ADUMU_/B 20 22 ADUMU_/B
PFM_/B 24 24 PFM_/B ADUMU_B 22 24 ADUMU_B
PFM_B 26 26 PFM_B DMBk_ROT 23 13 DMBk_ROT
B26B-PNDZS-1 B30B-PHDSS DMCL_ROT 25 1 DMCL_ROT
BTM_ROT 27 23 BTM_ROT
CN5 (DC main harness P2) CN3 D-GND 24 12 D-GND
INT24V1 1 3 INT24V1 N,C 26 4 N,C
P-GND 2 2 P-GND N,C 28 5 N,C
5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD B28B-PHDSS 14 N,C
B3P-VH B7P-VH B24B-PNDZS-1
CN-F
24V4 1 1 24V4 1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2
5VN 3 3 5VN 3
D-GND 4 4 D-GND 4 (DC main harness P2) CN4
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 14 TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 15 RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 16 /DTR_DSK
(15) DESK and LCC (P15)
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 17 DSR_DSK

RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 18 RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 19 /TRC_DSK
DESK CONTROL PWB NC 12 R SM-11Pin P
B12B-PHDSS-B
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3
2 F-GND 2
F.G. P EL-3Pin R
(DESK OPTION) SRA-21T-4
F.G.
CN-A 1 NC 1
NC 4 2 NC 2
TXD_LCC 7 3 TXD_LCC 3 20 TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC 8 4 RXD_LCC 4 21 RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC 9 5 /DTR_LCC 5 22 /DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC 10 6 /DSR_LCC 6 23 /DSR_LCC
RES_LCC 11 7 RES_LCC 7 24 RES_LCC
NC 3 8 F-GND 8
5VN 5 9 5VN 9
24V4 1 11 24V4 11 26 /TRC_LCC
P-GND 2 12 P-GND 12 B26B-PHDSS
/TRC_LCC 12 13 /TRC_LCC 13 PCU PWB
B12B-PHDSS-B 14 NC 14
LCC CONTROL PWB 15 NC 15
P EL-15Pin R
SRA-21T-4 F.G. (DC main harness P2) CN8 (FROM - P1)
F.G. 6 24V4

B7P-VH
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 12 WH_N(LCC) 12 CN7 (FROM - P1)
5 F-GND 5 7 P-GND
F.G. 1 NC 1 B8P-VH
(LCC OPTION) 2 NC 2 F.G. DC PWB
3 NC 3 SRA-21T-4 CN4 (FROM - P1)
6 NC 6 3 5VN
7 NC 7 6 D-GND
8 NC 8 B6P-VH
9 NC 9
10 NC 10
11 NC 11
P EL-12Pin R
CN4
1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_N(LSU)
WH 2 WH_N(LSU) 2 2 NC 2 2 WH_N(DESK/LCC)
P EL-2Pin R 3 WH_N(LSU) 3 3 NC
(LSU-WH harness) R EL-3Pin P 4 WH_L(DESK/LCC)
(LSU OPTION) 5 WH_L(LSU)
(WH-DESK_LCC harness II) B4P(5-3)-VH WH PWB
CN18
1 24V3
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT
5 /CV_START
6 /CV_CA
7 /CV_CLCOPY
TO COIN VENDOR 8 /CV_COLOR1
9 /CV_STAPLE
(16) Finisher and Coin vender (P16)
(OPTION) 10 /CV_COLOR0
11 /CV_DUPLEX
12 5VN
13 /CV_SIZE0 PCU PWB
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN CN (DC main harness P2) CN4

1 TXD_FIN TXD_FIN 1 TXD_INS 1 7 TXD_INS
2 RXD_FIN RXD_FIN 2 RXD_INS 2 8 RXD_INS
3 /DTR_FIN /DTR_FIN 3 /DTR_INS 3 9 /DTR_INS
4 /DSR_FIN /DSR_FIN 4 /DSR_INS 4 10 /DSR_INS
5 RES_FIN RES_FIN 5 RES_INS 5 11 RES_INS
6 24V3 24V3 6 NC 6 12 D-GND
7 5VN 5VN 7 5VN 7 B26B-PHDSS
8 D-GND D-GND
FINISHER 9 P-GND P-GND
8
9
D-GND
NC
8
9
10 F-GND F-GND 10 F-GND 10
11 24V5 24V5 11 24V5 11
12 P-GND P-GND 12 P-GND 12
P EL-12Pin R
INSERTOR
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION) SRA-21T-4

F.G.
CN8 (FROM - P1)

7 24V5
B7P-VH-B
CN7 (FROM - P1)

6 P-GND DC PWB
B8P-VH-B
CN4 (FROM - P1)
4 5VN
B6P-VH-B
(17) Scanner section 1/2 (P17)
(CCD-F_FFC)
CN2
GND 41 1 GND
OCSW
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD 1 5VEXT
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD 2 D-GND
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK 3 OCSW
side harness)
detection emitting
(Document
CN10
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS 5VEXT 1 EHR-3
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD D-GND 2
GND 35 7 GND OCSW 3
3.3V 34 8 3.3V 24VEXT 4
3.3V 33 9 3.3V /SIZE_LED1 5
3.3V 32 10 3.3V /SIZE_LED2 6
ORS LED PWB

3.3V 31 11 3.3V B6P-PH-H-S 24VEXT
3.3V 30 12 3.3V /SIZE_LED1
SRA-21T-4
3.3V 29 13 3.3V /SIZE_LED2
8.5inch OPE SYSTEM

GND 28 14 GND
F.G.
5V 27 15 5V
5V 26 16 5V
CCD PWB
CN4
5V 25 17 5V MiM_A 1
MIRROR
MOTOR
GND 24 18 GND MiM_B 2
10V 23 19 10V MiM_/A 3
10V 22 20 10V MiM_/B 4
GND 21 21 GND B4P-PH-H-S
RA- 20 22 RA- (SCN-LAMP_FFC)
CL INVERTOR
CN5
RA+ 19 23 RA+ P-GND 5 5 P-GND
GND 18 24 GND P-GND 4 4 P-GND 2
CL
PWB
RB- 17 25 RB- CL 3 3 CL 1
RB+ 16 26 RB+ 24VPD 2 2 24VPD
GND 15 27 GND 24VPD 1 1 24VPD
RC- 14 28 RC- 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
RC+ 13 29 RC+
GND 12 30 GND (MHPS harness)
CN9
MHPS
CLK- 11 31 CLK- MHPS 1 3 MHPS
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ D-GND 2 2 D-GND
GND 9 33 GND 5V 3 1 5V
RD- 8 34 RD- BM03B-GHS-TBT EHR-3
RD+ 7 35 RD+
GND 6 36 GND (OPE harness P2)
CN13
RE- 5 37 RE- GND 29 6 GND

RE+ 4 38 RE+ PD 28 5 PD
GND 3 39 GND 5V_EXT 27 4 5V_EXT
ORS-PD
PWB
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0
GND 1 41 GND PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2
(SCN-mother B6P-PH-H-S
CN11
harness P2) 9 3.3VPD

CN6
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0-
CN1
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ GND 50 1 GND
D-GND 3 3 D-GND GND 49 2 GND
SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT
SCANDATA1+ 5 6 SCANDATA1+ GND 47 20 GND
D-GND 6 5 D-GND 3.3V_EXT 39 18 3.3V_EXT
LIGHT
BACK
MFP-OPE PWB
SCANDATA2- 7 8 SCANDATA2- /BZR 38 16 /BZR
INVERTER PWB
2 /CCFT
SCANDATA2+ 8 10 SCANDATA2+ /KEYIN 37 19 /KEYIN 1 +CCFT
D-GND 9 7 D-GND SEG0LEDBPR 36 15 SEG0LEDBPR S02(8.0)B-BHS
SCANCLKOUT- 10 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG1LEDCRR 35 13 SEG1LEDCRR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG2D0 34 11 SEG2D0
(INVERTER
D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
harness P2)
SCANDATA3- 13 16 SCANDATA3- /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2 CN4 GND 5 5 GND
SCANDATA3+ 14 15 SCANDATA3+ /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1 +24V 3 3 +24V
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 +24V 2 2 +24V
CN12
5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2 GND 1 1 GND

D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED
nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED
CN3
/YL(Y1) 4
TOUCH
PANEL
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED XH(X1) 3
nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY YH(Y2) 2
501190-2029 /XL(X2) 1
52271-0469
(LSU earth
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND
PO SW
harness)
PWB
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND F.G.

nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
MOTHER PWB
(LCD FFC P2)

CN1
D-GND 10 10 10 (OPE harness P2) 10 D-GND +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V

LCD_DATA3+ 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3+ NC 39 39 NC
LCD_DATA3- 12 12 12 8 LCD_DATA3- +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+ UD/LR 36 36 N,C
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA2+ 17 17 17 18 LCD_DATA2+ Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA2- 18 18 18 20 LCD_DATA2- D-GND 32 32 D-GND
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1+ 19 20 20 24 LCD_DATA1+ D-GND 30 30 D-GND
LCD_DATA1- 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1- B5 29 29 B5
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA0+ 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0+ B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA0- 24 24 24 32 LCD_DATA0- D-GND 26 26 D-GND
8.5-LVDS PWB
B24B-PHDSS-B DF1B-24Pin B2 25 25 B2
(OPE harness P2) B1 24 24 B1
8.5 LCD UN
GND 23 1 GND B0 23 23 B0
CN14
CN3
D-GND 6 6 D-GND GND 22 2 GND D-GND 22 22 D-GND

+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND G5 21 21 G5
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND G4 20 20 G4
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND G3 19 19 G3
+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND D-GND 18 18 D-GND
SCN-CNT PWB
P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V G2 17 17 G2

B6P-VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT G1 16 16 G1
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT G0 15 15 G0
CN14
CN12
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT D-GND 14 14 D-GND

RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT R5 13 13 R5
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1) R4 12 12 R4
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1) R3 11 11 R3
LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2) D-GND 10 10 D-GND
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2) R2 9 9 R2
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP R1 8 8 R1
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT R0 7 7 R0
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT NC 6 6 NC
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2 CK 3 3 CK
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP D-GND 1 1 D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4029 FH1A2-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)

CN17
GND 1
P XAD 34Pin R (Main unit - RSPF interface harness PA2) CN15 nPOF_SCN 3
3 SPPD1 3 1 SPPD1 GND 5
4 SPPD2 4 2 SPPD2 /LVDS_STBY 7
9 SPFMCK 9 3 SPFMCK /STANDBY 9
10 SPFMM1 10 4 SPFMM1 nFWP_SCN 11
11 SPFMM2 11 5 SPFMM2 SCANUP 13
12 SPFMO1 12 6 SPFMO1 RES_EXT/ 15
13 SPFMO2 13 7 SPFMO2 GND 17
14 SPRMA 14 8 SPRMA FROM_DSPFCPU_INT/ 19
15 SPRMA/ 15 9 SPRMA/ GND 21
16 SPRMB 16 10 SPRMB _RXD_DSPF 23
(18) Scanner section 2/2 (P18)
17 SPRMB/ 17 11 SPRMB/ _TXD_DSPF 25

18 SPRMO1 18 12 SPRMO1 _RTS_DSPF 27
19 SGS 19 13 SGS _CTS_DSPF 29
20 STMPS 20 14 STMPS DSCANDATA0- 2
21 SRRC 21 15 SRRC DSCANDATA0+ 4
TO R-SPF 22 SPFC 22 16 SPFC GND 6
23 SPWS 23 17 SPWS DSCANDATA1- 8
24 SELA_ 24 18 SELA_ DSCANDATA1+ 10
25 SELB_ 25 19 SELB_ GND 12
26 SELC_ 26 20 SELC_ DSCANDATA2- 14 TO DSPF
27 SSELO 27 21 SSELO DSCANDATA2+ 16
29 SPFFAN 29 23 SPFFAN DSCANCLKOUT- 20
30 SPPD3 30 24 SPPD3 DSCANCLKOUT+ 22
32 5VPD 32 26 5VPD DSCANDATA3- 26
33 D-GND 33 27 GND DSCANDATA3+ 28
28 NC GND 30
B28B-PHDSS-B 501190-3017
CN16 CN16
1 P-GND 1 1 GND GND 1
2 P-GND 2 2 GND GND 2
8 AVCC 8 3 3.3V 3.3V 3
4 3.3V 3.3V 4
7 5V_EXT 7 5 5V 5V 5
6 12V 12V 6
7 24V 24V 7
5 24VPD 5 8 24V 24V 8
6 24VPD 6 9 24V 24V 9

34 D-GND 34 10 GND GND 10
B10B-PH-K-S B10P-PH-K-S
CN6
SCN-CNT n A_PNC 1
PWB n A_COPY 2
n A_CA 3
CN7 n A_READY 4
1 /C_CARD n A_AUD 5
2 /C_SEL 5V 6
Page2 3 /C_CLOCK D-GND 7 TO AUDITER
4 /C_DATA 24V 8
5 5V NC 9
6 D-GND n A_TC 10
B7B-PH-K-S 24V 11
PNC-a 12
D-GND 13
B13P-PH-K-S (PNC harness)
CN18
(19) FAX section (P19)
CN2 CN1 (SCN-mother harness JP P2) 1 D-GND

1 SP- D-GND1 30 2 D-GND
SPEAKER 2 SP+ 3.3V1 29 3 3.3V
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN) 3.3V2 28 4 3.3V
CNCT_FAX 26 5 24V
(BOARD TO nFAXCS_CTS 27 6 nFAXCS_CTS
CN2 BOARD) CN3 5V 25 7 5V
24V 1 1 24V +5V-1 24 8 nFAXCS_RTS
AG 2 2 AG FLVPP 22 9 FLVPP
24V 3 3 24V nFAXCS_CTS 23 10 nFAXCS_CTS
AG 4 4 AG D-GND 21 11 D-GND
MJ1 150VON 5 5 150VON D-GND2 20 12 nFAXD_RTS
1 - CION 6 6 CION D-GND 19 13 D-GND
2 T2 MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE 5V 17 14 5V
3 R1 HS1- 8 8 HS1- FAX_WUP- 18 15 FAXCS_RXD_N
TO LINE 4 T1 MFP
HS2- 9 9 HS2- FAXCS_RXD_P 15 16 FAXCS_RXD_P
5 R2 CI- 10 10 CI- FAX_WUP- 13 17 FAX_WUP- PWB
6 - EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- +5V-2 16 18 FAXD_RXD_P
MJ-64J-RD315 SON1 12 12 SON1 D-GND3 14 19 FAXD_RXD_N
SON2 13 13 SON2 D-GND 11 20 D-GND
ECON 14 14 ECON D-GND4 12 21 FAXCS_TXD_N
MRON 15 15 MRON FAXCS_TXD_P 9 22 FAXCS_TXD_P
TELID 16 16 TELID FLVPP 10 23 nRES_FAX
CI2- 17 17 CI2- 5VS 7 24 5VS
NC 18 18 NC +5V2 8 25 FAXD_TXD_P
MJ2 TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAXD_TXD_N 5 26 FAXD_TXD_N
1 - NC 20 20 NC +24V 6 27 nNCT_FAX
2 - DG 21 21 DG 3.3V3 4 28 3.3V
3 L1 3.3V 22 22 3.3V 3.3V4 3 29 3.3V
TO EX TEL
4 L2 DG 23 23 DG D-GND5 2 30 D-GND
5 - 5VS 24 24 5VS P-GND 1 31 P-GND
6 - DG 25 25 DG BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
MJ-62J-RD315 SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES-
SPK 27 27 SPK
MDM_ATXD 28 28 MDM_ATXD
MDM_ARXD 29 29 MDM_ARXD

MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 MDM_ABITCLK
MDM_ASPCLK
FAX MAIN PWB
31 31 MDM_ASPCLK
RGDT- 32 32 RGDT-
MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK
AFERES- 34 34 AFERES-
BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BRXD
BTXD 38 38 BTXD
TEL LIU PWB HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE-
RHS- 40 40 RHS-
TX25-40P-12ST-H1E TX24-40R-10ST-H1E
R SM-4pin P (HDD SATA cable P2)
1 PWR_CPUFAN 1
Controller 2 PWM_CPUFAN 2
FAN 3 P-GND 3
4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4 P QR/P4 8Pin S (HDD power interface harness P2) CN17
7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 1 PWR_CPUFAN
6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 3 PWM_CPUFAN
SATA POWER 3 P-GND 3 5 P-GND
12V 15 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 7 LOCK_CPUFAN
12V 14 2 PWR_HDDFAN
12V 13 4 PWM_HDDFAN
GND 12 6 P-GND
GND 11 8 LOCK_HDDFAN
GND 10 B10B-PHDSS-B
5V 9
(20) MFP board section (P20)
5V 8 (HDD power interface harness P2) CN16

5V 7 1 12V 1 1 12V
GND 6 5 D-GND 5 3 D-GND
GND 5 4 5V 4 2 5VN
HDD GND 4 8 D-GND 8 4 D-GND MOTHER PWB
3.3V 3 (HDD SATA cable P2) B4P-VH
3.3V 2
3.3V 1 MFP PWB
CN19 CN2
SATA SIGNAL (HDD SATA cable P2) 1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N 61 USB_DN_out 91 FAX1D_CTS 1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N 61 USB_DN_out 91 FAX1D_CTS
GND 1 1 GND CN4 2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P 62 USB_DP_out 92 FAX1CS_TXD 2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P 62 USB_DP_out 92 FAX1CS_TXD
SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP 3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N 63 USB_VBUS_out 93 FAX1CS_RXD 3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N 63 USB_VBUS_out 93 FAX1CS_RXD
SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN 4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P 64 USB_RTN_P_in 94 FAX1CS_RTS 4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P 64 USB_RTN_P_in 94 FAX1CS_RTS
GND 4 4 GND 5 LCD_DATA2- 35 ECLK_LSU_N 65 USB_RTN_N_in 95 FAX1CS_CTS 5 LCD_DATA2- 35 ECLK_LSU_N 65 USB_RTN_N_in 95 FAX1CS_CTS
SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN 6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON 96 RES_FAX1 6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON 96 RES_FAX1
SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP 7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN 97 NCNCT_FAX1 7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN 97 NCNCT_FAX1
GND 7 7 GND 8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98 NWU_FAX2 8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98 NWU_FAX2
6SAT07P-328B-B5 9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99 3.3VECO_MFP_out 9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99 3.3VECO_MFP_out
1 5V CN5 10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P 70 NRTS_SCN 100 RTS_LCDsub 10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P 70 NRTS_SCN 100 RTS_LCDsub
USB2.0 2 D- 11 nLDC_DISP(OC) 41 VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101 3.3V_FAX 11 nLDC_DISP(OC) 41 VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101 3.3V_FAX
3 D+ 12 LCDC_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102 3.3V_FAX 12 LCDC_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102 3.3V_FAX
(TYPE-A)
4 GND 13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103 3.3V_FAX 13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103 3.3V_FAX
UAR27-4K5J00 14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104 CTS_LCDsub 14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104 CTS_LCDsub
1 5V CN6 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P 75 TXD_PCU 105 5V0_FAX 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P 75 TXD_PCU 105 5V0_FAX
2 D- 16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106 USB_FR_SEL 16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106 USB_FR_SEL
USB2.0 3 D+ 17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0 77 NPOF_MFPC 107 LCDSEL2 17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0 77 NPOF_MFPC 107 LCDSEL2
(TYPE-B) 4 GND 18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1 78 NREQ_PIC 108 LCDSEL3 18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1 78 NREQ_PIC 108 LCDSEL3
UBR23-4K2200 19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL 79 NCLR_PIC 109 DGND 19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL 79 NCLR_PIC 109 DGND
1 TRP1+ CN9 20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL 80 TXD_PIC 110 DGND 20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL 80 TXD_PIC 110 DGND
2 TRP1- 21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL 81 RXD_PIC 111 DGND 21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL 81 RXD_PIC 111 DGND
3 TRP2+ 22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL 82 PWM0 112 DGND 22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL 82 PWM0 112 DGND

LAN 4 TRP2- 23 CH0_N 53 +5VL 83 FAN_CNCT 113 DGND 23 CH0_N 53 +5VL 83 FAN_CNCT 113 DGND
5 TRP3+ 24 CH0_P 54 +5VL 84 NRST_PIC 114 DGND 24 CH0_P 54 +5VL 84 NRST_PIC 114 DGND
6 TRP3- 25 CH1_N 55 +5VL 85 RES_MFP 115 DGND 25 CH1_N 55 +5VL 85 RES_MFP 115 DGND
7 TRP4+ 26 CH1_P 56 +5VL 86 PWM1 116 DGND 26 CH1_P 56 +5VL 86 PWM1 116 DGND
8 TRP4- 27 CH2_N 57 +5VL 87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117 DGND 27 CH2_N 57 +5VL 87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117 DGND
SI-51005-F 28 CH2_P 58 +5VL 88 FAX1D_TXD 118 DGND 28 CH2_P 58 +5VL 88 FAX1D_TXD 118 DGND
1 CD CN17 29 CLK_N 59 TXD_LCDsub 89 FAX1D_RXD 119 NC 29 CLK_N 59 TXD_LCDsub 89 FAX1D_RXD 119 NC
2 RXD 30 CLK_P 60 RXD_LCDsub 90 FAX1D_RTS 120 24V_FAX 30 CLK_P 60 RXD_LCDsub 90 FAX1D_RTS 120 24V_FAX
3 TXD TX25-120P-LT-H1E BOARD TO BOARD
4 DTR
RS232C 5 GND CN19
6 DSR
7 RTS
5V
5V
5V
24V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
8 CTS
FLVPP
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
9 RI
DBR30-091F100
1
2
3
4
5
6 nFAXCS_CTS
7
8 nFAXCS_RTS
9
10 nFAXCS_CTS
11
12 nFAXD_RTS
13
14
15 FAXCS_RXD_N
16 FAXCS_RXD_P
17 FAX_WUP-
18 FAXD_RXD_P
19 FAXD_RXD_N
20
21 FAXCS_TXD_N
22 FAXCS_TXD_P
23 nRES_FAX
24
25 FAXD_TXD_P
26 FAXD_TXD_N
27 nNCT_FAX
28
29
30
31
B31B-CSRK
2nd FAX UN (OPTION)

SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
(DM drive earth harness)
NM MODEL OTHER F.G.
CN19 CN13 (SCN-mother harness P2) LR PA-6Pin P (8.5 OPE harness P2) SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-51T-4
(LSU earth harness)

VBUS VBUS 10 2 VBUS 2 CN CN SRA-51T-4
D2- FP_D- 9 3 D- 3 5 VBUS VBUS1
(21) USB section (P21)
D2+ FP_D+ 8 4 D+ 4 4 D- D1-

DGND DGND 7 5 GND 5 3 D+ D1+ TO USB I/F
DGND DGND 6 6 SHIELD 6 2 GND GND
VBUS DGND 5 1 GND GND
D3- DGND 4 BM05B-GHS-TBT USB I/F PWB
D3+ DGND 3
DGND DGND 2
DGND DGND 1 (8.5 OPE harness P2) (Keyboard interface harness P2) (Keyboard harness P2)
BM10B-GHS-TBT LR PA-5Pin P P LR LR PA-6Pin P CN
1 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS 1 BLUE VBUS
2 D- 2 2 2 2 D- 2 BROWN D-
3 D+ 3 3 3 3 D+ 3 LIGHTBLUE D+
MOTHER 4 GND 4 4 4 4 GND 4 GRAY GND
PWB 5 SHIELD 5 5 5 5 SHIELD 5 GRAY GND
PA-5Pin 6 FG 6 Soldering
USB converter PWB

CN11 (HUB interface harness P2) CN4 DOWN
VBUS 1 4 VBUS SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 1
DGND 2 3 D- DOWN CN3 2
FP_D+ 3 2 D+ VBUS1 10 (SCN-mother harness P2) 3
FP_D- 4 1 GND D1- 9 4
DGND 5 BM04B-GHS-TBT D1+ 8 5
RE_D+ 6 GND 7 6
RE_D- 7 CN5 DOWN SHIELD1 6 7
DGND 8 6 VBUS VBUS2 5 8
DGND 9 5 D- D2- 4 9
5V 10 4 D+ D2+ 3 10
5V 11 3 GND GND 2 11
B11B-PH-K-S 2 SHIELD SHIELD2 1 12
1 SHIELD BM10B-GHS-TBT 13
BM06B-GHS-TBT 14
15
CN1 16 TO KEYBOARD
3 GND 17

2 5V 18
1 5V 19
B3B-PH-SM4-TB 20
FRONT UP 21
REAR DOWN CN2 UP 22
5 VBUS 23
4 D- USB HUB 24
3 D+ 25
2 GND
PWB 26
1 GND 27
BM05B-GHS-TBT 28
Keyboard
NM MODEL : STANDARD
Keyboard: OPTION OTHER: OPTION
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects waste toner full. Empty Full CN14 7 PCU
switch [Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL Detects the transfer belt Separated Contact CN16 23 PCU
detection separation CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK Detects the transfer belt Separated Contact CN16 19 PCU
detection separation BK.
1TURC Primary transfer separation Controls the primary transfer Separated Contact CN11 16 PCU
clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode.
1TURC_R Primary transfer separation Controls the primary transfer Separated Contact CN11 30 PCU
reverse clutch separation mode.
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN7 24 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Drives the right door section. CN8 3,5,7, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 9 4-phase signal.
ADUM_L_ ADU motor lower current Selects the ADU motor lower Large Small CN8 1 PCU
C select current. current current
ADUM_U_ ADM upper motor current Selects the ADM upper motor Large Small CN12 14 PCU
C select current. current current
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN7 4 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN7 18 PCU
[Transmission type] medium stream section.
BTM_CNT Belt motor current select Selects the belt motor current. Large Small CN12 4 PCU
current current
CAFM_LD Cartridge fan lock detection Detects the cartridge lock. Lock CN16 27 PCU
detection
CAFM_V# Cartridge fan Cools the cartridge. OFF ON CN16 26 PCU
CCFM_LD Process suction fan motor lock Detects the process suction fan Lock CN20 7 PCU
detection motor lock. detection
CCFM_V Process suction fan motor Cools the process. Stop Drive CN20 4 PCU
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN13 6 SCU
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the document ON OFF CN5 3 SCU
for the CCD to scan the
document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper CN9 3 PCU
(Lift HP detection) limit
[Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper CN9 4 PCU
(Lift HP detection) limit
[Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN5 8 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN5 10 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN9 9 PCU
[Transmission type] 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN9 10 PCU
[Transmission type] 2.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN5 1 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper feed
tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 1. Pass CN9 15 PCU
(Paper entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 2. Pass CN9 16 PCU
[Transmission type]
CPFM_D Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN6 24 PCU
[Brushless motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor Lock CN6 22 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF CN5 3 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF CN5 5 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN9 21 PCU Detects during
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity lifting up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN9 22 PCU Detects during
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity lifting up.
CSS11 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN9 27 PCU

DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase. Reference CN11 20 PCU
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BL phase. Reference CN11 17 PCU
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase. Reference CN11 23 PCU
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase. Reference CN11 26 PCU
DL_BK Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 1 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 21 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 2 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 22 PCU
the OPC drum.
DM_CL_ Drum motor (CL) current Selects the drum motor (CL) Large Small CN12 1 PCU
CNT select current. current current
DM_K_ Drum motor (K) current select Selects the drum motor (K) Large Small CN12 11 PCU
CNT current. current current
DSW_ ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the ADU Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
ADU detection [Transmission type] cover.
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/ Detects open/close of the tray 1, Open Close CN8 28 PCU
close detection 2 transport cover.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN17 4 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN17 2,3 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DVM_CL_ Development drive motor (CL) Drives the development section, Drive Stop CN11 12 PCU
D [Brushless motor] the color OPC drum, and the
transfer section.
DVM_CL_ Development drive motor (CL) Detects the development drive Lock CN11 14 PCU
LD lock detection motor (CL) lock. detection
DVM_K_D Development drive motor (K) Drives the development section, Drive Stop CN11 11 PCU
[Brushless motor] the black OPC drum, and the
transfer section.
DVM_K_ Development drive motor (K) Detects the development drive Lock CN11 13 PCU
LD lock detection motor (K) lock. detection
FUFM_LD Fusing fan motor lock Detects the fusing fan motor Lock CN13 34 PCU
detection lock. detection
FUFM_V Fusing fan motor Cools motor related to the fusing OFF ON CN13 33 PCU
section and paper exit section.
FUM_D Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit. Drive Stop CN14 29 PCU
[Brushless motor]
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. Lock CN14 31 PCU
detection
HLOUT_ Heater lamp external Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN14 12 PCU
EX external.
HLOUT_ Heater lamp lower main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN14 10 PCU
LM lower main.
HLOUT_ Heater lamp upper main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN14 14 PCU
UM upper main.
HLOUT_ Heater lamp upper sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN14 8 PCU
US upper sub.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detection Detects a change in the fusing Pressure Pressure CN14 30 PCU
sensor [Transmission sensor] pressure. release applying
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transports paper from the paper CN8 6,8, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] feed section to the transport 10,12 4-phase signal.
motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right
door section to the transport
motor drive system.
HPFM_ Horizontal transport motor Selects the horizontal transport Large Small CN8 4 PCU
CNT motor current. current current
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home Home CN13 28 PCU
position. position
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity. CN7 8 PCU Analog
detection

LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid Controls open/close of the LSU Open Close CN20 3 PCU
shutter.
MC_BK_ High voltage BK error Detects an abnormal output of Error CN6 17 PCU Judged when a
ERR detection high voltage BK. detection high voltage is
outputted.
MC_CL_ High voltage CL error Detects an abnormal output of Error CN6 19 PCU
ERR detection high voltage CL. detection
MHPS Scanner home position Detects the scanner home Home CN9 1 SCU
sensor [Transmission type] position. position
MIM Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section CN4 1,2,3, SCU
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F Manual paper
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPFD Manual feed paper entry Detects paper entry in the Pass CN7 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls the paper pickup Pickup CN7 22 PCU
(Manual paper feed) solenoid (manual paper feed)
[Electromagnetic solenoid] [Electromagnetic solenoid]
MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the ON OFF CN7 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] manual paper feed gate
solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection CN3 16 RD I/F Manual paper
detector manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN7 20 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper
feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the CN7 7 PCU Analog
width detector manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistance]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray Detects the pull-out position of Storing CN3 25 RD I/F Manual paper
pull-out position detection 1 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Retraction position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray Detects the pull-out position of Pull-out CN3 22 RD I/F Manual paper
pull-out position detection 2 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Pull-out position)
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open CN10 3 SCU
[Transmission type] document cover (document size
detection trigger).
OSM Shift motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. CN13 16,17, PCU Drives with the
18,19 4-phase signal.
OZFM_ OZFM speed control Controls the OZFM speed. CN5 14 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT drive
OZFM_ Ozone fan motor lock Detects the ozone fan motor Lock CN5 18 PCU
LD detection lock. detection
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor Discharges the ozone. Stop Drive CN5 12 PCU
PCS_CL Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density. CN6 9 PCU Analog
[Reflection type] detection
PCSFM1_ Toner cooling fan 1 lock Detects the toner cooling fan 1 Lock CN14 15 PCU
PCSFM1_ Toner cooling fan 1 Cools the toner bottle. OFF ON CN14 1 PCU
V#
PCSFM2_ Toner cooling fan 2 lock Detects the toner cooling fan 2 Lock CN14 17 PCU
PCSFM2_ Toner cooling fan 2 Cools the toner bottle. OFF ON CN14 3 PCU
V#
PCSS Process control shutter Controls ON/OFF of the process Open Close CN6 11 PCU
solenoid control and the registration
[Electromagnetic solenoid] sensor shutter.
PFM Transport motor Transports the registration roller CN8 20,22, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] and the horizontal transport 24,26 4-phase signal.
motor drive system.
PFM_CNT Transport motor current select Selects the transport motor Large Small CN8 18 PCU
current. current current
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass CN13 29 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass CN13 27 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right Pass CN7 17 PCU
tray.
POFM_ Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the speed of the paper CN13 21 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT speed control exit cooling fan motor. drive
POFM_ POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. Lock CN13 22 PCU
LD1 detection

POFM_ POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. Lock CN13 23 PCU
LD2 detection
POFM_V Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN13 20 PCU
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. CN8 13,15, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 17,19 4-phase signal.
POM_ Paper exit drive motor current Selects the paper exit drive Large Small CN8 11 PCU
CNT select motor current. current current
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass CN6 12 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Pass CN6 18 PCU
registration roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Changes the fusing pressure. CN14 20,22, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 24,26 4-phase signal.
PSFM_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN5 13 PCU
detection motor 1 lock. detection
PSFM_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN5 11 PCU
PSFM_V2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN5 21 PCU
PSFM2_ Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN5 22 PCU
LD detection motor 2 lock. detection
PTC_ERR PTC high voltage error Detects the output abnormality Error CN15 7 PCU
detection of the PTC high voltage. detection
PTC_ PTC heater Turns ON/OFF of the PTC OFF ON CN16 22 PCU
HEAT heater.
PWM MFP cooling fan Cools the controller. OFF ON (PWM CN19 82 MFPC
control)
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Outputs the ON/OFF control ON OFF CN12 8 MOTHER
[Push switch] signal of the DC power.
RCFM_LD Machine rear section cooling Detects the cooling fan motor Lock CN14 23 PCU
fan motor lock detection lock in the machine rear section. detection
RCFM_V Machine rear section cooling Cools the machine rear section. Stop Drive CN14 25 PCU
fan motor
REGS_F Registrations sensor (Front) Detects registration shift. CN6 5 PCU Analog
REGS_F_ Registration sensor LED Registration sensor LED light CN6 7 PCU Analog output
LED (Front) [LED] emitting.
REGS_R Registration sensor (Rear) Detects registration shift. CN6 6 PCU Analog
REGS_R_ Registrations sensor LED Registration sensor LED light CN6 8 PCU Analog output
LED (Rear) [LED] emitting
RRM Registration motor Drives and turns ON the CN8 14,16, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] registration roller. 23,25 4-phase signal.
RRM_ Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Large Small CN8 21 PCU
CNT select current. current current
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). CN10 27 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). CN10 7 PCU Analog
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). CN10 8 PCU Analog
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). CN10 28 PCU Analog
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper exit Full CN13 26 PCU
[Transmission type] tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full CN2 1 RD I/F
detection right tray.
TH_EX1_ External thermistor 1 External thermistor 1 CN13 10 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH_EX2_ External thermistor 2 External thermistor 2 CN13 5 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH_LM_ Lower main thermistor Detects the temperature. CN13 9 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH_M Temperature detection Detects the temperature. CN7 19 PCU Analog
detection
TH_UM_ Upper main thermistor Detects the temperature. CN13 8 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH_ Upper main thermistor Detects the temperature. CN13 1 PCU Analog
UMCS_IN detection
TH_US_ Upper sub thermistor Detects the temperature. CN13 4 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH1_LSU LSU unit thermistor Detects the temperature. CN19 5 PCU Analog
detection
TNM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the toner CN15 24,26, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] cartridge to the developing unit. 28,30 4-phase signal.

TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the toner CN15 21,23, PCU Drives with the
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the toner CN15 14,16, PCU Drives with the
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the toner CN15 11,13, PCU Drives with the
WEBD Web end detection Detects the web end. End CN13 13 PCU
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning CN13 31,32 PCU Drives with the
(Synchronous motor) paper. 2-phase signal.
WH_PR Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN5 19 PCU
dehumidifying heater.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner. CN14 11,13 PCU Drives with the
[Synchronous motor] 2-phase signal.

[11] OTHERS
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Factory default
Item
setting
X Bypass Plain, Auto-Inch
1. System settings Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection 8-1/2" x 14"
Paper Type Registration -
A. Login method Auto Tray Switching Enabled
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled Custom Size Registration Custom 1: X=17",
Y=11"
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Custom 2: X=17",
2) Touch the [Admin Password] key. Y=11"
3) Touch the [Password] text box and enter the administrator Custom 3: X=17",
password. Y=11"
Address Control
4) Touch the [OK] key.
Address Book -
5) Displays the system setting key on the touch panel. Custom Index User 1
* To logout, touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the Program -
screen. Fax Data Receive/Forward
Also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings. I-Fax Settings*4
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.) X Reception Start -
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled
(2) When User Authentication is Enabled X Forward Received Data -
a. When user authentication is by login name and password Printer Condition Settings
(and e-mail address) Printer Default Settings
X Copies 1
1) Touch the login name key.
X Orientation Portrait
2) Touch the [Admin Login] key.
X Default Paper Size 8-1/2" x 11"
3) Touch the [Password] key. X Default Output Tray Varies depending
Enter the administrator password in the administrator pass- on the machine
word entry screen. configuration
X Default Paper Type Plain Paper
4) Touch the [OK] key.
X Initial Resolution Setting 600dpi
b. Login by user number (High Quality)
1) Touch the [Admin Login] key. X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled
2) Touch the [Password] key. X Line Thickness 5
X 2-Sided Print 1-Sided
Enter the administrator password in the administrator pass-
X Color Mode Auto
word entry screen.
X N-Up Print 1-Up
3) Touch the [OK] key. X Fit To Page Enabled
* To logout, press the [LOGOUT] ([*]) key. (Except when entering a X Output Varies depending
fax number.) on the machine
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.) configuration
Print per Unit Enabled
B. System setting list X Quick File Disabled
PCL Settings
(1) System setting (general) list
X PCL Symbol Set Setting PC-8
Factory default X PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0:
Item Courier
setting
Total Count X PCL Line Feed Code 0.CR=CR;
LF=LF; FF=FF
Job Count -
X Wide A4 Disabled
Device Count -
PostScript Setting*5
Default Settings
X Print PS Errors Disabled
Clock
X Binary Processing Disabled
X Clock Adjust
Document Filing Control
Specify Time Zone -
USB-Device Check -
Date & Time Settings -
User Control*6
Synchronize with Internet Disable
Time Server Modify User Information -
X Daylight Saving Time Setting Disable *1: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
X Date Format [MM/DD/YYYY], [/], paper drawer is installed.
[Last], [12-Hour]
*2: When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.
Keyboard Select English (US)
List Print (User) *3: When a large capacity tray is installed.
All Custom Setting List - *4: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Printer Test Page - *5: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Sending Address List -
*6: When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user
Document Filing Folder List -
does not have the authority to configure the system settings
Paper Tray Settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).
Tray Settings
X Tray 1 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
X Tray 2 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
X Tray 3*1 Plain, Auto-Inch
X Tray 4*2
X Tray 5*3 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
MX-5001N OTHERS 11 1
(2) System setting (administrator) list Factory default
Item
setting
Factory default (Same as Scan)
Item
setting
Home Screen Settings*2 -
User Control
Preview Setting
User Authentication Setting
X Default Preview Display
X User Authentication Disabled
Image Send Reception Date:
X Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User Twice
by Login Name and Memory Box: Twice
Password
Doc. Filing Twice
X Device Account Mode Setting Disabled
X Received Date Image Check Setting Disabled
Other Settings
X Default List/Thumbnail Display List
X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Job is Completed
Remote Operation Settings
Jobs even when
X Remote Software Operation
the Limit of Pages is
Reached Operational Authority Prohibited
X The Number of User Name Displayed 12 View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
Setting on Operation Panel and MFP
X A Warning when Login Fails Disabled X Operation from Specified PC
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled Operational Authority Prohibited
X Automatically print stored jobs after login Disabled Hostname or IP Address of PC -
X Default Network Authentication Server - View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
Setting and MFP
X Count Setting after Login - X Operation by User who Has Password
X User Information Print - Operational Authority Prohibited
User List - View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
and MFP
Page Limit Group List -
Device Control
Authority Group List -
Other Settings
Favorite Operation Group List*1 -
X Original Feeding Mode All Disabled
X Favorite Operation Group Registration*1 -
X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*6 0.0 mm
X Home Screen List*1 -
X Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper
User Count -
X Tandem Connection Setting
Energy Save
IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
Toner Save Mode
Port Number 50001
X Print Disabled
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
X Copy Disabled
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
Auto Power Shut-Off Enabled
X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode 3
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 45 min.
X Registration Adjustment
Preheat Mode Setting 15 min.
X Optimization of a Hard Disk -
Operation Settings
X Clear All Job Log Data -
Other Settings
Original Size Detector Setting
X Keys Touch Sound Middle
X Original Detection Size Combination Inch-1
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled
X Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled
X Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.
Disabling of Devices
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled
X Message Time Setting 6 sec.
X Disabling of Duplex Disabled
X MFP Display Language Setting American English
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 Disabled
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled
X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disabled
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled
X Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
X Disabling of Finisher*9 Disabled
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled
X Disabling of Offset Disabled
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled
X Disabling of Stapler*9 Disabled
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled
X Disabling of Punch*10 Disabled
X Initial Original Count Setting All disabled
X Disabling of Color Mode*11 Disabled
MFP Display Pattern Setting Pattern 1
Fusing Control Settings 16 - 24 lbs.
Customize Key Setting*2
(60 - 90g/m2)
X Copy
Copy Function Settings
Customize 1 File
Initial Status Settings
Customize 2 Quick File
X Color Mode Full Color
Customize 3 -
X Paper Tray Varies depending
X Scan
on the
Customize 1 Address Review machine
Customize 2 File configuration
Customize 3 Quick File X Exposure Type Auto
X Internet Fax*3 X Copy Ratio 100%
(Same as Scan) X 2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
X Fax*4 X Output -
(Same as Scan) Other Settings
X USB Memory Scan X Copy Exposure Adjustment
Customize 1 - Color 5
Customize 2 - Black & White 5
Customize 3 - X Rotation Copy Setting Enabled
X Data Entry*5 X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios -
Factory default Factory default
Item Item
setting setting
X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 Initial Resolution Setting
X Initial Margin Shift Setting Scan Apply the
Side 1 1/2" Resolution Set
Side 2 1/2" when Stored:
X Erase Width Adjustment Disabled
200 X 200 dpi
Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Internet Fax*3 Apply the
Center Clearance Width 1/2"
Resolution Set
X Card Shot Settings
when Stored:
Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8" Disabled
Fit to Page Disabled 200 X 100 dpi
X Automatic Saddle Stitch*6 Enabled Fax*4 Apply the
X Initial Tab Copy Setting 1/2" Resolution Set
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled when Stored:
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled Disabled Standard
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled Default Exposure Settings Auto
X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Disabled Original Image Type Text
Supplied the Paper Moire Reduction Disabled
X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Disabled Must Input Next Address Key at Disabled
Document Feeder Broadcast Setting
X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
Color Adjustments The Number of File Name/Subject/Body 12
X Initial Color Balance Setting Factory default Keys Displayed Setting
state The Number of Direct Address Keys 10
X Auto Color Calibration - Displayed Setting
Network Settings Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
IPv4 Settings DHCP Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled
IPv6 Settings Disabled Default Verification Stamp Disabled
Enable TCP/IP Enabled Erase Width Adjustment
Enable NetWare Enabled Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Enable EtherTalk Enabled Center Clearance Width 1/2
Enable NetBEUI Enabled X Settings to Disable Registration
Reset the NIC - Disable Registering Destination from All disabled
Ping Command - Operation Panel
Printer Settings Disable Registering Destination on Web All disabled
Default Settings Page*12
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled Disable Registration of Program All disabled
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled Disable Destination Registration Using All disabled
Global Address Search*12
X Print Density Level
Disable Registration Using Network Disabled
Color 3
Scanner Tool*12
Black & White 3
X Settings to Disable Transmission
X CMYK Exposure Adjustment 0
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled
X Bypass Tray Settings
Disable Selection From Address Book All disabled
Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Disabled
Disable Direct Entry All disabled
Tray
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disabled
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Enabled
Tray Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 Disabled
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Disabled X Own Name and Destination Set
Select Sender Data Registration
X Job Spool Queuing Enabled Sender Name -
Interface Settings Sender Fax Number -
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled I-Fax Own Address -
X I/O Timeout 60 sec. Registration of Own Name Select -
X Enable USB Port Enabled Scan Settings
X USB Port Emulation Switching Auto X Other Settings
X Enable Network Port Enabled Default Sender Set -
X Network Port Emulation Switching Auto Default Color Mode Settings
X Port Switching Method Switch at End of Black & White Mono 2
Job Color Mode Auto, Grayscale
Auto Color Calibration - Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Disabled
Image Send Settings Mode
Operation Settings Initial File Format Setting
X Other Settings File Type PDF
Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax Black & White MMR (G4)
is installed) Color/Grayscale Medium
Hold settings for a while after scanning Disabled Specified Pages per File Disabled
has been completed Number of Pages Disabled
Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Enabled Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Screen Black & White MH (G3)
Address Book Default Selection Tab Switch: ABC, Color/Grayscale Medium
Address Type: All
Item Item
setting setting
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited Delete quick files at power up Enabled
(E-mail) (protected files excluded)
Maximum Size of Data Attachments Unlimited X Default Color Mode Settings
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder) Color Auto
Bcc Setting Black & White Mono 2
Enable Bcc Disabled X Default Exposure Settings Auto
Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Disabled Original Image Type Text
Screen Moire Reduction Disabled
Disable Scan Function X Initial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi
USB Memory Scan Disabled X Color Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium
PC Scan Disabled X Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled X Default Output Tray *13 Varies depending
X Default Address Setting Disabled on the
I-Fax Settings*3 machine
X I-Fax Default Settings configuration
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled
Compression Setting MH (G3) X Batch Print Settings
Speaker Volume Setting - Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Receive Signal Middle Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled
Communication Error Signal Middle allowed.
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error X Erase Width Adjustment
Report Only Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Transaction Report Print Select Setting Center Clearance Width 1/2"
Single Sending Print Out Error X Card Shot Settings
Report Only Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Broadcasting Print Out All Report Fit to Page Disabled
Receiving No Printed Report Document Output Options
Activity Report Print Select Setting X Print
Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled Copy Enabled
Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled Print Enabled
Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled Scan Send Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
X I-Fax Send Settings Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Disabled
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting Disabled Scan to HDD Enabled
I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout 1 hour X Scan Send
Setting Copy Disabled
Number of Resend Times at Reception 2 Scan Send Enabled
Error Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Disabled
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled Scan to HDD Enabled
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled X Internet Fax Send*3
Recall in Case of Line Busy Times: 2, Interval 3 Copy Disabled
min. Scan Send Disabled
Recall in Case of Communication Error Times: 2, Interval 3 Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Enabled
min.
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
X I-Fax Receive Settings
Scan to HDD Disabled
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled
X Fax Send*4
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled
Copy Disabled
Set Address for Data Forwarding -
Scan Send Disabled
Direct SMTP Disabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
Add Hostname or IP Address Too Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Enabled
Hostname or IP Address -
Scan to HDD Disabled
Receiving Date & Time Print Disabled
List Print (Administrator)
A3 RX Reduce Disabled
Administrator Settings List -
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting 60 sec.
Image Sending Activity Report -
Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min.
Data Receive/Forward List -
I-Fax Output Setting Varies depending
Web Settings List*12 -
on the machine
Metadata Set List*5 -
configuration
Security Settings
X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Setting All Invalid
SSL Settings
Document Filing Settings
X Server Port
Other Settings
HTTPS Disabled
X Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode
IPP-SSL Disabled
X Sort Method Setting Date
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Disabled
X Administrator Authority Setting
Page Access
Delete File Disabled
X Client Port
Delete Folder Disabled
HTTPS Enabled
Change Password Disabled
FTPS Enabled
X Delete All Quick Files
SMTP-SSL Enabled
Delete -
POP3-SSL Enabled
LDAP-SSL Enabled
Item Item
setting setting
Level of Encryption Low Serial Number -
IPsec Settings Disabled PS3 Expansion Kit -
IEEE802.1X Setting Disabled Internet Fax Expansion Kit -
Enable/Disable Settings E-mail Alert and Status -
Printer Condition Settings Application Integration Module -
X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled Application Communication Module -
User Control External Account Module -
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled XPS Expansion Kit -
Operation Settings Data Backup
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled Storage Backup -
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled Device Cloning -
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled Initialize and/or Store Settings
X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled Restore Factory Defaults -
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled Store Current Configuration -
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled Restore Configuration -
Device Control Sharp OSA Settings
X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled External Account Setting*15
X Disabling of Duplex Disabled X External Account Control Disabled
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 Disabled X Enable Authentication by External Server Disabled
X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disabled USB Device Settings*16
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled X External Keyboard Internal driver
X Disabling of Finisher*9 Disabled Level of Encryption None
X Disabling of Offset Disabled X USB Memory Internal driver
X Disabling of Stapler*9 Disabled Level of Encryption None
X Disabling of Punch*10 Disabled
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in
X Disabling of Color Mode*11 Disabled
the Web pages
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled *2: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system set-
Copy Function Settings tings in the Web pages.
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled *3: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled *4: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled
*5: When the application integration module is installed.
Printer Settings
*6: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled *7: When a large capacity tray is installed.
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Disabled *8: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
Select paper drawer is installed.
Image Send Settings *9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
X Other Disabling
*10: When a punch module is installed.
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
Disable Scan Function *11: When a color-related problem has occurred.
PC Scan Disabled *12: When network connection is enabled.
USB Memory Scan Disabled *13: When the exit tray unit is installed.
X Settings to Disable Registration *14: It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the
Disable Registering Destination from All disabled peripheral devices installed.
Operation Panel
*15: When the external account module is installed.
Disable Registering Destination on Web All disabled
Page*12 *16: When the external account module or application communica-
Disable Registration of Program All disabled tion module is installed.
Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled
Disable Destination Registration Using All disabled 2. Paper JAM code
Global Address Search*12
Disable Registration Using Network Disabled A. PCU JAM cause
Scanner Tools*12
X Settings to Disable Transmission Code Code content
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
Disable Selection from Address Book All disabled NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
Disable Direct Entry All disabled STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disabled TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 Disabled (CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
Document Filing Settings CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
X Batch Print Settings CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
allowed. CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Change Administrator Password See "TO THE CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
ADMINISTRATOR TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM
OF THE MACHINE" (CPFD2 not-reached JAM)
in the Safety Guide. CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Product Key*4 CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Code Code content Code Code content
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FIN_TIME Finisher paper fast delivery JAM
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) FIN_PAOF Paper spec data reception overflow
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) FPATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD2_DESK CPFD2 JAM
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) (Desk communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper) (LCC communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) (Finisher communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) FSSMJ Stapler shift motor JAM
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FPDMJ Paper exit motor JAM
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) FGMJ Gripper motor JAM
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor JAM
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
B. SCU JAM cause
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
Code Code content
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
PPD2_DRUM PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection)
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
POD1_FUS POD1 JAM (Detection of twining to fusing)
P_SHORT Short size JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(MPFD not-reached)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
PDPPD1_N Paper pass inlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_S Paper pass inlet port remaining JAM
PDPPD2_N Paper pass outlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD2_S Paper pass outlet port remaining JAM
FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM
FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
FSTPLJ Staple JAM
FPNCHJ Punch JAM
FDOP Finisher door open JAM
3. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
[12] EXTERNAL VIEW
MX-5001N (2) Rear cabinet
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
1. Disassembly and assembly

A. Cabinet
e 1
j
l
i
m
a
r
k
(3) Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet

p
h 1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
g f
o 2
b
q d
Parts
a Front cabinet 1
b Rear cabinet
c Left cabinet rear lower
d Left cabinet 2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
e Upper cabinet right remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
f Upper cabinet left
g Upper cabinet rear cover
h Upper cabinet rear
i Front cabinet upper
j Operation panel base plate
k Right cabinet front
C
l Right connection cabinet B
m Right cabinet rear cover
n Right cabinet rear
o Paper exit cover
2
p Paper exit tray cabinet
q Left cabinet rear 4
A
r Frame cover
1 3
(1) Front cabinet
1) Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet
hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
MX-5001N EXTERNAL VIEW 12 1

(4) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left (6) Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and 1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
the table glass (C). front cabinet upper.
2 3
C B
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base

2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
plate.
the upper cabinet left (B).
(7) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/Right

cabinet rear cover/Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
(5) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear 2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
B 2
2
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet 3
rear.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A). (9) Frame cover
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet 1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and unit.
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk con-
nection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabi-
net rear (F). 3) Remove the front cabinet upper.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
B 2
1
6 D
A
4
3
C
F
5
E
(8) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
C 4 2 2

1.
[B]
NM MODEL OTHER
CN19 CN13 LR PA-6pi n P CN CN
VBUS VBUS 10 2 VBUS 2 5 VBUS VBUS1
MX-5001N
D2- FP_D- 9 3 D- 3 4 D- D1-

D2+ FP_D+ 8 4 D+ 4 3 D+ D1+
DGND DGND 7 5 GND 5 2 GND GND
DGND DGND 6 6 SHIELD 6 1 GND GND /CCFT 2
LCD
VBUS DGND 5 BM05B-GHS-TBT +CCFT 1
D3- DGND 4 USB I/F PWB S02(8.0)B-BHS
D3+ DGND 3
DGND DGND 2
DGND DGND 1 CN4
GND 29 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
TOUCH PANEL
BM10B-GHS-TBT PD 28 5 PD CCFT 4 4 CCFT
CN13
5V_EXT 27 4 5V_EXT +24V 3 3 +24V
INVERTER PWB
PWB
PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0 +24V 2 2 +24V
ORS-PD
PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1 GND 1 1 GND
PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PAS K
BACK LIGHT
B6P-PH-H-S CN3
9 3.3VPD /YL(Y1) 4
SCANDATA0 - 1 1 SCANDATA0 - XH(X1) 3
CN11
CN6
2
SCANDATA0 + 2 2 SCANDATA0 + GND 50 1 GND YH(Y2) 2
CN1
D-GND 3 3 D-GND GND 49 2 GND /XL(X2) 1
SCANDATA1 - 4 4 SCANDATA1 - 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT 52271-0469
A. 8.5 inch operation panel
SCANDATA1 + 5 6 SCANDATA1 + GND 47 20 GND

D-GND 6 5 D-GND 3.3V_EXT 39 18 3.3V_EXT
SCANDATA2 - 7 8 SCANDATA2 - /BZR 38 16 /BZR
SCANDATA2 + 8 10 SCANDATA2 + /KEYIN 37 19 /KEYIN
D-GND 9 7 D-GND SEG0LEDBPR 36 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANCLKOUT- 10 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG1LEDCRR 35 13 SEG1LEDCRR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG2D0 34 11 SEG2D0
OPERATION PANEL
D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
5
SCANDATA3 - 13 16 SCANDATA3 - /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2
SCANDATA3 + 14 15 SCANDATA3 + /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0
D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB

5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2
D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND
CN12
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED
nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED
nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY
1
501190-2029
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND
PWB
nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW
PO SW
B3P-PH-H-S
D-GND 10 10 10 10 D-GND +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
CN1
6
LCD_DATA3 + 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3 + NC 39 39 NC
3
LCD_DATA3 - 12 12 12 8 LCD_DATA3 - +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+ UD/LR 36 36 NC
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND F-GND 34 34 F-GND

LCD_DATA2 + 17 17 17 18 LCD_DATA2 + Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA2 - 18 18 18 20 LCD_DATA2 - D-GND 32 32 D-GND
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND Hsync 31 31 Hsync
CR2 MOTHER PWB

LCD_DATA1 + 19 20 20 24 LCD_DATA1 + D-GND 30 30 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 - 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1 - B5 29 29 B5
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA0 + 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0 + B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA0 - 24 24 24 32 LCD_DATA0 - D-GND 26 26 D-GND
B24B-PHDSS-B DF1B-24Pin B2 25 25 B2
B1 24 24 B1
GND 23 1 GND B0 23 23 B0
D-GND 6 6 D-GND GND 22 2 GND D-GND 22 22 D-GND
MX-5001N OPERATION PANEL B 1

CN3
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND G5 21 21 G5
CN14
PWRSW
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND G4 20 20 G4
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND G3 19 19 G3
+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND D-GND 18 18 D-GND
P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V G2 17 17 G2
B6P-VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT G1 16 16 G1
8.5-LVDS PWB
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT G0 15 15 G0
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT D-GND 14 14 D-GND

RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT R5 13 13 R5
CN14
4
CN12
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1) R4 12 12 R4
OCSW
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1) R3 11 11 R3

LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2) D-GND 10 10 D-GND
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2) R2 9 9 R2
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP R1 8 8 R1
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT R0 7 7 R0
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT NC 6 6 NC
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB

nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2 CK 3 3 CK
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP D-GND 1 1 D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4029 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
CN10
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Outline A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD
INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, and
the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and
to display the status. e
They are connected with the document detection light receiving
PWB for detection of the document size. They receive light from the g
document detection light emitting PWB attached to the rear frame
side, detecting the document size. f c
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF con-
a
trol signal of the DC power.
b
The USB connecter can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and the USB d
hub, sending the electronic data to the mother PWB.
The MX-4100N and the MX-4101N are provided with the keyboard Parts
(standard for North America, option for other than North America) a LCD INV PWB
under the operation panel unit, allowing text input. b POWER SW PWB
c MFP OPE-P PWB
d USB connector PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

2) Remove the screw, and disconnect four connectors.
*3
*1 *1 *2
*4 *1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
*4: Disconnect the connector from the Mylar.

3) Remove the screw, remove the earth harness from the (3) LVDS PWB
machine, and turn the operation panel back. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
(1) LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
1) Remove the operation panel unit. wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the * When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB. LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the earth sheet and the MFP OPE-P PWB.
(4) LCD module

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LVDS shield sheet.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
(2) USB connector PWB

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
5) Remove the LCD module.

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD unit.
(5) Touch panel

1) Remove the operation panel unit. 5) Remove the touch panel.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.

D_SPED2 1
SGND 2 CN2
[C]
5V(sensor) 3 4 D_SPED2
175487-3 1 SGND
3 5V(sensor)
MX-5001N
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD
SGND 2 2 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 5 5V(sensor)
175487-3 8 D_SPOD
9 SGND
7 5V(sensor)
10 NC(SGND)
B10B-PHDSS-B
A. Paper feed section
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DSPF CNT PWB
DRIVER PWB
2 /D_SPFC 1
SPRDMD
1 24V_TR 2
PHNR-03-H CN6 CN 609
DSPF SECTION
5V 1 1 5V
CN4
SPPD1
5V 3 SGND 2 2 SGND
18 SGND
D_SPPD1 2 16 /D_SPFC
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 1 15 24V_TR SGND 4 4 SGND
PHR-3 13 5V D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
3 14 D_SPPD1 D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
5V
2 17 SGND D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_RANDOM
1 11 5V D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
SGND
12 D_RANDOM D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
PHR-3
4 SGND
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
2 D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
STUD
SGND 3 SGND
D_STUD 1 10 D_STUD D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
175487-3 7 5V(sensor) D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
2 SGND D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
5V (sensor) 3 8 D_SPED1 D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
SCOV
STLD
SGND 2 5 5V(sensor) D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
SPWS
D_SPED1 1 1 SGND D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
175487-3 6 D_SOCV
D_SPOM_ STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_ STEP
B18B-PHDSS-B
SPED2
D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
5V(sensor) 3 D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
SGND 2 24V 21 21 24V

D_SOCV 1
PGND 22 22 PGND
175487-3 24V 23 23 24V
SPFC
SPED1
PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
CN7
PGND 26 26 PGND
SPLS1
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
MX-5001N DSPF SECTION C 1

3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA C N3 CN610
5 24V_SPUM D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
SPUM
6 24V_SPUM D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
B6B-PH-K-S D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
SPLS2
CN5 D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
1 D_SLUM/B D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 D_SLUM/A D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
3 D_SLUMB D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
4 D_SLUMA VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5 24V_TR
SLUM
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
B5B-PH-K-S
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SPLS1 1
CN1 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
SGND 2
2 D_SPLS1 D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
5V(sensor) 3
175487-3 1 SGND D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
3 5V(sensor) D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2 D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
SGND 2 9 SGND D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
175487-3 4 VAREF
5V 23 23 5V
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 5 D_SPWS
6 AGND SGND 24 24 SGND
VAREF 1 VAREF 3
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 B9B-PH-K-S B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
AGND 3 AGND 1
PHNR-03-H
D_SPPD2
C N9
SPFM
SGND 1
B3B-PH-K-S
SGND
SPUM
D_STSET 2
5V
/D_STMP 3
24V_TR 4
1
2
3
/D_STRRBC 5
24V_TR 6
SPPD5
/D_STRRC 7
24V_TR 8 SMP-0 6 V-N C

13
16
18
17
11
14
10
15
12
7
8
1
9
3
2
6
CN608
D_SPF M/A 13 1 D_SPF M/B 1

DSPF CNT PWB
D_SPFM B 19 2 D_SPF M/A 2

D_SPF M/B 11 3 D_SPFM B 3
STRRC
5V
5V
D_SPF MA 17 4 D_SPF MA 4
D_SPPD2
D_SPPD3
D_SPPD4
D_SPPD5
D_ROCD
D_SOCD
24V_SPF M 23 5 24V_SPF M 5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V_SPF M 24 6 24V_SPF M 6
5V
5V
5V
5V
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-0 6V-N

24V_TR 10
/D_SRRC 20
24V_TR 12
SPPD2
SRRC
NC( FAN _PWM) 26
STRC
FAN_LOCK 28 2 /D_SRRC 1
PGND 25 1 24V_TR 2
SPPD3
24V_TR 27
PHNR-02-H
24V_TR 14
/D_STRC 18
B6B-PH-K-S NC 15
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
6 24V_SPUM NC 16
24 SGND SGND 24
23 5V 5V 23
5 24V_SPUM NC 21
4 D_SPUMA NC 22
22 /D_STRC /D_STRC 22
3 D_SPUMB B28B-PHDSS-B
SPPD4

21 D_STMPS D_STMPS 21
2 D_SPUM/A
20 D_STRRBC D_STRRBC 20
1 D_SPUM/B CN6 CN 609
19 D_STRRC D_STRRC 19
CN7 5V 1 1 5V
18 D_SPFM_DIREC D_SPFM_DIREC 18
SGND 2 2 SGND
17 D_SPFM_CLK D_SPFM_CLK 17 D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
B28B-PHDSS-B
16 D_SPFM_M2 D_SPFM_M2 16
1 SGND SGND 4 4 SGND
15 D_SPFM_M1 D_SPFM_M1 15
2 D_STSET D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
14 D_SRRBC D_SRRBC 14 D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
3 /D_STMP
DRIVER PWB
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
DSPF CNT PWB

13 D_SRRC D_SRRC 13 4 24V_TR
12 D_SPFC D_SPFC 12 D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
5 /D_STRRBC D_ SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
11 AGND AGND 11 6 24V_TR PHNR-02-H D_ SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
10 D_SPWS D_SPWS 10 7 /D_STRRC 2 1 /D_STRRC D_ SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
9 VAREF VAREF 9 8 24V_TR 1 2 24V_TR D_ SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
8 D_SELOUT D_SELOUT 8 13 D_SPFM/A D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
7 D_SELC D_SELC 7 19 D_SPFM D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
6 D_SELB D_SELB 6 11 D_SPFM/B D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
5 D_SELA D_SELA 5 17 D_SPFMA D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
4 D_SPOM_VREF2 D_SPOM_VREF2 4 D_ SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
23 24V_SPF
3 D_SPOM_VREF1 D_SPOM_VREF1 3 D_ SPO M_STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_ STEP
24 24V_SPF
2 D_SPFM_VREF D_SPFM_VREF 2 D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
9 /D_SRRBC D_ SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
1 D_SPUM_VREF D_SPUM_VREF 1 10 24V_TR 24V 21 21 24V
CN610 C N3 20 /D_SRRC PGND 22 22 PGND
12 24V_TR 24V 23 23 24V
B 26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B 26 NC(FAN_PWM) PGND 24 24 P GND
26 PGND PGND 26 28 FAN_LOCK 24V 25 25 24V
25 24V 24V 25 P GND 26 26 PGND
25 PGND CN608
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
24 PGND PGND 24 27 24V_TR SMP-0 D_SOCD 13
23 24V 24V 23 14 24V_TR 2 2 /D_STRC GND 16
C N3 CN 610
22 PGND PGND 22 18 /D_STRC 1 1 24V_TR 5V 7
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
21 24V 24V 21 15 NC D_ROCD 18
SMR-02V-N D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
20 D_SPO M_ DIR D_SPOM_DIR 20 GND 17
16 NC D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
19 D_SPO M_ MODE D_SPO M_ MODE 19 5V 8
21 NC D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
GND 1 1 SGND
18 D_SPOM_ STEP D_SPOM_ STEP 18 22 NC D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3
C. Lower transport section

B. Upper transport section
17 D_SPO M_ENA D_SPOM_ENA 17 D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB

CN9 5V 3 3 5V
16 D_SLUM/B D_SLUM/B 16 D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
15 D_SLUMB D_SLUMB 15 D_SPPD3 11
VAREF 9 9 VAREF

14 D_SULM/A D_SULM/A 14 5V 4
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
13 D_SLUMA D_SLUMA 13 GND 14 1 SGND
AGND 11 11 AGND
12 D_SPU M_IN/B D_SPUM_IN/B 12 D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
11 D_SPU M_INB D_SPUM_INB 11 5V 5 3 5V
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
10 D_SPU M_IN/A D_SPUM_IN/A 10 GND 15 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPPD5 12
9 D_SPU M_INA D_SPUM_INA 9 D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1 PHNR-03-H
5V 6
8 D_SPOD D_SPOD 8 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 3 1 SGND
7 D_SOCV D_SOCV 7 D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
2 D_SPPD5 2 2 D_SPPD5
6 D_RANDOM D_RANDOM 6 D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3 5V 1 3 5V
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
5 D_SPPD1 D_SPPD1 5 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H B3B-PH-K-S
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
4 SGND SGND 4
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
3 D_SPFFAN D_SPFFAN 3
2 SGND SGND 2
5V 23 23 5V
1 5V 5V 1 SGND 24 24 SGND
CN 609 CN6 B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B
D. Optical section
DSPF COPY LUMP
2 PGND
DSPFCNT 1 PGND
PWB
CL-INV-R
CN130
24V 1 5 24V
24V 2 4 24V
LAMP 3 3 LAMP
PGND 4 2 PGND
PGND 5 1 PGND
5597-05CPB7F
E. Peper exit section
DSPFCNT PWB
CN6 CN 609
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
CN8 D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE

1 D_SPOM/B D_SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_DIR
24V 21 21 24V
SPOM 2
3
D_SPOM/A
D_SPOMB PGND 22 22 PGND
4 D_SPOMA 24V 23 23 24V
B4B-PH-K-S PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
CN3 CN610
PWB D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
CN2 D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPED2 D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
1 SGND D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
3 5V(sensor) D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
6 D_STLD D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
2 SGND D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
5 5V(sensor) VAREF 9 9 VAREF
SPOD D_SPOD 1 8 D_SPOD D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS

SGND 2 9 SGND AGND 11 11 AGND
5V(sensor) 3 7 5V(sensor) D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
175487-3 10 NC(SGND) D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
B10B-PHDSS-B D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC

D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B24 B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B

2. Operational descriptions
A. Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray DSPF unit
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length as
shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on
the document tray, the largest size is detected. SPWS
Document length sensor SPLS1
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF SPLS2
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
B. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.
Transport speed 314mm/s Letter single-surface transport
Copy key ON
SPFFAN ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
DSPF cooling fan motor OFF at 500ms after SPCD OFF of the last paper
SPUM
DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM
DSPF transport motor Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
STRRC
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
SPRDMD
DSPF random sensor 1
SPPD1
DSPF paper pass sensor 1
SPPD2
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 69.4ms after SPPD2_OFF
SPPD3
DSPF paper pass sensor 3 11.8mm
12.3mm
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON
SRRC
(SIM adjustment)
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
OFF at 11.8mm (38ms) after SPPD3 OFF
SPPD4
SPPD5
37.6mm
Scanning start at 37.6mm (120ms) from
OC scanner scanning
SPPD4 ON (SIM adjustment)
39.3mm
Scanning start at 39.3mm (125ms) from
Built-in scanner scanning
SPPD5 ON (SIM adjustment)
SPOD
DSPF paper exit sensor
Reduces the speed simultaneously with SPOD OFF,
SPOM
reduces the speed up to 1855PPS in 15.7mm
DSPF paper exit motor
Drives for 15mm and returns to 3709PPS in 15.7mm.
(Common to each paper size)

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Open the DSPF unit to put it straight up, and remove the
screw.
A. DSPF unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid. Remove the screw,
and remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2 2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the locking band and the interface harness cover.
1
5) Slide the DSPF unit to the rear side, and fit the step screw with
the key hole of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
2 3
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.
(1) Front cabinet

1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.

2) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet. (4) Upper door
1) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to "1. Exterior section - A.
DSPF unit - (1) Front cabinet.")
2) Remove the spring. Remove the pawl. Remove the pressure
2 3 release axis holder. Remove the screw. Remove the pressure
release link lever.
4
4 2
1
3
(2) Rear cabinet
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the pawl.
Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door.

2
2
(3) Paper feed cover 3
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the paper
feed cover.
B. Paper feed tray unit
Parts
a DSPF document width sensor

1) Remove the front cabinet. 6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the pawl, and remove the
2) Remove the rear cabinet. DSPF document width sensor.
paper feed tray unit.
C. Paper feed unit
a
(1) DSPF document width sensor
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed tray lower. Dis-
connect the connector.
2
1
Parts
a DSPF paper feed clutch

3) Remove the paper feed cover.
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the
snap band.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the rotation tray shaft.

Remove the paper feed rotation tray.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed unit.

(1) DSPF paper feed clutch D. Transport section
2) Remove the rear cabinet. a
3) Remove the paper feed cover. b
4) Remove the paper feed unit. c
5) Remove the pawl, and remove the paper feed PG upper cover.
Parts
a DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
b DSPF transport roller clutch
c DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
(1) DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch

paper feed PG upper supporting plate. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper (a), and
remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch (b).
1
* When assembling, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
2 per is engaged with the plate.
7) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Lift the paper feed roller 2
shaft diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed clutch.
per is engaged with the plate. 1
(2) DSPF transport roller clutch

3 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the DSPF transport
roller clutch.
per is engaged with the plate.
1
3
2
1

(3) DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch 4) Remove the screw, and remove the DSPF CL inverter PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper (a), and
remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (b).
per is engaged with the plate.
b F. Drive unit
2
a
a
E. Optical section b
c
Parts
a DSPF CL inverter PWB
(1) DSPF CL inverter PWB

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the control PWB unit.
1 Parts
a DSPF paper feed motor
b DSPF paper exit motor
c DSPF lift-up motor
3
2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch.
3) Disconnect the connector, and open the edge saddle. Remove
1 the snap band.
2
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the

inverter PWB guide.

4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive unit. (3) DSPF lift-up motor
the screw, and remove the DSPF lift-up motor.
G. Drive transport unit
(1) DSPF paper feed motor a

the screw, and remove the DSPF paper feed motor.
Parts
a DSPF transport motor

2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch.
3) Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch.
4) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor.
5) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension. Tighten the
screw.
(2) DSPF paper exit motor

the screw, and remove the DSPF paper exit motor.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the drive transport unit.

(1) DSPF transport motor (1) DSPF cooling fan motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "1. Exterior section - A. 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "1. Exterior section - A.
DSPF unit - (2) Rear cabinet.") DSPF unit - (2) Rear cabinet.")
2) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension. Tighten the 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF cooling fan
screw. motor.
(2) DSPF driver PWB

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
DSPF transport motor. 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
DSPF driver PWB.
H. Others
a
d (3) DSPF flash PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the ROM cover.
c
Parts
a DSPF cooling fan motor
b DSPF driver PWB
c DSPF flash PWB
d DSPF control PWB

2) Release the lock, and remove the DSPF flash PWB.
(4) DSPF control PWB

2) Remove the DSPF flash PWB.
control PWB unit.
1
2

DSPF control PWB.

[D] RSPF SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Paper feed section
CN H
SPRMA/ 1
+24VPD 2
SPRMA 3
SPRMB 4
+24VPD 5
SPRMB/ 6
B6B-PH-K-R 179228-3
CN E 1 SPED
+24VPD_SRRC 1 2 GND
SRRC/ 2 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S 3 +5V_SPED
SPED 3 1 SPED 1
GND 4 2 GND 2 179228-3(BLACK)
1 +5VPD
+5V_SPED 5 3 +5V_SPED 3
2 SPPD1
+5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4
3 GND
SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5
GND 8 6 GND 6 PS-187-2V
+24VPD 9 7 +24VPD 7 1 +24VPD
GND 10 (NC) 8 +24VPD_SW 8 2 +24VPD_SW
+24VPD_SW 11
B11B-PH-K-S
SCOV
SPRM
SPPD1 SPFC
SPED
RSPF DRIVER
PWB
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
179228-3
1 SPLS1
2 GND
3 +5VPD_SPLS1
179228-3
CN D 1 SPLS2
SPLS1 1 2 GND
GND 2 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
+5VPD_SPLS1 3
SPLS2 4
GND 5
+5VPD_SPLS2 6 SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
AVCC 7 1 AVCC 1
SPWS 8 2 SPWS 2
GND 9 3 GND 3
SPFC/ 10
GND 11 (NC)
+24VPD_SW_SPFC 12
B12B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1 SPFC/ 1
2 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2
B. Reversing section
RSPF DRIVER PWB

+24VPD_STMPS
+5VPD_SOCD
+24VPD_SGS
SPRMA/
SPRMB/
SPRMA
SPRMB
STMPU
+24VPD
+24VPD
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPS/
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPPD4
+5VPD
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
+5VPD
+5VPD
SOCD
GND
GND
SGS/
GND
GND
GND
GND
(NC)
(NC)
B13B-PH-K-S
B6B-PH-K-R
B7B-PH-K-R
B6B-PH-K-S
B3B-PH-K-S
10
11
12
13
CN G
CN B
CN C
CN H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN F
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(NC)
(NC)
179228-3(BLACK)
VHPGP1A73A+-18
10
11
12
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
+5VPD_SOCD
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
+5VPD
+5VPD
SOCD
SPPD4
+5VPD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SPFM
179228-3(BLACK)
VHPGP1A73A+-18
1
2
3
SPPD5
+5VPD
GND
SPPD5
SGS SPRM
SPPD4
MX-5001N RSPF SECTION D 1

C. Transport section
CN F
SPFMA/ 1
+24VPD 2
SPFMA 3
SPFMB 4
+24VPD 5
SPFMB/ 6
B6B-PH-K-S SPFM
+24VPD_SRRC
CN E
1
SMP-02V-NC /
1
SMR-02V-N
+24VPD_SRRC 1
SRRC
SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2
SPED 3
GND 4
+5V_SPED 5
+5VPD 6
RSPF DRIVER PWB
SPPD1 7
GND 8
+24VPD 9
GND 10
+24VPD_SW 11
B11B-PH-K-S
SPPD3
179228-3(BLACK)
1
2
+5VPD
SPPD2
SPPD2
3 GND
CN G SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC VHPGP1A73A+-18
+5VPD 1 1 +5VPD 1
SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2 2
GND 3 3 GND 3 179228-3(BLACK)
+5VPD 4 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
SPPD3 5 5 SPPD3 5 2 SPPD3
GND 6 6 GND 6 3 GND
SOCD 7 7 SOCD 7 VHPGP1A73A+-18
GND 8 8 GND 8
+5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD_SOCD 9
+5VPD 10 10 +5VPD 10 179228-3
SPPD5
GND
11
12
11
12
SPPD5
GND
11
12
1
2
SOCD
GND
SOCD
(NC) 13 (NC) 3 +5VPD_SOCD
B13B-PH-K-S VHPGP1S73P+-18
A. Document size detection
(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected with the SPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the SPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length accord-
ing to the table below. When documents of different sizes are SPWS
mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size is
SPLS1
detected.
SPLS2
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON

B. Paper feed transport operation 7) Preliminary paper feed completion (Second sheet)
(1) Single-side scan

1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper feed start (Second sheet)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet)

Pickup roller falling
9) Scan completion (First sheet)/Resist operation (Second sheet)
3) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First

sheet)
10) Scan start (Second sheet)
4) Resist operation (First sheet)
11) Paper exit completion (First sheet)

5) Scan start (First sheet)
6) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet) 12) Scan completion (Second sheet)

13) Paper exit completion (Second sheet) 5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)
14) Pickup roller rising 6) Gate falling (First sheet front surface)
(2) Duplex scan

7) Scan completion (First sheet front surface)
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet) 8) Reverse stop

Pickup roller falling Gate rising

sheet) 9) Reverse start
4) Resist operation (First sheet front surface) 10) Reverse after resist operation

11) Resist operation (First sheet back surface) 17) Document transport continuation
12) Scan start (First sheet back surface) 18) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
19) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (Second

13) Gate falling (First sheet back surface) sheet)
14) Scan completion (First sheet back surface)

20) Resist operation (Second sheet front surface)
15) Reverse stop gate rising

16) Reverse start
22) Scan start (Second sheet front surface)

23) Same operations as "5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)" (3) Stamping operation
and later. 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
24) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet)

Pickup roller falling
25) Pickup roller rising

sheet)
4) Resist operation (First sheet)
5) Scan start (First sheet)
6) Scan completion (First sheet)

7) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (First sheet) 13) Pickup roller rising
C. RSPF mixed document select switch

8) Paper exit start (First sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (Sec-
ond sheet) This machine is provided with the random paper feed function
which allows feeding documents of different sizes.
The random paper feed can be used only for single surface docu-
ment of the following combinations.
Destination Combinations for random paper feed

AB series A3 and B4
B4 and A4R
A4 and B5
B5 and A5
Inch width 8.5" and 11" width
To enable the mixed document mode, set the mixed document
select switch to ON. To disable le, turn it OFF.
10) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (Second ON

sheet)
OFF
11) Paper exit start (Second sheet)
12) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Remove the rear cabinet.
A. Document tray unit
5) Remove the stopper.
Parts
a SPF document with sensor
1) Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
2) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the screw.
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed PG holder,

and remove the document tray unit.
2
1
1
3

(1) SPF document with sensor B. Paper feed unit
1) Remove the document tray unit.
2) Remove the document tray lower.
a
Parts
a SPF cover SW
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.

2) Remove the transport unit.
3) Remove the earth wire. Remove the spring and the paper feed
PG holder, and remove the paper feed unit and the upper PG
link arm.
3) Remove the SPF document width sensor.
3 1
(1) SPF cover SW

3) Remove the paper feed unit.
4) Remove the screws.

5) Remove the upper cover. 3) Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
4) Remove the screws.
6) Remove the SPF cover SW.
C. Transport unit
2) Remove the connecter.

D. Reversing section 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
4) Remove the resin E-ring and the bearing. Remove the drive
unit, and remove each part.
3 2
Parts 1 3
a Document paper exit gate solenoid
(1) Document paper exit gate solenoid

2) Remove the transport unit. (1) SPF paper feed clutch
3) Remove the solenoid adjustment plate. Remove the SPF doc-
ument paper exit gate solenoid.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF paper feed clutch.
* When installing, insert the pin of the SPF document paper
exit gate solenoid into the gate.
E. Drive unit (2) SPF resist roller clutch

3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF resist roller clutch.
b
d
c
a
Parts
a SPF paper feed clutch
b SPF resist roller clutch
c SPF paper feed reverse motor
d SPF transport motor

(3) SPF paper feed reverse motor F. Base tray section
4) Remove the drive unit.
5) Remove the SPF paper feed reverse motor.
Parts
a RSPF drive PWB
(1) RSPF drive PWB

2) Remove the RSPF drive PWB.
(4) SPF transport motor
4) Remove the drive unit.
5) Loosen the screw of the tension holder to reduce the tension of
the belt. Remove the SPF transport motor.
1 2

[E] SCANNER SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
CLI
3
1
2
2
1
8
CL INVERTOR
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MHPS
5597-05APB
CL
5V
EHR-3
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
B4P-PH-H-S
5597-05CPB7F
BM03B-GHS-TBT
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB

1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
CN2
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
MHPS
MiM_A
MiM_B
6 /RES_CCDAD
40 AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CL
5V
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
CLK+
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
FI-RE41S-VF
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CN9 CN5 CN4

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
FI-RE41S-VF
41
40
39
38
AFE_CS 37
/RES_CCDAD 36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CLK+
AFE_RDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
GND
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CCD PWB
Signal Name Function/Operation

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Reflects the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
MX-5001N SCANNER SECTION E 1

A. Outline
This section performs the following functions. B
G
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
R
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description R
(1) Optical section drive G
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner B
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by (Image data for 1 line)
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive R G B
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage Red component Green component Blue component
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation (4) Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con- 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). process section.
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue CCD PWB
components. This operation is called the color separation. Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
elements, R, G, and B. (6 Lines) R
G
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by
B
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc-
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner Buffer TG
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Timing
Generator
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

3. Disassembly and assembly 5) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
A. Scanner unit
f
b
d
a
c
e
Parts
a Scanner lamp
b CL inverter PWB
c CCD unit
d Scanner motor
e Document detection light receiving PWB
f Document detection light emitting PWB (1) Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
rear. the table glass (C).
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.. 2 3
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band. C B
1
2) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and
remove the wire.
2
3

3) While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder (2) CCD unit
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit. 1) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the CCD unit.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
2 (3) Scanner motor

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.
5) Remove the CL inverter PWB.

2
(4) Document detection light receiving PWB

1) Remove the operation base plate.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.

(5) Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.

[F] PAPER FEED SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Manual paper feed section
CN1
INT24V1 1
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
5 INT24V1
DRIVER HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
MAIN PWB HPFM_A/ 5
3
1
HPFM_B/
HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
4 HPFM_A
B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
CN9
INT24V2 3
AC PWB B3P-PH-K-S
CN17 P SM18P R
/CLUM2 8 16 /CLUM2 16
P-GND 9 15 P-GND 15
/CLUM1 6 14 /CLUM1 14
P-GND 7 13 P-GND 13
24V3 14 12 24V3 12
PCU PWB /CPUC2 15 11 /CPUC2 11
24V3 12 10 24V3 10
/CPUC1 13 9 /CPUC1 9
24V3 10 8 24V3 8
15 24V3 15 CN26 /CPFC 11 7 /CPFC 7
31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS
30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS
3 FG-OUT
14 24V3 14 7
CPFM_LD 2 5 CPFM_LD 5 5V
28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC 4 6
/CPFM_D 1 4 /CPFM_D CPFM_LD
13 24V3 13 5
/CPFM_CK 4 3 /CPFM_CK 3 /CPFM_D
P QR/P4 32PIN S 3 24V3 2 4 /CPFM_CK
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B 1 INT24V2 1 2 P-GND
6
5
3
4
2
1
1 INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
DF11-6DP-SP1 1 24V3 2
2 /MPUC 1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha P SM2P R
CN3(2/2)
8
7
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
1
2
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
HPFM
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1 HPDET
2 D-GND
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
1 5VLED7 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
R
2
1
MPUC
SM2P
3
2
1
/MPGS
24V3
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
MPFD
P
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP2
1 4 CPFM
5 MPFS
RIGHT MPFD
DOOR I/F 3
PWB 2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED
MTOP1
MPGS MPWD MTOP2
MPLD
CN3(1/2) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H

MPLD 16 12 MPLD 3 6 MPLD 4 1 MPLD
MPLD2 13 14 MPLD2 1 5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 4 5VLED12 6 3 5VLED12
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 3 5VN 7 3 5VN

MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2

2 D-GND
5VLED13 24 7 5VLED13 8 3 5VLED13
MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1

2 D-GND
5VLED9 27 5 5VLED9 10 3 5VLED9
5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN

HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-5001N PAPER FEED SECTION F 1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual feed paper entry detection
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Storing position)
detector 1
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Pulling out position)
detector 2
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
(Manual paper feed tray)
2 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.

CN9 CZW-40Pin
5VNPD 1 A-1 5VNPD A-20
CLUD1 3 A-2 CLUD1 A-19
D-GND 5 A-3 D-GND A-18 PHNR-12-H+
BU12P-TR-P-H
5VNPD 7 A-4 5VNPD A-17 9 5VN 4 1 5VN
CPED1 9 A-5 CPED1 A-16 8 CPFD1 5 2 CPFD1
D-GND 11 A-6 D-GND A-15 7 D-GND 6 3 D-GND
3 5VNPD 10
1 5VNPD
5VN 13 A-7 5VN A-14 2 CLUD1 11
2 CLUD1
CPFD1 15 A-8 CPFD1 A-13 1 D-GND 12
3 D-GND
D-GND 17 A-9 D-GND A-12 6 5VNPD 7
5 CPED1 8 1 5VNPD
A-18 5VN A-3 4 D-GND 9 2 CPED1
A-19 DSW_C A-2 12 5VN 1 3 D-GND
A-20 D-GND A-1 11 DSW_C 2
1 5VN
10 D-GND 3
2 DSW_C
3 D-GND
5VNPD 19 A-10 5VNPD A-11
CSPD1 21 1 5VNPD
A-11 CSPD1 A-10
2 CSPD1
D-GND 23 A-12 D-GND A-9
3 D-GND
B. Tray paper feed section

CSS11 27 A-14 CSS11 A-7 3 CSS11
PCU CSS12 29 A-15 CSS12 A-6 4 CSS12
PWB CSS13 31 A-16 CSS13 A-5 5 CSS13
CSS14 33 A-17 CSS14 A-4 6 CSS14
S6P-PH-K-S
AC PWB
5VNPD 2 B-1 5VNPD B-20
PCU PWB
CLUD2 4 B-2 CLUD2 B-19
D-GND 6 B-3 D-GND B-18
2 D-GND
CN9
CN17
3 CSS21 24V3
24V3
24V3
4 CSS22 /CPFC
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
B-4 5VNPD B-17

INT24V2
5VNPD 8
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
B3P-PH-K-S
/CPFM_CK
B-5 CPED2 B-16 5 CSS23
CPED2 10
B32B-PHDSS-B
B-6 D-GND B-15 6 CSS24
D-GND 12
5
4
1
2
7
6
9
8
3
11
10
13
12
15
14
S6P-PH-K-S
5VN 14 B-7 5VN B-14
CPFD2 16 B-8 CPFD2 B-13
5VNPD 20 B-10 5VNPD B-11

CSPD2 22 B-11 CSPD2 B-10
P
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
SM18P
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
11
11
CSS21 28 B-14 CSS21 B-7
R
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CSS22 30 B-15 CSS22 B-6
2
CPED1
6
CSS23 32 B-16 CSS23 B-5
CPED2
CSS24 34 B-17 CSS24 B-4
B34B-PHDSS
3
1
5
1
2
4
5
6
7
3
CN8
12
10
9
5VN 29
CLUD1
2
1
2
1
2
1
7 8
CLUD2
DSW_C 28
5V
D-GND 27
P-GND
FG-OUT
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
B7P-PH-K-S
B30B-PHDSS
1
2
1
2
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
/CPUC2
/CPUC1
1
2
1
2
1
2
P-GND
P-GND
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H
B2P-PH-K-S
B2P-PH-K-S
CSS23
CSS21
CSS13
CSS11
4

CSS2
CPFD1
CSS1
CPFD2
CSS22
CSS24
CSS12
CSS14
DSW_C
CSPD1
CSPD2
CPUC2
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H 1 5VN
9 5VN 1 2 CPFD2
8 CPFD2 2 3 D-GND
7 D-GND 3
3 5VNPD 7 1 5VNPD
CPFM CPUC1
2 CLUD2 8 2 CLUD2
1 D-GND 9 3 D-GND
6 5VNPD 4
5 CPED2 5 1 5VNPD
4 D-GND 6 2 CPED2
3 D-GND
CPFC
1 5VNPD
CN1 2 CSPD2
INT24V1 1 3 D-GND
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
CLUM1
5 INT24V1
CLUM2
HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
3 HPFM_B/
HPFM_A/ 5
1 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
DRIVER MAIN PWB

HPFM
4 HPFM_A
B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 upper limit detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection
CLUM1 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED 1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper empty detection
CPED 2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects tray 1 paper pass.
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects tray 2 paper pass.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Tray 1 installation defection
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Tray 2 installation defection
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear edge detection
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 1 4.
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear edge detection
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 1 4.
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected.
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.

2 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter Always provides a certain level of resistance to the rotation of the separation roller,
preventing against double feed.
6 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and the paper feed roller (No. 2 paper
feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
9 Transport roller 5 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (drive) Transport paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2 and 3, 4 to the transport roller 8.
11 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
12 Transport roller 14 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
A. Bypass (2) Paper feed operation
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
to the paper feed roller section. ing, feeding paper.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre- At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the to prevent against double feed of paper.
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual (3) Paper remaining detection
transport roller.
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
B. Tray paper feed total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(1) Paper feed front operation
Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller (4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor. The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up. tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
sensor.
stops at the specified position.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

A. Manual paper feed unit 1) Open the right door.
c a
b
2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
Parts
a Temperature humidity sensor
b Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
c Manual paper feed gate solenoid
d Paper pickup solenoid

3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl. 6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever. feed tray unit.
3
1
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit.
3
4
5
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
(1) Temperature and humidity sensor/Manual paper

feed tray paper width detector
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
3) Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and
disconnect the connector.
2 1

4) Remove the temperature and humidity sensor. (3) Paper pickup solenoid
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
5) Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector.
3) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
2
(2) Manual paper feed gate solenoid

1) Remove the manual paper feed unit. 1
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
4) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and

1
remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.

6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit. 3) Remove the right lower door unit.
4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.

7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
B. Tray paper feed unit

1) Remove the right cabinet front.

C. Others 3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 installation
detection.
Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 installation detection.
a
b
Parts
a Tray 1, 2 installation detection
(1) Tray 1, 2 installation detection

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the

tray 1, 2 installation detection unit.

[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
RRM DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
PFMB/ 6 3 PFMB/
PFMB 3 4 PFMB
PFMA 1 5 PFMA
PFMA/ 4 6 PFMA/
PHR-6
1 PFM INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1

INT24V1 6 8 INT24V1
2 RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB 5 10 RRMB
RRMA 4 11 RRMA
RRMA/ 2 12 RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R 13 N,C
PPD2 B13B-PASK-1
3
PCU PWB
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H CN6
PPD1 PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 12 PPD1
179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 16 5VNPD
2 PPD2 5 18 PPD2
1 D-GND 6 20 D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
D-GND 3
179228-3

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
PPD1 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Resist roller (drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of
paper, and adjusts the relative relations between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport
power of the transport roller.
3 Transport roller 8 (drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-5001N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G 1

Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch con-
trols ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer
images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

A. Resist roller unit
1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.

the resist roller unit.
MX-5001N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G 2

6
7
8
P
1
2
SM-2Pin
R
1
2
1
2
3
CN1
SM-3Pin
D-GND 4 1 D-GND
R
1
2
n BD 3 2 n BD
SM-2Pin
1
2
3
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN
P
1
2
B4B-PH-K-S 5 D-GND
LSUSS
6 LSUTH1
7 NC
B7B-PH-K-S
CN20
D-GND 4 B7B-PH-K-S
9
10
1
2
3
4
7
6
LSUTH1 3
NC 2
PCU PWB
/LSUSS_B
CCFM_LD
INT24V1
CCFM_V
NC 1
P-GND
NC
B4B-PH-K-S
6
CN3 CN4
3.3V CN 2 1 3.3V CN
CCFM
D-GND 1 8 D-GND
5V CN 4 5 5V CN
D-GND 3 7 D-GND
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
24V 5 2 24V
P-GND 6 4 P-GND
CN1 CN7 S06B-XASK-1
+5V 50 1 5V_LD
+5V 48 2 5V_LD CN4
5
5VLD 1 6 5VLD
DT_K1+ 11 14 DT_K1+
D-GND 2 12 D-GND
DT_K1- 9 12 DT_K1- /SCK_LSU 4 14 /SCK_LSU
MX-5001N LSU SECTION H 1

n SH_K1 4 9 /SH_K1 /TRANS_DAT /TRANS_DAT
5 13
n SH_K2 8 5 /SH_K2
2 3
/RST_DAT 8 16 /RST_DAT
GND 10 3 D-GND LSU_ASIC_RST 7 10 LSU_ASIC_RST
n LDERR_K 12 17 /LDERR_K /TRANS_RST /TRANS_RST
9 11
PGM
DT_K2+ 5 8 DT_K2+
JOBEND_INT 10 17 JOBEND_INT
DT_K2- 3 6 DT_K2- TH_LSU 11 20 TH_LSU
GND 7 4 D-GND /PCU_TRG 12 19 /PCU_TRG
VREF_K1 16 15 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_N
13 28
VREF_K2 14 13 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_K_P
14 27
n ENB_K 18 11 /ENB_K VSYNC_C_P VSYNC_C_P

15 26
MOTHER PWB
n SH_YMC1 40 49 /SH_C1 VSYNC_C_N 16 25 VSYNC_C_N
GND 42 47 D-GND VSYNC_M_N 17 24 VSYNC_M_N
n SH_YMC2 44 45 /SH_C2 VSYNC_M_P 18 23 VSYNC_M_P
LSU PWB
1
GND 46 43 D-GND VSYNC_Y_P 19 22 VSYNC_Y_P
DT_C1+ 23 50 DT_C1+ VSYNC_Y_N 20 21 VSYNC_Y_N
LSU_FAN
DT_C1- 21 48 DT_C1- S20B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS
GND 25 46 D-GND CN5 CN5
LD PWB
n LDERR_C 20 41 /LDERR_C CH0_N 1 23 CH0_N
VREF_C1 24 39 VREF_C1 CH0_P 2 24 CH0_P
VREF_C2 22 37 VREF_C2 D-GND 3 22 D-GND
DT_C2+ 17 44 DT_C2+ D-GND 4 21 D-GND
DT_C2- 15 42 DT_C2- CH1_N 5 19 CH1_N
GND 19 40 D-GND CH1_P 6 20 CH1_P
n ENB_YMC 38 35 /ENB_C CH2_N 7 17 CH2_N
CH2_P 8 18 CH2_P
DT_M1+ 47 38 DT_M1+
D-GND 9 16 D-GND
DT_M1- 45 36 DT_M1-
D-GND 10 15 D-GND
GND 49 34 D-GND
CLCLK_N 11 13 CLCLK_N
n LDERR_M 32 33 /LDERR_M
CLCLK_P 12 14 CLCLK_P
VREF_M1 36 31 VREF_M1
CH3_N 13 11 CH3_N
VREF_M2 34 29 VREF_M2
CH3_P 14 12 CH3_P
DT_M2+ 41 32 DT_M2+
D-GND 15 10 D-GND
DT_M2- 39 30 DT_M2-
D-GND 16 9 D-GND
GND 43 28 D-GND
CH4_N 17 7 CH4_N
DT_Y1+ 35 26 DT_Y1+ CH4_P 18 8 CH4_P
DT_Y1- 33 24 DT_Y1- ECLK_LSU_N 19 5 ECLK_LSU_N
GND 37 22 D-GND ECLK_LSU_P 20 6 ECLK_LSU_P
n LDERR_Y 26 27 /LDERR_Y D-GND 21 4 D-GND
VREF_Y1 30 25 VREF_Y1 D-GND 22 3 D-GND
VREF_Y2 28 23 VREF_Y2 HSYNC_LSU_P 23 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
DT_Y2+ 29 20 DT_Y2+ HSYNC_LSU_N 24 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
[H] LSU SECTION
DT_Y2- 27 18 DT_Y2- S24B-PHDSS B24B-PHDSS

GND 31 16 D-GND
LDCHK_1 1 19 LDCHK_1
LDCHK_2 2 21 LDCHK_2
501571-5007 501190-5017
CN6
1 24V
2 /FANRDY
3 GND
B3B-PH-K-S
CN2
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK
/START 4 3 /START
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
24V1 6 1 24V1
B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-K-S
MX-5001N
1.

CCFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
LSU_FAN LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 fT lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
4 fT lens 1 that at the center.
5 Reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser.
6 Cylindrical lens Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
7 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
8 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
9 LSU PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB
control signal and image data.
10 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
2. Operational descriptions (Scanning system)
A. Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU
are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of
the OPC drum.
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2-laser diodes for
each color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical
element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system
including the mirror which assures light path, and the main scan-
ning system.
B. Composition
(Primary system)
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
Main scanning direction
Rear
Scanning LD2
direction LD1
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
BK C M Y
Front

1 : Oct. 24 2008
(Writing position on paper) 1) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."]
Paper exit direction
2) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
Rear (For U.S.A. 50-sheet machine only)
Scanning 1 Remove the power switch cover.
direction
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1
2
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1
Front
(On the polygon motor)
Model Number of Rotating Bearing Remarks For U.S.A. 50-sheet machine only
mirror surface speed
MX-4100/4101 7 surfaces 44544rpm AIR
C. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width : 307mm
Resolution: 1200dpi
4
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
Laser power: Max. 0.255mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 795nm
3. Disassembly and assembly 3 3
Do not disassemble the LSU unit. If it is unavoidable to disassem-

ble and repair the LSU unit, strictly observe the following proce- 3) Remove the LSU left plate PA.
dures described below and never perform the other procedures. If
this precaution is violated, the safety is not assured.
A. LSU
Parts
a Polygon motor

4) Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen (1) Polygon motor
the screw (B). 1) Remove the LSU.
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screw. 2) Remove the screws, and the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the fan
cover.
5) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
4) Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
(A).
2 Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).
1
A
3 A B
1
B
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU. 2
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the poly-
gon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the poly-
gon mirror and the mirror surface.

B. Others 5) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
Parts
a LSU shutter solenoid 1 6) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
(1) LSU shutter solenoid 1

2) Remove the MC PWB.
3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the filter box unit.
7) Remove the LSU.

the LSU shutter solenoid unit.
4) Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Dis-
connect the connector.
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the sole-

noid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.
9) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shut-
ter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter
lever arm.

1

1.
[i]
MC
MX-5001N
MC-CL
CN1 CN6
GB-Y INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
GB
D-GND 7 29 D-GND
1 : Oct. 24 2008
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
MC
GB-C
/HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
GB
A. 41-sheet machine
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR

B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
MC
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10
NC 2
GB
/DL_BK 3 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK
MC
NC 2
GB
/DL_C 3 10 /DL_C 1 21 /DL_C
NC 2
/DL_M 3 10 /DL_M 1 2 /DL_M
PCU PWB
NC 2
2
/DL_Y 3 10 /DL_Y 1 22 /DL_Y
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
B40B-PADSS-1
DL_Y
CN11
DL_M
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K
D-GND 2 18 D-GND
5VNPD 3 19 5VNPD
20 DHPD_CL
21 D-GND
DL_C
22 5VNPD
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M
MX-5001N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i 1

D-GND 2 24 D-GND
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
5VNPD 3 25 5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS
DL_BK
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
R P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
8 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 9 DMCL_B
DM_K
DHPD_K
INT24V1 5 10 DMCL_B/
DMCL_B 3 11 DMCL_A/
DMCL_B/ 1 12 DMCL_A
DRIVER SUB PWB
DMCL_A/ 6 B12B-PASK-1
DMCL_A 4
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M CL drum motor Drives the CL drum.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.

1
MC
MC-CL
CN1 CN6
GB-Y INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
GB
D-GND 7 29 D-GND
GB-M
MC
GB-C
1 : Oct. 24 2008
/HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
GB
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
MC
B. 50-sheet machine
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10
NC 2
GB
/DL_BK 3 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK
MC
NC 2
GB
/DL_C 3 10 /DL_C 1 21 /DL_C
NC 2
/DL_M 3 10 /DL_M 1 2 /DL_M PCU PWB
NC 2
2
/DL_Y 3 10 /DL_Y 1 22 /DL_Y
B40B-PADSS-1
DL_Y
DL_M
CN1
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DMM_B 3 3 DMM_B
DMM_B/ DMM_B/
DL_C
1 4
DMM_A/
DHPD_Y
6 5 DMM_A/
DMM_A 4 6 DMM_A

7 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1
DM_Y INT24V1 5 9 DMY_B
DMY_B 3 10 DMY_B/
DL_BK
DMY_B/
DHPD_M
1 11 DMY_A/
DM_M DMY_A/ 6 12 DMY_A
DMY_A 4 13 N,C
B13B-PASK-1
R SM-6Pin P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
DHPD_C
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
DRIVER SUB PWB
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
DM_C
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
DHPD_K
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1
DM_K
INT24V1 5 9 DMC_B
DMC_B 3 10 DMC_B/
DMC_B/ 1 11 DMC_A/
DMC_A/ 6 12 DMC_A
DMC_A 4 B12B-PASK-1
1 : Oct. 24 2008

1 DM_C C drum motor Drives the C drum.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M M drum motor Drives the M drum.
DM_Y Y drum motor Drives the Y drum.
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase.
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase.
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
2. Operational descriptions 2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by Aluminum
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. OPC drum layer
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main CGL
charger. CTL
Aluminum
layer OPC drum
CGL
CTL
Laser beams
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
OPC drum
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
Screen grid High voltage unit
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
Main corona unit ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The radiated.
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
age applied to the screen grid. drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.

4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged. 2) Remove the waste toner box unit.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL
1
2
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the released, and open the drum positioning unit.
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
A
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing B
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
(CAUTION)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of
the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to
return it to the home position.
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
(1position for each color)
3. Disassembly and assembly 1

A. Drum unit
1) Open the front cover.

5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit. (1) Waste toner drive motor
1) Remove the frame cover.
the waste toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from he waste toner drive unit.
6) Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly.
Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both
hands.
(2) Waste toner full detection switch

1) Remove the frame cover.
the waste toner drive unit.
B. Others
b
a
3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box instillation lever.
Parts Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove
a Waste toner drive motor the waste toner full detection switch.
b Waste toner full detection switch

1.
[J]
1
No.
TNM
CRUM
MX-5001N
Signal name
1
CRUM(Y,M,C,K)
1
Toner transport pipe

Toner motor (Y,M,C,K)
Name
Name
1
CN15
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
/CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK /CRM_K_CK
1
11 3 3 3 /CRM_K_CK
TONER SUPPLY SECTION

TSR-04V-K
5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
/CRM_C_DT 13 6 /CRM_C_DT 6 4 /CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK 15 7 /CRM_C_CK 7 3 /CRM_C_CK
TSR-04V-K
5VN 2 9 5VN 9 2 5VN
/CRM_M_DT 10 10 /CRM_M_DT 10 4 /CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK 12 11 /CRM_M_CK 11 3 /CRM_M_CK
CRUM(Y)

TSR-04V-K
5VN 4 13 5VN 13 2 5VN
/CRM_Y_DT 14 14 /CRM_Y_DT 14 4 /CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK 16 15 /CRM_Y_CK 15 3 /CRM_Y_CK
CRUM(M)
B16B-PHDSS P SM-18Pin R TSR-04V-K
CN14 CN3 CN5
Data memory for toner cartridge.

24V3 22 12 24V3 +24V 1
MX-5001N TONER SUPPLY SECTION J 1

TNM_Y_/B 11 1 TMY_/B +24V 2
TNM_Y
PCU PWB
TNM_Y_B 13 3 TMY_B TMK_A 3
CRUM(C)
TNM_Y_/A 15 5 TMY_/A TMK_/A 4
Toner supply motor to the developing unit

5GTXKEG/CPWCN
TNM_Y_A 17 7 TMY_A TMK_B 5

P-GND 19 9 P-GND TMK_/B 6
TNM_K_/B 21 17 TMK_/B CN4
TNM_K_B 23 15 TMK_B +24V 1
TNM_M
TNM_K_/A 25 13 TMK_/A +24V 2

TNM_K_A 27 11 TMK_A TMC_A 3
P-GND 29 19 P-GND TMC_/A
CRUM(K)
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
P-GND 12 2 P-GND TMC_B 5
TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A TMC_/B 6
TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A CN2
TNM_C
TNM_M_B 18 6 TMM_B +24V 1
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M_/B 20 4 TMM_/B +24V 2
TNM_C_A 24 20 TMC_A TMM_A 3
TNM_C_/A 26 18 TMC_/A TMM_/A 4
TNM_C_B 28 16 TMC_B TMM_B 5
TNM_C_/B 30 14 TMC_/B TMM_/B 6
TNM_K
B30B-PHDSS B20B-PNDZS CN1

+24V 1
+24V 2
TMY_A 3
PWB
TMY_/A 4
TMY_B 5
TM-DRV
TMY_/B 6
When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock pawl A. Toner cartridges
is released and the supply shutter is opened. 1) Open the front cover.
2) Lift the lock lever, and pull it out slowly and horizontally.
The transport shutter is opened and closed by the shaft linked with
the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close level on the unit pushes the block .
MX-5001N TONER SUPPLY SECTION J 2

CN11
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVMK_CK 4 5 /DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D 5 7 /DVMK_D
DVMK_LD 7 9 DVMK_LD
NC 3
DVM_K
NC 6
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
/DVMC_CK 4 6 /DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D 5 8 /DVMC_D
DVMC_LD 7 10 DVMC_LD
NC 3 B18B-PHDSS
NC 6
CN1 C N6
BS-Y INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
MC PWB
D-GND 7 29 D-GND
BS-M
/HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
DVM_CL
BS-C HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM

BS-K MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
BS_K
B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
TCS_K
MX-5001N DEVELOPING SECTION K 1

BS_C
TCS_C
2
BS_M
TCS_M
2
TCS_K PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 5 5VN
BS_Y
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
PCU PWB
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND
TCS_Y
2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
3 TNCRU_K 3 2 TNCRU_K 9 17 TNCRU_K
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
1
2
C QR/P8-8P P
TCS_C PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 25 5VN
DEVELOPING SECTION
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C

TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
1
2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
3 TNCRU_C 3 2 TNCRU_C 9 37 TNCRU_C
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
3
C QR/P8-8P P
TCS_M PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 6 5VN
1
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
3 TNCRU_M 3 2 TNCRU_M 9 18 TNCRU_M
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
C QR/P8-8P P
TCS_Y PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 26 5VN
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
1
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
3 TNCRU_Y 3 2 TNCRU_Y 9 38 TNCRU_Y
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-1
MX-5001N
[K]
1.

DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Color developing unit/Color drum drive
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Black developing unit/Black drum drive
BS Developing bias (Y,M,C,K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 Toner filter (Y,M,C,K) Prevents dispersing of toner

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller sur-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner. face.
A. Development unit
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction. Parts
a Density sensor
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller. 1) Open the front cover.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). (1) Density sensor
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. 1) Remove the developing unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A). Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector.
Remove the density sensor.
A
B
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.

(1position for each color)

[L] TRANSFER SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Transfer section
1st TC PWB CN1 CN2

MC PWB CN1 C N6
1TC-Y INT24V2 8 1 INT24V2 INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
P-GND 7 2 D-GND D-GND 7 29 D-GND
1TC-REV 6 3 1TC-REV /HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
1TC-M 1TC-Y-CC 5 4 1TC-Y-CC /HV_CLK 5 25 /HV_CLK
1TC-M-CC 4 5 1TC-M-CC /HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
1TC-C-CC 3 6 1TC-C-CC HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
1TC-C
1TC-K-CC 2 7 1TC-K-CC MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
HV_REM 1 8 HV_REM MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
1TC-K N,C 9 9 N,C B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
B9B-PASK B9B-PASK
P SM-3Pin R CN13
1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 1 31 1TUD_CL
B32B-PHDSS
CN12
1TUD_BK 1 1 1TUD_BK 1 27 1TUD_BK
5VLED 3 3 5VLED 3 29 5VLED
4 PTC_HEAT 4 30 PTC_HEAT
P SM-4pin R B30B-PHDSS
5 6 1TURC_R
CN11
8 INT24V2 1 1
5
INT24V2
P-GND 2 P-GND
/DVMK_CK 4 9 /DVMK_CK
1TURC /DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
5
7
11
13
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
1 DVM_K NC
NC
3
6
R SM-2Pin P
1 24V3 1 15 24V3
1TC_CMY 1TUD_CL 2 1TURC 2 16 1TURC
R SM-2Pin P
1TC_K 1TUD_BK 1
2
24V3
1TURC_R
1
2
29
30
24V3
1TURC_R
B30B-PHDSS
3
BTM CN1
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
2 8
BTM_B
BTM_B/
4
6
3
4
BTM_B
BTM_B/
7 BTM_A/
BTM_A
3
1
5
6
BTM_A/
BTM_A
PTC B6B-XH B6B-PASK-1
3
2TC 2nd TC PWB CN1 CN14
4 9 PTC
B2P-VH
INT24V2
D-GND
1
2
2
4
INT24V2
D-GND
/TC_DATA 3 6 /TC_DATA
/TC_CLK 4 8 /TC_CLK
/TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD
/HV_REM 6 5 /HV_REM
2-TC PTC_ERR 7 7 PTC_ERR
13 PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8
B8B-PASK
9 /PTC_CLK
B30B-PHDSS
11
PCU PWB
1TNFD
10
WTNM 12 P SL2PIN R P DF1B-24DE S CN13
1 WTNM_1 1 17 WTNM_1 17 11 WTNM_1
2 WTNM_2 2 19 WTNM_2 19 13 WTNM_2
1TNFD 1 21 1TNFD 21 7 1TNFD

B32B-PHDSS

1TC_CMY Primary transfer output (CMY) Color transfer high voltage
1TC_K Primary transfer output (K) B/W transfer high voltage
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Waste toner full detection
1TUD_BK Transfer belt separation BK detection B/W transfer folder position detection
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Color transfer roller position detection
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Transfer roller separation control
1TURC_R Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2TC Secondary belt transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage
BTM Transfer belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Transfer unit drive (Commonly used with the B/W developing drive roller)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Transports waste toner.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Clean and remove residual toner from the intermediate transfer belt.
2 Intermediate transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the intermediate transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
MX-5001N TRANSFER SECTION L 1

6 Primary transfer belt tension roller Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
7 Belt CL brush Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
8 PTC opposing roller Roller to flow a PTC current.
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
10 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer belt dirve roller Drives the transfer belt.
12 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
13 PTC unit Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
B. Pro-reg sensor section
18 NC 18
PCU PWB 17 NC 17
CN6 16 NC 16 P SM2P R
24V3 13 15 24V3 15 1 24V3 1
/PCSS 11 14 /PCSS 14 2 /PCSS 2
/REGS_R_LED 8 13 /REGS_R_LED 13
REGS_R 6 12 REGS_R 12
D-GND 4 11 D-GND 11
5VNPD 2 10 5VNPD 10 3 /REGS_R_LED
9 NC 9 4 REGS_R PCSS
PCS_CL 9 8 PCS_CL 8 2 D-GND
7 NC 7 1 5VNPD
6 D-GND 6 5 PCS_R
5 5VNPD 5
/REGS_F_LED 7 4 /REGS_F_LED 4
REGS_F 5 3 REGS_F 3
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 2 5 PCS_F REGS_R
1 1 3 /REGS_F_LED
5VNPD 1 5VNPD
4 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS P SM18P R
2 D-GND
1 5VNPD
REGS_F

PCSS Color image density sensor PWB Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the resist sensor.
reflection plate shutter solenoid
REGS_F Color image density sensor/ Detection of resist shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of the color toner patch density.
Image registration sensor F
REGS_R Black image density sensor/ Detection of resist shift on the machine rear (R) side, and detection of the black toner patch density.
Image registration sensor R

2. Operational descriptions (2) Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation
mechanism and contents
A. Transfer
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, sepa-
(1) Transfer operation rates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the opera-
a. Transfer operation tion mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer
cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing sepa-
rating operation of the roller.
All pressing
PTC Constant All separating

current
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary
transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this weakens
positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the attractive force
between the primary transfer belt and toner.
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is
improved.
Pressing only black
Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary transfer
belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt are transferred
to paper. In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black
(K) transfer voltage is selected.
b. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying voltage of the
secondary transfer belt is made negative, and unnecessary toner is
transferred to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the pri-
mary transfer belt cleaning blade, and transported to the waste It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black
toner section. with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_BK) and the
separation detection arm.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
All pressing ON OFF
All separating OFF ON
Pressing only black OFF OFF
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are
commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant
voltage

B. Image density detection and resist detection 3. Disassembly and assembly
Image density detection and image resist detection are performed A. Primary transfer unit
by the sensors arranged on the front frame side and the rear frame
side. 1) Open the front cover.
(1) Function and operation of the color image density

sensor/image resist sensor F (REGS F) provided
on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the front frame side is detected.
The shutter plate is provided on the sensor. The shutter plate is
closed before operation of the process control. The sensor sensitiv-
ity adjustment is performed by using the shutter plate as the refer-
ence reflection plate.
The operation of the shutter plate is controlled by the process con- 2) Open the right door.
trol shutter solenoid (PCSS).
(2) Function and operation of the black image density
sensor/image resist sensor R (REGS R) provided
on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the rear frame side is detected.
3) Loosen the blue screw.
4) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
* Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer belt.
A
B

5) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer C. Pro-reg sensor unit
unit.
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is Parts
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of a Process control shutter solenoid
the work. (Power OFF-ON) 1) Remove the developing unit (K).
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
home position.
3) Remove the resist roller unit.
B. Secondary transfer unit 4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
1) Open the right door. pro-reg sensor unit.
2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit. (1) Process control shutter solenoid
1) Remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
3 2) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the
process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).

P RWZ R CN2
1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 N-HL(UM)
2 N,C
4 L-HL U 4 3 N-HL(EX)
B03P-VL-K
[M]
5 N-HL(US) 5 CN4 HL PWB

3 L-HL U
2 N,C N,C 8
MX-5001N
1 L-HL(LM) /HL_PR 7
6 N-HL(LM) 6 B03P-VL-RD HL_OUT_EX 6
HL_OUT_LM 5
HL_OUT_US 4
CN3 HL_OUT_UM 3
5VN
1 N-HL(US) D-GND 2
D-GND
HLPCD
PRM_B
PRM_A
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
2 L-HL(LM) 2 2 N,C INT24V1 1
3 N-HL(LM) B08B-PASK
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
B2P3-VH
PCU PWB
B32B-PHDSS
CN14
3 N-HL(EX) 3
3
7
5
9
CN6
24V3
PRM_B
PRM_A
B10B-PNDZS
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
PRM_B
PRM_A
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
2
6
4
8
1
TM-DRV PWB
CN14
B10B-PNDZS
CN6
INT24V1 4
R SM-3pin(BK) P PCU PWB D-GND 6
9
7
5
3
1
S
11
WH 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 HL_OUT_LM 10
15
13
BL 3 D-GND 3 HL_OUT_EX 12
P DF1B-20DEE CN13
FUSER SECTION
R SM-2pin P B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN
5VN
24V3
D-GND
HLPCD
PRM_B
PRM_A
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
1 TH_US_IN 1 B-4 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND 12 2 D-GND CN14
DF1B-24DE
2 D-GND 2 B-5 B-5 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN INT24V1 2
B-6 B-4 8 D-GND 8 7 D-GND P-GND 5
9
7
5
3
1
P
11
15
13
B-7 TH_EX2_IN B-3 6 TH_EX2_IN 6 5 TH_EX2_IN /FUM_CK 27
R SM-2pin P B-8 D-GND B-2 4 D-GND 4 3 D-GND /FUM_D 29
1 TH_LM_IN 1 FUM_LD 31
2 D-GND 2
1
2
3
4
5
B32B-PHDSS
3
2
1
B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 1 TH_UMCS_IN
RCZR 9PIN
CN13
R SM-4pin P
INT24V1 31
1 TH_EX2_IN 1
5VN
32
24V3
D-GND
PRM_B
PRM_A
D-GND
HLPCD
2 D-GND 2
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
SM-5Pin
1
2
3
4
5
P
3 TH_EX1_IN 3 A-1 TH_EX1_IN A-10 19 TH_EX1_IN 19 10 TH_EX1_IN
4 D-GND 4 A-2 D-GND A-9 17 D-GND 17 11 D-GND
A-3 5VN A-8 15 5VN 15 12 5VN
A-5 D-GND A-6 11 D-GND 11 14 D-GND
A-6 A-5
PRM
P SM-2pin R 9 9 B34B-PHDSS
1 WEBD 1 A-7 TH_LM_IN A-4 7 7
2 D-GND 2 A-8 D-GND A-3 5 5
A-9 A-2 3 3
A-10 A-1 1 1
RCZR 10PIN
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
HL_UM
HL_EX1
NC
P-GND
TH_US
/FUM_D
INT24V1
FUM_LD
/FUM_CK
DF1B-26Pin
SM-12Pin
WEB_M2out
WEB_M1out
HLPCD
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
HL_LM
19
18
2
WEBM
P
2
1
TS MAIN
TS EX1
MX-5001N FUSER SECTION M 1

HL_EX2
SL-2Pin
WEB_M2out
WEB_M1out
R
2
1
TH_UM
TH_LM
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1
TH_EX1
TH_EX2
6
2
WEB-END
TS EX2
7
TS SUB
6
3
FUM
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the fusing roller (pressing).
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the fusing roller (heating).
HL_EX1 Heater lamp external 1 Heats the fusing roller (heating). (External)
HL_EX2 Heater lamp external 2 Heats the fusing roller (heating). (External)
HLPCD Fusing pressure release sensor Detects pressure release of the fusing roller.
TS MAIN Thermostat (1) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
TS EX1 Thermostat (2) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
(External)
TS EX2 Thermostat (3) When the temperature rises abnormally, conduction to the heater lamp is cut off.
[For the fusing roller (heating)] (External)
TS SUB Thermostat (4) When the temperature rises abnormally, conduction to the heater lamp is cut off.
[For the fusing roller (pressing)] (External)
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (1) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
TH_US Fusing temperature sensor (2) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor (3) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressing).
TH_EX1 Fusing temperature sensor (4) Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller (external).
TH_EX2 Fusing temperature sensor (5) Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller (external).
WEB-END Web roller end detection Detects presence of cleaning paper.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
4 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller 1.
5 Web roller Cleans the upper heat roller.
6 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (pressing).
7 Fusing cleaning roller Cleans the fusing roller (pressing).
2. Operational descriptions The upper and the lower heat rollers of silicon rubber are
employed.
A. Fusing unit drive This is because of the following reasons.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
Driving by the drive motor (DC brushless motor) is performed
according to the control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
1) To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity
C. Fusing operation for paper.
Color toner (Y,M,C,K) on paper is subject to heat and pressure to 2) By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused
be fused on paper. without deformation.
At that time, color toner of Y, M, C, and K are mixed to reproduce 3) An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner lay-
colors approximate to the document image colors. ers (multi-layer structure).
The heater lamps are provided in the lower and the upper heat
roller to heat paper from the upper and the lower sides.
This is because paper must be heated both from the upper side
and from the lower side together in order to melt and fuse toner in
the four layers on the paper.

D. Automatic pressure release system 3. Disassembly and assembly
The upper and the lower heat rollers are normally pressed together. A. Fusing unit
When, however, one of the following conditions is satisfied, pres-
sure is released. f
When the machine shifts to the pre-heating mode. f
When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode. c
When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
When the machine has been left in the ready state for 20 min- c
utes.
When the envelope mode is used.
(1) Pressure release operation
The pressure release motor (PRM) rotates to drive the pressure
release lever of the fusing unit to the pressure release state via the
reduction gears (6 pcs.).
When 3600ms passes from operating the pressure release detec-
e
tion level and driving the pressure release sensor (HLPCD) to the
d
transmission state (L level), the pressure release motor stops to
complete the pressure release operation. b
Pressure release lever a
Parts
Pressing condition a Upper thermostat
b Lower thermostat
c External thermostat
d Upper heater lamp
e Lower heater lamp
f External heater lamp
Pressure release 1) Open the right door.

motor (PRM) Pressure release
state
(2) Pressing operation

When an end use performs any operation or when the machine
receives a job signal, the pressure release motor rotates reversely
to dive the pressure release lever to the pressing state.
When 200ms passes from when the pressure release sensor
(HLPCD) is in the interruption state (H level), the pressure motor
stops to complete the pressing operation. 2) Remove the blue screw and the step screw. Release the lock
lever and remove the fusing unit.
NOTE: When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine,
be sure to turn OFF the power switch of the operation
panel and wait for 10 sec from turning OFF the LCD, and
then turn OFF the main power switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD dis-
played, the power is turned off without completion of the 2
pressure release operation. This will deform the upper and
the lower heat rollers. 1 2
When, in addition, the fusing roller is installed again after 3
removing it, be sure to install it under the pressure release
state.
1 1

(1) Upper thermostat 3) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
1) Remove the fusing unit. lower thermostat.
2) Remove the screw. Pull out the interface harness and remove * Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces
the fusing upper cover. down.
(3) External thermostat

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing upper cover.
* After installation, check to confirm that the harness of the
external thermister can be seen through the hole in the fus- 3) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
ing upper cover. external thermostat.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the * Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces up.
upper thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces up.
(2) Lower thermostat

2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing lower cover.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
(4) Upper heater lamp 5) Disconnect the connector on the front side of the upper heater
1) Remove the fusing unit. lamp, and remove the upper heater lamp from the front side.
3) Remove the fusing upper cover FAS.
A 1
RED
(41-sheet machine)
BLACK
(50-sheet machine)
A
A
4) Remove the screw, and remove the upper lamp holder F. Dis- WHITE
connect the lamp connector on the rear side, and remove the
upper lamp harness from the upper lamp holder R.

holder.
(5) Lower heater lamp
3) Remove the fusing lower cover.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the clamp, the fusing upper
cover RAS, and the lower lamp holder F/R.
NOTE: Put the upper heater lamp harness on the bent section
beside the upper lamp holder F and pass through the
clamp.
NOTE: The lamp harness is engaged with the fusing upper cover
RAS. Remove the lamp harness.
NOTE: Attach the clamp on the front side to the left side apart from
the lamp, and the clamp on the rear side to the right side.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
NOTE: When installing the fusing upper cover RAS, be careful not B. Others
to pinch the wires.
5) Disconnect the connectors F/R, and remove the lower heater a

lamp.
Parts
a Fusing pressure release motor
(1) Fusing pressure release motor

1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
the fusing pressure release motor unit.
A
1
RED
(41-sheet machine)
BLACK
(50-sheet machine)
A
A
WHITE

NOTE: When installing, check to confirm that the section (A) of the 3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release
lower heater lamp is securely engaged with the lamp motor.
holder.

[N] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX-5001N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Duplex section
CN2
S DF1B-26p P
ADMHA// 2
21 ADMHA// 21 1 ADMHA//
ADMHA/ 1
DRIVER ADMHB/ 4
22 ADMHA/ 22 4 ADMHA/
23 ADMHB/ 23 6 ADMHB/
SUB ADMHB// 3
24 ADMHB// 24 3 ADMHB//
INT24V1 5
PWB INT24V1 6
25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
26 INT24V1 26 5 INT24V1
N.C 7
B7B-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H ADUM-H
2 24V3 1
1 /ADUGS 2
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 4 3 5VLED1
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
4
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 D-GND
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 3 5VLED4 5
POD3
TFD3
ADUGS
DSW_ADU 7 3 DSW_ADU 2 1 DSW_ADU
ADUM-L
5VLED2 9 4 5VLED2 1 3 5VLED2 3
APPD1 10 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1

D-GND 11 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND APPD1
5VLED5 12 3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5 DSW_ADU
S16B-PHDSS-B PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN3(1/2)
APPD2 4 1 APPD2
D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10 1
S32B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB 9 24V3 9 CN26 2
25 /ADUGS 25 7 /ADUGS
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 9 5VN
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 10 SIN3
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 13 SELIN1
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 1 APPD1
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 2 APPD2 APPD2
APPD3 9
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 14 POD3
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 11 MPFD
MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 16 MPWD CN5
TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 17 TH_M ADMLA// 8 1 ADMLA//
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 19 HUD_M INT24V1 11 2 INT24V1
S16B-PHDSS-B 18 P-GND DRIVER ADMLB// 9 3 ADMLB//
15 24V3 15 ADMLA/ 7 4 ADMLA/
31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS MAIN PWB INT24V1 12 5 INT24V1
30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS ADMLB/ 10 6 ADMLB/
14 24V3 14 B12B-PH-K-S
28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC
13 24V3 13
P QR/P4 32PINS 3 24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
6 5 3 4 2 1
PCU PWB
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1
MX-5001N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION N 1

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM-H ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.
ADUM-L ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to
the right tray.
5 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.

B. Paper exit section
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2
4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H P DF1B-26p S CN13
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 15 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 19 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 21 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 22 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
3 P-GND 2
4 POFM_LD2 1
R SM6P P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 24 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 7 /OSM_XB
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 9 /OSM_XA
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 11 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 13 /OSM_A
5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 10 TFD2
D-GND 1
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 14 POD2 14 12 POD2
TFD2 HPOS D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
HOPS 2 15 HOPS 15 16 HOPS
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
POD1 2 16 POD1 16 14 POD1
12 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
OSM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POFM_R
DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
1 POMB/ 6
R
12
SM-12p
POMB/
P
12
CN6
4 POMB/
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 6 INT24V1
POD2 POM POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 1 POMA/

POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 3 POMB//
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 5 INT24V1 DRIVER
POMA// 1 7 POMA// 7 2 POMA// MAIN
6 FUMA/ 6 7 FUMA/ PWB
5 FUMB/ 5 10 FUMB/
4 INT24V1 4 12 INT24V1
POFM_F POD1 3
2
INT24V1
FUMA//
3
2
11
8
INT24V1
FUMA//
1 FUMB// 1 9 FUMB//
B12B-PH-K-S

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing after detection fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.

2. Operational descriptions (1) Right door unit
1) Open the right door.
A. Duplex
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
2
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
1
By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then 2) Remove the right door unit.
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
charged to the right tray.

A. Duplex unit
a. RD I/F PWB
(2)-b 2) Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(1)
Unit Parts
(1) Right door a RD I/F PWB 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
unit b Manual paper feed clutch
c Right paper exit gate
d ADU gate solenoid
(2) Others a ADU motor lower
b ADU motor upper

b. Manual paper feed clutch d. ADU gate solenoid
1) Remove the right door. 1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the connector cover and the ADU inner cover. 2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R. 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU gate solenoid
unit.
Remove the ADU gate solenoid.
4) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-

nector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit. 1
(2) Others
a. ADU motor lower
2) Open the control box.
5) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.
c. Right paper exit gate

2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
4) Remove the ADU cabinet F.
5) Remove the lock block, and disengage the right door lock
pawl. Remove the right door release lever.
6) Remove the E-ring, and the ADU gate.

B. Paper exit unit 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit cooling
fan motor.
e * When installing, be sure to note the fan direction.
a
a b
c f
b. Shifter motor
Unit Parts 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
(1) Paper exit a Paper exit cooling fan motor 2) Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
unit b Shifter motor Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
c Fusing web cleaning motor the connectors and remove the snap band.
d Fusing drive motor
e Paper exit drive motor
f ADU motor upper
(1) Paper exit unit

1) Remove the screw, the upper cabinet right, and the right con- A
necting cabinet.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector. B
a. Paper exit cooling fan motor

1) Remove the paper exit unit. 3) Remove the shifter motor unit. Remove the gear.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.

4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor. e. Paper exit drive motor
f. ADU motor upper
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
c. Fusing web cleaning motor

2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then B
remove the fusing web cleaning motor.
B A
* Be careful to install the motors in the proper direction.

* When installing, attach the belt as shown below.
d. Fusing drive motor

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing drive motor.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
[O] DRIVE SECTION

MX-5001N 3) Remove the flywheel. (BK: 50-sheet machine only)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

1
* Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM
(Engraved mark for each color)
1. Disassembly and assembly * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
A. Main drive unit the harness.
1
1 b b
a
b
KM
j
C
BK
d 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
i the main drive unit.
h
l * Hold section A and remove.
g k
e
f
Parts
a TM drive PWB
b Toner motor
c Developing drive motor (K)
d Developing drive motor (CL)
e Resist motor
f Transfer belt motor
g BK drum motor
1 h C drum motor (50-sheet machine)
i CL drum motor (40-sheet machine) /
M drum motor (50-sheet machine)
j Y drum motor (50-sheet machine) A
k Primary transfer separation clutch
l Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch

2) Remove the screw, and open the control box.
(1) TM drive PWB/Toner motor

the TM dive PWB.
MX-5001N DRIVE SECTION O 1

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove (4) Resist motor
the toner motor. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the flywheel.
the resist motor.
(2) Developing drive motor (K)

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove (5) Transfer belt motor
the developing drive motor (K) 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
the transfer belt motor.
(3) Developing drive motor (CL)

(6) BK drum motor
the developing drive motor (CL).
the BK drum motor.

1 : Oct. 24 2008
(7) C drum motor (50-sheet machine) 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
1 1
1) Remove the rear cabinet. the Y drum motor.
the C drum motor.
(10) Primary transfer separation clutch

4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear.
(8) CL drum motor (40-sheet machine) /

M drum motor (50-sheet machine)
1
1 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the CL drum motor/M drum motor. 2 1
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans-
fer separation clutch.
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
(9) Y drum motor (50-sheet machine)

1 1) Remove the rear cabinet.

(11) Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch B. Paper feed drive unit
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear.
b a
1 e
g c
d
2 1
f
d
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con-
Parts
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans-
a Transport motor
fer separation reverse rotation clutch.
b Horizontal transport motor
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping c Paper feed motor
the clutch rotation with the frame projection. d Paper tray lift-up motor
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
f Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
g Tray vertical transport clutch

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the each
terminal. Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Disengage

the pawl, and remove the filter box unit.

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive (3) Paper feed motor
unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the filter box unit.
the paper feed motor.
(1) Transport motor

the transport motor.
(4) Paper tray lift-up motor

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External
view.")
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
(2) Horizontal transport motor

the horizontal transport motor.
* When installing, insert the connector downward, and rotate
the motor.
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.

(5) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/ 7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
Paper feed tray 2)/Tray vertical transport clutch
1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2) Remove the paper feed motor.
3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
8) Remove the belt.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
9) Remove the gear, and remove the tray vertical transport clutch
unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
6) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.

* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
clutch.

[P] PWB SECTION
MX-5001N A. Control box
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

(Countermeasures against static electricity)
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands. i
h
e g
b
a
f
c
d
a
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine. Parts
a DIMM memory PWB (512MB)
b DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
c PROG1 ROM PWB
d PROG2 ROM PWB
e MFP cnt PWB
f HDD
g PCU Flash ROM PWB
h PCU PWB
i Mother PWB
(1) DIMM memory PWB (512MB/1GB)/PROG1 ROM

PWB/PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

procedure on an anti-static mat.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-5001N PWB SECTION P 1

* Inserting position an inserting procedure when the DIMM * Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
memory is removed Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM1
DIMM2
Outside Inside Outside Inside
DIMM4 * Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

DIMM5
Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM3
DIMM1: Option
DIMM2: 1GB
DIMM3: 512MB Outside Inside Outside Inside
DIMM4: Reserved (No option)
DIMM5: 512MB a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
3) Push Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock holding * When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
the memory PWB. sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
A A
b) Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the

bottom.
4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out. * Be careful not to tilt left and right.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out. * The gold plated section must be completely seated
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB. inside slot.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]

c) Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper (2) HDD
clicks. 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
* Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center 2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
of the lock hole.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB. the HDD unit.
A A
B B
5) Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B). 4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
A B

the MFP cnt PWB.
(3) PCU Flash ROM PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.

2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. B. Power unit
1 b
1
Parts
a AC power PWB
b DC power PWB
(4) PCU PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (1) AC power PWB
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector,
the PCU PWB. and remove the AC power PWB.
(5) Mother PWB (2) DC power PWB

the mother PWB.

3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove C. Others
the filter box unit.
b
a
c
d f
g
h
4) Remove the screw, the reactor and the AC cord unit and dis-
connect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.
Parts
a SCN Flash ROM PWB
b Scanner control PWB
c HL PWB
d Secondary transfer PWB
e Driver main PWB
f Driver sub PWB
g Primary transfer PWB
5) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove h MC PWB
the DC power PWB.
(1) SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
2
1

3) Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit. 4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
Disconnect the connector. the HL PWB.
(3) Secondary transfer PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
the secondary transfer PWB.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.
(4) Driver main PWB

the driver main PWB.
(2) HL PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
the duct.
(5) Driver sub PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
the driver sub PWB.

(6) Primary transfer PWB (7) MC PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
* Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM * Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM
(Engraved mark for each color) (Engraved mark for each color)
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
the harness. the harness.
KM KM
C C
4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove 4) Disconnect the connector, remove the supporter, and remove
the primary transfer PWB. the primary transfer PWB unit.

the MC PWB and the supporter.

[Q] FAN SECTION
MX-5001N 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
the duct.

A. Fan motor
a
h
i
f
g
e
the rear cooling fan motor.
d * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and be
careful of the pulling direction of the harness (B).
c
Parts
a Rear cooling fan motor
B
b Ozone fan motor A
c Power cooling fan motor
d Power cooling fan motor2
e Controller cooling fan motor
f Fusing fan motor
g Process air inlet fan motor
h LSU cooling fan motor
i Cartridge cooling fan motor
(1) Rear cooling fan motor

2) Open the control box. (2) Ozone fan motor
MX-5001N FAN SECTION Q 1

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove
the ozone fan motor from the filter box unit. the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.
(3) Power cooling fan motor

6) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove harness (B) facing upward.
the power cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
C
B
B
A
(4) Power cooling fan motor2
(5) Controller cooling fan motor
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
4) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector,
and remove the AC power PWB unit.

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 3) Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the pro-
the controller cooling fan motor. cess air inlet fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
(8) LSU cooling fan motor

A
1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
(6) Fusing fan motor
the fusing fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.

B A the LSU cooling fan motor.
(7) Process air inlet fan motor

1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the screw. Remove the duct. At the unit on its side
and disconnect the connector.
(9) Cartridge cooling fan motor

1) Remove the screw (A) and disconnect the connector (B).
Remove the drive rear exhaust duct unit.
2) Remove the screw (C) and disconnect the connector and the
harness. Remove the cartridge cooling fan motor.
A
B

[R] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
MX-5001N 3) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch unit.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Sensor/Switch
4) Disconnect the connector, disengage the pawl, and remove

the main switch.
c * When installing, be careful of connection of the connector.
b
a
3
2
R
1
Parts
a Main switch F
b Front door open/close switch
c Right door open/close switch
(1) Main switch (2) Front door open/close switch

1) Remove the front cabinet. 1) Remove the frame cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close
switch unit.
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the front door open/close switch.
2
3
MX-5001N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION R 1

(3) Right door open/close switch
4) Remove the resist roller unit.
the right door open/close switch cover unit.
6) Remove the right door open/close switch.
MX-5001N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION R 2

1 : Oct. 24 2008
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
CODE: 00ZMX4100/C1/
DIGITAL FULL COLOR


MX-4100N/4101N
MX-4100FN/4101FN
MX-5000N/5001N
MX-3600FN 1
MODEL MX-5000FN/5001FN
CONTENTS
[1] BLOCK DIAGRAM /
[2] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND PARTS LAYOUT /
[3] POWER LINE DIAGRAM /
[4] SIGNAL LIST /
[5] CONNECTOR LIST /
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
[1] BLOCK DIAGRAM [1]

1. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. MFP CONTROLLER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 2. MFP PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 3. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
4. SCANNER CONTROL PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 4. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
5. LSU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 5. LSU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
6. SERIAL COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
7. FAX (MX-FXX2, MX-3600FN/4100FN/4101FN/ 7. FAX (MX-FXX2, MX-3600FN/4100FN/4101FN/
5000FN/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8 5000FN/5001FN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
[2] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND PARTS LAYOUT [2]

2. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-87 2. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
3. MOTHER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-129 3. MOTHER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
4. SCANNER CONTROL PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-155 4. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
5. DSPF cnt PWB 5. DSPF cnt PWB
(MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-195 (MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
6. LSU CNT PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-217 6. LSU CNT PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217
7. MFP OPE PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-233 7. MFP OPE PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-233
8. DRIVER MAIN PWB, DRIVER SUB PWB . . . . . . . .2-235 8. PWB PWB . . . 2-235
9. RSPF DRIVER PWB 9. RSPF PWB
(MX-3600FN/4100N/4100FN/5000N/5000FN) . . . . .2-241 (MX-3600FN/4100N/4100FN/5000N/5000FN) . . . . 2-241
10. DSPF DRIVER PWB 10. DSPF
(MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-243 (MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-243
11. 8.5 LVDS PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-249 11. 8.5 LVDS PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249
12. HL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-253 12. HL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
13. AC POWER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-255 13. AC PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-255
5000FN/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-261 5000FN/5001FN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-261
[3] POWER LINE DIAGRAM [3]

1. AC POWER LINE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 1. AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. DC POWER LINE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 2. DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
[4] SIGNAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 [4] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] CONNECTOR LIST [5]
2. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 2. PCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
3. MOTHER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 3. MOTHER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
4. SCANNER CONTROL PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 4. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5. DSPF cnt PWB 5. DSPF cnt PWB
(MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 (MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
6. LSU CNT PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 6. LSU CNT PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
7. MFP OPE PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 7. MFP OPE PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
8. DRIVER MAIN PWB, DRIVER SUB PWB . . . . . . . . . .5-9 8. PWB PWB . . . . . 5-9
9. RSPF DRIVER PWB 9. RSPF PWB
(MX-3600FN/4100N/4100FN/5000N/5000FN) . . . . . . .5-9 (MX-3600FN/4100N/4100FN/5000N/5000FN) . . . . . . 5-9
10. DSPF DRIVER PWB 10. DSPF
(MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 (MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
11. 8.5 LVDS PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 11. 8.5 LVDS PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
12. HL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 12. HL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
13. AC POWER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 13. AC PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
14. DC POWER PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 14. DC PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
15. TM-DRV PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 15. TM-DRV PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
16. RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 16. I/F PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
17. 1st TC PWB, 2nd TC PWB, MC PWB . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 17. 1 PWB2 PWBMC PWB . . . . . . . . 5-12
18. WH PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 18. WH PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5000FN/5001FN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 5000FN/5001FN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
1

A.
PTC UNIT
MX-4101N
PTC_HEATER
DERIVERY UNIT 2TC PTC_HV DSPF UNIT

1 : Oct. 24 2008
POD1 POFM_F SPOD STRC SPFC SLUM SPED1 SPLS1

DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD SPPD5
FUFM RCFM PCSFM1 PCSFM2
STUD STRRC SRRC SPUM SPED2 SPLS2
POD2 POFM_R SPPD4
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT STLD STRRBC SRRBC SPFM SCOV
TFD2 OSM SPPD3

SPPD1 SFPFAN SPOM
SPPD2
HPOS FUM PROCESS DRIVE UNIT DSPF DRIVER
SPRANDOM
PWB CL
SOCD
TM-DRV
ADUM_L PWB CCD PWB
HLPCD
POM DSPFcnt
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y ROCD CL INVERTER
PWB PWB
WEB_M DM_M
DRV_ SCANNER UNIT
ADUM_H SUB
PWB Option Option
Option
1TURC DVM_K DVM_CL
BTM AUDITOR
MX-4101N/4101FN/5001N/5001FN

DHPD_M
DHPD_K
1TURC_R (DHPD_CL)
USB USB CN CL
RRM CONV CONV
PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L
CL INVERTER
PWB OCSW
OPERATION UNIT
SCNC
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
PWB
CCD ORS-PD
[1] BLOCK DIAGRAM /
HUB PANEL
PWB
PWB
TH4_FU PWB
LCD
PWB
REGS_F
TH5_FU MOTHER- MHPS
WEBD or MOTHER
HUB
PWB
PWB
REGS_R
PS UNIT POWER SW
PWB
PCSS
1. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM /
MOTHER
PCU
PWB
PPD2
CSS1 CSS2 CAFM PSFM

HDD
OPTION LSU UNIT
PWB
CCFM
MX-4101N BLOCK DIAGRAM / 1 1

APPD1 POD3 FAX2
UNIT UNIT LD PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS
%KTEWKV&KCITCO

PWB
RD I/F HL
PWB PWB
LD_C
DSW_ADU PWB
FIN 1K
PWB LD_M

LD_Y
PWB
HPFM CSPD1 CSPD2

BD_K
MPED MPUC
PWB
DHSW
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB PGM
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS PWB
MSW
WH
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS
DH1
AC IN

1
B.
PTC UNIT
PTC_HEATER
DERIVERY UNIT 2TC PTC_HV RSPF UNIT
POD1 POFM_F
DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD SPPD1 SOCD
FUFM RCFM PCSFM1 PCSFM2 SGS SPLS1
1 : Oct. 24 2008
POD2 POFM_R
SPPD2 SCOV
SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT
TFD2 OSM SPED
SPPD3
SPRM SPPD5 SPWS
HPOS FUM PROCESS DRIVE UNIT SPFC SRRC
RSPF
TM-DRV PWB
ADUM_L PWB
HLPCD
POM
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y

WEB_M DM_M
DRV_ SCANNER UNIT
ADUM_H SUB
PWB Option Option
Option
1TURC DVM_K DVM_CL
BTM AUDITOR
DHPD_M
DHPD_K
1TURC_R (DHPD_CL)
USB USB CN CL
RRM CONV CONV
PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L
CL INVERTER
PWB OCSW
OPERATION UNIT
SCNC
MX-3600FN/4100N/4100FN/5000N/5000FN
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y

PWB
CCD ORS-PD
HUB PANEL
PWB
PWB
TH4_FU PWB
LCD
PWB
REGS_F
TH5_FU MOTHER- MHPS
WEBD or MOTHER
HUB
PWB
PWB
REGS_R
PS UNIT POWER SW
PWB
PCSS
MOTHER
PCU
PWB
PPD2
CSS1 CSS2 CAFM PSFM

HDD
OPTION LSU UNIT
PWB

CCFM
APPD1 POD3 FAX2
UNIT UNIT LD PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS
PWB
RD I/F HL
PWB PWB
LD_C
DSW_ADU PWB
FIN 1K
PWB LD_M

LD_Y
PWB
HPFM CSPD1 CSPD2

BD_K
MPED MPUC
PWB
DHSW
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB PGM
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS PWB
MSW
WH
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS
DH1
AC IN

SATA2 Keyboard USB HOST LCD Pannel SCANNER Control
(Opt) TYPE-A CN
HDD (FRONT) LVDS System (SCU)
SATA
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM
SYSTEM Memory
Memory
DDR2 DIMM DIP
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA USB HUB
Device Interface Interface SWITCH Controller
SLOT Controller USB2.0
0 1
Host
Controller
SDRAM SDRAM
Controller 64Mbx2 PCU
DDR/DDR2 IF HDD ASIC
Giga
LAN JACK RTC
BitEther GMII RTC
RJ45 Controller
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
(4Lane) Interface (x10)
Interface
SOC (4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
Local-Bus LCDC
Controller
Controller
D-SUB9 RS232C
MPC8533E Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON. (4lane)
1000MHz
PCI-Express
able
Interface
Interrupt
Program-
Controller
(1lane)
256Kb
Local Bus EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART Controller
Controller
Controller
Board to Board Connector
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
PCI
Express
FPDLINK FPDLINK FPDLINK LVDS
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
CPLD SW
PCI-Express SCAN LSU
Interface
PIC
Micon.
PCI Express ACRE
Clock ROM FLASH
Generater
MFP ASIC
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video In
2. MFP CONTROLLER PWB / MFP PWB
Memory
Out
Controlller
SRAM Mother PWB
4Mbit
I2C
FAX PROGROM & OPT
(2nd) Local Memory SRAM
CN FLASH DIMM DDR2 DIMM
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
1Mbit

H8S/2373
PROGROM
FLASH DIMM
Video In
Out
SMIC
HCSL
Clock
Codec ASIC
79MHz
ACRE ASIC
SLOT
Connecter
DDR2 DIMM
ACRE-DSP OPTION
ACRE Local Memory
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
MFPC PWB ACRE PWB (MX-EBX3)

1 : Oct. 24 2008
3. PCU PWB
1 A. MX-3600FN/4100N/4101N/4100FN/4101FN
Stepping Motor
Fuser Unit HV
HLcontrol Pout motor (POM)/ADU motor High (ADUH)/ FAN
MC/TC unit ADU motor Low (ADUL)/Shifter motor (OSM)/
HL_UM/LM/US/EX PoutFAN (POFM1/2)/
PMC PSF motor (PFM)/ OzoneFAN (OZFM)
Horizontal paper feed motor ( HPFM)/
IC25 Resist motor (RRM)/Drum motor K (DM_K/CL)/
IC33 Toner motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)/ Drum lamp
EEPROM
RESET IC Belt motor (BTM) (DL_K/C/M/Y)
(64kbit)
Fusing separates motor (PRM)
PWM Load Contorl Output
X1 Adress bus CRUM MPGS/CPUC1/CPUC2/CPFC/
Xtal FlashROM CRUM_K/C/M/Y 1TRUC/1TURC_R/PCSS/LSUSS_B/
Data bus Sensor Input
19.6608MHz (16Mbit) MPUC/MPFS/PCSFM1_V/PCSFM2_V/
HV Error
IC26 PTC_ERR/MC_CL_ERR/MC_BK_ERR
SRAM Motor Lock Detect
(1Mbit) PCSFM2_LD
MFP
UART Sensor Input

Synchronous Motor DC brushless Motor DHPD_K/C/M/Y/
Mother SCI 1TNFD/WEBD/1TUD_CL/POD2/HPOS/POD3/
WEBM FUM/DVM_BK/DVM_CL
IC54 CLUD1/CLUD2/MPFD/APPD3/CPED1/CPED2/
PMCASIC CPFD1/CPFD2/CSPD1/CSPD2/PPD1/TFD2
CLK BUN Drum Lamp Open Detect
PWM DL_OPEN_K/C/M/Y
LSU DC brushless Motor Coin Vendor PTC Heater Open Detect
CPFM CV_START/CV_COUNT/ PTCHT_OPEN
Option CV_COLOR1/CV_COLOR0/ Motor Lock Detect
Synchronous Motor DVM_CL_LD/DVM_K_LD/POFM_LD1/POFM_LD2/
CV_CA/CV_SIZE0/CV_SIZE1/
WTNM PCSFM1_LD/FUM_LD/RCFM_LD/OZFM_LD/
IC36 CV_SIZE2/CV_SIZE3/
UART PSFM_LD/CCFM_LD/CPFM_LD/
LCC CPU CV_STAPLE/CV_DUPLEX/
CLK IC32 Fuser Thermistor Open Detect
H8S/2373 THOPEN_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2/UMCS
I/O ASIC Coin Vendor
CV_COPY/CV_CLCOPY
UART
DESK
Load Contorl Output
FIN Resist sensor
IC24 CSS11/12/13/14/21/22/23/24
Load Control Output PTC HEATER

CAFM_V/FUFM_VL/FUF M_VH
MUX Sensor Input

Sensor Input
PPD2 Analog Input
Fuser Themistor
B. MX-5000N/5001N/5000FN/5001FN
1
Stepping Motor
Drum motor K (DM_BK/DM_C/DM_M/DM_Y)/
Belt motor (BTM)
Fuser Unit HV FAN
HLcontrol MC/TC unit Stepping Motor PoutFAN (POFM1/2)/
HL_UM/LM/US/EX Pout motor (POM)/ADU motor High (ADUH)/ OzoneFAN (OZFM)
PMC ADU motor Low (ADUL)/Shifter motor (OSM)/
IC25 PSF motor (PFM)/
IC33 Drum lamp
EEPROM Horizontal paper feed motor ( HPFM)/
RESET IC (64kbit) (DL_K/C/M/Y)
Resist motor (RRM)/
PWM Toner motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)/
X1 CRUM Fusing separates motor (PRM)
Adress bus Load Contorl Output
Xtal FlashROM CRUM_K/C/M/
Data bus Y MPGS/CPUC1/CPUC2/CPFC/
19.6608MHz (16Mbit) 1TRUC/1TURC_R/PCSS/LSUSS_B/
Sensor Input MPUC/MPFS/PCSFM1_V/PCSFM2_V/
IC26 HV Error
SRAM PTC_ERR/MC_CL_ERR/MC_BK_ERR
(1Mbit) Motor Lock Detect
MFP
PCSFM2_LD
UART
Synchronous Motor DC brushless Motor Sensor Input
Mother SCI FUM/DVM_BK/DVM_CL DHPD_K/C/M/Y/
WEBM
IC54 1TNFD/WEBD/1TUD_CL/POD2/HPOS/POD3/
PMC ASIC CLUD1/CLUD2/MPFD/APPD3/CPED1/CPED2/
CLK BUN CPFD1/CPFD2/CSPD1/CSPD2/PPD1/TFD2
LSU PWM DC brushless Motor Drum Lamp Open Detect
Coin Vendor DL_OPEN_K/C/M/Y
CPFM
CV_START/CV_COUNT/ PTC Heater Open Detect
Option Synchronous Motor CV_COLOR1/CV_COLOR0/ PTCHT_OPEN
WTNM CV_CA/CV_SIZE0/CV_SIZE1/ Motor Lock Detect
IC36 CV_SIZE2/CV_SIZE3/ DVM_CL_LD/DVM_K_LD/POFM_LD1/POFM_LD2/
UART
LCC CPU CV_STAPLE/CV_DUPLEX/ PCSFM1_LD/FUM_LD/RCFM_LD/OZFM_LD/
CLK IC32 PSFM_LD/CCFM_LD/CPFM_LD/
H8S/2373 Coin Vendor
I/O ASIC Fuser Thermistor Open Detect
CV_COPY/CV_CLCOPY THOPEN_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2/UMCS
UART
DESK
Load Contorl Output
FIN Resist sensor
IC24 CSS11/12/13/14/21/22/23/24
Load Contorl Output PTC HEATER
CAFM_V/FUFM_VL/FUFM_VH
MUX Sensor Input

Sensor Input
PPD2 Analog Input
Fuser Themistor

4. SCANNER CONTROL PWB / PWB
3.3V DSPFcnt DSPF model
1.8V Page Memory

CCD-R RGB 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
(DSPF side) Tr Rx FPD Link
10V Tr 35bit
Tr AFE SCN
3line color CCD Tr ASIC
LVDS IC Tx
TCD2716ADG Tr 28bit
(Medusa)
Tr AFE_CS 10V/5V/3V
BUFFER Two serial systems

BUFFER AD_CLK
AFE_CSTG
CPU
SH, 1, others Timing 5V/3.3V motor DRIVER H8S/2373
(74VHCT
generator sensors 244)
F-ROM
Oscillator SRAM
(DIMM)
DRIVER
PWB
F-ROM
(for Shading DATA storage)
CL 24V
12V
5V Communication, others
3.3V
Power supply
3.3V
1.8V To CPU
CCD-F
(Machine side) Tr RGB DATA
10V Tr
Tr Image data
AFE
3line color CCD Tr
TCD2716ADG Tr SCNcnt line buf
Tr AFE_CS Oscillator 16 (8Mx16bit)
line buf
BUFFER 16 (8Mx16bit)
BUFFER AD_CLK clk SS LVDS IC Rx
RGB Rx FPD Link
28bit
35bit
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus mother
SH, 1, others Timing 5V/.33V 10V/5V/3V

generator SCN
ASIC BUS
Oscillator
3.3VPD SW
LVDS IC Tx
Two serial systems 1.5V Image data 28bit
CS3
12 10V CTRL_A10V IPD/IDOCC

12 5V CTRL_A5V
5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
1.2V
Mirror
.Motor 3.3VPD
MOTOR
DRIVER
Copy Lamp BUSBUF

powdown
MHP sensor
CPU CS2 CS0
RSPF UN H8S/2373 F-ROM
SRAM
RSPF model MOTOR (DIMM)
DRIVER
E2PROM
uart, others
HC151 SEL_A/B/C
Sensors CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT) IO ASIC

or LCDs detection
LVDS PWB (8.1 inch mono) PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1
PNL_SEL2 HC151 LCD_SKT
PNL_SEL3 LCDs detection
Touch panel
CCFT_CPU
INV PWB /CCFT
nLCD_DISP
Vcc REG (ON/OFF)
8.5 inch Rx
LCD 28bit
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
Original size sensor PDSEL2
PD
5V2
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V2
Buzzer /BZR
LED matrix LED drive circuit

5. LSU PWB
TH
Thermistor
Thermistor output
AMP
ID[0:0]
Hardware reset I2C BUS I2C
Reset input Reset IC ROM
ASIC
CHIP-2
Motor control PGM_CK
PGM_START
Interruption output (PGM_BREAK) 3
JOBEND_INT
Polygon O.C.
Polygon
ASIC control PGM_LOCK
PCU I/F motor
CHIP-2
PCU SCK Register etc...
RSV_DAT
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN control
O.C. O.C.
LSU
ASIC FANSTABLE
FAN
Clock synchronous serial communication CHIP-2
CLK_C_EN
TRANS_DAT
CLK_M_EN
ASIC
CHIP-2 CLK_A_EN
Print trigger input PCU_TRG LSU_ASIC

CHIP-1 3 PIC
Oscillator SYSCLK Serial transfer

S/S
(System CK) LD control DA_CLK
DA_DT Vref YMCK x2
Serial DA_LD Serial 8
ASIC
D/A I/F D/A
CHIP-2
ECLK ECLK nSHMY x2 4

LVDS/Driver
HSYNC HSYNC LD_ENB MY 2

O.C.
VSYNC_M/Y
4 VSYNC LD5V
VSYNC_K/C ASIC LD control
Main Scan/ (APC etc...) LDERR YMCK
CHIP-2 Sub scan
Image transfer CK ECKL timing control BD
HSYNC HSYNC nSHB MY x2

ASIC
FPD-LINK/Reciver
CHIP-2
ASIC
LD_CHK 1/2/3/4 4
CHIP-2
35:5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A: M1 circuit
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B: M2 circuit
35:5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C: Y1 circuit
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D: Y2 circuit
VIDEOIF_ACT
OSCCLK_C Oscillator CLK_C_EN

(Color CK)
OSCCLK_M Oscillator CLK_M_EN
Print trigger chain (Monochrome CK)
OSCCLK_A Oscillator CLK_A_EN

(Heavy paper CK)
LD
ID[0:1] BD
I2C bus I2C
MFP Hardware reset ROM
Motor control
Interruption output Polygon
PCU I/F control Reserve circuit for LDD made by AKM
Clock synchronous serial communication AKM_SDCLK
Register etc... FAN control
SCK
RSV_DAT AKM_APCSEL_CMYK
TRANS_RST nSHB MY x2 4
nSHB KC x2
TRANS_DAT
AKM_RESET_LDD
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP-2 AKM_CS_CMYK 4
AKM LDD serial communication

VSYNC_K/C LD control
AKM_SCK
ECLK Main Scan/ AKM_SDT 2
Serial
Sub scan
D/A I/F
HSYNC timing control
nSH KC x2 4
LD_ENB KC 2
LD control O.C.
(APC etc...)
BD LD5V
nSHB KC x2
FPD-LINK/Reciver
35:5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A: K1 circuit
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B: K2 circuit
35:5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C: C1 circuit
DT_C2+- 2
Channel D: C2 circuit

P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
SCN Cnt
P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RxD TxD[2]
Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0] Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
P.U.
PD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD
RxD
P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
TxD_FIN
CPU DTR_SCAN
O.C. Schmit Inv. DSR_SCAN
H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RxD_SCAN
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
P.U.
P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
6. SERIAL COMMUNICATION /
TxD3 RxD CLR[PIC]
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD REQ[PIC]
P.D.
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK MFPC
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
O.C. O.C. I/F ASIC
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C. (Optional) H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mot her MFPC

O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC DSPF Cnt(for DSPF model)
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[3]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX (D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[3]
I/O RxD_FAX (D)
DSR_LCC LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) ) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[4]
TxD_FAX (CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[4]
RxD_FAX (CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
I/O ASIC ASIC
A[4:0] P.U.
RTS[3]
PD65892GC- DTR_FAX (D)
D[15:8] TxD
103 Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[3]
PIC DSR_FAX (D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[4]
DTR_FAX (CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[4]
2nd FAX DSR_FAX (CS)
(same as 1st) 1st FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Optional) (for FG Model)
1 : Oct. 24 2008
1 7. FAX (MX-FXX2, MX-3600FN/4100FN/4101FN/5000FN/5001FN)

A. MX-FXX2 (Except Japan)
RGDT-(CI detection)
Operation in 1W/7W
energy-save mode

1
B.

DAA

1 : Oct. 24 2008

1((
CI

CI
MX-3600FN/4100FN/4101FN/5000FN/5001FN (Japan)

MR
EC
5


1((

99

[2] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND PARTS LAYOUT
MX-4101N
/
%KTEWKV&KCITCO
1. MFP CONTROLLER PWB / MFP PWB

A. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM /
5 4 3
MFPC PWB (ReSet Tree)
5V_IN
ICB1
1 5
NC VCC CB402
D 2
A 0.1uF(B)
DGND
3 4 CP339
GND Y
OPEN-DRAIN BUFFER
TC7SZ07FU(TE85L_F)
5V_IN DGND
RB168 RB166
4.7KJ X_0J
5V_IN
BU4238F
2 4 CP340 COREPWR_OE {4}
VDD VOUT
CB408 1 3 CP342
GND CT
1uF(1608:B) ICB2 CB412 CB406
{4,8,42,43} PWROFF_BK2
3.8V DETECT 0.01uF(B) 1000pF(B)
DGND
DGND DGND
5V_IN
ICB3
1 5
NC VCC CB330
2 0.1uF(B)
A DGND
3 4 CP257
GND Y
OPEN-DRAIN BUFFER
5V_IN TC7SZ07FU(TE85L_F)
DGND
RB109 RB110
C 5V_IN 4.7KJ X_0J
BU4240F
2 4 CP249 IOPWR_OE {4}
VDD VOUT
CB396 1 3 CP327
GND CT
1uF(1608:B) ICB4 CB395 CB394 CB323
CB325
4.0V DETECT 0.01uF(B) 0.01uF(B) 0.01uF(B)
DGND 1000pF(B)
DGND DGND
3R3V
RB113
10KJ
5V_IN BU4242F
2 4 CP255 nHARDRESET {6}
VDD VOUT
CB341 1 3 CP256
GND CT
1uF(1608:B) ICB5 CB337
4.2V DETECT 0.1uF(1608:B)

DGND
DGND
B
SW1
D_SKQMBAE010
Force Reset by Another PWB C
B 10K R113
{30} RES_MFP_MT
QB2 D_1KJ
DTC114YUB
47K
E
DGND DGND
5 4 3
MX-4101N CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND PARTS LAYOUT / 2 1

3 2 1
1/42 (3)
5V_IN
RB167
4.7KJ
D
COREPWR_OE_ECO {4}
B 10K
QB4
DTC114YUB
47K
E
DGND
B 10K
QB3
DTC114YUB
47K
E
DGND
5V_IN
RB114
10KJ
IOPWR_OE_ECO {4}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (DC POWER)
5V_IN
C394
1uF(1608:B) R315 R314

3.3KJ 10KJ
SENSE1_UP
IC7 LTC3850EGN#PBF
5V_IN
{3} COREPWR_OE 1 RUN1 FREQ/PLLFLTR 28
CP691 CB645
CP694 + C350 + C348
R313 10J CP715 10uF(2012:F) 120uF/6.3V(PXA/F60) 120uF/6.3V(PXA/F60)
2 27 RB407
SENSE1+ MODE/PLLIN
5
6
7
8
C393 X_1KJ DGND DGND DGND
D
D
D
D
1000pF(B) DGND
R312 10J 3 26 ICB6
SENSE1- SW1 TPC8021-H
G
S
S
S
CP695
CP693 CP698
4
3
2
1
C392 4 25 L32
1000pF(B) TK/SS1 TG1 CP652 NR10050T2R1N R285 CP590
CB687
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
22pF(CH) CP688 CP696 CP697 C391
5
6
7
8
CP690
C390 5 24 PMR50HZPFU6L00(5025)
RB408 R311 1000pF(B) I_TH1 BOOST1
D
D
D
D
30KF 10KJ C389 0.1uF(B)
10uF(2012:F)
220pF(CH) CP701 DB10
6 23 ICB8 RB050LA-30
VFB1 BG1
G
S
S
S
TPC8021-H + +
CP700
C310
CB688
4
3
2
1
C311
C312
X_8pF(CH) RB409
120KF 7 22
SGND VIN
CP703 D22 RB461F DGND DGND

8 21 DGND
VFB2 INTVCC D21 RB461F
CB689 C384
4
3
2
1
X_33pF(CH) 100pF(CH) CP699 CP702
C 9 20
G
S
S
S
RB410 R310 C388 I_TH2 BG2 ICB9 DB11
24KF 33KJ CP689 470pF(B) TPC8021-H RB050LA-30
CB690 CP706 R284
D
D
D
D
RB411 C383 10 19 PMR50HZPFU10L0(5025) Soc
22pF(CH) 30KF 1000pF(B) TK/SS2 PGND CP710 CP567
5
6
7
8
DGND
CP709 CP704 C382 L31
CP653
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
R309 10J 11 18 NR6045T2R3N
SENSE2- BOOST2
4
3
2
1
10uF(2012:F)
C381 0.1uF(B)
G
S
S
S
CP707 ICB10
1000pF(B)12 17 TPC8021-H +
SENSE2+ TG2
C307
R308 10J
D
D
D
D
CP705
C349
5
6
7
8
13 16
SIGNALGND
RUN2 SW2
DGND DGN
CP711
14 15 CPUVCCPG CB646
I_LM PGOOD
10uF(2012:F)
CP692
X_PADSHORT
X_PADSHORT
5V_IN L39 DGND

BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
RJ2
RJ3
C385 C386 C387
10uF(2012:F) 2.2uF(2012:B) 0.1uF(B)

DGND DGND DGND
SENSE2_UP
D20 R306
CPUVCCPG 5V_IN
LT1F67AF CP712 470J

B
Green LED Light to Trouble MPU cannot run.
5V_IN
IC11
1 NC VCC 5 3R3V
R307
CP412 2 10KJ
{6} GVDD_ON A CP708 1R8V
3 4 L24
RB412 GND Y NFM21PC475B1A3 CP400
1KJ OPEN-DRAIN BUFFER
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
TC7SZ07FU(TE85L_F)
3R3V C300
+
C191
DGND DGND 10uF(201

CB691
DGND
0.1uF(B) DGND DGND
DGND
A Bank1 3.3V
3R3V
MOD4
8 GND VOUT 1
CP346 CP259
R154 7 2
470KF ADJUST VOUT + C2
6 3 120uF/6.3V(PXA/F60)
{3} IOPWR_OE ON/OFF PGOOD
5V_IN 5 4 1R0V 1R0V_HDD
VIN GND C145 C144
MPD5M006S DGND
C146 10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B)
DGND DGND R257 R316
10uF(2012:F) 47KJ 47KJ
DGND
DGND
DGND DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
2/42 (4)
HDD ASIC Core

1R0V L41 1R0V_HDD
NFM21PC475B1A3
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
+
C395
DGND DGND D
MOD1 CP685
8 GND VOUT 1
CP686
RB377 7 2
18KF ADJUST VOUT
{3} COREPWR_OE 6 ON/OFF PGOOD 3
5V_IN 5 VIN GND 4
X_MPD5M006S C397 C396
DGND C351 DGND 10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B)
10uF(2012:F)
DGND
DGND
Soc Core
1R0V
1uF(1608:B)
C309
5V_IN
GND MFP ASIC Core
1R2V_ECO
MOD2 CP89 RB92
8 1 10KJ
GND VOUT
CP100 C
R108 7 2 CP687
30KF ADJUST VOUT
{3} COREPWR_OE_ECO 6 ON/OFF PGOOD 3

oc DDR2
5V_IN 5 VIN GND 4
MPD5M006S CB202 CB203

C139
DGND DGND 10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B)
1uF(1608:B)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
DGND DGND
C306
C308
DGND
RB46
{3} IOPWR_OE_ECO
0J
MFP ASIC DDR2
1R8V_EC2
MOD3 CP30
8 GND VOUT 1 220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
CP38
10uF(2012:F)
RB47 7 2
ADJUST VOUT
1uF(1608:B)
C6
100KF
6 ON/OFF PGOOD 3
+
C50
C48
5V_IN 5 VIN GND 4
MPD5M006S
C85 DGND DGND 5V_IN
DGND DGND B
10uF(2012:F)
R37
DGND 10KJ
CP37
HDD ASIC PCIe

1R8V_HDD IC70
CP722
1 Vout Vcc 8 5V_IN Bank2 3.3V
CP721
R55 2 7 3R3V_ECO
0 C301 47KJ ITH PVcc CP720 L47
{3} IOPWR_OE_ECO 3 EN SW 6
(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) C107 LQH32PN4R7NN0 CP719
4 GND PGND 5
470pF(B) C106 C108 + C105
D BD9104FVM-TR 120uF/6.3V(PXA/F60)
C100 10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B)
DGND 10uF(2012:F)
DGND DGND
DGND
3R3V_ECO
A
R117
220J
3R3V_ECO
CP99
R116
220J
C
CP723
HDD 1R8V 3R3V 1R2V_ECO 1R8V_EC2 {3,8,42,43} PWROFF_BK2 R115 B
10KJ Q15 RB81
2SC2412K 47KJ
E
R114
316 R283 R112 R49 R36 47KJ
KJ 47KJ 47KJ 47KJ 47KJ
DGND
GND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (GLOBAL CLOCK)
GP7 GP12
3R3V DGND
C224 C222 C169 C170
X_PADSHORT
RJ6
X8 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
2
D FA-365_14.7456_50ppm C225 DGND DGND DGND DGND
X_27pF(CH)
CP221
#2
IC12
1 20 R139
VDDc CLK9
#1
22J
DGND C223 2 19
XOUT VSS CP224
X_27pF(CH)
1
3 18 R138
XIN CLK8 10J
4 VSS VDD3 17
CP294 CP225
{6} CPLD_REFCLK CP295 R204 10J 5 16
CLK1 CLK7
R203 X_10J 6 15
CP297 CP296 VDD1 VDD2 CP228
{8} SOC_SYSCLK R202 7 14
10J CLK2 CLK6
8 VSS VSS 13
CP229
CP235 9 12 RSV33M
CP299 FS0 CLK5 CP231
10 11 R133
FS1 CLK4 10J
CY25404-006(KUBERA)
DGND DGND
{6,8} DCPWRON_BANK2 DCPWRON_BANK2
{8} SOC_RTC_CLK
3R3V_ECO
3R3V
C167
R201 X6 0.1uF(B)
C X_4.7KJ 1 ST VDD 4 DGND
C
2 GND OUT 3
SSCGOFF
GP8 GP9 X_SG-310SCF_50ppm_25MHz
R200 DGND
4.7KJ
DGND
DGND
3R3V
3R3V_CLKBUF
GP4 GP3
C171
CP153 10uF(2012:F) C128 C
R105 1J 3R3V
DGND DGND 1000pF(B) 0
C131 C130
X4 0.01uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
1 4 DGND DGND IC14
ST VDD
2 3 DIFCLKBUF_IN R88 1 48
GND OUT 22J XIN/CLKIN VDDA
SG-310SCF_50ppm_25MHz CP163 2 47
X2 GNDA CP168
B DGND CB204 3 46 IREF R78
0.1uF(B) VDD IREF 475F
DGND 4 45 DGN
GND FS0 (PD)
5 44 DGN
CP156 R89 REFOUT FS1 (PD)
{36} CODEC_SYS_CLKP CP157 R90 33J DCPWRON_BANK2
{36} CODEC_SYS_CLKN 6 FS2 (PD) OE_0 (PD) 43
33J
DGND 7 42 PCIE_CLK0P CP174
R97 R98 DCPWRON_BANK2 OE_7 (PD) DIF_0
49.9F 49.9F 8 41 PCIE_CLK0M CP169
CP159 DIF_7 DIF_0#
CP164 9 40 CB208
CB205 DIF_7# VDD 0.1uF(B)
0.1uF(B) 10 39 DGND
DGND DGND VDD DIF_1 PCIE_CLK1P CP175
CP85 R91 CP160 PCIE_CLK6P 11 38 PCIE_CLK1M CP170
{18} MFP_PCIE_CLKP CP84 R92 33J DIF_6 DIF_1#
{18} MFP_PCIE_CLKN 33J CP165 PCIE_CLK6M 12 DIF_6# OE_1 (PU) 37
R99 R100 DCPWRON_BANK2 13 36 CB209

49.9F 49.9F OE_6 (PU) VDD 0.1uF(B)
CB206 14 35 DGND
0.1uF(B) VDD GND
DGND 15 34 3R3V
GND OE_2 (PU)
DGND 16 33 PCIE_CLK2P CP176
OE_5 (PU) DIF_2
CP403 R93 33J CP161 PCIE_CLK5P 17 32 PCIE_CLK2M CP171
{15} HDD_PCIE_CLKP CP401 R94 33J DIF_5 DIF_2#
{15} HDD_PCIE_CLKN CP166 PCIE_CLK5M CB210
18 DIF_5# VDD 31
0.1uF(B)
R101 R102 CB207 19 30 PCIE_CLK3P
49.9F 49.9F 0.1uF(B) VDD DIF_3
DGND 20 29 PCIE_CLK3N
CP162 DIF_4 DIF_3#
CP167 21 28 OPT_REFCLK_OE
DIF_4# OE_3 (PD)
DGND DCPWRON_BANK2 22 27
CP155 OE_4 (PD) SEL14M_25M (PU) CP173
R95 23 26 DGND SPRE
A {40} SWITCH_PCIE_CLKP R96 33J SDATA SPREAD (PD)
{40} SWITCH_PCIE_CLKN CP158 33J 24 SCLK DIF_STOP# 25 3R3V
R103 R104 {6,8,10} S2_I2C_SDA
49.9F 49.9F ICS9FG108CG-LFT
{6,8,10} S2_I2C_SCL
CP577
DGND DGND
DGND
GP6 GP5
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
3/42 (5)
D
CP220
HDD_REFCLK {14}
CP223
HDD_UACLK {16}
CP226
R137 10J MFP_REFCLK {20}
CP227
R136 10J MDDR2_REFCLK {18}
R134 X_10J
R135 X_10J
CP232
C168
27pF(CH)
DGND
B)
C
CP230
3R3V
CP178
R69
1J
C129 C127 C126
0.01uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B)
DGND
B
DGND
DGND CP179
CP180 CODEC_PCIE0_CLKP {36}
CODEC_PCIE0_CLKN {36}
P174 R79 R70 R71

33J 49.9F 49.9F
P169 R80
33J
DGND
P175 R81 CP184
P170 R82 33J CP181 SOC_PCIE2_CLKP {11}
33J SOC_PCIE2_CLKN {11}
R72 R73
X_49.9F X_49.9F
DGND
P176 R83 33J CP185

R84 33J CP182 SOC_PCIE1_CLKP {11}
P171 SOC_PCIE1_CLKN {11}
R74 R75
X_49.9F X_49.9F
DGND
DGND
CP177 R85 33J CP186
CP172 R86 33J CP183 ACRE_PCIE_CLKP {42}
ACRE_PCIE_CLKN {42}
PREAD R87 X_10KJ 3R3V
R76 R77 A
49.9F 49.9F
P577
OPT_REFCLK_OE {6}
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (Address Fetch & Separate)
{8} SOC_LAD[31:0] IC15B

LB_D31 E13 B16 LB_A23
SOC_LAD0 LB_D30 LB_D31 LB_A23 LB_A22
B10 C15
C11 D14
C12 D15
A12 D16
B12 J12
LB_D26 LB_A18
D SOC_LAD5 LB_D25 A13
LB_D25 LB_A17
E14 LB_A17
LB_A16
SOC_LAD6 LB_D24 B13 E15
C13 E16
B14 F13
C14 F14
D13 F15
D11 F16
D12 G14
C10 G15
B11 G16
D4 H14
A8 H15
B3 H16
B6 J14
A2 J15
A5 J16
A9 K14
B4 K15
SOC_LAD23 LB_D7 LB_D8 LB_A0
C8 K16 EXLCS1_BOOT {25}
SOC_LAD24 LB_D6 LB_D7 LCS1_0
C6 L13 EXLCS1_PRG1 {25}
B5 L14 EXLCS1_PCL {25}
B9 L15 EXLCS1_BARCD {25}
C4 L16 EXLCS1_PSJ1_BTM {26}
SOC_LAD28 LB_D2 LB_D3 LCS1_5_BTM
A4 M13 EXLCS1_PSJ1_TOP {26}
SOC_LAD29 LB_D1 LB_D2 LCS1_5_TOP
A6 M14 EXLCS1_PSJ2_BTM {26}
SOC_LAD30 LB_D0 LB_D1 LCS1_6_BTM
C9 M15 EXLCS1_PSJ2_TOP {26}
SOC_LAD31 LB_D0 LCS1_6_TOP
{25,26} RESET_FROM A15 M16 EXLCS1_FAXSTD {26}
NRESET_FROM LCS1_7
{18} RESET_MFP_PCIE A7 N13 EXLCS2_FAXEXT {26}
NRESET_MFP_PCIE LCS2 C
{18,21,24} RESET_MFP B8 N14 EXLCS3_SRAM {27}
NRESET_MFP LCS3
{14,34} RESET_HDD B1 N15
CP292 NRESET_HDD LCS5
{42} RESET_ACRE P15 D5 EXLCS6_HDD {16}
CP293 RST_ACRE LCS6
{42} RESET_DSP N16 P14 SRAM_CE2 {27}
RST_DSP SRAM_CE2
{16} DMA_ACK0_HDD A11 A10 DMA_REQ1_HDD {16}
HDD_DACK_0 HDD_DREQ_1 C
{16} DMA_ACK1_HDD C7 B7 LB_WAIT_HDD {16}
HDD_DACK_1 WAIT_N_HDD
{16} DMA_REQ0_HDD C5 H12
HDD_DREQ_0 WAIT_N_MFP
EPM570F256C5N(Kubera)
I/O BANK = 2
C
IC15A
SOC_LAD0 R6 G3
SOC_LAD0 SOC_LCS0 SOC_LCS0 {8}
SOC_LAD1 R7 K3
SOC_LAD2 P6 J3
SOC_LAD3 P4 J2
SOC_LAD4 R4 F3
SOC_LAD5 N5 E4
SOC_LAD6 R5 E3
SOC_LAD7 P5 D3
SOC_LAD8 H3 N2
SOC_LAD8 LB_WE LB_LWE0 {7,8}
SOC_LAD9 H1 N1
SOC_LAD9 LB_OE LB_OE {7,8}
SOC_LAD10 H2 P12
SOC_LAD10 SOC_DREQ_0 DMA_nREQ0_PLD1 {8}
SOC_LAD11 G1 R13
SOC_LAD11 SOC_DREQ_1 DMA_nREQ1_PLD1 {8}
SOC_LAD12 G2 N12 OPT_REFCL
SOC_LAD13 SOC_LAD12 OPT_REFCLK_OE OPT_INSERT_N_IN RB189
F1 C3
SOC_LAD14 SOC_LAD13 OPT_INSERTN
F2 P8 DMA_ACK0_PLD1 {8}
SOC_LAD15 SOC_LAD14 SOC_DACK_0
E1 P9 DMA_ACK1_PLD1 {8}
SOC_LAD16 SOC_LAD15 SOC_DACK_1 RB1
M4 C2 GVDD_ON {4}
SOC_LAD17 SOC_LAD16 GVDD_ON RB1
E2 R10 GPO_RST_PCU {32}
B SOC_LAD18 M3
SOC_LAD17 RST_PCU
T10 GPO_RST_SCN {32} RB1
SOC_LAD19 SOC_LAD18 RST_SCN RB1
M2 R9 GPI_FAN_THERM {33}
SOC_LAD20 SOC_LAD19 GPI1
D1 P7 nLBACC_TMN {8}
SOC_LAD21 SOC_LAD20 SOC_LGTA_N CP407
D2 R12
SOC_LAD22 SOC_LAD21 HDD_INTN CP298
L4 P13
SOC_LAD23 SOC_LAD22 MFP_INTN
L2 R16 HDD_INT2 {8}
SOC_LAD24 SOC_LAD23 SOC_HDDINTN
L1 R14 MFP_INT2 {8}
SOC_LAD25 SOC_LAD24 SOC_MFPINTN
M1 R8
SOC_LAD26 SOC_LAD25 GPI3
R3 T11
SOC_LAD27 SOC_LAD26 NRESET_PCIESW GPO_LED7
L3 T15
SOC_LAD28 SOC_LAD27 LED7 GPO_LED6
N3 T13
K1 T12
K2 T7
J1 T6
SOC_LAD31 LED3 GPO_LED2
{5,8} DCPWRON_BANK2 P10 T5
BANK2_ON LED2 GPO_LED1
{27} GPO_BT_CHECK P11 T4
BT_CHECK LED1 GPO_LED0
{27} GPI_nLOW_BAT R11 T2
GPI0 LED0
{5,8,10} S2_I2C_SDA P2 M8
SDA_I2C NRESET_CODEC
{5,8,10} S2_I2C_SCL R1 T9 HRESET_4
SCL_I2C SOC_HRESETN
J5 CPLD_REF
REFCLK
H5 LB_ALE
ALE
T8
GPI2
M9 nHARDRES
RESET_N
CB464
EPM570F256C5N(Kubera) 1000pF(B)
I/O BANK = 1
DGND
CP423 RB197
GPO_LED7 D9 470J
LT1F67AF
CP419 RB201
GPO_LED6 D10 470J
LT1F67AF
CP424 RB198
GPO_LED5 D11 470J
LT1F67AF
A CP420 RB202
GPO_LED4 D12 470J
LT1F67AF
CP425 RB199
GPO_LED3 D13 470J
LT1F67AF
CP421 RB203
GPO_LED2 D14 470J
LT1F67AF
CP426 RB200
GPO_LED1 D15 470J
LT1F67AF
CP422 RB204
GPO_LED0 D16 470J
LT1F67AF
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
4/42 (6)
LB_D[31:0] {16,25,26,27} LB_A[23:0] {16,25,26,27}

LB_D31
LB_D30 LB_A23
LB_D29 LB_A22
LB_D28 LB_A21
LB_D27 LB_A20
LB_D26 LB_A19
LB_D25 LB_A18
LB_D24 LB_A17 D
LB_D23 LB_A16
LB_D22 LB_A15
LB_D21 LB_A14
LB_D20 LB_A13
LB_D19 LB_A12
3R3V LB_D18 LB_A11
LB_D17 LB_A10
LB_D16 LB_A9
IC16 LB_D15 LB_A8
TC7SZ04FU(TE85L_F) C221 LB_D14 LB_A7
1 5 LB_D13 LB_A6
NC VCC 0.1uF(B) LB_D12 LB_A5
Y=/A
LB_A0 2 LB_D11 LB_A4

A DGND LB_D10 LB_A3
3 4 LB_D9 LB_A2
GND Y nLB_A0 {27} LB_D8 LB_A1
LB_D7 LB_A0
DGND LB_D6
LB_D5
LB_D4
LB_D3
6} LB_D2
6} LB_D1
6} LB_D0
6} 3R3V
CP748 RB143 2.2KJ

RB142 X_2.2KJ
CP760 RB140 2.2KJ

RB139 X_2.2KJ 3R3V
DGND
C22
0.1uF(B)
C
DGND IC17
20 VCC
{7,8} LB_LWE0 2 18 CP14 R26 33J CP409 ASIC_WE {16}
1A1 1Y1 CP16 R25 33J
4 1A2 1Y2 16 LB_ROM_WE0 {25}
6 14 CP17 R24 33J LB_ROM_WE1 {26}
1A3 1Y3 CP18 R23 33J CP51
8 1A4 1Y4 12 LB_ROM_WE2 {27}
{7,8} LB_OE 11 9 CP44 R31 33J CP43 ASIC_OE {16}
2A1 2Y1 CP42 R32 33J
13 2A2 2Y2 7 LB_ROM_OE0 {25}
15 5 CP41 R33 33J LB_ROM_OE1 {26}
2A3 2Y3 CP39 R34 33J CP40
17 2A4 2Y4 3 LB_ROM_OE2 {27}
1 1G
19 2G
10 GND
TC74LCX244FT(EL_K)
DGND
OPT_REFCLK_OE {5}
RB191 2.2KJ 3R3V
RB190 10KJ 3R3V
FCLK_OE
89 10KJ OPT_INSERT_N {42} 3R3V CP416
L25 3R3V_MAX2 IC15C
RB193 2.2KJ 3R3V_ECO H8 H7
RB194 2.2KJ BLM18PG121SN1(1608) VCCINT GNDINT
3R3V H10 H9
RB192 47KJ C317 C318 J7
VCCINT GNDINT
J8 B
RB195 47KJ VCCINT GNDINT
J9 VCCINT GNDINT J10
DGND 10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B) C1 A1
P407 VCCIO1 GNDIO
HDD_INT_N {16} H6 VCCIO1 GNDIO A16
MFP_INT_N {18} DGND DGND J6 B2
VCCIO1 GNDIO
L8 VCCIO1 GNDIO B15
L9 VCCIO1 GNDIO G7
GPI_FAN_LOCK {33} P1 VCCIO1 GNDIO G8
RESET_PCIESW {40} T3 VCCIO1 GNDIO G9
CP414 T14 G10
VCCIO1 GNDIO
A3 VCCIO2 GNDIO K7
A14 VCCIO2 GNDIO K8
C320 C319 C16 K9
VCCIO2 GNDIO
F8 VCCIO2 GNDIO K10
10uF(2012:F) 1uF(1608:B) F9 R2
VCCIO2 GNDIO
H11 VCCIO2 GNDIO R15
DGND DGND J11 T1
VCCIO2 GNDIO
RESET_CODEC {36} P16 VCCIO2 GNDIO T16
ET_4PLD {8} {35} MAX2_JTAG_TDI L6 TDI
REFCLK {5} {35} MAX2_JTAG_TDO M5 TDO
E {7,8} N4 DGND
{8,14,23,35} JTAG_TMS1 TMS
GPI_FAN_DETECT {33} {8,14,23,35} JTAG_CK1 P3 TCK
RESET {3}
EPM570F256C5N(Kubera)
I/O BANK = 1,2
3R3V_MAX2 3R3V_MAX2
A
CB450 CB451 CB389 CB388 CB449 CB458 CB453 CB466 CB462 CB461 CB459 CB457
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND
DGND DGND DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC CONFIGURATION)
3R3V 3R3V
D
RB303 RB300 RB298 RB296 RB294 R270 R263 R265 R261
4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ
LB_LWE0 {6,8}
SOC_LA27 {8}
SOC_LA28 {8} LB_LWE1 {8}

SOC_LA31 {8}
RB277 RB282 RB281 RB283
RB302 RB299 RB297 RB295 RB293 X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ
DGND
DGND
3R3V 3R3V
RB226 RB225 RB224 RB229 RB228 RB230 RB305 RB304 RB222 RB309 RB223 RB308
4.7KJ X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
TSEC1_TXD[7:0] {12,23} T
TSEC1_TXD0 TSEC3_TXD0
TSEC1_TXD3 R234 X_4.7KJ TSEC3_TXD2
3R3V
TSEC1_TXD7 R235 X_4.7KJ TSEC3_TXD3 RB30
TSEC1_TXD2 TSEC3_TXD7 RB30
B
RB232 RB236 RB235 RB233 RB234 RB312 RB311 RB313 RB238 RB310
X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ
DGND DGND
3R3V 3R3V
RB227 RB221
4.7KJ 4.7KJ
TSEC1_TX_ERR {12,23} TSEC3_TX_ERR {12}
RB231 RB237
X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
DGND DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
5/42 (7)
3R3V 3R3V 3R3V
D
R266 R267 R269 RB287 RB285 RB292 RB290
4.7KJ X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ
LB_CTL {8} LGPL0 {8} LGPL3 {8}

LB_ALE {6,8} LGPL1 {8} LGPL5 {8}
LB_OE {6,8}
RB286 RB284 RB291 RB289
RB280 RB279 RB278 X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
DGND DGND
DGND
3R3V
3R3V
R160 R162
4.7KJ 4.7KJ
PCI_GNT1 {11} PCI_GNT3 {11}
R158 R165
X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
DGND DGND
TSEC3_TXD[7:0] {12}
B307 4.7KJ 3R3V

B306 4.7KJ 3R3V 3R3V
RB163 R157
X_4.7KJ 4.7KJ
B
PCI_GNT2 {11} PCI_GNT4 {11}
R166 R159
4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
DGND DGND
MSRCID0 {8}
MSRCID1 {8}
RB211 RB214
X_4.7KJ X_4.7KJ
A
DGND DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC LOCAL BUS/GPIO/UART/DMA/I2C)
3R3V 3R3V
D
3R3V
R172
10KJ R167 R156 R
10KJ 10KJ 4
IC18
CP418 1 5 C209
{6} HRESET_4PLD A VCC
Y=AB
COP_HRESET 2 0.1uF(B) HRESET_REQ
B
RB196 3 4 CP321
GND Y
2.2KJ
TC7SZ08FU(TE85L_F) COP_SRESET
C213 C210 COP_CKSTP_IN

DGND
DGND 1000pF(B) 1000pF(B) COP_CKSTP_OUT
DGND DGND
{5} SOC_RTC_CLK
{5} SOC_SYSCLK
3R3V 3R3V
{33} TMP_ANODE
{33} TMP_CATHOD
CP3
C157 R163 3R3V R174
2.2KJ 10KJ
0.1uF(B) IC20
1 A0 VCC 8
3R3V 2 7 CP254 WP_2KBIT 3R3V 3R3V 3R3V 3R3V
A1 WP S2_I2C_SCL
3 A2 SCL 6
4 5 S2_I2C_SDA
GND SDA R186 R184 R168 R169
X_CAT24WC02(SOP8) 3R3V 2.2KJ 2.2KJ 2.2KJ 2.2KJ
DGND
CP242 RB153 33J CP315

{27,33} S1_I2C_SDA
CP244 RB152 33J CP313
{27,33} S1_I2C_SCL
C R190 R192 RB206 R180
2.2KJ 2.2KJ 2.2KJ 2.2KJ RB161 33J CP330
{5,6,10} S2_I2C_SDA
RB162 33J CP331
{5,6,10} S2_I2C_SCL
{43} GPI_nEFPWRGOOD
{43} GPI_nEFDETECT
{32} GPI_PICPROG_READ
GPI_CNUPDATE
RB149 RB148 RB205 R182 {32} REQPIC
X_2.2KJ X_2.2KJ X_2.2KJ X_2.2KJ {28} DSR_RS232C
GPO_GPHY1_RSTN CP236
DGND {32} GPO_RES_PIC CP206
GPO_EEP_nWP CP239
C166 3R3V GPO_PD_SDDR_VTT1 CP237
0.1uF(B) GPO_SOCRSV4 CP311
GPO_SOCRSV5 CP309
{32} CLR_PIC R197 0J CP304
3R3V {28} DTR_RS232C
DGND
RB150 RB154 R191 R196 R189

14
7
IC21 R131 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ

WP_2KBIT 2 1 GPO_EEP_nWP 4.7KJ
GND
VCC
1Y 1A
{9} GPO_nPD_SDDR_VTT1 4 3 GPO_PD_SDDR_VTT1
2Y 2A DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
{3,4,42,43} PWROFF_BK2 6 5 CP758 DCPWRON_BANK2 {5,6}
3Y 3A
{6} DMA_nREQ0_PLD1
{35} PWROFF_BK2_2 8 4Y Y=/A 4A 9 {6} DMA_nREQ1_PLD1
Schmitt
{23} GPHY_RST 10 11 GPO_GPHY1_RSTN
5Y 5A
{6} DMA_ACK0_PLD1
12 13 HRESET_REQ {6} DMA_ACK1_PLD1
6Y 6A
B TC74LCX14FT(EL_K)
{32} REQPIC R193 X

CP238 CP303 D6
3R3V R194 4
R130 {28} CTS_RS232C
{28} RTS_RS232C {32} CLR_PIC RB164 X
470J {28} RXD_RS232C
LT1F67AF DGND {28} TXD_RS232C
{32} SRXD1_PIC
3R3V
{32} STXD1_PIC
RB157 1KJ C
RB160 1KJ C
R181 1KJ C
RB213 4
DGND RB217 4
3R3V
3R3V
{7} MSRCID0
{7} MSRCID1 RB218 4
3R3V
3R3V RB216 4
R227 3R3V RB215 4
10J
CN1 CP437 CCBCLK_OU
1 CP486 COP_VDD
1 CP487 COP_HRESET R242 10J COP_CLK
2 2 {6,14,23,35} JTAG_CK1
3 CP593 COP_SRESET R244 10J COP_TDI
3 {35} SOC_JTAG_TDI
4 CP591 COP_CKSTP_IN
4 CP594 COP_CKSTP_OUT {35} SOC_JTAG_TDO R198 10J COP_TMS
5 5 {6,14,23,35} JTAG_TMS1
6 CP596 COP_TRST R187 10J COP_TRST
A 6
7 CP595 COP_CLK
{14,23,35} JTAG_RST1
7 CP597 COP_TDI
8 8
9 CP592 SOC_JTAG_TDO RB151 R243
9 CP598 COP_TMS 1KJ 10KJ
10 10
11 11
X_BM11B-SRSS-TB DGND DGND

DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
6/42 (8)
4.7KJ R42 GPI_CNUPDATE CP98
R41
10KJ C60
3R3V 0.1uF(B)
SW2
1 ON 4 DGND DGND
A1 B1 4.7KJ R43
2 A2 B2 3 USB_SEL_SW {30}
D
KSP22
R44
RB156 R173 10KJ
4.7KJ 4.7KJ
IC19C DGND
CP328 AG15 L19 CP565 SOC_LA27 {7}

HRESET_REQ_O LA[27]_O (PU) CP564
LA[28]_O (PU) K16 SOC_LA28 {7}
AG16 K17 CP563 SOC_LA29 {7}
HRESET_I LA[29]_O (PU) CP562
LA[30]_O (PU) H17 SOC_LA30 {7}
AG19 G17 CP561 SOC_LA31 {7}
SRESET_I LA[31]_O (PU)
AH5
SYSTEM CONTROL
CKSTP_IN_I
SOC_LAD[31:0] {6}
AA12 CKSTP_OUT_O (PU)
K22 SOC_LAD0
LAD[00]_IO SOC_LAD1
LAD[01]_IO L21
AF15 L22 SOC_LAD2
RTC_I LAD[02]_IO SOC_LAD3
AH16 SYSCLK_I LAD[03]_IO K23
K24 SOC_LAD4
LAD[04]_IO SOC_LAD5
LAD[05]_IO L24
Y3 L25 SOC_LAD6
TEMP_ANODE LAD[06]_IO SOC_LAD7
AA3 TEMP_CATHOD LAD[07]_IO K25
L28 SOC_LAD8
CP325 LAD[08]_IO SOC_LAD9
LAD[09]_IO L27
SOC_ASLEEP AH17 K28 SOC_LAD10
KJ ASLEEP_O LAD[10]_IO SOC_LAD11
LAD[11]_IO K27
J28 SOC_LAD12
LAD[12]_IO SOC_LAD13
LAD[13]_IO H28
H27 SOC_LAD14
SOC_SDA1 LAD[14]_IO SOC_LAD15
AH21 IIC1_SDA_IO LAD[15]_IO G27
SOC_SCL1 AG21 G26 SOC_LAD16
IIC1_SCL_IO LAD[16]_IO SOC_LAD17
LAD[17]_IO F28
F26 SOC_LAD18
F25
I2C
SOC_SDA2 LAD[19]_IO SOC_LAD20

AG14 IIC2_SDA_IO LAD[20]_IO E28
SOC_SCL2 AG13 E27 SOC_LAD21
IIC2_SCL_IO LAD[21]_IO SOC_LAD22
LAD[22]_IO E26
LAD[23]_IO F24 SOC_LAD23 C
E24 SOC_LAD24
LAD[25]_IO C26
G24 SOC_LAD26
LAD[27]_IO E23
AH24 G23 SOC_LAD28
GPIN[0]_I LAD[28]_IO SOC_LAD29
AG24 GPIN[1]_I LAD[29]_IO F22
AD23 G22 SOC_LAD30
GPIN[2]_I LAD[30]_IO
LOCAL BUS
AE21 G21 SOC_LAD31

GPIN[3]_I LAD[31]_IO
AD22 GPIN[4]_I
AF23 GPIN[5]_I
AG25 GPIN[6]_I
AE20 K26 SOC_LDP0 RB208 10KJ
GPIN[7]_I LDP[0]_IO SOC_LDP1 R262 10KJ
LDP[1]_IO G28
SOC_LDP2 R264 10KJ
GPIO
LDP[2]_IO B27
E25 SOC_LDP3 RB288 10KJ
LDP[3]_IO
P236 AF22 DGND
P206 GPOUT[0]_O
AH23 GPOUT[1]_O
AG27 GPOUT[2]_O LCS[0]_O K18 SOC_LCS0 {6}
AH25 GPOUT[3]_O LCS[1]_O G19 SOC_LCS1 {6}
AF21 GPOUT[4]_O LCS[2]_O H19 SOC_LCS2 {6}
AF25 GPOUT[5]_O LCS[3]_O H20 SOC_LCS3 {6}
AG26 GPOUT[6]_O LCS[4]_O G16 SOC_LCS4 {6}
AF26 GPOUT[7]_O LCS[5]/DMA_REQ2_IO H16 SOC_LCS5 {6}
LCS[6]/DMA_DACK2_O J16 SOC_LCS6 {6}
LCS[7]/DMA_DDONE2_O L18 SOC_LCS7 {6}
89
KJ
J22 CP415 LB_LWE0 {6,7}
LWE0/LBS0/LSDDQM[0]_O (PU) CP553
LWE1/LBS1/LSDDQM[1]_O (PU) H22 LB_LWE1 {7}
H23 CP552 LB_LWE2 {7}
GND
LWE2/LBS2/LSDDQM[2]_O (PU) CP555
LWE3/LBS3/LSDDQM[3]_O (PU) H21 LB_LWE3 {7}
AA10 DMA_DREQ[0]_I
AA11 J26 CP413
DMA_DREQ[1]_I LALE_O (PU) CP551 LB_ALE {6,7}
AA7 DMA_DDONE[0]_O LBCTL_O (PU) J25 LB_CTL {7}
Y11 J20 CP556
DMA_DDONE[1]_O LGPL0/LSDA10_O (PU) LGPL0 {7}
DMA
Y13 K20 CP554

DMA_DACK[0]_O (PU) LGPL1/LSDWE_O (PU) CP417 LGPL1 {7}
Y12 DMA_DACK[1]_O (PU) LGPL2/LOE/LSDRAS_O (PU) G20 LB_OE {6,7}
H18 CP560
LGPL3/LSDCAS_O (PU)
L20
LGPL3 {7}
nLBACC_TMN {6}
B
LGPL4/LGTA/LUPWAIT/LPBSE_IO CP559
LGPL5_O (PU) K19 LGPL5 {7}
X_10J CP306 L17
LCKE_O
LCLK[0]_O H24
4.7KJ AH8 J24
UART_CTS[0]_I LCLK[1]_O
AF6 UART_CTS[1]_I LCLK[2]_O H25
X_10J CP334 AG8
UART
UART_RTS[0]_O SOC_LSYNC
AG9 UART_RTS[1]_O LSYNC_IN_I D27
AG7 UART_SIN[0]_I LSYNC_OUT_O D28
AH6 UART_SIN[1]_I
AH7 UART_SOUT[0]_O
AF7 UART_SOUT[1]_O
3R3V 3R3V 3R3V 3R3V 3R3V

AH15 CP326 R171 10KJ 3R3V
UDE_I CP319 R176 10KJ
MCP_I AG18 3R3V
CP436 AC20
CP324 L1_TSTCLK_I
AE17 L2_TSTCLK_I
CP317 AH19 AG22 CP308 R188 10KJ 3R3V R199 R246 R247 R248 R249
LSSD_MODE_I IRQ[0]_I CP438 RB159 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
AH13 TEST_SEL_I IRQ[1]_I AF17 3R3V
AD21 CP434 RB155 10KJ 3R3V
IRQ[2]_I CP435 RB158 10KJ
IRQ[3]_I AF19 3R3V
4.7KJ CP443 AC5 CP322 R175 10KJ
PIC
TRIG_IN_I IRQ[4]_I AG17 3R3V

4.7KJ CP448 AB5 AF16 CP301
TRIG_OUT/READY/QUIESCE_O IRQ[5]_I nFAX12_PIC_INT {32}
CP442 Y7 AC23 CP302
MSRCID[0]_O (PU) IRQ[6]_I nPOF {32}
CP445 W9 AC22
MSRCID[1]_O (PU) IRQ[7]_I HDD_INT2 {6}
4.7KJ AA9 AC19
MSRCID[2]_O IRQ[8]_I MFP_INT2 {6}
4.7KJ AB6 AG20 CP344
MSRCID[3]_O IRQ[9]/DMA_DREQ3_I PHY_INT_N {23}
4.7KJ AD5 AE27 CP428 RTC_INTA {27}
MSRCID[4]_O IRQ[10]/DMA_DACK3_IO CP427
Y8 MDVAL_O IRQ[11]/DMA_DDONE3_IO AE24 RTC_INTB {27}
_OUT AE16
JTAG & TEST
CLK_OUT_O
IRQ_OUT_O AD14
AG28 TCK_I
AH28 C219 CB390 C220 C275 C276 C277 C278
TDI_I (PU)
AF28 TDO_O
AH27 220pF(CH) 470pF(B) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH)
TMS_I (PU)
AH22 TRST_I (PU) A
DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
SoC MPC8533(1G)
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC DDR2 I/F)
1R8V
IC19A
S_DDR1_AD[13:0] {10}
1 8 SDDR_ECC0 G12 B7 S_DDR1_AD0
SDDR_ECC1 MECC[0]_IO MA[00]_O S_DDR1_AD1
2 7 D14 MECC[1]_IO MA[01]_O G8
3 6 BRB4 SDDR_ECC2 F11 C8 S_DDR1_AD2
1KJx4 SDDR_ECC3 MECC[2]_IO MA[02]_O S_DDR1_AD3
4 5 C11 MECC[3]_IO MA[03]_O A10
1 8 SDDR_ECC4 G14 D9 S_DDR1_AD4
MECC[4]_IO MA[04]_O
D 2 7 SDDR_ECC5 F14 MECC[5]_IO MA[05]_O C10 S_DDR1_AD5
3 6 BRB3 SDDR_ECC6 C13 A11 S_DDR1_AD6
1KJx4 SDDR_ECC7 MECC[6]_IO MA[06]_O S_DDR1_AD7
4 5 D12 MECC[7]_IO MA[07]_O F9
1 8 SDDR_DQSP8 SDDR_DM8 F13 E9 S_DDR1_AD8
SDDR_DQSN8 SDDR_DQSP8 MDM[8]_O MA[08]_O S_DDR1_AD9
2 7 D13 MDQSP[8]_IO MA[09]_O B12
3 6 BRB2 SDDR_DM8 SDDR_DQSN8 E13 A5 S_DDR1_AD10
1KJx4 MDQSN[8]_IO MA[10]_O S_DDR1_AD11
4 5 MA[11]_O A12
D11 S_DDR1_AD12
MA[12]_O S_DDR1_AD13
MA[13]_O F7
MA[14]_O E10
{10} S_DDR1_CKE0 H10 MCKE[0]_O MA[15]_O F10
{10} S_DDR1_CKE1 K10 MCKE[1]_O
{10} S_DDR1_CKE2 G10 MCKE[2]_O S_DDR1_BA[2:0] {10}
{10} S_DDR1_CKE3 H9 MCKE[3]_O
A4 S_DDR1_BA0
MBA[0]_O S_DDR1_BA1
MBA[1]_O B5
B13 S_DDR1_BA2
MBA[2]_O
S_DDR1_CS[3:0] {10}
D3 S_DDR1_CS0
MCS[0]_O S_DDR1_CS1
MCS[1]_O H6
C4 S_DDR1_CS2
MCS[2]_O S_DDR1_CS3
MCS[3]_O G6
S_DDR1_DQ[63:0] {10}
A26 S_DDR1_DQ0
MDQ[00]_IO S_DDR1_DQ1
MDQ[01]_IO B26
C22 S_DDR1_DQ2
MDQ[03]_IO D21
D25 S_DDR1_DQ4
MDQ[05]_IO B25
D22 S_DDR1_DQ6
MDQ[07]_IO E21
C25 S_DDR1_DM0
MDM[0]_O
MDQSP[0]_IO C23 S_DDR1_DQS0P {1
MDQSN[0]_IO D24 S_DDR1_DQS0N {
A24 S_DDR1_DQ8
MDQ[08]_IO
C MDQ[09]_IO A23 S_DDR1_DQ9
B20 S_DDR1_DQ10
MDQ[11]_IO A20
A25 S_DDR1_DQ12
MDQ[13]_IO B24
B21 S_DDR1_DQ14
MDQ[15]_IO A21
B23 S_DDR1_DM1
MDM[1]_O
MDQSP[1]_IO A22 S_DDR1_DQS1P {1
MDQSN[1]_IO B22 S_DDR1_DQS1N {
E19 S_DDR1_DQ16
MDQ[17]_IO D19
E16 S_DDR1_DQ18
MDQ[19]_IO C16
F19 S_DDR1_DQ20
MDQ[21]_IO F18
F17 S_DDR1_DQ22
MDQ[22]_IO
DDR2 SDRAM I/F
D16 S_DDR1_DQ23
0R9V_DDR1VREF MDQ[23]_IO S_DDR1_DM2
MDM[2]_O D18
MDQSP[2]_IO E17 S_DDR1_DQS2P {1
A28 MVREF MDQSN[2]_IO C18 S_DDR1_DQS2N {
CB587 CB585 B18 S_DDR1_DQ24

MDQ[25]_IO A18
1uF(1608:B) 0.1uF(B) A15 S_DDR1_DQ26
MDQ[27]_IO B14
B19 S_DDR1_DQ28
DGND
MDQ[29]_IO A19
A16 S_DDR1_DQ30
MDQ[31]_IO B15
B17 S_DDR1_DM3
MDM[3]_O
MDQSP[3]_IO B16 S_DDR1_DQS3P {1
MDQSN[3]_IO A17 S_DDR1_DQS3N {
C5 D1 S_DDR1_DQ32
{10} S_DDR1_RAS MRAS_O MDQ[32]_IO S_DDR1_DQ33
MDQ[33]_IO F3
E7 G1 S_DDR1_DQ34
B {10} S_DDR1_CAS MCAS_O MDQ[34]_IO
H2 S_DDR1_DQ35
{10} S_DDR1_WE B4 MWE_O MDQ[36]_IO E4
G5 S_DDR1_DQ37
MDQ[38]_IO H3
J4 S_DDR1_DQ39
MDQ[39]_IO S_DDR1_DM4
MDM[4]_O G4
MDQSP[4]_IO K5 S_DDR1_DQS4P {1
{10} S_DDR1_CK0P A9 MCKP[0]_O MDQSN[4]_IO J5 S_DDR1_DQS4N {
{10} S_DDR1_CK0N B9 MCKN[0]_O
J11 B2 S_DDR1_DQ40
{10} S_DDR1_CK1P MCKP[1]_O MDQ[40]_IO S_DDR1_DQ41
{10} S_DDR1_CK1N H11 MCKN[1]_O MDQ[41]_IO C3
F2 S_DDR1_DQ42
{10} S_DDR1_CK2P J6 MCKP[2]_O MDQ[43]_IO G2
K6 A2 S_DDR1_DQ44
{10} S_DDR1_CK2N MCKN[2]_O MDQ[44]_IO S_DDR1_DQ45
MDQ[45]_IO B3
A8 E1 S_DDR1_DQ46
{10} S_DDR1_CK3P MCKP[3]_O MDQ[46]_IO S_DDR1_DQ47
{10} S_DDR1_CK3N B8 MCKN[3]_O MDQ[47]_IO F1
C2 S_DDR1_DM5
MDM[5]_O
J13 MCKP[4]_O MDQSP[5]_IO D2 S_DDR1_DQS5P {1
H13 MCKN[4]_O MDQSN[5]_IO C1 S_DDR1_DQS5N {
H8 MCKP[5]_O
J8 L5 S_DDR1_DQ48
MCKN[5]_O MDQ[48]_IO S_DDR1_DQ49
MDQ[49]_IO L4
N3 S_DDR1_DQ50
MDQ[51]_IO P3
J3 S_DDR1_DQ52
MDQ[53]_IO K4
N4 S_DDR1_DQ54
RB210 MDQ[55]_IO P4
18.2F K15 L3 S_DDR1_DM6
1R8V MDIC[1]_IO MDM[6]_O
H15 MDIC[0]_IO MDQSP[6]_IO M3 S_DDR1_DQS6P {1
RB301 18.2F M4
DGND
MDQSN[6]_IO S_DDR1_DQS6N {
J1 S_DDR1_DQ56
MDQ[57]_IO K1
P1 S_DDR1_DQ58
{10} S_DDR1_ODT[3:0] MDQ[59]_IO R1
J2 S_DDR1_DQ60
A S_DDR1_ODT0 E5
MDQ[60]_IO
K2 S_DDR1_DQ61
S_DDR1_ODT1 MODT[0]_O MDQ[61]_IO S_DDR1_DQ62
H7 MODT[1]_O MDQ[62]_IO N1
S_DDR1_ODT2 E6 R2 S_DDR1_DQ63
S_DDR1_ODT3 MODT[2]_O MDQ[63]_IO S_DDR1_DM7
F6 MODT[3]_O MDM[7]_O L2
MDQSP[7]_IO P2 S_DDR1_DQS7P {1
MDQSN[7]_IO M2 S_DDR1_DQS7N {
SoC MPC8533(1G)
5 4 3

3 2 1
7/42 (9)
0R9V_DDR1VTT
CP651
+ C353
150uF/4V(PXA/F60)
DGND D
0R9V_DDR1VREF
IC22 SC2596SETRT 1R8V

CP549 1 3R3V
GND VTT 8
{8} GPO_nPD_SDDR_VTT1 2 /SD PVIN 7
3 1R8V
CP550 VSENSE AVIN 6
4 VREF VDDQ 5
EPad
C315 C316 C321 C325 C323 C322
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 22uF(3216:F) 0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B)
GND1
DGND C324
10uF(2012:F)
DGND
S_DDR1_DM[7:0] {10}
S_DDR1_DM0
S_DDR1_DM1
P {10} S_DDR1_DM2
N {10} S_DDR1_DM3
S_DDR1_DM4
S_DDR1_DM5
S_DDR1_DM6 C
S_DDR1_DM7
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
P {10}
N {10}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC DDR2 SOCKET)

{9} S_DDR1_DM[7:0]
{9} S_DDR1_DQ[63:0]
{9} S_DDR1_AD[13:0]
{9} S_DDR1_BA[2:0]
{9} S_DDR1_CS[3:0]
{9} S_DDR1_ODT[3:0]
CN2
S_DDR1_BA0 107 102 S_DDR1_AD0

S_DDR1_BA1 106 BA0 A0 S_DDR1_AD1
BA1 A1 101
S_DDR1_BA2 85 100 S_DDR1_AD2
BA2/NC A2 S_DDR1_AD3
A3 99
98 S_DDR1_AD4
A4 S_DDR1_AD5
A5 97
94 S_DDR1_AD6
S_DDR1_CS0 A6 S_DDR1_AD7
110 S0 A7 92
S_DDR1_CS1 115 93 S_DDR1_AD8
S1/NC A8 S_DDR1_AD9
A9 91
105 S_DDR1_AD10
AP/A10 S_DDR1_AD11
A11 90
89 S_DDR1_AD12
S_DDR1_ODT0 A12 S_DDR1_AD13
114 ODT0 NC/A13 116
S_DDR1_ODT1 119 ODT1/NC
5 S_DDR1_DQ0
DQ0 S_DDR1_DQ1
DQ1 7
17 S_DDR1_DQ2
S_DDR1_RAS DQ2 S_DDR1_DQ3
{9} S_DDR1_RAS 108 RAS DQ3 19
S_DDR1_CAS 113 4 S_DDR1_DQ4
{9} S_DDR1_CAS CAS DQ4
S_DDR1_WE 109 6 S_DDR1_DQ5
{9} S_DDR1_WE WE DQ5
14 S_DDR1_DQ6
DQ6 S_DDR1_DQ7
DQ7 16
10 S_DDR1_DM0
S2_I2C_SDA DM0 S_DDR1_DQS0P
{5,6,8} S2_I2C_SDA 195 SDA DQS0 13
S2_I2C_SCL 197 11 S_DDR1_DQS0N
{5,6,8} S2_I2C_SCL SCL DQS0
C DQ8 23 S_DDR1_DQ8
25 S_DDR1_DQ9
DQ9 S_DDR1_DQ10
DQ10 35
79 37 S_DDR1_DQ11
{9} S_DDR1_CKE0 CKE0 DQ11 {9} S_DDR
80 20 S_DDR1_DQ12
{9} S_DDR1_CKE1 CKE1/NC DQ12 {9} S_DDR
22 S_DDR1_DQ13
DQ13 S_DDR1_DQ14
DQ14 36
30 38 S_DDR1_DQ15
{9} S_DDR1_CK0P CK0 DQ15 {9} S_DDR
32 26 S_DDR1_DM1
{9} S_DDR1_CK0N CK0 DM1 {9} S_DDR
31 S_DDR1_DQS1P
DQS1 S_DDR1_DQS1N
DQS1 29
{9} S_DDR1_CK1P 164 CK1 {9} S_DDR

166 43 S_DDR1_DQ16
3R3V {9} S_DDR1_CK1N CK1 DQ16 3R3V {9} S_DDR
45 S_DDR1_DQ17
DQ17 S_DDR1_DQ18
DQ18 55
199 57 S_DDR1_DQ19
VDDSPD DQ19 S_DDR1_DQ20
198 SA0 DQ20 44
200 46 S_DDR1_DQ21
SA1 DQ21 S_DDR1_DQ22
DQ22 56
DGND 0R9V_DDR1VREF 58 S_DDR1_DQ23 DGND 0R9
DQ23 S_DDR1_DM2
DM2 52
1 51 S_DDR1_DQS2P
VREF DQS2 S_DDR1_DQS2N
DQS2 49
CB651
CB625
0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 81 61 S_DDR1_DQ24
VDD DQ24 S_DDR1_DQ25
82 VDD DQ25 63
DGND DGND 88 73 S_DDR1_DQ26
87 VDD DQ27 75
1R8V 95 62 S_DDR1_DQ28 1
96 VDD DQ29 64
103 74 S_DDR1_DQ30
104 VDD DQ31 76
111 67 S_DDR1_DM3
VDD DM3 S_DDR1_DQS3P
112 VDD DQS3 70
CB634 117 68 S_DDR1_DQS3N
0.1uF(B) VDD DQS3
118 VDD
CB631
{9} S_DDR1_DQS0P
0.1uF(B) 123 S_DDR1_DQ32
{9} S_DDR1_DQS0N DQ32
CB632 2 125 S_DDR1_DQ33
B 0.1uF(B) 3
VSS DQ33
135 S_DDR1_DQ34
CB627 VSS DQ34 S_DDR1_DQ35
{9} S_DDR1_DQS1P 8 VSS DQ35 137
0.1uF(B) 9 124 S_DDR1_DQ36
{9} S_DDR1_DQS1N VSS DQ36
CB628 12 126 S_DDR1_DQ37
0.1uF(B) VSS DQ37 S_DDR1_DQ38
15 VSS DQ38 134
CB633 18 136 S_DDR1_DQ39
{9} S_DDR1_DQS2P VSS DQ39
0.1uF(B) 21 130 S_DDR1_DM4
{9} S_DDR1_DQS2N VSS DM4
CB629 24 131 S_DDR1_DQS4P
0.1uF(B) VSS DQS4 S_DDR1_DQS4N
27 VSS DQS4 129
CB637 28
{9} S_DDR1_DQS3P VSS
0.1uF(B) 33
{9} S_DDR1_DQS3N VSS
CB639 34 141 S_DDR1_DQ40
39 VSS DQ41 143
CB642 40 151 S_DDR1_DQ42
0.1uF(B) 41 153 S_DDR1_DQ43
CB638 42 140 S_DDR1_DQ44
47 VSS DQ45 142
CB641 48 152 S_DDR1_DQ46
0.1uF(B) 53 154 S_DDR1_DQ47
54 147 S_DDR1_DM5
VSS DM5 S_DDR1_DQS5P
59 VSS DQS5 148
DGND 60 146 S_DDR1_DQS5N
{9} S_DDR1_DQS6P VSS DQS5
{9} S_DDR1_DQS6N 65 VSS
CB663 66
10uF(2012:F) VSS S_DDR1_DQ48
71 VSS DQ48 157
72 159 S_DDR1_DQ49
77 173 S_DDR1_DQ50
78 175 S_DDR1_DQ51
VSS DQ51 S_DDR1_DQ52
121 VSS DQ52 158
CB655 122 160 S_DDR1_DQ53
10uF(2012:F) VSS DQ53 S_DDR1_DQ54
127 VSS DQ54 174
128 176 S_DDR1_DQ55
VSS DQ55 S_DDR1_DM6
132 VSS DM6 170
133 169 S_DDR1_DQS6P
VSS DQS6 S_DDR1_DQS6N
138 VSS DQS6 167
CB678 139
10uF(2012:F) VSS
144 VSS
145 179 S_DDR1_DQ56
149 VSS DQ57 181
150 189 S_DDR1_DQ58
155 191
A CB686 156
VSS DQ59
180 S_DDR1_DQ60
161 VSS DQ61 182
162 192 S_DDR1_DQ62
165 VSS DQ63 194
DGND 168 185 S_DDR1_DM7
171 VSS DQS7 188
172 186 S_DDR1_DQS7N
VSS DQS7
177 VSS
178 VSS Event/NC 50
183 VSS NC 69
184 VSS NC 83
187 84 AS10
AS9 VSS A15/NC I_DIMM
190 VSS A14/NC 86
X_DIMM_DDR2_1G 193 120
VSS NC
196 VSS TEST/NC 163
DGND CA0410-200N32(TYPE-A)
5 4 3

3 2 1
8/42 (10)
0R9V_DDR1VTT
CN3
CB654
S_DDR1_BA0 107 102 S_DDR1_AD0 10uF(2012:F)
S_DDR1_BA1 106 BA0 A0 S_DDR1_AD1
BA1 A1 101
S_DDR1_BA2 85 100 S_DDR1_AD2 CB644
BA2/NC A2 S_DDR1_AD3 S_DDR1_AD0 RB393 51J 0.1uF(B)
A3 99
98 S_DDR1_AD4 S_DDR1_AD1 RB392 51J CB657
A4 S_DDR1_AD5 S_DDR1_AD2 RB391 51J 0.1uF(B)
A5 97
94 S_DDR1_AD6 S_DDR1_AD3 RB390 51J CB683
S_DDR1_CS2 A6 S_DDR1_AD7 0.1uF(B)
110 S0 A7 92
S_DDR1_CS3 115 93 S_DDR1_AD8 S_DDR1_AD4 RB389 51J
S1/NC A8 S_DDR1_AD9 S_DDR1_AD5 RB388 51J CB685
A9 91
105 S_DDR1_AD10 S_DDR1_AD6 RB387 51J 0.1uF(B)
AP/A10 S_DDR1_AD11 S_DDR1_AD7 RB385 51J CB673
A11 90
89 S_DDR1_AD12 0.1uF(B)
S_DDR1_ODT2 A12 S_DDR1_AD13 S_DDR1_AD8 RB386 51J
114 ODT0 NC/A13 116
S_DDR1_ODT3 119 S_DDR1_AD9 RB384 51J CB659
ODT1/NC S_DDR1_AD10 RB394 51J 0.1uF(B)
5 S_DDR1_DQ0 S_DDR1_AD11 RB383 51J CB682
DQ0 S_DDR1_DQ1 0.1uF(B)
DQ1 7
17 S_DDR1_DQ2 S_DDR1_AD12 RB382 51J
S_DDR1_RAS DQ2 S_DDR1_DQ3 S_DDR1_AD13 RB405 51J CB635
108 RAS DQ3 19
S_DDR1_CAS 113 4 S_DDR1_DQ4 S_DDR1_BA0 RB396 51J 0.1uF(B)
S_DDR1_WE CAS DQ4 S_DDR1_DQ5 S_DDR1_BA1 RB395 51J CB681
109 WE DQ5 6
14 S_DDR1_DQ6 0.1uF(B)
DQ6 S_DDR1_DQ7 S_DDR1_BA2 RB381 51J
DQ7 16
10 S_DDR1_DM0 S_DDR1_CS0 RB399 51J CB670
S2_I2C_SDA DM0 S_DDR1_DQS0P S_DDR1_CS1 RB403 51J 0.1uF(B)
195 SDA DQS0 13
S2_I2C_SCL 197 11 S_DDR1_DQS0N S_DDR1_CS2 RB362 51J CB660
SCL DQS0 0.1uF(B)
S_DDR1_CS3 RB404 51J
DQ8 23 S_DDR1_DQ8 S_DDR1_RAS RB397 51J CB656 C
25 S_DDR1_DQ9 S_DDR1_CAS RB400 51J 0.1uF(B)
DQ9 S_DDR1_DQ10 S_DDR1_WE RB398 51J CB671
DQ10 35
79 37 S_DDR1_DQ11 0.1uF(B)
DDR1_CKE2 CKE0 DQ11
80 20 S_DDR1_DQ12 S_DDR1_CKE0 RB378 51J
DDR1_CKE3 CKE1/NC DQ12
22 S_DDR1_DQ13 S_DDR1_CKE1 RB379 51J CB676
DQ13 S_DDR1_DQ14 S_DDR1_CKE2 RB380 51J 0.1uF(B)
DQ14 36
30 38 S_DDR1_DQ15 S_DDR1_CKE3 RB361 51J CB667
DDR1_CK2P CK0 DQ15
32 26 S_DDR1_DM1 0.1uF(B)
DDR1_CK2N CK0 DM1
31 S_DDR1_DQS1P
DQS1 S_DDR1_DQS1N S_DDR1_ODT0 RB401 51J
DQS1 29
S_DDR1_ODT1 RB406 51J CB636
164 S_DDR1_ODT2 RB363 51J 0.1uF(B)
DDR1_CK3P CK1
166 43 S_DDR1_DQ16 S_DDR1_ODT3 RB402 51J CB664
DDR1_CK3N CK1 DQ16
45 S_DDR1_DQ17 0.1uF(B)
DQ17 S_DDR1_DQ18
DQ18 55
199 57 S_DDR1_DQ19 CB680
VDDSPD DQ19 S_DDR1_DQ20 0.1uF(B)
198 SA0 DQ20 44
200 46 S_DDR1_DQ21 CB665
SA1 DQ21 S_DDR1_DQ22 0.1uF(B)
DQ22 56
0R9V_DDR1VREF 58 S_DDR1_DQ23 DGND
DQ23 S_DDR1_DM2
DM2 52
1 51 S_DDR1_DQS2P
VREF DQS2 S_DDR1_DQS2N
DQS2 49
CB652
CB653
0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 81 61 S_DDR1_DQ24
82 VDD DQ25 63
DGND DGND 88 73 S_DDR1_DQ26
87 VDD DQ27 75
1R8V 95 62 S_DDR1_DQ28
96 VDD DQ29 64
103 74 S_DDR1_DQ30
104 VDD DQ31 76
111 67 S_DDR1_DM3
VDD DM3 S_DDR1_DQS3P
112 VDD DQS3 70
CB661 117 68 S_DDR1_DQS3N
0.1uF(B) VDD DQS3
118 VDD
CB658
0.1uF(B) 123 S_DDR1_DQ32
CB662 DQ32 S_DDR1_DQ33
2 125
0.1uF(B) 3
VSS DQ33
135 S_DDR1_DQ34 B
8 VSS DQ35 137
0.1uF(B) 9 124 S_DDR1_DQ36
12 VSS DQ37 126
0.1uF(B) 15 134 S_DDR1_DQ38
18 VSS DQ39 136
0.1uF(B) 21 130 S_DDR1_DM4
CB674 VSS DM4 S_DDR1_DQS4P
24 VSS DQS4 131
0.1uF(B) 27 129 S_DDR1_DQS4N
CB672 VSS DQS4
28 VSS
0.1uF(B) 33
CB677 VSS S_DDR1_DQ40
34 VSS DQ40 141
0.1uF(B) 39 143 S_DDR1_DQ41
40 VSS DQ42 151
0.1uF(B) 41 153 S_DDR1_DQ43
42 VSS DQ44 140
0.1uF(B) 47 142 S_DDR1_DQ45
48 VSS DQ46 152
0.1uF(B) 53 154 S_DDR1_DQ47
VSS DQ47 S_DDR1_DM5
54 VSS DM5 147
59 148 S_DDR1_DQS5P
DGND
60 VSS DQS5 146
65 VSS
CB640 66
10uF(2012:F) VSS S_DDR1_DQ48
71 VSS DQ48 157
72 159 S_DDR1_DQ49
77 VSS DQ50 173
78 175 S_DDR1_DQ51
121 VSS DQ52 158
CB630 122 160 S_DDR1_DQ53
127 VSS DQ54 174
128 176 S_DDR1_DQ55
VSS DQ55 S_DDR1_DM6
132 VSS DM6 170
133 169 S_DDR1_DQS6P
138 VSS DQS6 167
CB626 139
10uF(2012:F) VSS
144 VSS
145 179 S_DDR1_DQ56
149 VSS DQ57 181
150 189 S_DDR1_DQ58
155 191
CB643 156
VSS DQ59
180 S_DDR1_DQ60 A
161 VSS DQ61 182
162 192 S_DDR1_DQ62
165 VSS DQ63 194
DGND 168 185 S_DDR1_DM7
171 VSS DQS7 188
172 186 S_DDR1_DQS7N
VSS DQS7
177 VSS
178 VSS Event/NC 50
183 VSS NC 69
184 VSS NC 83
S10 187 84
DIMM_DDR2_1G VSS A15/NC
190 VSS A14/NC 86
193 VSS NC 120
196 VSS TEST/NC 163
DGND CA0410-200N32(TYPE-A)
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC PCI Express/PCI BUS)
IC19B
AH26 PCI1_CLK_I SD1_PLL_TPD_O V28
DGND
D SD1_REF_CLKP_I U28
SD1_REF_CLKN_I U27
DGND AG6 PCI1_IDSEL_I
AD12 PCI1_FRAME_IO SD1_TST_CLKP T22
3R3V AC13 T23
PCI1_DEVSEL_IO SD1_TST_CLKN
AF13 PCI1_IRDY_IO
AD13 PCI1_TRDY_IO
AA13 M23 SD1_TXP0 C272
PCI1_STOP_IO SD1_TXP[0]_O SD1_TXN0 C271 0.1uF(B)
AB14 PCI1_PAR_IO SD1_TXN[0]_O M22
AE14 0.1uF(B)
R161 R164 PCI1_PERR_IO SD1_TXP1 C284
AC14 PCI1_SERR_IO SD1_TXP[1]_O N21
10KJ 10KJ N20 SD1_TXN1 C283 0.1uF(B)
SD1_TXN[1]_O 0.1uF(B)
P23 SD1_TXP2 C282
SD1_TXP[2]_O SD1_TXN2 C281 0.1uF(B)
SD1_TXN[2]_O P22
CP337 CP335 SOCPCI1_REQ0 AB8 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_REQ[0]_IO SD1_TXP3 C270
AD6 PCI1_REQ[1]_I SD1_TXP[3]_O R21
AH10 R20 SD1_TXN3 C269 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_REQ[2]_I SD1_TXN[3]_O 0.1uF(B)
AG10 PCI1_REQ[3]_I
AF9 PCI1_REQ[4]_I
PCI Express 1 [4LANE]

SD1_RXP[0]_I N28
SD1_RXN[0]_I N27
SOCPCI1_GNT0 AE6
CP444 PCI1_GNT[0]_IO
{7} PCI_GNT1 AC8 PCI1_GNT[1]_O (PU) SD1_RXP[1]_I P26
{7} PCI_GNT2 CP333 AH11 P25
CP332 PCI1_GNT[2]_O (PU) SD1_RXN[1]_I
{7} PCI_GNT3 AG11 PCI1_GNT[3]_O (PU)
{7} PCI_GNT4 CP336 AE7 R28
PCI1_GNT[4]_O (PU) SD1_RXP[2]_I
SD1_RXN[2]_I R27
SD1_RXP[3]_I T26
3R3V RB165 SOCPCI1_PU CP441 AA16 T25
PCI1_AD[00]_IO SD1_RXN[3]_I
AB18 PCI1_AD[01]_IO
10KJ AB17 PCI1_AD[02]_IO
AD19 PCI1_AD[03]_IO
AE19
PCI BUS
PCI1_AD[04]_IO
AC17 PCI1_AD[05]_IO
AE18 U21 SD1_TXP4 C280
PCI1_AD[06]_IO SD1_TXP[4]_O SD1_TXN4 C279 0.1uF(B)
AF18 PCI1_AD[07]_IO SD1_TXN[4]_O U20
AB16 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_AD[08]_IO SD1_TXP5 C266
Y15 PCI1_AD[09]_IO SD1_TXP[5]_O V23
C AD16 PCI1_AD[10]_IO SD1_TXN[5]_O V22 SD1_TXN5 C265 0.1uF(B)
AA15 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_AD[11]_IO SD1_TXP6 C286
AB15 PCI1_AD[12]_IO SD1_TXP[6]_O W21
AC15 W20 SD1_TXN6 C285 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_AD[13]_IO SD1_TXN[6]_O 0.1uF(B)
AE15 PCI1_AD[14]_IO
Y14 Y23 SD1_TXP7 C268
PCI1_AD[15]_IO SD1_TXP[7]_O SD1_TXN7 C267 0.1uF(B)
AE11 PCI1_AD[16]_IO SD1_TXN[7]_O Y22
AF12 0.1uF(B)
PCI1_AD[17]_IO
AC12 PCI1_AD[18]_IO
AB12

PCI1_AD[19]_IO
AB11 PCI1_AD[20]_IO SD1_RXP[4]_I Y26
AC11 PCI1_AD[21]_IO SD1_RXN[4]_I Y25
AE10 PCI1_AD[22]_IO
AD10 PCI1_AD[23]_IO SD1_RXP[5]_I AA28
AE9 PCI1_AD[24]_IO SD1_RXN[5]_I AA27
AC9 PCI1_AD[25]_IO
AB9 PCI1_AD[26]_IO SD1_RXP[6]_I AB26
AG12 PCI1_AD[27]_IO SD1_RXN[6]_I AB25
AH12 PCI1_AD[28]_IO
AF8 PCI1_AD[29]_IO SD1_RXP[7]_I AC28
AD8 PCI1_AD[30]_IO SD1_RXN[7]_I AC27
AE8 PCI1_AD[31]_IO
SD2_PLL_TPD_O AG3
AD17 PCI1_C_BE[0]_IO
AA14 PCI1_C_BE[1]_IO SD2_REF_CLKP_I AE2
AE12 PCI1_C_BE[2]_IO SD2_REF_CLKN_I AF2
AC10 PCI1_C_BE[3]_IO
SD2_TST_CLKP AG4
SD2_TST_CLKN AF4
AA21 SD2_TXP0 CB492

SD2_TX[0]P_O SD2_TXN0 CB495 0.1uF(B)
SD2_TX[0]N_O AA20
0.1uF(B)
SD2_RX[0]P_I AD26
SD2_RX[0]N_I AD25
B CP431 AE28
CP433 SD_IMP_CAL_TX
M26 SD_IMP_CAL_RX SD2_TX[2]P_O AC4
V26 SD_PLL_TPA SD2_TX[2]N_O AB4
RB207 RB209 AA5

100F 200F SD2_TX[3]P_O
SD2_TX[3]N_O Y5
SD2_RX[2]P_I AC1
DGND DGND AD1
CP460 SD2_RX[2]N_I
Y1 SD2_IMP_CAL_TX_I
CP338 AH3 AA2
SD2_IMP_CAL_RX_I SD2_RX[3]P_I
AH1 SD2_PLL_TPA SD2_RX[3]N_I AB2
R236 R155
100F 200F
SoC MPC8533(1G)
DGND
DGND DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
9/42 (11)
SOC_PCIE1_CLKP {5} D
SOC_PCIE1_CLKN {5}
SH_TX0P {15}
SH_TX0N {15}
SH_TX1P {15}
SH_TX1N {15}
SH_TX2P {15}
SH_TX2N {15}
SH_TX3P {15}
SH_TX3N {15}
SH_RX0P {15}
SH_RX0N {15}
SH_RX1P {15}
SH_RX1N {15}
SH_RX2P {15}
SH_RX2N {15}
SH_RX3P {15}
SH_RX3N {15}
SW_TX0P {40}
SW_TX0N {40}
SW_TX1P {40}
SW_TX1N {40} C
SW_TX2P {40}
SW_TX2N {40}
SW_TX3P {40}
SW_TX3N {40}
SW_RX0P {40}
SW_RX0N {40}
SW_RX1P {40}
SW_RX1N {40}
SW_RX2P {40}
SW_RX2N {40}
SW_RX3P {40}
SW_RX3N {40}
SOC_PCIE2_CLKP {5}
SOC_PCIE2_CLKN {5}
SD_TX0P {42}
SD_TX0N {42}
SD_RX0P {42}
SD_RX0N {42}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC GIGABIT ETHERNET)
IC19D
U1 TSEC1_TXOUT0 4 5
TSEC1_TXD[0]_O (PU) 33
D {23} GTX_CLK125 T2 EC_GTX_CLK125_I TSEC1_TXD[1]_O (PU) U2 TSEC1_TXOUT1 3 6
BR
3R3V V1 TSEC1_TXOUT2 2 7
TSEC1_TXD[2]_O (PU) TSEC1_TXOUT3
TSEC1_TXD[3]_O (PU) V2 1 8
V3 TSEC1_TXOUT4 1 8
RB219 TSEC1_TXD[4]_O (PU) TSEC1_TXOUT5
TSEC1_TXD[5]_O (PU) V5 2 7
2.2KJ U5 TSEC1_TXOUT6 3 6 BR
TSEC1_TXD[6]_O (PU) TSEC1_TXOUT7 33
TSEC1_TXD[7]_O (PU) T5 4 5
CP450 AC7
{23} EC_MDC EC_MDC_O (PU)
3R3V
GIGABIT ETHERNET 1
RB220
2.2KJ
CP451 Y9 T6 TSEC1_RXD0
{23} EC_MDIO EC_MDIO_IO TSEC1_RXD[0]_I
T7 TSEC1_RXD1
TSEC1_RXD[1]_I TSEC1_RXD2
TSEC1_RXD[2]_I T8
U8 TSEC1_RXD3
TSEC1_RXD[4]_I T9
T10 TSEC1_RXD5
TSEC1_RXD[6]_I U9
U10 TSEC1_RXD7
TSEC1_RXD[7]_I
TSEC1_COL_I R5
AA18 N.C TSEC1_CRS_IO T4
AA19 N.C
AB19 N.C
AB20 T1 TSEC1_GTXCLKOUT R239
N.C TSEC1_GTX_CLK_O
AB21 N.C
AB22 N.C
AB23 N.C TSEC1_TX_CLK_I V6
B6 U4 CP452 R238
N.C TSEC1_TX_EN_O TSEC1_TXEROUT R241
C19 N.C TSEC1_TX_ER_O T3
D10 N.C
D7 N.C
F12 R237
N.C 4.7KJ
J7 N.C
J9 N.C
C K13 N.C
K9 DGND
N.C
L13 N.C
L6 N.C TSEC1_RX_CLK_I V7 TSE
M12 N.C TSEC1_RX_DV_I U7 TSE
M19 N.C TSEC1_RX_ER_I (PU) R9 TSE
M25 N.C
N19 N.C
N24 N.C
P12 N.C
P19 M6 TSEC3_TXD0
N.C TSEC3_TXD[0]_O (PU) TSEC3_TXD1
R19 N.C TSEC3_TXD[1]_O (PU) P6
T11 R6 TSEC3_TXD2
T12 N.C TSEC3_TXD[3]_O (PU) L7
T19 M8 TSEC3_TXD4
N.C TSEC3_TXD[4]_O (PU)
GIGABIT ETHERNET 2
U11 P7 TSEC3_TXD5
U19 N.C TSEC3_TXD[6]_O (PU) N7
V10 M7 TSEC3_TXD7
N.C TSEC3_TXD[7]_O (PU)
V11 N.C
V12 N.C
V13 N.C
V14 N.C
V15 N.C
V16 N.C
V17 N.C
V18 N.C
V19 N.C
V25 N.C TSEC3_RXD[0]_I P10
V8 N.C TSEC3_RXD[1]_I N9
V9 N10 DGND
N.C TSEC3_RXD[2]_I
W1 N.C TSEC3_RXD[3]_I R8
W12 N.C TSEC3_RXD[4]_I L11
W13 N.C TSEC3_RXD[5]_I M11
W14 N.C TSEC3_RXD[6]_I N11
W15 N.C TSEC3_RXD[7]_I P11
W16 N.C
W17 N.C
W18 N.C TSEC3_COL_I M9
W19 L9 RB212 4.7KJ
N.C TSEC3_CRS_IO
W2 N.C
W27 DGND
B W3
N.C
R7
N.C TSEC3_GTX_CLK_O
W4 N.C
W5 N.C
W6 L10 DGND
N.C TSEC3_TX_CLK_I
W7 N.C TSEC3_TX_EN_O N6
W8 L8 CP453
N.C TSEC3_TX_ER_O (PU)
Y17 N.C
Y18 N.C
Y19 R240
N.C 4.7KJ
A6 N.C
DGND
TSEC3_RX_CLK_I P9
TSEC3_RX_DV_I P8
TSEC3_RX_ER_I R11
DGND
SoC MPC8533(1G)
5 4 3

3 2 1
10/42 (12)
TSEC1_TXD[7:0] {7,23}
5 TSEC1_TXD0 CP462
6 33Jx4 TSEC1_TXD1 CP465 D
7 BR5 TSEC1_TXD2 CP464
8 TSEC1_TXD3 CP474
8 TSEC1_TXD4 CP458
7 TSEC1_TXD5 CP461
6 BR4 TSEC1_TXD6 CP463
5 33Jx4 TSEC1_TXD7 CP471
TSEC1_RXD[7:0] {23}
TSEC1_COL {23}
TSEC1_CRS {23}
33J TSEC1_GTXCLK {23}
TSEC1_TX_CLK {23}
33J TSEC1_TX_ENB {23}
33J CP456 TSEC1_TX_ERR {7,23}
TSEC1_RX_CLK {23}
TSEC1_RX_DV {23}
TSEC1_RX_ERR {23}
TSEC3_TXD[7:0] {7}
CP569
CP568
CP454
CP571
CP572
CP455
CP573
CP570
TSEC3_TX_ERR {7}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SoC VCC/GND)
1R0V
LB9 1R0V_SCORE
NFM21PC475B1A3
CP341
CB534 CB415 CB410 CB511 CB509 CB505 CB510 CB515 CB519 CB507 CB504 CB517 CB512 CB518 CB516
10uF(2012:F) 22uF(3216:F) 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND DGND

D
DGND
1R0V_SCORE
CB414 CB413 CB411 CB409 CB403 CB407 CB405 CB401
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
1R0V
LB12 CP432 1R0V_SPX1CORE

BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CB472 CB474 CB480 CB488 CB473 CB478 CB479 CB483 CB477 CB476 CB484 CB486 CB481
CB582 CB470
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
22uF(3216:F) 22uF(3216:F)
DGND
DGND DGND DGND
CP440
1R0V_SCORE
LB17 CP430 1R0V_SPX1TX
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CB471 CB498 CB500 CB490 CB499 CB489 CB493 CB501 CB496 CB502
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
CB469 C287
DGND
10uF(2012:F) 10uF(2012:F)
1R0V_SPX2CORE
DGND DGND
LB13 CP449
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
C 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
DGND
1R0V_SPX2TX
1R8V
LB8 CP446
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
DGND
1R8V
220uF/2.5V(PXA/F60)
DGND
CB622
CB612
CB611
CB610
CB609
CB607
CB605
CB603
C327
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
10uF(2012:F)
+
DGND
DGND
3R3V 3R3V_STSEC
3R3V_STS
LB20 CP447
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CB530 CB529 CB528 CB527 CB526
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)

3R3V_STS
DGND
DGND
3R3V_SIO
3R3V
3R3V_SIO
LB7 CP312
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
DGND
DGND
3R3V_SLB
LB18 CP558
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CB583 CB597 CB589 CB586 CB588 CB595 CB584
3R3V_SLB
A 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
11/42 (13)
AS8
A_Heatsink_SOC
IC19E PIN1 PIN2 IC19F

1R0V_SPX1CORE
2 2 2 2
W11 SENSEVDD_O GND A13 AA25 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS AA24
GND Y10 1 1 1 1 AB28 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS AA26
U18 VDD GND V4 AD27 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS AB24
U16 VDD GND U6 M27 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS AB27
U14 U17 X_HB9703E-K X_HB9703E-K N25 AC24
VDD GND DGND DGND
SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS
U12 VDD GND U15 P28 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS AD28
T17 VDD GND U13 R24 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS M28
T15 VDD GND T18 R26 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS N26
T13 VDD GND T16 T24 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS P24
R18 VDD GND T14 T27 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS P27
R16 VDD GND R17 U25 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS R25
R14 VDD GND R15 W24 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS T28
R12 VDD GND R13 W26 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS U24
P17 VDD GND P5 Y24 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS U26
P15 VDD GND P18 Y27 SVDD_SRDS SGND_SRDS V24
P13 VDD GND P16 SGND_SRDS W25
N18 VDD GND P14 SGND_SRDS Y28
N16 N2 1R0V_SPX1TX
VDD GND DGND
N14 VDD GND N17
N12 VDD GND N15 M21 XVDD_SRDS
C
M17 VDD GND N13 N23 XVDD_SRDS
M15 VDD GND M5 P20 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS M20
M13 VDD GND M18 R22 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS M24
L16 VDD GND M16 T20 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS N22
L14 VDD GND M14 U23 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS P21
GND M10 V21 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS R23
GND L26 W22 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS T21
GND L15 Y20 XVDD_SRDS XGND_SRDS U22
GND L12 XGND_SRDS V20
B1 GVDD GND L1 XGND_SRDS W23
B11 GVDD GND K8 XGND_SRDS Y21
C14 GVDD GND K7
C17 K21 1R0V 1R0VA_SPX1 DGND
GVDD GND
C21 GVDD GND K11
C24 J27 R245 CP429 W28
GVDD GND 1J AVDD_SRDS
C7 GVDD GND J17
C9 J15 C274 C273 C264
GVDD GND
D15 GVDD GND J14
D20 J12 2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B) 2200pF(B)
GVDD GND
D4 GVDD GND H4 V27 AGND_SRDS
D6 GVDD GND H1
E11 G25 DGND
GVDD GND
E14 GVDD GND G15
E18 GVDD GND G13
E2 F8 1R0V_SPX2CORE
GVDD GND
E22 GVDD GND F4
E8 GVDD GND F27 AB1 SVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AA1
F15 GVDD GND F21 AC26 SVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AB3
F5 GVDD GND E3 AD2 SVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AC2
G11 GVDD GND E20 AE26 SVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AC25
G3 GVDD GND E15 AG2 SVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AC3
G7 GVDD GND E12 SGND_SRDS2 AD24
G9 GVDD GND D8 SGND_SRDS2 AD3
H12 D5 1R0V_SPX2TX AE1
GVDD GND SGND_SRDS2
H14 GVDD GND D26 SGND_SRDS2 AE25
H5 GVDD GND D23 AA23 XVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AE3
J10 GVDD GND D17 AA6 XVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AF3
K12 GVDD GND C6 AF5 XVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 AH2
K14 GVDD GND C27 AG5 XVDD_SRDS2 SGND_SRDS2 Y2
K3 C20 Y6
M1
GVDD GND
C15 1R0V XVDD_SRDS2 DGND B
GVDD GND
N5 GVDD GND C12
R3 B28 1R0VA_SPX2
GVDD GND
GND B10
AH9 R233 CP457 AG1 AA22
STSEC GND 1J AVDD_SRDS2 XGND_SRDS2
GND AG23 XGND_SRDS2 AA4
AF14 C261 C262 C263 AD4
GND XGND_SRDS2
U3 LVDD[2] GND AF11 XGND_SRDS2 AE4
R4 AE23 2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B) 2200pF(B) AH4
LVDD[1] GND XGND_SRDS2
GND AD7 AF1 AGND_SRDS2 XGND_SRDS2 Y4
GND AD18
STSEC AC21 DGND DGND
GND
GND AC16
R10 TVDD[2] GND AA8
N8 TVDD[1] GND AA17
GND A7
GND A3
GND A27
SIO A14 1R0VA_SCORE
GND
GND G18
AF27 F16 R170 CP329 AH14
OVDD[17] GND 10J AVDD_CORE
AF24 OVDD[16]
AF20 DGND C208 C207
OVDD[15]
AF10 OVDD[14] SENSEVSS W10
AE22 CP439 2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B)
OVDD[13]
AE5 OVDD[12]
AD20 OVDD[11]
AD15 DGND
OVDD[10] 1R0VA_SPCI
AE13 OVDD[09]
AD11 OVDD[08]
AD9 R185 CP310 AH20
OVDD[07] 10J AVDD_PCI1
AC18 OVDD[06]
AC6 C216 C215
OVDD[05]
AB13 OVDD[04]
AB10 2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B)
OVDD[03]
AB7 OVDD[02]
Y16 OVDD[01] DGND
1R0VA_SLBI
SLB R268 CP557 C28

10J AVDD_LBIU A
L23 C314 C313
BVDD
J23 BVDD
J21 2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B)
BVDD
J19 BVDD
J18 BVDD
H26 DGND
BVDD 1R0VA_SPLAT
F23 BVDD
F20 BVDD R179 CP318 AH18
10J AVDD_PLAT
C211 C212
SoC MPC8533(1G)
2.2uF(2012:B) 2.2uF(2012:B) SoC MPC8533(1G)
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (HDD ASIC LCDC/SDRAM/I2C)
{6,34} RESET_HDD
CB579
1000pF(B) IC24A
DGND
B22 AB26 CP620
RESET_N_I LC_DCLK_IN_I HDDLCD_CLKIN
{5} HDD_REFCLK AB25 REF_SYSCLK_I

RB262 AB24
10KJ REF_AESCLK_I
LCD[23:0] {31}
DGND AF24 LCD0
LC_DATA_0_O LCD1
LC_DATA_1_O AD24
AD23 LCD2
DGND LC_DATA_2_O LCD3
AC24 SYSCLK_THR_I (PD) LC_DATA_3_O AC23
3R3V RB263 X_4.7KJ AESCLK_SEL0 CP537 W23 AB23 LCD4
RB261 X_4.7KJ AESCLK_SEL1 CP536 AESCLK_SEL_0_I (PD) LC_DATA_4_O LCD5
AA23 AESCLK_SEL_1_I (PD) LC_DATA_5_O AE25
SYSTEM CONTROL
3R3V R291 2.2KJ SDCLK_SEL0 CP644 D21 AD25 LCD6
R290 X_4.7KJ SDCLK_SEL1 CP646 SD_CLK_SEL_0_I (PD) LC_DATA_6_O LCD7
A24 SD_CLK_SEL_1_I (PD) LC_DATA_7_O AB22
AC20 AC25 LCD8
UA_VD_SEL_I (PD) LC_DATA_8_O LCD9
LC_DATA_9_O AC26
AD26 LCD10
LC_DATA_10_O LCD11
LC_DATA_11_O Y23
Y24 LCD12
LC_DATA_12_O LCD13
LC_DATA_13_O V23
W25 LCD14
LC_DATA_14_O LCD15
LC_DATA_15_O Y26
SD_CKE AE13 W24 LCD16
SD_CLK R305 82J SD_CKE_O LC_DATA_16_O LCD17
LCD I/F
AF22 SD_CLK_OUT_O LC_DATA_17_O U23
C SD_CS AC14 SD_CS_O LC_DATA_18_O W26 LCD18
SD_RAS AE14 T22 LCD19
SD_CAS SD_RAS_O LC_DATA_19_O LCD20
AF14 SD_CAS_O LC_DATA_20_O T23
SD_WE AF12 V24 LCD21
SD_WE_O LC_DATA_21_O LCD22
LC_DATA_22_O U25
U24 LCD23
LC_DATA_23_O
SD_A[14:0] AA26
LC_DCLK_OUT_O LCD_CP {31}
LC_LP_O AC22 LCD_LP {31}
SD_A0 AB17 AE23
SD_A1 SD_A_0_O LC_FRAME_O LCD_FRAME {31}
AC17 SD_A_1_O LC_M_O AF23 LCD_M {31}
SD_A2 AD17 AC21
SD_A3 SD_A_2_O LC_DE_O LCD_ENB {31}
AF17 SD_A_3_O LC_DISP_O AE24 LCD_DISPON {31}
SD_A4 AC16
SD_A5 SD_A_4_O
AD16 SD_A_5_O
SD_A6 AE16
SD_A7 SD_A_6_O
AF16 SD_A_7_O
SD_A8 AB15 E18
SD_A9 SD_A_8_O RT_CE_O RTC_CE {27}
AC15 SD_A_9_O RT_CLK_O D18 RTC_CLK {27}
SD_A10 AD15 A20
SD_A_10_O RT_DATA_IO RTC_DATA {27}
RTC
SD_A11 AE15 B19 R275 10KJ

SD_A12 SD_A_11_O RT_IO_O
AD12 SD_A_12_O
SD_A13 AB13 3R3V_ECO
SD_A14 SD_A_13_O DGND
AF15 SD_A_14_O
SD_DQ[31:0]
R288
SD_DQ0 1 8 AE12 2.2KJ
SD_DQ1 SD_D_0_IO (PU)
2 7 AF10
I2C I/F
SD_DQ2 BRB8 SD_D_1_IO (PU)

3 6 AC13 SD_D_2_IO (PU)
SD_DQ3 4 5 47Jx4 AD11
SD_DQ4 SD_D_3_IO (PU) R293 33J
1 8 AF11 B20
SDRAM I/F
SD_DQ5 SD_D_4_IO (PU) I2_SDA_IO R272 33J

2 7 AD9 SD_D_5_IO (PU) I2_SCL_O D19
SD_DQ6 3 6 BRB5 AD10
SD_DQ7 47Jx4 SD_D_6_IO (PU) CP544 R273 33J H2_I2C_SDA
4 5 AC10 SD_D_7_IO (PU) E2_SDA_IO C20
SD_DQ8 4 5 AF8 A21 CP642 R294 33J H2_I2C_SCL
SD_DQ9 47Jx4 SD_D_8_IO (PU) E2_SCL_O
3 6 AE11 SD_D_9_IO (PU)
SD_DQ10 2 7 BRB6 AC12
1 8 AC11 SD_D_11_IO (PU)
SD_DQ12 4 5 AB10
B SD_DQ13 3 6 47Jx4 AE10
SD_D_12_IO (PU)
SD_DQ14 BRB7 SD_D_13_IO (PU)
2 7 AD8 SD_D_14_IO (PU)
SD_DQ15 1 8 AE9
1 8 AE20 SD_D_16_IO (PU)
SD_DQ17 2 7 AE19 SD_D_17_IO (PU)
JTAG
SD_DQ18 3 6 BR10 AF21

SD_DQ19 47Jx4 SD_D_18_IO (PU)
4 5 AD20 SD_D_19_IO (PU) TCK_I A22 JTAG_CK1 {6,8,23,35}
SD_DQ20 1 8 AE22 C22
SD_D_20_IO (PU) TDI_I HDD_JTAG_TDI {35}
SD_DQ21 2 7 AD19 C21
SD_DQ22 BR7 SD_D_21_IO (PU) TDO_O HDD_JTAG_TDO {35}
3 6 AD22 SD_D_22_IO (PU) TMS_I AE21 JTAG_TMS1 {6,8,23,35}
SD_DQ23 4 5 47Jx4 AD21 B21
SD_D_23_IO (PU) TRST_I JTAG_RST1 {8,23,35}
SD_DQ24 4 5 AC19
SD_DQ25 47Jx4 SD_D_24_IO (PU)
3 6 AC18 SD_D_25_IO (PU)
SD_DQ26 2 7 BR8 AF20
1 8 AD18 SD_D_27_IO (PU) TMC1_I D22
SD_DQ28 4 5 AB18 C23
SD_DQ29 47Jx4 SD_D_28_IO (PU) TMC2_I
3 6 AF19 SD_D_29_IO (PU) TST_RST_I (PD) T2
SD_DQ30 2 7 BR9 AE18 AD6
SD_DQ31 SD_D_30_IO (PU) TST_SEL_0_I (PD)
1 8 AE17 SD_D_31_IO (PU) TST_SEL_1_I (PD) AC8
TST_SEL_2_I (PD) AE7
TST_IO_0_IO (PD) AA24
TEST
TST_IO_1_IO (PD) Y25

SD_DQM_0 AB12 AD7
SD_DQM_1 SD_DQM_0_O SMC_I (PD)
AB14 SD_DQM_1_O TEN_I (PD) D20
SD_DQM_2 AD13 AA25
SD_DQM_3 SD_DQM_2_O BUNRI_I (PD)
AD14 SD_DQM_3_O THMODE_I (PD) AC7
TST_DMA (PD) A23
HDD ASIC
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
12/42 (14)
SD_A[14:0]
ICB23 D
SD_A13 20 23 SD_A0
SD_A14 BA0 A0 SD_A1
21 BA1 A1 24
25 SD_A2
A2 SD_A3
A3 26
SD_DQM_0 15 29 SD_A4
SD_DQM_1 DQML A4 SD_A5
39 DQMH A5 30
31 SD_A6
SD_WE A6 SD_A7
16 WE A7 32
SD_CAS 17 33 SD_A8
SD_RAS CAS A8 SD_A9
18 RAS A9 34
SD_CS 19 22 SD_A10
CS A10/AP SD_A11
A11 35
3R3V SD_CLK 38 36 SD_A12
CLK A12
KIN {30} 1 VDD NC 40

14 SD_DQ[31:0]
CB648 CB650 CB647 VDD DGND
27 VDD
2 SD_DQ0
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) DQ0 SD_DQ1
3 VDDQ DQ1 4
9 5 SD_DQ2
VDDQ DQ2 SD_DQ3
43 VDDQ DQ3 7
DGND 49 8 SD_DQ4
VDDQ DQ4 SD_DQ5
DQ5 10
SD_CKE 37 11 SD_DQ6
CKE DQ6 SD_DQ7
DQ7 13
6 42 SD_DQ8
VSSQ DQ8 SD_DQ9
12 VSSQ DQ9 44
46 45 SD_DQ10
VSSQ DQ10 SD_DQ11
52 VSSQ DQ11 47
48 SD_DQ12
DQ12 SD_DQ13
28 VSS DQ13 50
41 51 SD_DQ14
VSS DQ14 SD_DQ15
54 VSS DQ15 53
K4S641632
C
SD_A[14:0]
IC25
SD_A13 20 23 SD_A0
SD_A14 BA0 A0 SD_A1
21 BA1 A1 24
25 SD_A2
A2 SD_A3
A3 26
SD_DQM_2 15 29 SD_A4
SD_DQM_3 DQML A4 SD_A5
39 DQMH A5 30
31 SD_A6
SD_WE A6 SD_A7
16 WE A7 32
SD_CAS 17 33 SD_A8
SD_RAS CAS A8 SD_A9
18 RAS A9 34
SD_CS 19 22 SD_A10
CS A10/AP SD_A11
A11 35
3R3V SD_CLK 38 36 SD_A12
CLK A12
1 VDD NC 40
CO 14
C412 C411 C410 VDD DGND
27 VDD
3R3V 2 SD_DQ16
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) DQ0 SD_DQ17
3 VDDQ DQ1 4
288 9 5 SD_DQ18
2KJ VDDQ DQ2 SD_DQ19
43 VDDQ DQ3 7
DGND 49 8 SD_DQ20
R271 R289 VDDQ DQ4 SD_DQ21
DQ5 10
2.2KJ 2.2KJ SD_CKE 37 11 SD_DQ22
CP645 CKE DQ6 SD_DQ23
H1_I2C_SDA {19,37,40} DQ7 13
CP548 6 42 SD_DQ24
H1_I2C_SCL_CPLD {35} VSSQ DQ8 SD_DQ25
12 VSSQ DQ9 44
CP547 46 45 SD_DQ26
CP643 VSSQ DQ10 SD_DQ27
52 VSSQ DQ11 47
48 SD_DQ28
DQ12 SD_DQ29
28 VSS DQ13 50
3R3V 41 51 SD_DQ30
VSS DQ14 SD_DQ31
54 53
VSS DQ15 B
K4S641632
C34 R28
2.2KJ
0.1uF(B)
IC26
1 A0 VCC 8
2 A1 WP 7 GPO_256EEP_WP {16}
3 A2 SCL 6
4 GND SDA 5
8PIN DIP SOCKET (EEPROM)

DGND DGND
AS1
A_AT24C256B-PU
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (HDD ASIC PCIexpress/SATA/USB/VIDEO)
IC24B
{5} HDD_PCIE_CLKP R2 PE_CLKP_I

R1 F2 H_TXP
{5} HDD_PCIE_CLKN PE_CLKN_I PE_TXP_0_O
1R0V_HDD G2 H_TXN
PE_TXN_0_O
D
CP405 H2 H_TXP
PE_TXP_1_O H_TXN
G4 PE_CORE_VDD PE_TXN_1_O J2
K4 PE_CORE_VDD
C290 CB434 CB438 CB439 CB440 K5 L2 H_TXP
PE_CORE_VDD PE_TXP_2_O H_TXN
N4 PE_CORE_VDD PE_TXN_2_O M2
N2 H_TXP
DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
PE_TXP_3_O H_TXN
PE_TXN_3_O P2
1R8V_HDD
CP408
G3 PE_VDD_TIO
K3 PE_VDD_TIO PE_RXP_0_I E1
CB387 CB437 CB432 CB443 N3 F1
PE_VDD_TIO PE_RXN_0_I
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) G1
PE_RXP_1_I
PE_RXN_1_I H1
DGND DGND DGND DGND
PE_RXP_2_I K1
PE_RXN_2_I L1
CP404 1R8VA_HPX
LB10 RB188 R3 M1
BLM18PG121SN1(1608) 1J PE_VDD_A PE_RXP_3_I
PE_RXN_3_I N1
CB427 C299
0.1uF(B) 10uF(2012:F)
P3 PE_VSS_A
DGND
3R3V DGND L4 L3
VSS VSS
J1 VSS VSS J4
K2 VSS VSS J3
M3 VSS VSS H4
M4 VSS VSS H3
P1 VSS VSS F3
C365 P4 E2
X10 VSS VSS
0.01uF(B)
PCI Express I/F
1 6 DGND D
OE VCC DGND
2 N.C. /OUT 5
C 3 GND OUT 4 S_CLKP_OUT L25 S_CLKP_I S0_TXP_O P26 S0_TX

S_CLKN_OUT L26 P25 S0_TX
EG-2102CA 100MHz S_CLKN_I S0_TXN_O
DGND R26 S0_RX
S0_RXN_I S0_RX
S0_RXP_I R25
CP724 K22
CP725 S_REFSEL_I (PD)
R23 S_F50SEL_I (PD)
CP726 L23 S_SRREN_I (PU)
H26 S_SPXCLK_I
1R0V_HDD DGND
M26 S1_TX
CP639 1R0V_HSTCORE S1_TXP_O S1_TX
S1_TXN_O M25
L34 P24
BLM18PG121SN1(1608) S_VDD
P23 S_VDD S1_RXN_I N26
C356 CB562 C355 N25
S1_RXP_I
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND

1R8V_HDD
CP635 1R8V_HST
L36 R297 M24
BLM18PG121SN1(1608) 1J S_VDD_TIO
M23 S_VDD_TIO
C360 CB567 C359
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)

VSS T26
DGND DGND DGND K26
VSS
VSS N23
VSS N24
CP637 1R8VA_HST R24
L35 R296 VSS
K25 S_VDD_A VSS T24
GP13 GP14 BLM18PG121SN1(1608) 1J T25
C358 CB572 C357 VSS
VSS U26
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) D

L24
B DGND 3R3V DGND DGND
S_VSS_A
SATA I/F
DGND
C329 X9
1 ST VDD 4 UB_DMH_IO B16
0.1uF(B) CP545 CP542 A16
UB_CLK_OUT R274 USB_CLK UB_DPH_IO
2 GND OUT 3 A18 UB_USBCLK_I
22J C18
SG-310SCF_100ppm(C)_30MHz UB_USB_PCLK_I
DGND DGND
UB_PPON_O D17 UB_PPO

UB_OCI_I A19 UB_OCI
B18 UB_USBCLK_SEL_I (PD)
E17 UB_ENDIAN_SEL_I (PD)
C17 UB_PCLK_SEL_I (PD)
E19 UB_THMODE_I (PD)
CP540
3R3V LB27 D16
BLM18PG121SN1(1608) UB_VD331
D15 UB_VD332
CB581 C328 CB577
+ C326 C15
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) UB_GND1
A14 UB_GND2 UB_DMF_IO A15
47uF/16V(MVL/F60) C16 B15
DGND DGND DGND
UB_GND3 UB_DPF_IO
DGND DGND
UB_RPU_O B14 UB_RPU

3R3VA_HUSB
UB_VBUS_I C19 UB_VBU
CP546
3R3V L28 C13
BLM18PG121SN1(1608) CP727 UB_RREF UB_AVDD RB2
A13 L17
A CP728 UB_PVDDFIL B13
UB_RREF DPH_IO
K17
UB_PVDDFIL UB_RSDPH_IO
C330 RB272 CB578 L16 RB2
1.6KF UB_RSDMH_IO
B12 UB_AVSS DMH_IO K16
10uF(2012:F) 1000pF(B) A12 UB_COM RB2
C14 UB_PVSS UB_RSDMF_IO K15
RJ1 UB_AGND L15
DMF_IO
X_PADSHORT
USB I/F K14 RB2
DGND
DPF_IO
UB_RSDPF_IO L14
HDD ASIC
5 4 3

3 2 1
13/42 (15)
_TXP0 C291 SH_RX0P {11}

_TXN0 C292 0.1uF(B) SH_RX0N {11}
0.1uF(B) D
_TXP1 C293 SH_RX1P {11}
_TXN1 C294 0.1uF(B) SH_RX1N {11}
0.1uF(B)
_TXP2 C295 SH_RX2P {11}
_TXN2 C296 0.1uF(B) SH_RX2N {11}
0.1uF(B)
_TXP3 C297 SH_RX3P {11}
_TXN3 C298 0.1uF(B) SH_RX3N {11}
0.1uF(B)
SH_TX0P {11}
SH_TX0N {11}
SH_TX1P {11}
SH_TX1N {11}
SH_TX2P {11}
SH_TX2N {11}
SH_TX3P {11}
SH_TX3N {11}
DGND
FG2
CN4
FG
1 1
0_TXP C398 SATA0_TX_P 2 2
AS13
I_HDD_SATA80G_SG
C
0_TXN C399 0.01uF(B) SATA0_TX_N 3
0.01uF(B) 3
4 4
0_RXN C400 SATA0_RX_N 5
0_RXP C401 0.01uF(B) SATA0_RX_P 5
6 6
0.01uF(B)
FG
7 7
6SAT07P-328B-B5
FG1
DGND
1_TXP C367 SATA1_TX_P {34}

1_TXN C369 0.01uF(B) SATA1_TX_N {34}
0.01uF(B)
SATA1_RX_N {34}
SATA1_RX_P {34}
R292 L33
CP648 IC27 CP647 nanoSMDC110F(3216) CP641 BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
1 CTRLA OUTA 8 USB_VBUS {30}
RB270 5V_IN
47KJ 3R3V 2 7 R295 + C380 C379
FLAGA VDD C354 47KJ
47uF/16V(MVL/F60) 0.01uF(B)
3 6 10uF(2012:F)
R287 FLAGB GND DGND DGND DGND
10KJ DGND
DGND 4 5
CTRLB OUTB
PNL_USB_DN {30}
BD6512F-E2 PNL_USB_DP {30}
CP650
DGND
DGND
R286
1KJ B
CN5
FG1
UAR27-4K5J00
1
FG
VBUS
2 D-
3 D+ L43
FG
4 GND 0.1uF(1608:B)
K2
K1
FG2
RB274 RB273
15KJ 15KJ DGND FGND
_PPON DGND
_OCI CP649 D8
HZM6.2Z4MWA
A
C352 DGND DGND
0.1uF(B)
MT_USB_RTN_P {30}
DGND
MT_USB_RTN_N {30}
CN6 CP759
FG1
UBR23-4K2200
UB_VBUS_DEVICE 1
FG
UB_DN_DEVICE VBUS
2 D-
UB_DP_DEVICE 3 D+ L44
FG
4 GND 0.1uF(1608:B)
K2
K1
RB271
FG2
1.5KJ
DB8 DGND FGND
_RPU CP729 1SS355 DGND
CP543 D4
_VBUS RB275 HZM6.2Z4MWA
A
10KJ
DB9 DGND
RB265 1SS355 RB276 CB580
39J 15KJ A
10uF(2012:F)
RB267
39J DGND
RB266 DGND
39J
RB264
39J
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (HDD ASIC LocalBUS/UART/GPIO)
IC24C
D
A10 LB_ADDR_E
C12 LB_ADDR_E
{6,25,26,27} LB_A[23:0] D13 LB_ADDR_E
LB_A1 D10
LB_A2 LB_ADDR_1_
A8 LB_ADDR_2_
LB_A3 E10
LB_A4 LB_ADDR_3_
D11 LB_ADDR_4_
LB_A5 E11
LB_A6 LB_ADDR_5_
B9 LB_ADDR_6_
LB_A7 C10
LB_A8 LB_ADDR_7_
A9 LB_ADDR_8_
LB_A9 B10
LB_A10 LB_ADDR_9_
C11 LB_ADDR_1
LB_A11 D12
{6,25,26,27} LB_D[31:0] LB_ADDR_1
LB_D0 C5
LB_D1 LB_DATA_0_
C6 LB_DATA_1_
LB_D2 D7
LB_D3 LB_DATA_2_
B6 LB_DATA_3_
LB_D4 A5
LB_D5 LB_DATA_4_
C7 LB_DATA_5_
LB_D6 D8
LB_D7 LB_DATA_6_
E8 LB_DATA_7_
LB_D8 B7
LB_D9 LB_DATA_8_
A6 LB_DATA_9_
LB_D10 C8
LB_D11 LB_DATA_10
D9 LB_DATA_11
LB_D12 E9
LB_D13 LB_DATA_12
B8 LB_DATA_13
LB_D14 A7
LB_D15 LB_DATA_14
C9 LB_DATA_15
D4 LB_EXCS_O
C4 LB_EXCS_O
C3 LB_EXCS_O
A3 LB_EXCS_O
D5 LB_EXCS_O
C B4 LB_EXCS_O
B3 LB_EXCS_O
A4 LB_EXCS_O
{6} EXLCS6_HDD B5 LB_CS_IN_N

D6 LB_EXCS_IN
{6} ASIC_OE E4 LB_OE_N_I (

{6} ASIC_WE B2 LB_WE_N_I
{6} LB_WAIT_HDD C2 LB_WAIT_N_
{6} HDD_INT_N E5 LB_INTR_N_
{6} DMA_REQ0_HDD D2 LB_DMA_RE

{6} DMA_REQ1_HDD C1 LB_DMA_RE
{6} DMA_ACK0_HDD D1 LB_DMA_AC

{6} DMA_ACK1_HDD F5 LB_DMA_AC
F4 LB_DMA_TC
D3 LB_DMA_TC
{14} GPO_256EEP_WP G23 GP_IO_0_IO

3R3V RB356 X_2.2KJ F25
RB358 2.2KJ GP_IO_1_IO
E26 GP_IO_2_IO
RB354 2.2KJ G24
B GP_IO_3_IO
RB357 X_2.2KJ
RB355 2.2KJ
RB353 X_2.2KJ
DGND CP56 H23

{21} GPI_IMG_RYBY GP_IO_4_IO
{42} GPI_DSP1 {25} GPI_RYBY_BOOTPROG H22 GP_IO_5_IO
{25} GPI_RYBY_PCLBUMON G25 GP_IO_6_IO
{26} GPI_RYBY_FAXSTD F26 GP_IO_7_IO
{26} GPI_RYBY_FAXEXT H24 GP_IO_8_IO

{30} GPI_nCNCT_FAX1 J23 GP_IO_9_IO
{29} GPI_nCNCT_FAX2 J22 GP_IO_10_IO
{30} GPI_nFAN_CNCT H25 GP_IO_11_IO
{30} LCDSEL0 RB351 2.2KJ G26

RB349 2.2KJ GP_IO_12_IO
{30} LCDSEL1 J24 GP_IO_13_IO
{30} LCDSEL2 RB345 2.2KJ K23
RB347 X_2.2KJ GP_IO_14_IO
K24 GP_IO_15_IO
DGND
3R3V RB352 2.2KJ AF6

RB350 2.2KJ VD_LSCLK_
RB346 2.2KJ
RB348 2.2KJ DGND AE8 VD_HSYNCK
A
AC6 VD_VSYNCK
AC9 VD_VSYNCC
AD5 VD_VSYNCM
AB9 VD_VSYNCY
HDD ASIC
5 4 3

3 2 1
14/42 (16)
D
DR_EX_0_I (PU) UA_CLK1_I T1 HDD_UACLK {5}
DR_EX_1_I (PU) UA_CLK0_I U1
DR_EX_2_I (PU)
DR_1_I (PU)
DR_2_I (PU)
DR_3_I (PU)
DR_4_I (PU) UA_TXD1_O E3 HTXD1_FAX1D {32}
DR_5_I (PU) UA_TXD2_O R5 HTXD2_FAX1CS {32}
DR_6_I (PU) UA_TXD3_O R4 HTXD3_SCN {32}
DR_7_I (PU) UA_TXD4_O T3 HTXD4_PCU {32}
DR_8_I (PU) UA_TXD5_O U2 RB186 100J
HTXD5_LCDSUB {30}
DR_9_I (PU) UA_TXD6_O V1
AB2 RB179 100J
DR_10_I (PU) UA_TXD7/VD_DC0_O HTXD7_ACRE {42}
DR_11_I (PU) UA_TXD8/VD_DC1_O AB1 HTXD8_EF {43}
UA_TXD9/VD_DC2_O AA2 HTXD9_FAX2D {29}
TA_0_IO UA_TXD10/VD_DC3_O AA1 HTXD10_FAX2CS {29}
TA_1_IO
TA_2_IO
TA_3_IO
TA_4_IO
TA_5_IO UA_RXD1_I U5 HRXD1_FAX1D {32}
TA_6_IO UA_RXD2_I W1 HRXD2_FAX1CS {32}
TA_7_IO UA_RXD3_I U4 HRXD3_SCN {32} HRXD5_LCDSUB {30}
TA_8_IO UA_RXD4_I V3 HRXD4_PCU {32}
W2 RB180 100J RB181 1KJ
TA_9_IO UA_RXD5_I RB185 10KJ
TA_10_IO UA_RXD6_I V5 3R3V
V4 RB184 100KF
TA_11_IO UA_RXD7_I
LOCAL BUS
W3 RB182 10KJ
TA_12_IO UA_RXD8_I
TA_13_IO UA_RXD9_I T4 HRXD9_FAX2D {29}
TA_14_IO UA_RXD10_I W5 HRXD10_FAX2CS {29} HRXD7_ACRE {42}
UART
TA_15_IO
HRXD8_EF {43}
RB187 X_10KJ
CS_OUT_N_0_O UA_CTS1_I AA4 HCTS1_FAX1D {32}
AA3 DGND
CS_OUT_N_1_O UA_CTS2_I HCTS2_FAX1CS {32}
CS_OUT_N_2_O UA_CTS3_I U3 HCTS3_SCN {32} HCTS5_LCDSUB {30}
CS_OUT_N_3_O UA_CTS4_I AB4 HCTS4_PCU {32}
AB3 RB178 100J RB177 1KJ
CS_OUT_N_4_O UA_CTS5_I
CS_OUT_N_5_O UA_CTS6_I AD3 RB174 2.2KJ 3R3V C
AC3 RB175 100KF
CS_OUT_N_6_O UA_CTS7_I RB176 10KJ
CS_OUT_N_7_O UA_CTS8_I AC4
UA_CTS9_I AC5 HCTS9_FAX2D {29}
UA_CTS10_I AB5 HCTS10_FAX2CS {29}
GPI_EF_UART_RDY {43}
IN_N_I (PU)
CS_IN_N_I (PU) HCTS7_ACRE {42}
UA_RTS1_O W4 HRTS1_FAX1D {32}
UA_RTS2_O Y3 HRTS2_FAX1CS {32} HCTS8_EF {43}
UA_RTS3_O V2 HRTS3_SCN {32}
UA_RTS4_O T5 HRTS4_PCU {32}
_N_I (PU) UA_RTS5_O Y5 RB183 100J
HRTS5_LCDSUB {30}
_N_I (PU) UA_RTS6_O Y4
T_N_O UA_RTS7/VD_DM0_O AD2 HRTS7_ACRE {42}
R_N_O UA_RTS8/VD_DM1_O AD1 HRTS8_EF {43}
UA_RTS9/VD_DM2_O AC2 HRTS9_FAX2D {29}
UA_RTS10/VD_DM3_O AC1 HRTS10_FAX2CS {29}
A_REQ_N_0_O
A_REQ_N_1_O
A_ACK_N_0_I (PU)
A_ACK_N_1_I (PU)
A_TC_N_0_I (PU)
A_TC_N_1_I (PU)
RB413 X_2.2KJ GPO_CPUFAN_PWM0 {33}
D26 CP636 RB359 2.2KJ GPO_PWM0 {30}

0_IO GP_O_0_O CP638 RB360 2.2KJ
1_IO GP_O_1_O C26 GPO_PWM1 {30}
2_IO GP_O_2_O B24 GPO_nPD_MDDR_VTT2 {18}
B25 TFT_SEL {31}
3_IO GP_O_3_O B
D23 CP541 GPO_IMG_nWP {21}

GP_O_4_O
GP_O_5_O D24 GPO_nWP_BOOTPROG {25}
4_IO GP_O_6_O C24 GPO_nWP_PCL {25}
5_IO GP_O_7_O E22 GPO_nWP_FAXSTD {26}
6_IO
7_IO
GPIO
GP_O_8_O E23 GPO_nWP_FAXEXT {26}
GP_O_9_O D25 GPO_RST_FAX1 {32}
GP_O_10_O C25 GPO_RST_FAX2 {29}
GP_O_11_O B23 GPO_ENG_UART_RDY {43}
8_IO
9_IO CP539 RB269 2.2KJ
10_IO GP_O_12_O F23 PIC12VON {30}
11_IO GP_O_13_O E25 GPO_nPD_CDDR_VTT3 {37}
GP_O_14_O E24 GPO_DSP1 {42}
GP_O_15_O F24 GPO_DSP2 {42}
RB268
12_IO GP_O16/VD_DK0_O AE3 47KJ
13_IO GP_O17/VD_DK1_O AE2
14_IO GP_O18/VD_DK2_O AE4
15_IO GP_O19/VD_DK3_O AF3
DGND
CLK_I VD_LSOUTCLK_O AE6
YNCK_N_I (PU) VD_HSYNCOUTK_N_O AF7
VIDEO I/F A
YNCK_N_I (PU) VD_DY0_O AF4

YNCC_N_I (PU) VD_DY1_O AF5
YNCM_N_I (PU) VD_DY2_O AE5
YNCY_N_I (PU) VD_DY3_O AD4
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (HDD ASIC VCC/GND)
1R0V_HDD
1R0V_HCORE
L22 NFM21PC225B0J3 CP411
D
CB436 C288 C289 CB569 CB571 CB435 CB565 CB561 CB426 CB554 CB557 CB558 CB555 CB559 CB564
10uF(2012:F) 22uF(3216:F) 2.2uF(2012:B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND DGND
DGND
1R0V_HCORE
DGND
3R3V 3R3V_HIO
CP410
LB11
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
DGND
DGND
CB545 CB568 CB430 CB546 CB442
C
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
1R0V_HDD
C
LB16
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
RJB5
X_PADSHORT
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
15/42 (17)
IC24D
1R0V_HCORE 3R3V_HIO
K12 VDD10 VDD33 A2

K13 VDD10 VDD33 A11
L12 VDD10 VDD33 A17
L13 VDD10 VDD33 A25
M10 VDD10 VDD33 B1
M11 VDD10 VDD33 B26
M16 VDD10 VDD33 E7
M17 VDD10 VDD33 E12
N10 VDD10 VDD33 E21
N11 VDD10 VDD33 G5
N16 VDD10 VDD33 G22
N17 VDD10 VDD33 J26
P10 VDD10 VDD33 L22
P11 VDD10 VDD33 P5
P16 VDD10 VDD33 U22
P17 VDD10 VDD33 V26
R10 VDD10 VDD33 Y1
R11 AA5
R16
VDD10 VDD33
AA22 B
VDD10 VDD33
R17 VDD10 VDD33 AB8
T12 VDD10 VDD33 AB19
T13 VDD10 VDD33 AB21
T14 VDD10 VDD33 AE1
T15 VDD10 VDD33 AE26
U12 VDD10 VDD33 AF2
U13 VDD10 VDD33 AF9
U14 VDD10 VDD33 AF18
U15 VDD10 VDD33 AF25
1R0VA_HPLL
CP538
V22 PLL1_AVDD
CB553 CB552
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B)
W22 PLL1_AGND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A1
A26
B11
B17
D14
E6
E13
E14
E15
E16
E20
F22
H5
J5
J25
K10
K11
L5
L10
L11
M5
M12
M13
M14
M15
M22
N5
N12
N13
N14
N15
N22
P12
P13
P14
P15
P22
R12
R13
R14
R15
R22
T10
T11
T16
T17
U10
U11
U16
U17
V25
Y2
Y22
AB6
AB7
AB11
AB16
AB20
AF1
AF13
AF26
HDD ASIC
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (MFP ASIC LOCAL BUS / PCI Express / DDR2 I/F)
IC29A
M_DDR2_AD
B17 AH1 M_DDR2_AD0
F_LBA[0]_I (PU) F_SDA[0]_O M_DDR2_AD1
C17 F_LBA[1]_I (PU) F_SDA[1]_O AH2
D D17 F_LBA[2]_I (PU) F_SDA[2]_O AG3 M_DDR2_AD2
E17 AG4 M_DDR2_AD3
A19 F_LBA[4]_I (PU) F_SDA[4]_O AG1
B19 AG2 M_DDR2_AD5
C19 F_LBA[6]_I (PU) F_SDA[6]_O AF3
D19 AF1 M_DDR2_AD7
E19 F_LBA[8]_I (PU) F_SDA[8]_O AF4
A20 AF2 M_DDR2_AD9
B20 F_LBA[10]_I (PU) F_SDA[10]_O AH4
C20 AE2 M_DDR2_AD11
D20 F_LBA[12]_I (PU) F_SDA[12]_O AE3
E20 AL2 M_DDR2_AD13
F_LBA[13]_I (PU) F_SDA[13]_O
A21 F_LBA[14]_I (PU) F_SDA[14]_O AL1
B21 F_LBA[15]_I (PU)
C21 F_LBA[16]_I (PU) M_DD
D21 F_LBA[17]_I (PU)
AJ2 M_DDR2_BA0
3R3V_ECO F_SDBA[0]_O M_DDR2_BA1
F_SDBA[1]_O AH3
AE1 M_DDR2_BA2
F_LBD2 F_LBD0 F_SDBA[2]_O
1 8 C13 F_LBD[0]_IO
2 BRB11 7 F_LBD7 F_LBD1 D13
F_LBD0 F_LBD2 F_LBD[1]_IO
3 6 E13 F_LBD[2]_IO
4 1KJx4 5 F_LBD1 F_LBD3 A14 AM1 M_DDR2_CS0
F_LBD4 F_LBD4 F_LBD[3]_IO F_SDCS_N[0]_O M_DDR2_CS1
1 8 B14 F_LBD[4]_IO F_SDCS_N[1]_O AL3
2 BRB12 7 F_LBD3 F_LBD5 C14 AJ4 M_DDR2_CS2
F_LBD5 F_LBD6 F_LBD[5]_IO F_SDCS_N[2]_O M_DDR2_CS3
3 6 D14 F_LBD[6]_IO F_SDCS_N[3]_O AJ3
4 1KJx4 5 F_LBD8 F_LBD7 E14
LOCAL BUS
1 8 A15 F_LBD[8]_IO
2 BRB13 7 F_LBD6 F_LBD9 B15
3 6 C15 F_LBD[10]_IO
4 1KJx4 5 F_LBD13 F_LBD11 D15 H2 M_DDR2_DQ0
F_LBD11 F_LBD12 F_LBD[11]_IO F_SDQ[0]_IO M_DDR2_DQ1
1 8 E15 F_LBD[12]_IO F_SDQ[1]_IO J2
2 BRB14 7 F_LBD14 F_LBD13 C16 L2 M_DDR2_DQ2
F_LBD12 F_LBD14 F_LBD[13]_IO F_SDQ[2]_IO M_DDR2_DQ3
3 6 D16 F_LBD[14]_IO F_SDQ[3]_IO M2
4 1KJx4 5 F_LBD15 F_LBD15 E16 H3 M_DDR2_DQ4
F_LBD[15]_IO F_SDQ[4]_IO M_DDR2_DQ5
F_SDQ[5]_IO J3
K2 M_DDR2_DQ6
{6,21,24} RESET_MFP F_SDQ[6]_IO
CB117 L3 M_DDR2_DQ7
F_SDQ[7]_IO
F5 F_RESET_N_I F_SDDM[0]_IO K3
1000pF(B) J1
DGND
F_SDQS[0]_IO
F_SDQS_N[0]_IO H1
C 3R3V_ECO E18 F_LBCS_N_I (PU)
A17 F_LBWAIT_N_O
N2 M_DDR2_DQ8
F_SDQ[8]_IO M_DDR2_DQ9
3R3V_ECO D18 F_LBWR_N_I (PU) F_SDQ[9]_IO P3
3R3V_ECO C18 T2 M_DDR2_DQ10
F_LBRD_N_I (PU) F_SDQ[10]_IO M_DDR2_DQ11
F_SDQ[11]_IO V2
B16 M3 M_DDR2_DQ12
{6} MFP_INT_N F_LBINT_N_O F_SDQ[12]_IO M_DDR2_DQ13
F_SDQ[13]_IO N3
T1 M_DDR2_DQ14
F_SDQ[15]_IO V1
{6} RESET_MFP_PCIE F_SDDM[1]_IO P2
F_SDQS[1]_IO L1
CB179 K1
F_SDQS_N[1]_IO
1000pF(B) A33
DGND
F_PCIE_RESET_N_I M_DDR2_DQ16
F_SDQ[16]_IO W2
W4 M_DDR2_DQ17
{5} MFP_PCIE_CLKP L32 F_PCIEREFCLK_P_I F_SDQ[18]_IO Y4
L31 AA3 M_DDR2_DQ19
{5} MFP_PCIE_CLKN F_PCIEREFCLK_N_I F_SDQ[19]_IO
W1 M_DDR2_DQ20
C95 M_TXP0 F_SDQ[20]_IO M_DDR2_DQ21
{40} MW_RX0P K33 F_PCIETX0_P_O F_SDQ[21]_IO W3
C94 0.1uF(B) M_TXN0 J33 Y3 M_DDR2_DQ22
{40} MW_RX0N 0.1uF(B) F_PCIETX0_N_O F_SDQ[22]_IO M_DDR2_DQ23
F_SDQ[23]_IO AA2
C93 M_TXP1 J34 Y2
{40} MW_RX1P C92 0.1uF(B) M_TXN1 F_PCIETX1_P_O F_SDDM[2]_IO
{40} MW_RX1N H34 F_PCIETX1_N_O F_SDQS[2]_IO AA1
0.1uF(B) Y1
C91 M_TXP2 F_SDQS_N[2]_IO
{40} MW_RX2P G33 F_PCIETX2_P_O
C90 0.1uF(B) M_TXN2 F33
{40} MW_RX2N 0.1uF(B) F_PCIETX2_N_O M_DDR2_DQ24
F_SDQ[24]_IO AB2
C89 M_TXP3 F34 AB4 M_DDR2_DQ25
{40} MW_RX3P F_PCIETX3_P_O F_SDQ[25]_IO
PCI Express I/F
C88 0.1uF(B) M_TXN3 E34 AC4 M_DDR2_DQ26

{40} MW_RX3N 0.1uF(B) F_PCIETX3_N_O F_SDQ[26]_IO M_DDR2_DQ27
F_SDQ[27]_IO AD2
AA4 M_DDR2_DQ28
F_SDQ[29]_IO AB3
U34 AC3 M_DDR2_DQ30
{40} MW_TX0P F_PCIERX0_P_I F_SDQ[30]_IO
T34 AD1 M_DDR2_DQ31
{40} MW_TX0N F_PCIERX0_N_I F_SDQ[31]_IO
F_SDDM[3]_IO AC2
{40} MW_TX1P T33 F_PCIERX1_P_I F_SDQS[3]_IO AC1
{40} MW_TX1N R33 F_PCIERX1_N_I F_SDQS_N[3]_IO AB1
{40} MW_TX2P P34

B {40} MW_TX2N N34
F_PCIERX2_P_I
AN3 M_DDR2_DQ32
F_PCIERX2_N_I F_SDQ[32]_IO M_DDR2_DQ33
F_SDQ[33]_IO AM4
N33 AN5 M_DDR2_DQ34
{40} MW_TX3P F_PCIERX3_P_I F_SDQ[34]_IO
M33 AN6 M_DDR2_DQ35
{40} MW_TX3N F_PCIERX3_N_I F_SDQ[35]_IO
AP2 M_DDR2_DQ36
F_SDQ[37]_IO AP3
AL5 M_DDR2_DQ38
F_SDQ[39]_IO AM5
F_SDDM[4]_IO AN4
F_SDQS[4]_IO AP5
F_SDQS_N[4]_IO AP4
{5} MDDR2_REFCLK F1 F_DDR2_REFCLK_I

AM7 M_DDR2_DQ40
F_SDQ[41]_IO AN7
AN9 M_DDR2_DQ42
F_SDQ[43]_IO AL9
DDR2 SDRAM I/F
AM6 M_DDR2_DQ44
F_SDQ[45]_IO AP6
AM8 M_DDR2_DQ46
F_SDQ[47]_IO AM9
{19} M_DDR2_RAS AJ1 F_SDRAS_N_O F_SDDM[5]_IO AN8
F_SDQS[5]_IO AP8
{19} M_DDR2_CAS AK4 F_SDCAS_N_O F_SDQS_N[5]_IO AP7
{19} M_DDR2_WE AK1 F_SDWE_N_O

AM10 M_DDR2_DQ48
F_SDQ[49]_IO AN11
AM12 M_DDR2_DQ50
{19} M_DDR2_CKE0 AD4 F_SDCKE[0]_O F_SDQ[51]_IO AL16
AD3 AN10 M_DDR2_DQ52
{19} M_DDR2_CKE1 F_SDCKE[1]_O F_SDQ[52]_IO M_DDR2_DQ53
F_SDQ[53]_IO AL10
M1 AL11 M_DDR2_DQ54
{19} M_DDR2_CK0P F_SDCLK[0]_O F_SDQ[54]_IO M_DDR2_DQ55
{19} M_DDR2_CK0N N1 F_SDCLK_N[0]_O F_SDQ[55]_IO AL12
F_SDDM[6]_IO AM11
{19} M_DDR2_CK1P P1 F_SDCLK[1]_O F_SDQS[6]_IO AP15
{19} M_DDR2_CK1N R1 F_SDCLK_N[1]_O F_SDQS_N[6]_IO AP14
{19} M_DDR2_CK2P AP9 F_SDCLK[2]_O

AP10 AN15 M_DDR2_DQ56
{19} M_DDR2_CK2N F_SDCLK_N[2]_O F_SDQ[56]_IO M_DDR2_DQ57
AN16
A AP11
F_SDQ[57]_IO
AP18 M_DDR2_DQ58
{19} M_DDR2_CK3P F_SDCLK[3]_O F_SDQ[58]_IO M_DDR2_DQ59
{19} M_DDR2_CK3N AP12 F_SDCLK_N[3]_O F_SDQ[59]_IO AM18
AM15 M_DDR2_DQ60
{19} M_DDR2_ODT[3:0] F_SDQ[61]_IO AM16
AM17 M_DDR2_DQ62
M_DDR2_ODT3 F_SDQ[62]_IO M_DDR2_DQ63
AM2 F_SDODT[3]_O F_SDQ[63]_IO AN18
M_DDR2_ODT2 AN1 AN17
M_DDR2_ODT1 F_SDODT[2]_O F_SDDM[7]_IO
AK3 F_SDODT[1]_O F_SDQS[7]_IO AP17
M_DDR2_ODT0 AK2 AP16
F_SDODT[0]_O F_SDQS_N[7]_IO
MFP ASIC
5 4 3

3 2 1
16/42 (18)
0R9V_EC_DDR2VTT
CP12
R2_AD[13:0] {19}
+ C26
150uF/4V(PXA/F60)
DGND D
0R9V_EC_DDR2VREF
IC30 SC2596SETRT 1R8V_EC2

CP13 1 3R3V_ECO
GND VTT 8 1R8V_EC2
{16} GPO_nPD_MDDR_VTT2 2 /SD PVIN 7
3 VSENSE AVIN 6
CP11 4 VREF VDDQ 5
EPad
C25 C24 C47 C45 C49 C51
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 22uF(3216:F) 0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B)
GND1
C46
M_DDR2_BA[2:0] {19}
DGND
10uF(2012:F)
DGND
M_DDR2_CS[3:0] {19}
M_DDR2_DQ[63:0] {19}
M_DDR2_DM0
M_DDR2_DM[7:0] {19}
M_DDR2_DQS0P {19} M_DDR2_DM0
M_DDR2_DQS0N {19} M_DDR2_DM1 C
M_DDR2_DM2
M_DDR2_DM3
M_DDR2_DM4
M_DDR2_DM5
M_DDR2_DM6
M_DDR2_DM7
M_DDR2_DM1
M_DDR2_DQS1P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS1N {19}
M_DDR2_DM2
M_DDR2_DQS2P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS2N {19}
M_DDR2_DM3
M_DDR2_DQS3P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS3N {19}
M_DDR2_DM4
M_DDR2_DQS4P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS4N {19}
M_DDR2_DM5
M_DDR2_DQS5P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS5N {19}
M_DDR2_DM6
M_DDR2_DQS6P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS6N {19}
M_DDR2_DM7
M_DDR2_DQS7P {19}
M_DDR2_DQS7N {19}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (MFP ASIC DDR2 SOCKET)

{18} M_DDR2_DM[7:0]
{18} M_DDR2_DQ[63:0]
{18} M_DDR2_AD[13:0]
{18} M_DDR2_BA[2:0]
{18} M_DDR2_CS[3:0]
{18} M_DDR2_ODT[3:0]
CN7
M_DDR2_BA0 107 102 M_DDR2_AD0

M_DDR2_BA1 106 BA0 A0 M_DDR2_AD1
BA1 A1 101
BA2/NC A2 M_DDR2_AD3
A3 99
98 M_DDR2_AD4
A4 M_DDR2_AD5
A5 97
94 M_DDR2_AD6
M_DDR2_CS0 A6 M_DDR2_AD7
110 S0 A7 92
M_DDR2_CS1 115 93 M_DDR2_AD8
S1/NC A8 M_DDR2_AD9
A9 91
105 M_DDR2_AD10
AP/A10 M_DDR2_AD11
A11 90
89 M_DDR2_AD12
M_DDR2_ODT0 A12 M_DDR2_AD13
114 ODT0 NC/A13 116
M_DDR2_ODT1 119 ODT1/NC
5 M_DDR2_DQ0
DQ0 M_DDR2_DQ1
DQ1 7
17 M_DDR2_DQ2
M_DDR2_RAS DQ2 M_DDR2_DQ3
{18} M_DDR2_RAS 108 RAS DQ3 19
M_DDR2_CAS 113 4 M_DDR2_DQ4
{18} M_DDR2_CAS CAS DQ4
M_DDR2_WE 109 6 M_DDR2_DQ5
{18} M_DDR2_WE WE DQ5
14 M_DDR2_DQ6
DQ6 M_DDR2_DQ7
DQ7 16
10 M_DDR2_DM0
H1_I2C_SDA DM0 M_DDR2_DQS0P
{14,37,40} H1_I2C_SDA 195 SDA DQS0 13
H1_I2C_SCL 197 11 M_DDR2_DQS0N
{35,37,40} H1_I2C_SCL SCL DQS0
C DQ8 23 M_DDR2_DQ8
25 M_DDR2_DQ9
DQ9 M_DDR2_DQ10
DQ10 35
79 37 M_DDR2_DQ11
{18} M_DDR2_CKE0 CKE0 DQ11 {18} M_DD
80 20 M_DDR2_DQ12
CKE1/NC DQ12 M_DDR2_DQ13
DQ13 22
36 M_DDR2_DQ14
DQ14 M_DDR2_DQ15
{18} M_DDR2_CK0P 30 CK0 DQ15 38 {18} M_DD
32 26 M_DDR2_DM1
{18} M_DDR2_CK0N CK0 DM1 {18} M_DD
31 M_DDR2_DQS1P
DQS1 M_DDR2_DQS1N
DQS1 29
{18} M_DDR2_CK2P 164 CK1 {18} M_DD

166 43 M_DDR2_DQ16
{18} M_DDR2_CK2N CK1 DQ16 {18} M_DD
3R3V_ECO 45 M_DDR2_DQ17 3R3V_ECO
DQ17 M_DDR2_DQ18
DQ18 55
199 57 M_DDR2_DQ19
VDDSPD DQ19 M_DDR2_DQ20
198 SA0 DQ20 44
200 46 M_DDR2_DQ21
SA1 DQ21 M_DDR2_DQ22
DQ22 56
DGND 0R9V_EC_DDR2VREF 58 M_DDR2_DQ23 DGND
DQ23 M_DDR2_DM2
DM2 52
1 51 M_DDR2_DQS2P
VREF DQS2 M_DDR2_DQS2N
DQS2 49
CB14
CB13
0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 81 61 M_DDR2_DQ24
VDD DQ24 M_DDR2_DQ25
82 VDD DQ25 63
DGND DGND 88 73 M_DDR2_DQ26
87 VDD DQ27 75
1R8V_EC2 95 62 M_DDR2_DQ28
96 VDD DQ29 64
103 74 M_DDR2_DQ30
104 VDD DQ31 76
111 67 M_DDR2_DM3
VDD DM3 M_DDR2_DQS3P
112 VDD DQS3 70
CB10 117 68 M_DDR2_DQS3N
0.1uF(B) VDD DQS3
118 VDD
CB53
{18} M_DDR2_DQS0P
0.1uF(B) 123 M_DDR2_DQ32
{18} M_DDR2_DQS0N DQ32
CB46 2 125 M_DDR2_DQ33
B 0.1uF(B) 3
VSS DQ33
135 M_DDR2_DQ34
CB9 VSS DQ34 M_DDR2_DQ35
{18} M_DDR2_DQS1P 8 VSS DQ35 137
0.1uF(B) 9 124 M_DDR2_DQ36
{18} M_DDR2_DQS1N VSS DQ36
CB8 12 126 M_DDR2_DQ37
0.1uF(B) VSS DQ37 M_DDR2_DQ38
15 VSS DQ38 134
CB42 18 136 M_DDR2_DQ39
{18} M_DDR2_DQS2P VSS DQ39
0.1uF(B) 21 130 M_DDR2_DM4
{18} M_DDR2_DQS2N VSS DM4
CB6 24 131 M_DDR2_DQS4P
0.1uF(B) VSS DQS4 M_DDR2_DQS4N
27 VSS DQS4 129
CB35 28
{18} M_DDR2_DQS3P VSS
0.1uF(B) 33
{18} M_DDR2_DQS3N VSS
CB5 34 141 M_DDR2_DQ40
39 VSS DQ41 143
CB30 40 151 M_DDR2_DQ42
0.1uF(B) 41 153 M_DDR2_DQ43
CB4 42 140 M_DDR2_DQ44
47 VSS DQ45 142
CB24 48 152 M_DDR2_DQ46
0.1uF(B) 53 154 M_DDR2_DQ47
54 147 M_DDR2_DM5
VSS DM5 M_DDR2_DQS5P
59 VSS DQS5 148
DGND 60 146 M_DDR2_DQS5N
{18} M_DDR2_DQS6P VSS DQS5
{18} M_DDR2_DQS6N 65 VSS
66 VSS
71 157 M_DDR2_DQ48
{18} M_DDR2_DQS7P 72 VSS DQ49 159
10uF(2012:F) 77 173 M_DDR2_DQ50
78 175 M_DDR2_DQ51
VSS DQ51 M_DDR2_DQ52
121 VSS DQ52 158
122 160 M_DDR2_DQ53
127 VSS DQ54 174
CB20 128 176 M_DDR2_DQ55
10uF(2012:F) VSS DQ55 M_DDR2_DM6
132 VSS DM6 170
133 169 M_DDR2_DQS6P
VSS DQS6 M_DDR2_DQS6N
138 VSS DQS6 167
139 VSS
144 VSS
CB21 145 179 M_DDR2_DQ56
10uF(2012:F) VSS DQ56 M_DDR2_DQ57
149 VSS DQ57 181
150 189 M_DDR2_DQ58
155 191
A 156
VSS DQ59
180 M_DDR2_DQ60
161 VSS DQ61 182
CB56 162 192 M_DDR2_DQ62
165 VSS DQ63 194
168 185 M_DDR2_DM7
171 VSS DQS7 188
172 186 M_DDR2_DQS7N
VSS DQS7
177 VSS
DGND 178 50
VSS Event/NC
183 VSS NC 69
184 VSS NC 83
187 VSS A15/NC 84
190 86 AS11 AS12
VSS A14/NC I_DIMM_DDR2_512M X_DIMM_DDR2_512M
193 VSS NC 120
196 VSS TEST/NC 163
CA0411-200N32(TYPE-B)
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
17/42 (19)
0R9V_EC_DDR2VTT
CN8 CB1
10uF(2012:F)
M_DDR2_BA1 106 BA0 A0 M_DDR2_AD1
BA1 A1 101
BA2/NC A2 M_DDR2_AD3 M_DDR2_AD0 RB22 51J CB32
A3 99
98 M_DDR2_AD4 M_DDR2_AD1 RB5 51J 0.1uF(B)
A4 M_DDR2_AD5 M_DDR2_AD2 RB23 51J CB41
A5 97
94 M_DDR2_AD6 M_DDR2_AD3 RB24 51J 0.1uF(B)
M_DDR2_CS2 A6 M_DDR2_AD7
110 S0 A7 92
M_DDR2_CS3 115 93 M_DDR2_AD8 M_DDR2_AD4 RB25 51J CB47
S1/NC A8 M_DDR2_AD9 M_DDR2_AD5 RB6 51J 0.1uF(B)
A9 91
105 M_DDR2_AD10 M_DDR2_AD6 RB26 51J CB7
AP/A10 M_DDR2_AD11 M_DDR2_AD7 RB27 51J 0.1uF(B)
A11 90
89 M_DDR2_AD12
M_DDR2_ODT2 A12 M_DDR2_AD13 M_DDR2_AD8 RB7 51J CB2
114 ODT0 NC/A13 116
M_DDR2_ODT3 119 M_DDR2_AD9 RB28 51J 0.1uF(B)
ODT1/NC M_DDR2_AD10 RB4 51J CB3
5 M_DDR2_DQ0 M_DDR2_AD11 RB29 51J 0.1uF(B)
DQ0 M_DDR2_DQ1
DQ1 7
17 M_DDR2_DQ2 M_DDR2_AD12 RB8 51J CB36
M_DDR2_RAS DQ2 M_DDR2_DQ3 M_DDR2_AD13 RB13 51J 0.1uF(B)
108 RAS DQ3 19
M_DDR2_CAS 113 4 M_DDR2_DQ4 M_DDR2_BA0 RB20 51J CB50
M_DDR2_WE CAS DQ4 M_DDR2_DQ5 M_DDR2_BA1 RB21 51J 0.1uF(B)
109 WE DQ5 6
14 M_DDR2_DQ6
DQ6 M_DDR2_DQ7 M_DDR2_BA2 RB9 51J CB59
DQ7 16
10 M_DDR2_DM0 M_DDR2_CS0 RB18 51J 0.1uF(B)
H1_I2C_SDA DM0 M_DDR2_DQS0P M_DDR2_CS1 RB14 51J CB22
195 SDA DQS0 13
H1_I2C_SCL 197 11 M_DDR2_DQS0N M_DDR2_CS2 RB17 51J 0.1uF(B)
SCL DQS0
M_DDR2_CS3 RB16 51J CB44
DQ8 23 M_DDR2_DQ8 M_DDR2_RAS RB19 51J 0.1uF(B) C
25 M_DDR2_DQ9 M_DDR2_CAS RB2 51J CB29
DQ9 M_DDR2_DQ10 M_DDR2_WE RB3 51J 0.1uF(B)
DQ10 35
79 37 M_DDR2_DQ11
M_DDR2_CKE1 CKE0 DQ11
80 20 M_DDR2_DQ12 M_DDR2_CKE0 RB10 51J CB12
CKE1/NC DQ12 M_DDR2_DQ13 M_DDR2_CKE1 RB30 51J 0.1uF(B)
DQ13 22
36 M_DDR2_DQ14 CB11
DQ14 M_DDR2_DQ15 0.1uF(B)
M_DDR2_CK1P 30 CK0 DQ15 38
32 26 M_DDR2_DM1
M_DDR2_CK1N CK0 DM1
31 M_DDR2_DQS1P M_DDR2_ODT0 RB15 51J
DQS1 M_DDR2_DQS1N M_DDR2_ODT1 RB1 51J CB55
DQS1 29
M_DDR2_ODT2 RB36 51J 0.1uF(B)
164 M_DDR2_ODT3 RB12 51J CB31
M_DDR2_CK3P CK1
166 43 M_DDR2_DQ16 0.1uF(B)
M_DDR2_CK3N CK1 DQ16
45 M_DDR2_DQ17
DQ17 M_DDR2_DQ18
DQ18 55
199 57 M_DDR2_DQ19 CB60
VDDSPD DQ19 M_DDR2_DQ20 0.1uF(B)
198 SA0 DQ20 44
200 46 M_DDR2_DQ21
SA1 DQ21 M_DDR2_DQ22
DQ22 56
0R9V_EC_DDR2VREF 58 M_DDR2_DQ23 CB23
DQ23 M_DDR2_DM2 0.1uF(B)
DM2 52
1 51 M_DDR2_DQS2P CB66
VREF DQS2 M_DDR2_DQS2N 0.1uF(B)
DQS2 49
CB57
CB58
0.1uF(B) 1uF(1608:B) 81 61 M_DDR2_DQ24
VDD DQ24 M_DDR2_DQ25 DGND
82 VDD DQ25 63
DGND DGND 88 73 M_DDR2_DQ26
87 VDD DQ27 75
1R8V_EC2 95 62 M_DDR2_DQ28
96 VDD DQ29 64
103 74 M_DDR2_DQ30
104 VDD DQ31 76
111 67 M_DDR2_DM3
VDD DM3 M_DDR2_DQS3P
112 VDD DQS3 70
CB52 117 68 M_DDR2_DQS3N
0.1uF(B) VDD DQS3
118 VDD
CB49
0.1uF(B) 123 M_DDR2_DQ32
CB45 DQ32 M_DDR2_DQ33
2 125
0.1uF(B) 3
VSS DQ33
135 M_DDR2_DQ34 B
8 VSS DQ35 137
0.1uF(B) 9 124 M_DDR2_DQ36
12 VSS DQ37 126
0.1uF(B) 15 134 M_DDR2_DQ38
18 VSS DQ39 136
0.1uF(B) 21 130 M_DDR2_DM4
CB40 VSS DM4 M_DDR2_DQS4P
24 VSS DQS4 131
0.1uF(B) 27 129 M_DDR2_DQS4N
CB34 VSS DQS4
28 VSS
0.1uF(B) 33
CB26 VSS M_DDR2_DQ40
34 VSS DQ40 141
0.1uF(B) 39 143 M_DDR2_DQ41
40 VSS DQ42 151
0.1uF(B) 41 153 M_DDR2_DQ43
42 VSS DQ44 140
0.1uF(B) 47 142 M_DDR2_DQ45
48 VSS DQ46 152
0.1uF(B) 53 154 M_DDR2_DQ47
VSS DQ47 M_DDR2_DM5
54 VSS DM5 147
59 148 M_DDR2_DQS5P
DGND
VSS DQS5 M_DDR2_DQS5N
60 VSS DQS5 146
65 VSS
66 VSS
71 157 M_DDR2_DQ48
72 VSS DQ49 159
10uF(2012:F) 77 173 M_DDR2_DQ50
78 VSS DQ51 175
121 158 M_DDR2_DQ52
122 VSS DQ53 160
127 174 M_DDR2_DQ54
128 VSS DQ55 176
10uF(2012:F) 132 170 M_DDR2_DM6
133 VSS DQS6 169
VSS DQS6
139 VSS
144 VSS
CB43 145 179 M_DDR2_DQ56
149 VSS DQ57 181
150 189 M_DDR2_DQ58
155 191
156
VSS DQ59
180 M_DDR2_DQ60 A
161 VSS DQ61 182
CB33 162 192 M_DDR2_DQ62
165 VSS DQ63 194
168 185 M_DDR2_DM7
171 VSS DQS7 188
VSS DQS7
177 VSS
DGND 178 50
VSS Event/NC
183 VSS NC 69
184 VSS NC 83
187 VSS A15/NC 84
190 VSS A14/NC 86
193 VSS NC 120
196 VSS TEST/NC 163
CA0411-200N32(TYPE-B)
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (MFP ASIC SCANNER/LSU)
IC29B
{31} SCN_DAT_R[7:0]
D
SCN_DAT_R0 AC34 AL34
SCN_DAT_R1 F_SCDR[0]_I F_LSDA[0]_O
AD29 F_SCDR[1]_I F_LSDA[1]_O AM32
SCN_DAT_R2 AD30 AM33
SCN_DAT_R3 F_SCDR[2]_I F_LSDA[2]_O
AD31 F_SCDR[3]_I F_LSDA[3]_O AM34
SCN_DAT_R4 AD32
SCN_DAT_R5 F_SCDR[4]_I
AD33 F_SCDR[5]_I
SCN_DAT_R6 AD34
SCN_DAT_R7 F_SCDR[6]_I MFP_LSU_
AE29 F_SCDR[7]_I F_LSDK[0]_O AJ31
AJ32 MFP_LSU_
F_LSDK[1]_O MFP_LSU_
{31} SCN_DAT_G[7:0] F_LSDK[2]_O AJ33
AJ34 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_G0 F_LSDK[3]_O MFP_LSU_
AB32 F_SCDG[0]_I F_LSDK[4]_O AK30
SCN_DAT_G1 AB33 AK31 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_G2 F_SCDG[1]_I F_LSDK[5]_O MFP_LSU_
AB34 F_SCDG[2]_I F_LSDK[6]_O AK32
SCN_DAT_G3 AC29 AK33 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_G4 F_SCDG[3]_I F_LSDK[7]_O
AC30 F_SCDG[4]_I
SCN_DAT_G5 AC31
SCN_DAT_G6 F_SCDG[5]_I
AC32 F_SCDG[6]_I
SCN_DAT_G7 AC33 AG34 MFP_LSU_
F_SCDG[7]_I F_LSDC[0]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDC[1]_O AH29
AH30 MFP_LSU_
{31} SCN_DAT_B[7:0] F_LSDC[2]_O
AH31 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_B0 F_LSDC[3]_O MFP_LSU_
SCANNER I/F
Y30 F_SCDB[0]_I F_LSDC[4]_O AH32
SCN_DAT_B1 AA30 AH33 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_B2 F_SCDB[1]_I F_LSDC[5]_O MFP_LSU_
AA31 F_SCDB[2]_I F_LSDC[6]_O AH34
SCN_DAT_B3 AA32 AJ30 MFP_LSU_
SCN_DAT_B4 F_SCDB[3]_I F_LSDC[7]_O
AA33 F_SCDB[4]_I
SCN_DAT_B5 AB29
SCN_DAT_B6 F_SCDB[5]_I
AB30 F_SCDB[6]_I
SCN_DAT_B7 AB31 AF32 MFP_LSU_
F_SCDB[7]_I F_LSDM[0]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDM[1]_O AF33
AF34 MFP_LSU_
F_LSDM[2]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDM[3]_O AG29
CP78 Y31 AG30 MFP_LSU_
{24} SSYNC_SIOUT F_SCSSYNC_N_I F_LSDM[4]_O
{24} LINGT_SIOUT F_SCLINGT_I F_LSDM[5]_O
{24} HSYNC_SIOUT F_SCHSYNC_N_I F_LSDM[6]_O
{24} DOTGT_SIOUT F_SCDOTGT_I F_LSDM[7]_O
CP75 AA29
{24,31} SCN_CLK F_CSCANCLK_I
C F_LSDY[0]_O AE30 MFP_LSU_
SCN_FBCLK AA34 AE31 MFP_LSU_
CP76 F_CSCANFBCLK_O F_LSDY[1]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[2]_O AE32
LSU I/F
AE33 MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[3]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[4]_O AE34
AF29 MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[5]_O MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[6]_O AF30
AF31 MFP_LSU_
F_LSDY[7]_O
{5} MFP_REFCLK A29 F_SYS_REFCLK_I

3R3V_ECO
F_LSCLK_I AP32
C82 X3
1 OE VDD 4
GP18 GP17 0.1uF(B) CP87
2 GND OUT 3 C29 F_HALCLK_I
DGND X_SG-9001LB
DGND
R51 AP29 LSU_CLK_OU
10KJ F_LSOUTCLK_O
B28 F_SEGCLK_I F_PODCLK_O AP30
DGND AN33
F_LSVSYNCOP_N_O
F_LSHSYNCOP_N_O AN34
F_LSVSYNCK_N_I AM29
F_LSVSYNCC_N_I AL29
F_LSVSYNCM_N_I AN30
B30 F_PCI_HTMODE_I (PD) F_LSVSYNCY_N_I AM30
C30 F_PCI_HTXRST_I (PD)
F2 C
F_DDR_HTMODE_I
G2 F_DDR_BISTMODE_I 2
TEST
B A30 D
F_PLL_MODE_I
C31 F_PLL_BYPASS[0]_I
B1 F_PLL_BYPASS[1]_I
B29 F_PLL_BYPASS[2]_I F_LSHSYNCOK_N_O AL33
D3 AL32 LSHSYNCC_
F_VPD_I F_LSHSYNCOC_N_O LSHSYNCM_
F_LSHSYNCOM_N_O AL31
DGND AK34 LSHSYNCY_
F_LSHSYNCOY_N_O
{24,35,36,40} JTAG_CK2_ECO E4 F_TCK_I (PU)

E2 AN28
JTAG
{35} MFP_JTAG_TDI F_TDI_I (PU) F_LSHSYNCK_N_I

{35} MFP_JTAG_TDO G3 F_TDO_O F_LSHSYNCC_N_I AM28
{24,35,36,40} JTAG_TMS2_ECO E3 F_TMS_I (PU) F_LSHSYNCM_N_I AL28
{35,36,40} JTAG_RST2_ECO E1 F_TRST_I (PU) F_LSHSYNCY_N_I AN29
MFP ASIC
5 4 3

3 2 1
18/42 (20)
MFP_LSU_K[7:0] {30}
LSU_K0
LSU_K1
LSU_K2
LSU_K3
LSU_K4
LSU_K5
LSU_K6
LSU_K7
MFP_LSU_C[7:0] {30}
LSU_C0
LSU_C1
LSU_C2
LSU_C3
LSU_C4
LSU_C5
LSU_C6
LSU_C7
MFP_LSU_M[7:0] {30}
LSU_M0
LSU_M1
LSU_M2
LSU_M3
LSU_M4
LSU_M5
LSU_M6
LSU_M7
MFP_LSU_Y[7:0] {30}
LSU_Y0 C
LSU_Y1
LSU_Y2
LSU_Y3
LSU_Y4
LSU_Y5
LSU_Y6
LSU_Y7
LSCLK {30}
CP57
K_OUT RB77
33J MFP_LSU_CLK {30}
MFP_POD_CLK {21}
LSVSYNC_K {30}
LSVSYNC_C {30}
LSVSYNC_M {30}
LSVSYNC_Y {30}
CB138 CB137 CB139 CB136
220pF(CH) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH) 220pF(CH)

DGND DGND DGND DGND B
CP64 RB80
CC_OUT CP60 10J MFP_LSU_HSYNC {30}
CM_OUT CP61
CY_OUT CP63
CP58
LSHSYNC_IN {30}
CB140
100pF(CH)
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (MFP ASIC VIDEO/FlashROM/ACRE)
IC29C
{42} ACRE_D_R0 A26 F_ACREDOR[0]_O

{42} ACRE_D_R1 B26 F_ACREDOR[1]_O
{42} ACRE_D_R2 C26 F_ACREDOR[2]_O
{42} ACRE_D_R3 D26 F_ACREDOR[3]_O
{42} ACRE_D_R4 E26 F_ACREDOR[4]_O
{42} ACRE_D_R5 A27 F_ACREDOR[5]_O
D {42} ACRE_D_R6 B27 F_ACREDOR[6]_O
{42} ACRE_D_R7 C27 F_ACREDOR[7]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G0 C24 F_ACREDOG[0]_O

{42} ACRE_D_G1 D24 F_ACREDOG[1]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G2 E24 F_ACREDOG[2]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G3 A25 F_ACREDOG[3]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G4 B25 F_ACREDOG[4]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G5 C25 F_ACREDOG[5]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G6 D25 F_ACREDOG[6]_O
{42} ACRE_D_G7 E25 F_ACREDOG[7]_O
ACRE ASIC I/F

{42} ACRE_D_B0 E22 F_ACREDOBL[0]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B1 A23 F_ACREDOBL[1]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B2 B23 F_ACREDOBL[2]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B3 C23 F_ACREDOBL[3]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B4 D23 F_ACREDOBL[4]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B5 E23 F_ACREDOBL[5]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B6 A24 F_ACREDOBL[6]_O
{42} ACRE_D_B7 B24 F_ACREDOBL[7]_O
{42} ACRE_SEG0 E21 F_ACRESEGO[0]_O

{42} ACRE_SEG1 A22 F_ACRESEGO[1]_O
{42} ACRE_SEG2 B22 F_ACRESEGO[2]_O
{42} ACRE_SEG3 C22 F_ACRESEGO[3]_O
{42} ACRE_SEG4 D22 F_ACRESEGO[4]_O
{42} ACRE_VSYNC E29 F_ACREOVSYNC_N_O

{42} ACRE_HSYNC E28 F_ACREOHSYNC_N_O
{42} ACRE_PROEN D27 F_ACREOPROEN_O
{42} ACRE_READY D28 F_ACRE_READY_I (PU)
{42} ACRE_CLK E27 F_ACRECLK_O

C
MFP_RCDT[15:0]
MFP_RCA[20:0]
IC31 MFP_RCDT0 AP22
MFP_RCDT0 MFP_RCA0 MFP_RCDT1 F_T_RCDATA[0]_IO
29 DQ0 A0 25 AK21 F_T_RCDATA[1]_IO
MFP_RCDT1 31 24 MFP_RCA1 MFP_RCDT2 AL21
MFP_RCDT2 DQ1 A1 MFP_RCA2 MFP_RCDT3 F_T_RCDATA[2]_IO
33 DQ2 A2 23 AM21 F_T_RCDATA[3]_IO
MFP_RCDT3 35 22 MFP_RCA3 MFP_RCDT4 AN21
38 DQ4 A4 21 AP21 F_T_RCDATA[5]_IO
MFP_RCDT5 40 20 MFP_RCA5 MFP_RCDT6 AK20
42 DQ6 A6 19 AL20 F_T_RCDATA[7]_IO
MFP_RCDT7 44 18 MFP_RCA7 MFP_RCDT8 AM20
30 DQ8 A8 8 AN20 F_T_RCDATA[9]_IO
MFP_RCDT9 32 7 MFP_RCA9 MFP_RCDT10 AP20
34 DQ10 A10 6 AK19 F_T_RCDATA[11]_IO
MFP_RCDT11 36 5 MFP_RCA11 MFP_RCDT12 AL19
3R3V_ECO MFP_RCDT12 DQ11 A11 MFP_RCA12 MFP_RCDT13 F_T_RCDATA[12]_IO
39 DQ12 A12 4 AM19 F_T_RCDATA[13]_IO
MFP_RCDT13 41 3 MFP_RCA13 MFP_RCDT14 AN19
43 2 AP19
FLASH ROM I/F

MFP_RCDT15 DQ14 A14 MFP_RCA15 F_T_RCDATA[15]_IO
45 DQ15/A-1 A15 1
R39 48 MFP_RCA16
4.7KJ A16 MFP_RCA17
A17 17
16 MFP_RCA18
A18 MFP_RCA19 MFP_RCA0
NC/A19 9 AP28 F_T_RCADDR[0]_O
{16} GPI_IMG_RYBY 15 10 MFP_RCA20 MFP_RCA1 AK27
RY/BY NC/A20 MFP_RCA2 F_T_RCADDR[1]_O
47 BYTE/NC AL27 F_T_RCADDR[2]_O
3R3V_ECO 26 MFP_RC_CS0 MFP_RCA3 AM27
CE MFP_RC_OE MFP_RCA4 F_T_RCADDR[3]_O
13 NC/VCCW OE 28 AN27 F_T_RCADDR[4]_O
37 11 MFP_RC_WE MFP_RCA5 AP27
C58 C33 VCC WE MFP_RCA6 F_T_RCADDR[5]_O
AK26 F_T_RCADDR[6]_O
27 14 MFP_RCA7 AL26
GND WP/ACC GPO_IMG_nWP {16} F_T_RCADDR[7]_O
0.1uF(B) 0.01uF(B) 46 12 MFP_RCA8 AM26
GND RST RESET_MFP {6,18,24} F_T_RCADDR[8]_O
MFP_RCA9 AN26
DGND LHF00L28 MFP_RCA10 F_T_RCADDR[9]_O
AP26 F_T_RCADDR[10]_O
C59 R40 MFP_RCA11 AK25
B 10KJ MFP_RCA12 AL25
F_T_RCADDR[11]_O
1000pF(B) MFP_RCA13 F_T_RCADDR[12]_O
AM25 F_T_RCADDR[13]_O
MFP_RCA14 AN25
DGND DGND MFP_RCA15 F_T_RCADDR[14]_O
AP25 F_T_RCADDR[15]_O
MFP_RCA16 AK24
MFP_RCA17 F_T_RCADDR[16]_O
AL24 F_T_RCADDR[17]_O
MFP_RCA18 AM24
MFP_RCA19 F_T_RCADDR[18]_O
AN24 F_T_RCADDR[19]_O
MFP_RCA20 AP24 F_T_RCADDR[20]_O
AK23 F_T_RCADDR[21]_O
MFP ASIC
5 4 3

3 2 1
19/42 (21)
F_VIODK[0]_I B10 VIDEO_DAT_K0 {36,43}

F_VIODK[1]_I C10 VIDEO_DAT_K1 {36,43}
F_VIODK[2]_I D10 VIDEO_DAT_K2 {36,43}
F_VIODK[3]_I A11 VIDEO_DAT_K3 {36,43}
F_VIODK[4]_I B11 VIDEO_DAT_K4 {36,43}
F_VIODK[5]_I C11 VIDEO_DAT_K5 {36,43}
F_VIODK[6]_I D11 VIDEO_DAT_K6 {36,43} D
F_VIODK[7]_I E11 VIDEO_DAT_K7 {36,43}
F_VIODC_R[0]_IO A2 VIDEO_DAT_C0 {36,43}

F_VIODC_R[2]_IO B3 VIDEO_DAT_C2 {36,43}
F_VIODC_R[5]_IO C4 VIDEO_DAT_C5 {36,43}
F_VIODM_G[0]_IO C5 VIDEO_DAT_M0 {36,43}

F_VIODM_G[1]_IO D5 VIDEO_DAT_M1 {36,43}
F_VIODM_G[2]_IO A6 VIDEO_DAT_M2 {36,43}
F_VIODM_G[3]_IO B6 VIDEO_DAT_M3 {36,43}
F_VIODM_G[4]_IO C6 VIDEO_DAT_M4 {36,43}
VIDEO I/F
F_VIODM_G[5]_IO D6 VIDEO_DAT_M5 {36,43}

F_VIODM_G[6]_IO E6 VIDEO_DAT_M6 {36,43}
F_VIODM_G[7]_IO A7 VIDEO_DAT_M7 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[0]_IO B7 VIDEO_DAT_Y0 {36,43}

F_VIODY_B[1]_IO C7 VIDEO_DAT_Y1 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[2]_IO D7 VIDEO_DAT_Y2 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[3]_IO E7 VIDEO_DAT_Y3 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[4]_IO A8 VIDEO_DAT_Y4 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[5]_IO B8 VIDEO_DAT_Y5 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[6]_IO C8 VIDEO_DAT_Y6 {36,43}
F_VIODY_B[7]_IO D8 VIDEO_DAT_Y7 {36,43}
F_VIOVSYNCK_N_O B13 VIDEO_VSYNC_K_N {36,43}

F_VIOVSYNCC_N_O A10 VIDEO_VSYNC_C_N {36,43}
F_VIOVSYNCM_N_O E9 VIDEO_VSYNC_M_N {36,43}
F_VIOVSYNCY_N_O D9 VIDEO_VSYNC_Y_N {36,43}
F_VIOHSYNCOK_N_IO (PU) C9 VIDEO_HSYNCI_K_N {36,43} C

F_VIOHSYNCOC_N_O B9 VIDEO_HSYNCI_C_N {36}
F_VIOHSYNCOM_N_O A9 VIDEO_HSYNCI_M_N {36}
F_VIOHSYNCOY_N_O E8 VIDEO_HSYNCI_Y_N {36}
R38
E10 10J
F_VIOPOUTCLK_O VIDEO_CLKIN {36,43}
F_VIOHSYNCK_N_I (PU) A13 VIDEO_HSYNCO_K_N {36,43}

F_VIOHSYNCC_N_I (PU) D12 VIDEO_HSYNCO_C_N {36}
F_VIOHSYNCM_N_I (PU) C12 VIDEO_HSYNCO_M_N {36}
F_VIOHSYNCY_N_I (PU) B12 VIDEO_HSYNCO_Y_N {36}
F_VIOPINCLK_I A12 VIDEO_CLKOUT {36,43}

GP2 GP1
3R3V_ECO
C81
E12 DGND
F_VIOPBASECLK_I 0.01uF(B)
FLASH ROM I/F
RB45 X2
10KJ 1 4
OE VDD
2 GND OUT 3
F_T_TEST1_RCRYBY_I (PU) AN22
AK22 DGND X_SG-9001LB
F_T_TEST0_RCWP_I (PU) DGND
AL23 MFP_RC_WE CP718

F_T_RCWE_N_O MFP_RC_OE
F_T_RCOE_N_O AM23
AN23 MFP_RC_CS0 CP717 R50

F_T_RCCS_N[0]_O 10J
F_T_RCCS_N[1]_O AP23 {20} MFP_POD_CLK
3R3V_ECO B
RB79 RB78
2.2KJ X_2.2KJ
AM22 RC_COFG1
F_T_RCCFG[1]_I RC_COFG0
F_T_RCCFG[0]_I AL22
RB44
2.2KJ
DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (MFP ASIC VCC/GND)
CB119
10uF(2012:F)
1R2V_ECO DGND
1R2V_EC_MCORE
L2 NFM21PC225B0J3 CP34
D C28 C31 CB170 CB110 CB113 CB116 CB104 CB100 CB156 CB152 CB148 CB147 CB145 CB149
22uF(3216:F) 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND

DGND
1R2V_EC_MCORE
DGND
1R2V_EC_MPXCORE
CP82
L10
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
C138 C137 CB178 CB172 CB175 CB174 CB177 CB162 CB160 CB159 CB155 CB154 CB153
DGND
DGND DGND
1R2V_EC_MPX
CP83
L9
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
C97 CB163 C96 CB167 CB161
DGND
DGND
C
CP35 1R2V_EC_MDDR_2
L3
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
C52 C54 CB99 CB77 CB75 CB72 CB92 CB118 CB106 CB87 CB84 CB96
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
DGND
3R3V_EC_MIO
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
3R3V_ECO
DGND 3R3V_EC_MIO
CP36
L4
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
DGND
DGND
3R3V_EC_MPX
CP79
L11
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
C99 C98 CB166 CB164
B
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.01uF(B)
DGND
DGND
1R8V_EC2
1R8V_EC_MDDR_2
CP31
L5
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
DGND
1R8V_EC_MDDR_2
DGND
CB69 CB85 CB78 CB79 CB80
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND
RB37 200F OCDRES_1

A 1R8V_EC2
RB42 200F OCDRES_2
1R8V_EC2 RB38 300F ODTVREF_1
RB43 300F ODTVREF_2
0R9V_EC_DDR2VREF
CB88 CB91 0R9V_EC_DDR2VREF
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
CB68
DGND 0.1uF(B)
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
20/42 (22)
1R2V_EC_MPXCORE IC29D
D33 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN E31

D34 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN E32
G31 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN E33
G32 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN F31
H30 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN F32
H31 G30 1R2V_EC_MCORE IC29E
#EX_VDN #EX_VSN
H32 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN G34
P30 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN H29 AA22 #VDD #VSS A18
P31 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN H33 AA23 #VDD #VSS A28 D
R30 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN J29 AA28 #VDD #VSS AA17
R31 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN J30 AB20 #VDD #VSS AA18
T31 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN J31 AB21 #VDD #VSS AA19
V32 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN J32 AB28 #VDD #VSS AA20
V33 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN K34 AC20 #VDD #VSS AA21
V34 #EX_VDN #EX_VSN L33 AC21 #VDD #VSS AB22
#EX_VSN L34 AG28 #VDD #VSS AB23
#EX_VSN M34 AH21 #VDD #VSS AC23
3R3V_EC_MPX N29 AH26 AE28
#EX_VSN #VDD #VSS
#EX_VSN N30 AH27 #VDD #VSS AF28
L29 #EX_VDP #EX_VSN N31 AH28 #VDD #VSS AH24
L30 #EX_VDP #EX_VSN N32 AJ21 #VDD #VSS AH25
M29 #EX_VDP #EX_VSN P29 AJ26 #VDD #VSS AH6
#EX_VSN P32 AJ27 #VDD #VSS AJ24
#EX_VSN P33 F16 #VDD #VSS AJ25
1R2V_EC_MPX R32 F17 AN31
#EX_VSN #VDD #VSS
#EX_VSN R34 F20 #VDD #VSS B18
K31 #EX_VDU #EX_VSN T32 F21 #VDD #VSS C2
K32 #EX_VDU #EX_VSN U32 F28 #VDD #VSS C28
M31 #EX_VDU #EX_VSN U33 F29 #VDD #VSS D2
M32 #EX_VDU #EX_VSU K29 F8 #VDD #VSS F10
#EX_VSU K30 F9 #VDD #VSS F11
#EX_VSU M30 G16 #VDD #VSS F14
1R2V_EC_MDDR_2 G17 F15
#VDD #VSS
G20 #VDD #VSS F22
AA12 DGND G21 F23
#SSTL18_VDD #VDD #VSS
AA13 #SSTL18_VDD G28 #VDD #VSS F26
AB14 #SSTL18_VDD G7 #VDD #VSS F27
AB15 #SSTL18_VDD G8 #VDD #VSS F4
AC14 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AA14 G9 #VDD #VSS G1
AC15 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AA15 H6 #VDD #VSS G10
AC7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AA16 H7 #VDD #VSS G11
AD7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AA6 M14 #VDD #VSS G14
AG6 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AA7 M15 #VDD #VSS G15
AG7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AB12 M20 #VDD #VSS G22
AH11 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AB13 M21 #VDD #VSS G23
AH12 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AB6 N14 #VDD #VSS G26
AH13 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AB7 N15 #VDD #VSS G27
AH14 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AC12 N20 #VDD #VSS G4
AH20 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AC13 N21 #VDD #VSS G5
AH8 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AE6 T20 #VDD #VSS J6 C
AJ13 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AE7 T21 #VDD #VSS M13
AJ14 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AF6 U20 #VDD #VSS M22
AJ20 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AF7 U21 #VDD #VSS M23
AJ7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AG5 Y22 #VDD #VSS N22
AJ8 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AH10 Y23 #VDD #VSS P12
G6 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AH15 #VSS P13
L6 AH16 3R3V_EC_MIO P14
#SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS #VSS
L7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AH5 #VSS P15
M6 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AH9 AC28 #VDE #VSS P20
M7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AJ10 AD28 #VDE #VSS P21
R12 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AJ15 AH19 #VDE #VSS R14
R13 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AJ16 AH22 #VDE #VSS R15
U7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AJ9 AH23 #VDE #VSS R16
V7 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AK13 AJ19 #VDE #VSS R17
Y12 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AK14 AJ22 #VDE #VSS R18
Y13 #SSTL18_VDD #SSTL18_VSS AK7 AJ23 #VDE #VSS R19
#SSTL18_VSS AK8 AJ28 #VDE #VSS R20
#SSTL18_VSS AL6 AJ29 #VDE #VSS R21
1R8V_EC_MDDR_2 AL7 AK28 T14
#SSTL18_VSS #VDE #VSS
#SSTL18_VSS AL8 AK29 #VDE #VSS T15
AA5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS AN12 AN32 #VDE #VSS T16
AB16 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS AN14 AP31 #VDE #VSS T17
AB17 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS J7 D29 #VDE #VSS T18
AB18 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS K6 D30 #VDE #VSS T19
AB19 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS K7 F12 #VDE #VSS U14
AB5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS M12 F13 #VDE #VSS U15
AC16 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS N12 F18 #VDE #VSS U16
AC17 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS N13 F19 #VDE #VSS U19
AC18 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS N6 F24 #VDE #VSS V14
AC19 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS N7 F25 #VDE #VSS V15
AC5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS P6 G12 #VDE #VSS V16
AC6 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS P7 G13 #VDE #VSS V19
AD5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS R2 G18 #VDE #VSS W14
AD6 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS R3 G19 #VDE #VSS W15
AE5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS R4 G24 #VDE #VSS W16
AF5 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS R5 G25 #VDE #VSS W17
AH17 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS T3 H4 #VDE #VSS W18
AH18 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS T4 H5 #VDE #VSS W19
AJ11 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS T5 J4 #VDE #VSS W22
AJ12 U5 J5 W23
AJ17
#SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS
U6 M16
#VDE #VSS
W28 B
#SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS #VDE #VSS
AJ18 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS V5 M17 #VDE #VSS W29
AK10 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS V6 M18 #VDE #VSS W30
AK11 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS W5 M19 #VDE #VSS W31
AK12 #SSTL18_VDE #SSTL18_VSS Y14 N16 #VDE #VSS W32
AK17 #SSTL18_VDE N19 #VDE #VSS Y16
AK18 #SSTL18_VDE P16 #VDE #VSS Y17
AK9 DGND P17 Y18
#SSTL18_VDE #VDE #VSS
AL15 #SSTL18_VDE P18 #VDE #VSS Y19
AL17 #SSTL18_VDE P19 #VDE #VSS Y20
AL18 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C A1 V20 #VDE #VSS Y21
K4 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C A16 V21 #VDE
K5 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C A34 W20 #VDE
L4 AC22 W21 DGND
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C #VDE
L5 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AH7 Y28 #VDE
M4 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AJ5 Y29 #VDE
M5 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AJ6 %N.C P22
N4 AK5 1R2V_ECO P23
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C %N.C
N5 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AK6 %N.C P28
P4 AL30 1R2VA_EC_MPLL_DDR R22
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C CP10 %N.C
P5 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AL4 %N.C R23
R6 AM3 L1 C1 R28
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C BLM18PG121SN1(1608) VDI_DDR_PLL %N.C
R7 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AM31 %N.C R29
T12 AN2 C27 C29 C30 C32 T22
T13 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AP1 %N.C T23
T6 AP33 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.01uF(B) 1000pF(B) T28
T7 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C AP34 D1 VSI_DDR_PLL %N.C T29
U12 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C B2 %N.C T30
U13 B33 DGND U17
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C 1R2VA_EC_MPLL_HAL %N.C
V12 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C B34 %N.C U18
V13 C3 CP88 U22
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C L6 %N.C
W12 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C C32 B31 VDI_HAL_PLL %N.C U23
W13 C33 BLM18PG121SN1(1608) U28
#SSTL18_VDE %N.C C83 C84 C86 C87 %N.C
W6 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C C34 %N.C U29
W7 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C D31 %N.C U30
Y6 D32 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.01uF(B) 1000pF(B) U31
Y7 #SSTL18_VDE %N.C D4 A31 VSI_HAL_PLL %N.C V17
%N.C E30 %N.C V18
1 CP8 U2 E5 DGND V22
2 CP32 AN13
F_OCDRES_1_O %N.C
F3 1R2VA_EC_MPLL_SYS %N.C
V23
A
_1 CP9 F_OCDRES_2_O %N.C CP86 %N.C
U1 F_ODTVREF_1_O %N.C F30 %N.C V28
_2 CP33 AP13 F6 L7 B32 V29
F_ODTVREF_2_O %N.C BLM18PG121SN1(1608) VDI_SYS_PLL %N.C
%N.C F7 %N.C V30
G29 C133 C134 C135 C136 V31
%N.C %N.C
U3 F_VREF_1_I %N.C H28 %N.C AE4
U4 J28 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.01uF(B) 1000pF(B)
F_VREF_2_I %N.C
V3 F_VREF_3_I %N.C K28 A32 VSI_SYS_PLL
V4 F_VREF_4_I %N.C L28
AM13 M28 DGND
F_VREF_5_I %N.C MFP ASIC
AL13 F_VREF_6_I %N.C N23
CB70 AM14 N28
F_VREF_7_I %N.C
AL14 F_VREF_8_I
0.1uF(B)
MFP ASIC
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (GIGABIT ETHERNET PHY)
L20
D BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CP347
C257 C255 C204 C200
10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
LB15 DGND DGND

BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CP482
CB536
10uF(2012:F)
DGND
CP485
3R3V
RB258 RB257 RB254 RB251 RB248

0J X_47KJ X_47KJ X_47KJ 22.6KF
CMODE4 CP480
CMODE3 CP479
CMODE2 CP477
C CMODE1 CP478
CMODE0 CP472
RB255 RB252 RB249 RB246 RB245

X_47KJ 0J 0J 2.26KF X_47KJ
DGND
IC32C
{12} TSEC1_CRS
VSC8641 Control {12} TSEC1_COL
14 EECLK REG_EN 67 3R3V
13 EEDAT {12} TSEC1_RX_DV
{12} TSEC1_RX_ERR
TSEC1_RXD7
TSEC1_RXD6
CMODE0 56 TSEC1_RXD5
CMODE1 CMODE0 C250 TSEC1_RXD4
57 CMODE1
CMODE2 58 80 CP730 1uF(1608:B) TSEC1_RXD3
CMODE3 CMODE2 REF_FILT TSEC1_RXD2
59
B CMODE4 60
CMODE3
81 CP731 TSEC1_RXD1
CMODE4 REF_REXT R229 TSEC1_RXD0
2KF DGND {12} TSEC1_RXD[7:0]
{8} PHY_INT_N 16 MDINT NC 1
{12} EC_MDC 17 MDC NC 2 {12} TSEC1_RX_CLK
{12} EC_MDIO 18 MDIO NC 24
NC 51
R231 0J 66 52
{12} GTX_CLK125 R232 4.7KJ OSCEN/CLKOUT NC
NC 72
12 NRESET NC 73
DGND 50 74
CP345 NSRESET NC
NC 75
C NC 76
NC 77 {12} TSEC1_TX_CLK
B 10K C199 CP469 78
{8} GPHY_RST NC {12} TSEC1_GTXCLK
Q12 79 TSEC1_TXD7
DTC114YUB 1uF(1608:B) NC TSEC1_TXD6
71 PLLMODE NC 96
47K 97 TSEC1_TXD5
DGND
NC TSEC1_TXD4
NC 98
E DGND CP348 TSEC1_TXD3
94 XTAL2 NC 99
DGND 100 TSEC1_TXD2
NC TSEC1_TXD1
95 XTAL1(RefClk) TSEC1_TXD0
{7,12} TSEC1_TXD[7:0]
VSC8641_EP-LQFP {7,12} TSEC1_TX_ERR
C192 R151 {12} TSEC1_TX_ENB
0.1uF(B) CP488 1J 3R3V
C193
0.01uF(B)
GP20 GP19
X7
1 ST VDD 4
CP484
2 3 R228 22J
DGND
GND OUT
DGND
SG-310SCF_50ppm_25MHz
5 4 3

3 2 1
21/42 (23)
L21
BLM18PG121SN1(1608)
CP343 3R3V
C259 C253
IC32B 10uF(2012:F) 0.1uF(B) C252
VDDREG 68
L17 10uF(2012:F)
VSC8641 Power DGND BLM18PG121SN1(1608) D
7 3 CP483 3R3V
VDD12 VDD33 DGND
8 VDD12 VDD33 4
C201 C203 19 61 CB537 CB538 C254 C198 C197 C196
VDD12 VDD33
20 VDD12 VDD33 82
B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 55 88 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 10uF(2012:F)
VDD12 VDD33
VDD33 93
REG_OUT 69
70 DGND DGND
REG_OUT
83 VDD12A VDDIOmicro 15
CB535 C202 C206
0.1uF(B) 23 0.1uF(B) 10uF(2012:F)

VDDIOMAC
25 VSS VDDIOMAC 32
VDDIOMAC 38
DGND GND1 53 DGND
VSSPAD VDDIOMAC
VSC8641_EP-LQFP
DGND C205 C260 C258 C256
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
LB14 DGND
1R2VREG 1R2REGOUT CP481
LQH32PN4R7NN0
CB540 CB539 R230

15J
1uF(1608:B) 10uF(2012:F)
DGND C251
1000pF(B)
DGND
IC32DVSC8641 JTAG
TCK 10 JTAG_CK1 {6,8,14,35}
TDI 6 GPHY1_JTAG_TDI {35}

TDO 5 GPHY1_JTAG_TDO {35}
TMS 9 JTAG_TMS1 {6,8,14,35}

NTRST 11 JTAG_RST1 {8,14,35}
VSC8641_EP-LQFP
CN9
ACTIVATE R110 11
470J RLED(K)
12 ACT GREEN
3R3V RLED(A)
IC32A LINK1000D R152 X_470J

LINK100DH R153 470J 13 LLED(K)
LINK10DH 14 Speed GREEN
LLED(A)
21 CRS
22 COL ORENGE
26 Option
RX_DV
27 RX_ER
7 28 92 MDI_3N
6 RXD7 TXVND TRP1+
29 RXD6
5 30 91 MDI_3P MDI_0P 2 J1
RXD5 TXVPD TRD1+
31 RXD4
33 RXD3 SL
34 TRP1-
35
RXD2 MDI_0N 3 J2 B
RXD1 TRD1-
36 RXD0
37 90 MDI_2N
RX_CLK TXVNC TRP2+
89 MDI_2P MDI_1P 4 J3
TXVPC TRD2+
SL TRP3+
VSC8641 Data
MDI_1N 5 J4
TRD2-
87 MDI_1N
TXVNB TRP3-
86 MDI_1P MDI_2P 7 J5
TXVPB TRD3+
39 TX_CLK
40 GTX_CLK SL
D7 41 TRP2-
D6 TXD7 MDI_2N J6
42 TXD6 8 TRD3-
D5 43 85 MDI_0N
D4 TXD5 TXVNA
44 TXD4
D3 45 84 MDI_0P TRP4+
D2 TXD3 TXVPA MDI_3P J7
46 TXD2 9 TRD4+
D1 47
D0 TXD1
48 TXD0 SL
49 65 ACTIVATE TRP4-
TX_ER LED0 LINK1000D MDI_3N J8
54 TX_EN LED1 64 10 TRD4-
63 LINK100DH
LED2 LINK10DH
LED3 62 each
75ohm SL
6 COMNCT
VSC8641_EP-LQFP 1000pF/2KV
C194 C195 1 GND

FG2
FG1
0.1uF(B) 0.1uF(B)
DGND DGND DGND MAG_SI-51005-F

FG2
FG1
A
L46
0.1uF(1608:B)
FGND DGND
IC33 IC34
MDI_0P 1 6 MDI_0N MDI_2P 1 6 MDI_2N
L1 L4 L1 L4
2 GND VCC 5 2 GND VCC 5
MDI_1P 3 4 MDI_1N MDI_3P 3 4 MDI_3N
L2 L3 L2 L3
SRV05-4 SRV05-4
DGND DGND
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (SCAN IN CPLD)
{20,31} SCN_CLK
{6,18,21} RESET_MFP
C188
X_470pF(B)
DGND
3R3V_ECO
CB352 CB351
10uF(2012:F) X_1uF(1608:B)
DGND
C {31} SCN_SSYNC
CB294
X_470pF(B)
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
DGND
hsyncB_i
ssyncB_i
VCCINT
pclk
dotgt_out
RSV
GND+
rstB
GND+
GND
RSV
{31} SCN_HSYNC
CB346 1 33 R
{35} SIN_JTAG_TDI TDI linegt_out
X_100pF(CH) 2 linegt_i TDO 32
3 31 R
DGND
RSV RSV
4 GND GND 30
5 dotgt_i VCCIO 29
6 28 R
{31} SCN_LINGT RSV hsyncB_out R
{20,35,36,40} JTAG_TMS2_ECO 7 TMS ssyncB_out 27
{31} SCN_DOTGT 8 RSV TCK 26
9 VCCIO RSV 25
10 esdenb_i GND 24
11 GND dualout_enb 23
CB348 CB347
hsyncB2_out
ssyncB2_out
linegt2_out
hmask_sig
dotgt2_out
X_10pF(CH) X_470pF(B)
VCCINT
RB133
DGND DGND X_10KJ
GND
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DGND
IC35
X_EPM3064ATC44-10N(RSS1)
DGND
B
3R3V_ECO
CB360 X_0.1uF(B) For 9Pin RB1

{31} SCN_SSYNC
RB1
For 18Pin {31} SCN_LINGT
C189 X_0.1uF(B) RB1
{31} SCN_HSYNC
RB1
For 29Pin {31} SCN_DOTGT
CB353 X_0.1uF(B)
CB350 X_0.1uF(B) For 41Pin
DGND
5 4 3

3 2 1
22/42 (24)
RB103 X_33J
SSYNC_SIOUT {20}
SIN_JTAG_TDO {35}
RB129 X_33J
HSYNC_SIOUT {20}
RB130 X_33J
LINGT_SIOUT {20}
RB131 X_33J
DOTGT_SIOUT {20}
JTAG_CK2_ECO {20,35,36,40}
CB357 CB356 CB355 CB295

10pF(CH) 470pF(B) 100pF(CH) 470pF(B)
133 RB132
10KJ X_2.2KJ DGND DGND DGND DGND
ND DGND
RB102 0J SSYNC_SIOUT {20}

RB126 0J LINGT_SIOUT {20}
RB125 0J HSYNC_SIOUT {20}
RB127 0J DOTGT_SIOUT {20}
3 2 1

5 4 3
MFPC PWB (72pin DIMM Sockets)
{6,16,26,27} LB_A[23:2]
{6,16,26,27} LB_D[31:0]
CN10 CN11
12 D15/A_1 12 D15/A_1
LB_A2 13 LB_A2 13
LB_A3 A0 LB_A3 A0
14 A1 14 A1
LB_A4 15 LB_A4 15
LB_A5

Sharp MX-4100N MX-5000N MX-4101N MX-5001N SM PG

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Sharp MX-4100N MX-5000N MX-4101N MX-5001N SM PG

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

1 : Oct.

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

2. Warning for servicing

MX-5001N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of excessive dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slanted surface

MX-5001N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Article constitution (Main unit and option)

Paper exit system Document feeder system

Printer expansion Image send expansion

PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT

XPS EXPANSION KIT

SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

MX-5001N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

2. Mainfunction of the main unit

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected.

MX-5001N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

Writing resolution Copy: 600 x 600dpi

(7) Printable area

1 Platen 4.7 sec. 6.7 sec. 4.1 sec. 5.9 sec.

* Measurement conditions: When paper of A4/8.5 x 11 is fed to

b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding B. Controller board

Type Dot matrix TFT LCD, touch panel

(10) Power consumption

100V series 200V series

Scanning copy mode

(2) Document table

Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

(3) Automatic document feeder

Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

Type Exit tray unit Function

(4) Duplex (2) Support OS

System Non stack system Custom Custom Custom

(3) PDL emulation

PCL5c compatibility, PCL6 compatibility Standard

(2) Support system

Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax

OS Windows 98 Number of files 38GB

PC-FAX send Yes

* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."

1. Supply system table

B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

2. Recommended color paper

Kind Model Supplier Specification

MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 2

3. Maintenance parts list

MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 3

MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 4

No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks

MX-5001N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 5

No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks

4. Definition the developer/drum life end 1

selection). Black developer/drum 150,000

oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. $7'(9(92B/B&